Table of Contents
- Contents
- Guide to This Manual
- Important Instructions
- Part Names and Functions
- Guide to the Control Panel
- Loading Paper
- Placing Originals
- Inserting and Removing a Memory Device
- Printing
- Printing Documents
- Printing from a Computer - Windows
- Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)
- Printing from a Computer - Mac OS
- Printing Using a PostScript Printer Driver - Mac OS X
- Printing PDF Files from a Memory Device
- Printing Documents from Smart Devices (iOS)
- Printing Documents from Smart Devices (Android)
- Printing on Envelopes
- Printing Photos
- Printing Web Pages
- Printing Using a Cloud Service
- Printing Documents
- Copying
- Scanning
- Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
- Maintaining the Printer
- Checking the Consumables Status
- Improving Paper Feeding Problems for Paper Cassette
- Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality
- Saving Power
- Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately
- Moving and Transporting the Printer
- Replacing Maintenance Rollers in Paper Cassette 1
- Replacing Maintenance Rollers in Paper Cassette 2 to 4
- Solving Problems
- Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
- Connecting to a Printer that has been Connected to the Network
- Re-setting the Network Connection
- Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi-Fi Direct)
- About Wi-Fi Direct
- Connecting to an iPhone, iPad or iPod touch using Wi-Fi Direct
- Connecting to Android Devices using Wi-Fi Direct
- Connecting to Devices other than iOS and Android using Wi-Fi Direct
- Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) Connection
- Changing the Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) Settings Such as the SSID
- Checking the Network Connection Status
- Using Optional Items
- List of Optional Items
- Printer Stand
- Optional Cassette Unit
- Manual Stapler
- Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board
- Expansion Fax Ports
- Fax Settings Menu (When Optional Fax Boards Installed)
- Registering a Recipient to the Contacts List (When Optional Fax Boards Installed)
- Sending Faxes Using the Printer with Optional Fax Boards
- Sending Faxes From a Computer Using an Optional Fax Board
- Checking the Status of the Lines (When Optional Fax Boards Installed)
- Solving Problems
- Specifications for Optional Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board
- 10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet
- Product Information
- Paper Information
- Consumable Products Information
- Software Information
- Settings Menu List
- Product Specifications
- Printer Specifications
- Scanner Specifications
- ADF Specifications
- Fax Specifications (Fax-capable Printers Only)
- Using Port for the Printer
- Interface Specifications
- Network Specifications
- PostScript Level 3 Compatibility
- Supported Third Party Services
- Memory Device Specifications
- Supported Data Specifications
- Dimensions
- Electrical Specifications
- Environmental Specifications
- Installation Location and Space
- System Requirements
- Font Specifications
- Regulatory Information
- Administrator Information
- Connecting the Printer to the Network
- Settings to Use the Printer
- Managing the Printer
- Advanced Security Settings
- Security Settings and Prevention of Danger
- Making Settings for Password Encryption
- Controlling Using Protocols
- Using a Digital Certificate
- SSL/TLS Communication with the Printer
- Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering
- Connecting the Printer to an IEEE802.1X Network
- S/MIME Settings
- Solving Problems for Advanced Security
- Using Epson Open Platform
- Where to Get Help
- Technical Support Web Site
- Contacting Epson Support
- Before Contacting Epson
- Help for Users in Europe
- Help for Users in Taiwan
- Help for Users in Australia
- Help for Users in New Zealand
- Help for Users in Indonesia
- Help for Users in Malaysia
- Help for Users in the Philippines
- Help for Users in Singapore
- Help for Users in Thailand
- Help for Users in Vietnam
- Help for Users in India
- Help for Users in Hong Kong
Epson RIPS WF-C879R User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for RIPS WF-C879R by Epson which is a product in the Multifunctionals category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
Contents
Guide to This Manual
Introduction to the Manuals...................8
Searching for Information....................8
Printing Only the Pages You Need.............. 9
About is Manual......................... 9
Marks and Symbols.......................9
Notes on Screenshots and Illustrations. . . . . . . . 10
Operating System References...............10
Trademarks..............................11
Copyright...............................12
Important Instructions
Safety Instructions.........................15
Safety Instructions for Ink................. 16
Printer Advisories and Warnings.............. 16
Advisories and Warnings for Setting Up the
Printer................................16
Advisories and Warnings for Using the Printer. . 17
Advisories and Warnings for Using the
Touchscreen........................... 17
Advisories and Warnings for Using the
Printer with a Wireless Connection...........17
Advisories and Warnings for Transporting or
Storing the Printer.......................18
Protecting Your Personal Information...........18
Part Names and Functions
Front...................................20
Rear................................... 24
Guide to the Control Panel
Control Panel............................ 27
Home Screen Conguration..................28
Guide to the Network Icon.................29
Menu Screen Conguration..................30
Job/Status Screen Conguration...............31
Entering Characters........................32
Viewing Animations....................... 32
Loading Paper
Paper Handling Precautions..................35
Paper Size and Type Settings..................36
List of Paper Type....................... 36
List of Detected Paper Sizes................ 37
Loading Paper............................37
Loading Envelopes.......................38
Loading Pre-punched Paper................38
Loading Long Papers.....................39
Placing Originals
Placing Originals..........................41
Detecting the Original Size Automatically. . . . . . . . 43
Originals that are not Supported by the ADF. . . . . . 43
Inserting and Removing a Memory
Device
Inserting an External USB Device..............45
Removing an External USB Device.............45
Sharing Data on a Memory Device.............46
Printing
Printing Documents........................48
Printing from a Computer - Windows.........48
Printing a Document Using the PostScript
Printer Driver (Windows)................. 71
Printing from a Computer - Mac OS..........75
Printing Using a PostScript Printer Driver -
Mac OS X.............................83
Printing PDF Files from a Memory Device. . . . . 88
Printing Documents from Smart Devices (iOS). . 89
Printing Documents from Smart Devices
(Android).............................90
Printing on Envelopes...................... 91
Printing on Envelopes from a Computer
(Windows)............................ 91
Printing on Envelopes from a Computer
(Mac OS)..............................91
Printing Photos...........................92
Printing JPEG Files from a Memory Device. . . . .92
Printing TIFF Files from a Memory Device. . . . . 93
Printing Web Pages........................ 94
Printing Web Pages from a Computer.........94
Printing Web Pages from Smart Devices.......94
Printing Using a Cloud Service................95
Registering to Epson Connect Service from
the Control Panel........................95
2
Copying
Available Copying Methods..................98
Copying Originals.......................98
Copying on 2-Sides...................... 98
Copying by Enlarging or Reducing...........99
Copying Multiple Originals onto One Sheet. . . .100
Copying in Page Order...................101
Copying Originals Using Good Quality. . . . . . . 101
Copying ID card....................... 102
Copying Books.........................102
Copying Bar Codes Clearly................103
Basic Menu Options for Copying............. 103
Color Mode:.......................... 103
Density:..............................104
Paper Setting:..........................104
Reduce/Enlarge:........................104
Original Type:.........................105
2-Sided:..............................105
Advanced Menu Options for Copying..........105
Multi-Page:...........................105
Original Size:..........................105
Finishing:............................ 105
Mixed Size Originals:....................106
Orientation (Original):...................106
Book->2 Pages:........................ 106
Continuous Scanning:................... 106
Image Quality:.........................106
Binding Margin:........................107
Reduce to Fit Paper:.....................107
Remove Shadow:.......................107
Remove Punch Holes:....................107
ID Card Copy:.........................107
Scanning
Available Scanning Methods.................109
Scanning Originals to a Network Folder........ 109
Destination Menu Options for Scanning to a
Folder...............................110
Scan Menu Options for Scanning to a Folder. . . 111
Scanning Originals to an Email. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Recipient Menu Options for Scanning to an
Email................................113
Scan Menu Options for Scanning to an Email. . 114
Scanning Originals to a Computer............ 116
Scanning Originals to a Memory Device........117
Basic Menu Options for Scanning to a
Memory Device........................117
Advanced Menu Options for Scanning to a
Memory Device........................118
Scanning Originals to the Cloud..............119
Basic Menu Options for Scanning to the Cloud. 120
Advanced Menu Options for Scanning to the
Cloud............................... 120
Scanning Using WSD......................121
Setting Up a WSD Port...................121
Scanning Originals to a Smart Device..........123
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
Before Using Fax Features...................126
Overview of this Printer's Fax Features.........126
Feature: Sending Faxes...................126
Feature: Receiving Faxes..................127
Feature: PC-FAX Send/Receive
(Windows/Mac OS).....................129
Features: Various Fax Reports..............129
Feature: Status or Logs for Fax Jobs..........130
Feature: Fax Box........................130
Feature: Security when Sending and
Receiving Faxes........................131
Features: Other Useful Features........... 131
Sending Faxes Using the Printer..............131
Selecting Recipients.....................132
Various Ways of Sending Faxes.............133
Receiving Faxes on the Printer............... 139
Receiving Incoming Faxes.................140
Receiving Faxes by Making a Phone Call......141
Saving and Forwarding Received Faxes. . . . . . . 143
Viewing Received Faxes Saved in the Printer
on the LCD Screen......................144
Menu Options for Faxing...................145
Recipient.............................145
Fax Settings...........................145
More................................148
Menu Options for Fax Box..................149
Inbox/Condential......................149
Stored Documents:......................151
Polling Send/Board..................... 152
Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs........156
Displaying Information when Received Faxes
are Unprocessed (Unread/Not Printed/Not
Saved/Not Forwarded)...................156
Checking Fax Jobs in Progress..............157
Checking the Fax Job History..............157
Reprinting Received Documents............158
Sending a Fax from a Computer..............158
Sending Documents Created Using an
Application (Windows).................. 158
3
Sending Documents Created Using an
Application (Mac OS)....................161
Receiving Faxes on a Computer...............162
Saving Incoming Faxes on a Computer.......163
Canceling the Feature that Saves Incoming
Faxes to the Computer...................163
Checking for New Faxes (Windows).........164
Checking for New Faxes (Mac OS).......... 165
Maintaining the Printer
Checking the Consumables Status............167
Improving Paper Feeding Problems for Paper
Cassette................................167
Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality. . . . 168
Adjusting the Print Quality................168
Checking and Cleaning the Print Head.......169
Running Power Cleaning.................170
Preventing nozzle clogging................171
Aligning Ruled Lines....................171
Cleaning the Paper Path for Ink Smears.......172
Cleaning the Scanner Glass................172
Cleaning the ADF...................... 174
Adjusting Print Quality per Paper...........178
Saving Power............................179
Saving Power (Control Panel)..............179
Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately. 179
Installing the Applications Separately........ 179
Installing a PostScript Printer Driver.........182
Adding the Printer (for Mac OS Only)........183
Uninstalling Applications.................183
Updating Applications and Firmware. . . . . . . . 185
Moving and Transporting the Printer.......... 187
Moving the Printer......................187
Transporting the Printer..................188
Replacing Maintenance Rollers in Paper Cassette 1 189
Replacing Maintenance Rollers in Paper
Cassette 2 to 4...........................194
Solving Problems
e Printer Does Not Work as Expected........200
e Printer Does Not Turn On or O........200
Power Turns O Automatically.............200
Paper Does Not Feed or Eject Correctly. . . . . . .201
Cannot Print..........................206
Cannot Start Scanning...................224
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes..............237
Error Code is Displayed on the Status Menu. . . 253
Cannot Operate the Printer as Expected. . . . . . 259
A Message is Displayed on the LCD Screen. . . . . . 264
Paper Gets Jammed.......................266
Preventing Paper Jams...................266
It is Time to Replace Ink Supply Units..........267
Ink Supply Unit Handling Precautions........267
Replacing Ink Supply Units................268
It is Time to Replace the Maintenance Box. . . . . . .268
Maintenance Box Handling Precautions. . . . . . 268
Replacing a Maintenance Box..............269
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing
Quality is Poor...........................269
Print Quality is Poor.....................269
Copy Quality is Poor.................... 277
Scanned Image Problems.................283
e Quality of the Sent Fax is Poor..........285
Received Fax Quality is Poor...............287
Cannot Solve Problem Aer Trying All Solutions. .288
Cannot Solve Printing or Copying Problems. . . 288
Adding or Replacing the Computer or
Devices
Connecting to a Printer that has been
Connected to the Network..................290
Using a Network Printer from a Second
Computer............................290
Using a Network Printer from a Smart Device. . 291
Re-setting the Network Connection........... 291
When Replacing the Wireless Router.........291
When Changing the Computer.............292
Changing the Connection Method to the
Computer............................293
Making Wi-Fi Settings from the Control Panel. .295
Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly
(Wi-Fi Direct)...........................297
About Wi-Fi Direct..................... 297
Connecting to an iPhone, iPad or iPod touch
using Wi-Fi Direct......................298
Connecting to Android Devices using Wi-Fi
Direct...............................301
Connecting to Devices other than iOS and
Android using Wi-Fi Direct...............303
Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP)
Connection...........................307
Changing the Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP)
Settings Such as the SSID.................307
Checking the Network Connection Status.......308
Checking the Network Connection Status
from the Control Panel...................308
Printing a Network Connection Report. . . . . . . 309
4
Printing a Network Status Sheet............ 315
Checking the Network of the Computer
(Windows only)........................315
Using Optional Items
List of Optional Items......................318
Wiring Codes with Clamps................320
Printer Stand............................320
Installing the Printer Stand................320
Moving the Printer While the Printer Stand is
Attached.............................326
Printer Stand Specications............... 327
Optional Cassette Unit.....................327
Installing the Paper Cassette Units.......... 327
Setting the Paper Cassette Unit in the Printer
Driver...............................332
Moving the Printer While the Paper Cassette
Units are Attached......................333
Problems with the Paper Cassette Unit....... 333
Paper Cassette Unit Specications...........334
Manual Stapler...........................334
Using the Manual Stapler.................335
Replacing the Staple Cartridge............. 335
Problems with the Manual Stapler...........336
Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board................337
Expansion Fax Ports.....................337
Fax Settings Menu (When Optional Fax
Boards Installed).......................338
Registering a Recipient to the Contacts List
(When Optional Fax Boards Installed)........340
Sending Faxes Using the Printer with
Optional Fax Boards.....................340
Sending Faxes From a Computer Using an
Optional Fax Board.....................341
Checking the Status of the Lines (When
Optional Fax Boards Installed).............342
Solving Problems.......................342
Specications for Optional Super G3/G3
Multi Fax Board........................343
10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Function List when Using an Additional
Network............................. 343
Installing an Ethernet Board...............345
Settings when Using an Additional Network. . . 346
Solving Problems when Using an Additional
Network............................. 351
Menu Options for Network Settings (When
Using an Additional Network)............. 352
Product Information
Paper Information........................355
Available Paper and Capacities.............355
Unavailable Paper Types..................361
Consumable Products Information............362
Ink Supply Unit Codes...................362
Maintenance Box Code...................362
Maintenance Rollers Codes................362
Soware Information......................363
Soware for Printing.................... 363
Soware for Scanning....................368
Soware for Faxing..................... 370
Soware for Package Creation..............371
Soware for Making Settings or Managing
Devices..............................371
Soware for Updating................... 374
Settings Menu List........................374
General Settings........................374
Print Counter..........................401
Supply Status..........................401
Maintenance..........................401
Language.............................402
Printer Status/Print..................... 403
Contacts Manager......................403
User Settings..........................404
Authentication Device Status.............. 404
Epson Open Platform Information..........404
Product Specications..................... 404
Printer Specications....................404
Scanner Specications...................405
ADF Specications......................406
Fax Specications (Fax-capable Printers Only). .406
Using Port for the Printer.................407
Interface Specications...................409
Network Specications...................409
PostScript Level 3 Compatibility............412
Supported ird Party Services.............412
Memory Device Specications............. 412
Supported Data Specications..............413
Dimensions...........................413
Electrical Specications.................. 414
Environmental Specications..............414
Installation Location and Space.............415
System Requirements....................416
Font Specications........................417
Available Fonts for PostScript..............417
Available Fonts for PCL (URW)............ 418
List of Symbol Sets......................420
Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only).......422
5
Regulatory Information....................431
Standards and Approvals................. 431
German Blue Angel.....................433
Restrictions on Copying..................433
Administrator Information
Connecting the Printer to the Network.........435
Before Making Network Connection.........435
Connecting to the Network from the Control
Panel................................437
Settings to Use the Printer...................439
Using the Print Functions.................439
Setting Up AirPrint..................... 447
Conguring a Mail Server.................447
Setting a Shared Network Folder............451
Making Contacts Available................467
Preparing to Scan.......................478
Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable
Printers Only).........................480
Making Basic Operation Settings for the Printer 496
Problems when Making Settings............499
Managing the Printer......................500
Introduction of Product Security Features. . . . . 500
Administrator Settings...................501
Restricting Available Features..............510
Disabling the External Interface............ 512
Making Settings for Processing Saved Data. . . . 513
Monitoring a Remote Printer.............. 514
Backing Up the Settings..................516
Advanced Security Settings..................517
Security Settings and Prevention of Danger. . . . 518
Making Settings for Password Encryption. . . . . 519
Controlling Using Protocols...............520
Using a Digital Certicate.................525
SSL/TLS Communication with the Printer. . . . .532
Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP
Filtering..............................534
Connecting the Printer to an IEEE802.1X
Network............................. 545
S/MIME Settings.......................548
Solving Problems for Advanced Security......550
Using Epson Open Platform...............556
Where to Get Help
Technical Support Web Site..................559
Contacting Epson Support..................559
Before Contacting Epson................. 559
Help for Users in Europe..................559
Help for Users in Taiwan..................559
Help for Users in Australia................560
Help for Users in New Zealand.............560
Help for Users in Indonesia................561
Help for Users in Malaysia................ 563
Help for Users in the Philippines............563
Help for Users in Singapore............... 564
Help for Users in ailand................ 564
Help for Users in Vietnam................ 564
Help for Users in India...................565
Help for Users in Hong Kong..............565
6
Guide to This Manual
Introduction to the Manuals...........................................8
Searching for Information.............................................8
Printing Only the Pages You Need.......................................9
About is Manual..................................................9
Trademarks...................................................... 11
Copyright........................................................12
Introduction to the Manuals
e following manuals are supplied with your Epson printer. As well as the manuals, check the various types of
help information available from the printer itself or from the Epson soware applications.
❏Important Safety Instructions (paper manual)
Provides you with instructions to ensure the safe use of this printer.
❏Start Here (paper manual)
Provides you with information on setting up the printer, installing the soware, and so on.
❏User's Guide (digital manual)
is manual. Provides overall information and instructions on using the printer, on network settings when
using the printer on a network, and on solving problems.
You can obtain the latest versions of the above manuals with the following methods.
❏Paper manual
Visit the Epson Europe support website at http://www.epson.eu/Support, or the Epson worldwide support
website at http://support.epson.net/.
❏Digital manual
is manual is available in PDF and HTML versions. You can view the HTML version from the epson.sn
support page. Start EPSON Soware Updater on your computer to view the PDF version. EPSON Soware
Updater checks for available updates of Epson soware applications and the digital manuals, and allows you to
download the latest ones.
http://epson.sn
Related Information
&“Application for Updating Soware and Firmware (EPSON Soware Updater)” on page 374
Searching for Information
e PDF manual allows you to search for information you are looking for by keyword, or jump directly to specic
ections using the bookmarks. is section explains how to use a PDF manual that has been opened in Adobe
Reader X on your computer.
Searching by keyword
Click Edit > Advanced Search. Enter the keyword (text) for information you want to nd in the search window,
and then click Search. Hits are displayed as a list. Click one of the displayed hits to jump to that page.
Guide to This Manual
>
Searching for Information
8
Jumping directly from bookmarks
Click a title to jump to that page. Click + or > to view the lower level titles in that section. To return to the previous
page, perform the following operation on your keyboard.
❏Windows: Hold down Alt. and then press ←.
❏Mac OS: Hold down the command key, and then press ←.
Printing Only the Pages You Need
You can extract and print only the pages you need. Click Print in the File menu, and then specify the pages you
want to print in Pages in Pages to Print.
❏To specify a series of pages, enter a hyphen between the start page and the end page.
Example: 20-25
❏To specify pages that are not in series, divide the pages with commas.
Example: 5, 10, 15
About This Manual
is section explains the meaning of marks and symbols, notes on descriptions, and operating system reference
information used in this manual.
Marks and Symbols
!
Caution:
Instructions that must be followed carefully to avoid bodily injury.
Guide to This Manual
>
About This Manual
>
Marks and Symbols
9
c
Important:
Instructions that must be observed to avoid damage to your equipment.
Note:
Provides complementary and reference information.
Related Information
&Links to related sections.
Notes on Screenshots and Illustrations
❏Screenshots of the printer driver are from Windows 10 or macOS High Sierra. e content displayed on the
screens varies depending on the model and situation.
❏Illustrations used in this manual are examples only. Although there may be slight dierences depending on
themodel, the method of operation is the same.
❏Some of the menu items on the LCD screen vary depending on the model and settings.
❏You can read the QR code using dedicated app.
Operating System References
Windows
In this manual, terms such as "Windows 10", "Windows 8.1", "Windows 8", "Windows 7", "Windows Vista",
"Windows XP", "Windows Server 2019", "Windows Server 2016", "Windows Server 2012 R2", "Windows Server
2012", "Windows Server 2008 R2", "Windows Server 2008", "Windows Server 2003 R2", and "Windows Server
2003" refer to the following operating systems. Additionally, "Windows" is used to refer to all versions.
❏Microso
®
Windows
®
10 operating system
❏Microso
®
Windows
®
8.1 operating system
❏Microso
®
Windows
®
8 operating system
❏Microso
®
Windows
®
7 operating system
❏Microso
®
Windows Vista
®
operating system
❏Microso
®
Windows
®
XP operating system
❏Microso
®
Windows
®
XP Professional x64 Edition operating system
❏Microso
®
Windows Server
®
2019 operating system
❏Microso
®
Windows Server
®
2016 operating system
❏Microso
®
Windows Server
®
2012 R2 operating system
❏Microso
®
Windows Server
®
2012 operating system
❏Microso
®
Windows Server
®
2008 R2 operating system
❏Microso
®
Windows Server
®
2008 operating system
❏Microso
®
Windows Server
®
2003 R2 operating system
❏Microso
®
Windows Server
®
2003 operating system
Guide to This Manual
>
About This Manual
>
Operating System References
10
Mac OS
In this manual, "Mac OS" is used to refer to macOS Catalina, macOS Mojave, macOS High Sierra, macOS Sierra,
OS X El Capitan, OS X Yosemite, OS X Mavericks, OS X Mountain Lion, Mac OS X v10.7.x, and Mac OS X v10.6.8.
Trademarks
❏EPSON
®
is a registered trademark, and EPSON EXCEED YOUR VISION or EXCEED YOUR VISION is a
trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
❏Epson Scan 2 soware is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
❏libti
Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leer
Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this soware and its documentation for any purpose is
hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in
all copies of the soware and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leer and Silicon Graphics
may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the soware without the specic, prior written
permission of Sam Leer and Silicon Graphics.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
❏QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and other countries.
❏e SuperSpeed USB Trident Logo is a registered trademark of USB Implementers Forum, Inc.
❏Microso
®
, Windows
®
, Windows Server
®
, and Windows Vista
®
are registered trademarks of Microso
Corporation.
❏Apple, Mac, macOS, OS X, Bonjour, ColorSync, Safari, AirPrint, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, iTunes, TrueType,
and iBeacon are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
❏Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to work specically with the
technology identied in the badge and has been certied by the developer to meet Apple performance
standards.
❏Chrome, Google Play, and Android are trademarks of Google LLC.
❏Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, Photoshop, PostScript
®
3™, and Reader are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
❏Albertus, Arial, Coronet, Gill Sans, Joanna and Times New Roman are trademarks of e Monotype
Corporation registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Oce and may be registered in certain
jurisdictions.
❏ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, Lubalin Graph, Mona Lisa, ITC Symbol, Zapf Chancery and Zapf
Dingbats are trademarks of International Typeface Corporation registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark
Oce and may be registered in certain other jurisdictions.
❏Clarendon, Eurostile and New Century Schoolbook are trademarks of Linotype GmbH registered in the U.S.
Patent and Trademark Oce and may be registered in certain other jurisdictions.
Guide to This Manual
>
Trademarks
11
❏Wingdings is a registered trademark of Microso Corporation in the United States and other countries.
❏CG Omega, CG Times, Garamond Antiqua, Garamond Halbfett, Garamond Kursiv, Garamond Halbfett Kursiv
are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. and may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
❏Antique Olive is a trademark of M. Olive.
❏Marigold and Oxford are trademarks of AlphaOmega Typography.
❏Helvetica, Optima, Palatino, Times and Univers are trademarks of Linotype Corp. registered in the U.S. Patent
and Trademark Oce and may be registered in certain other jurisdictions in the name of Linotype Corp. or its
licensee Linotype GmbH.
❏PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
❏Arcfour
is code illustrates a sample implementation of the Arcfour algorithm.
Copyright © April 29, 1997 Kalle Kaukonen. All Rights Reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modication, are permitted provided that
this copyright notice and disclaimer are retained.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY KALLE KAUKONEN AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KALLE KAUKONEN OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
❏microSDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Note: microSDHC is built into the product and cannot be removed.
❏Firefox is a trademark of the Mozilla Foundation in the U.S. and other countries.
❏General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identication purposes only and may be trademarks
of their respective owners. Epson disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Copyright
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
Seiko Epson Corporation. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained
herein. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information herein. e
information contained herein is designed only for use with this Epson product. Epson is not responsible for any
use of this information as applied to other products.
Neither Seiko Epson Corporation nor its aliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third parties for
damages, losses, costs, or expenses incurred by the purchaser or third parties as a result of accident, misuse, or
abuse of this product or unauthorized modications, repairs, or alterations to this product, or (excluding the U.S.)
failure to strictly comply with Seiko Epson Corporation's operating and maintenance instructions.
Guide to This Manual
>
Copyright
12
Seiko Epson Corporation and its aliates shall not be liable for any damages or problems arising from the use of
any options or any consumable products other than those designated as Original Epson Products or Epson
Approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation.
Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be held liable for any damage resulting from electromagnetic interference that
occurs from the use of any interface cables other than those designated as Epson Approved Products by Seiko
Epson Corporation.
© 2019 Seiko Epson Corporation
e contents of this manual and the specications of this product are subject to change without notice.
Guide to This Manual
>
Copyright
13
Safety Instructions
Read and follow these instructions to ensure safe use of this printer. Make sure you keep this manual for future
reference. Also, be sure to follow all warnings and instructions marked on the printer.
❏Some of the symbols used on your printer are to ensure safety and proper use of the printer. Visit the following
Web site to learn the meaning of the symbols.
http://support.epson.net/symbols
❏Use only the power cord supplied with the printer and do not use the cord with any other equipment. Use of
other cords with this printer or the use of the supplied power cord with other equipment may result in re or
electric shock.
❏Be sure your AC power cord meets the relevant local safety standard.
❏Never disassemble, modify, or attempt to repair the power cord, plug, printer unit, scanner unit, or options by
yourself, except as specically explained in the printer's manuals.
❏Unplug the printer and refer servicing to qualied service personnel under the following conditions:
e power cord or plug is damaged; liquid has entered the printer; the printer has been dropped or the casing
damaged; the printer does not operate normally or exhibits a distinct change in performance. Do not adjust
controls that are not covered by the operating instructions.
❏Place the printer near a wall outlet where the plug can be easily unplugged.
❏Do not place or store the printer outdoors, near excessive dirt or dust, water, heat sources, or in locations
subject to shocks, vibrations, high temperature or humidity.
❏Take care not to spill liquid on the printer and not to handle the printer with wet hands.
❏Keep the printer at least 22 cm away from cardiac pacemakers. Radio waves from this printer may adversely
aect the operation of cardiac pacemakers.
❏If the LCD screen is damaged, contact your dealer. If the liquid crystal solution gets on your hands, wash them
thoroughly with soap and water. If the liquid crystal solution gets into your eyes, ush them immediately with
water. If discomfort or vision problems remain aer a thorough ushing, see a doctor immediately.
❏Avoid using a telephone during an electrical storm. ere may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
❏Do not use a telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
❏e printer is heavy and should not be lied or carried by less than four people. If paper cassettes are installed,
uninstall all paper cassettes. When liing the printer, four people should assume the correct positions as shown
below.
Important Instructions
>
Safety Instructions
15
Safety Instructions for Ink
❏Be careful when you handle used ink supply units, as there may be some ink around the ink supply port.
❏If ink gets on your skin, wash the area thoroughly with soap and water.
❏If ink gets into your eyes, ush them immediately with water. If discomfort or vision problems continue aer
a thorough ushing, see a doctor immediately.
❏If ink gets into your mouth, see a doctor right away.
❏Do not disassemble the ink supply unit and the maintenance box; otherwise ink may get into your eyes or on
your skin.
❏Do not shake ink supply units too vigorously; otherwise ink may leak from the ink supply units.
❏Keep ink supply units and maintenance box out of the reach of children.
Printer Advisories and Warnings
Read and follow these instructions to avoid damaging the printer or your property. Make sure you keep this
manual for future reference.
Advisories and Warnings for Setting Up the Printer
❏Do not block or cover the vents and openings in the printer.
❏Use only the type of power source indicated on the printer's label.
❏Avoid using outlets on the same circuit as photocopiers or air control systems that regularly switch on and o.
❏Avoid electrical outlets controlled by wall switches or automatic timers.
❏Keep the entire computer system away from potential sources of electromagnetic interference, such as
loudspeakers or the base units of cordless telephones.
❏e power-supply cords should be placed to avoid abrasions, cuts, fraying, crimping, and kinking. Do not place
objects on top of the power-supply cords and do not allow the power-supply cords to be stepped on or run over.
Be particularly careful to keep all the power-supply cords straight at the ends and the points where they enter
and leave the transformer.
❏If you use an extension cord with the printer, make sure that the total ampere rating of the devices plugged into
the extension cord does not exceed the cord's ampere rating. Also, make sure that the total ampere rating of all
devices plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the wall outlet's ampere rating.
❏If you plan to use the printer in Germany, the building installation must be protected by a 10 or 16 amp circuit
breaker to provide adequate short-circuit protection and over-current protection for the printer.
❏When connecting the printer to a computer or other device with a cable, ensure the correct orientation of the
connectors. Each connector has only one correct orientation. Inserting a connector in the wrong orientation
may damage both devices connected by the cable.
❏Place the printer on a at, stable surface that extends beyond the base of the printer in all directions. e printer
will not operate properly if it is tilted at an angle.
❏When installing the printer on the oor, install the optional printer stand. e printer may fall without the
printer stand.
❏Allow space above the printer so that you can fully raise the document cover.
❏Leave enough space in front of the printer for the paper to be fully ejected.
Important Instructions
>
Printer Advisories and Warnings
>
Advisories and Warnings for Setting Up the Printer
16
❏Avoid places subject to rapid changes in temperature and humidity. Also, keep the printer away from direct
sunlight, strong light, or heat sources.
Related Information
&“Installation Location and Space” on page 415
Advisories and Warnings for Using the Printer
❏Do not insert objects through the slots in the printer.
❏Do not put your hand inside the printer during printing.
❏Do not touch the white at cable inside the printer.
❏Do not use aerosol products that contain ammable gases inside or around the printer. Doing so may cause re.
❏Do not move the print head by hand; otherwise, you may damage the printer.
❏Be careful not to trap your ngers when closing the scanner unit.
❏Do not press too hard on the scanner glass when placing the originals.
❏Always turn the printer o using the
P
button. Do not unplug the printer or turn o the power at the outlet
until the
P
light stops ashing.
❏If you are not going to use the printer for a long period, be sure to unplug the power cord from the electrical
outlet.
Advisories and Warnings for Using the Touchscreen
❏e LCD screen may contain a few small bright or dark spots, and because of its features it may have an uneven
brightness. ese are normal and do not indicate that it is damaged in any way.
❏Only use a dry, so cloth for cleaning. Do not use liquid or chemical cleaners.
❏e exterior cover of the touchscreen could break if it receives a heavy impact. Contact your dealer if the panel
surface chips or cracks, and do not touch or attempt to remove the broken pieces.
❏Press the touchscreen gently with your nger. Do not press force or operate with your nails.
❏Do not use sharp objects such as ball point pens or sharp pencils to perform operations.
❏Condensation inside the touchscreen due to abrupt changes in temperature or humidity may cause
performance to deteriorate.
Advisories and Warnings for Using the Printer with a Wireless
Connection
❏Radio waves from this printer may negatively aect the operation of medical electronic equipment, causing
them to malfunction. When using this printer inside medical facilities or near medical equipment, follow
directions from the authorized personnel representing the medical facilities, and follow all posted warnings and
directions on the medical equipment.
❏Radio waves from this printer may negatively aect the operation of automatically controlled devices such as
automatic doors or re alarms, and could lead to accidents due to malfunction. When using this printer near
automatically controlled devices, follow all posted warnings and directions on these devices.
Important Instructions
>
Printer Advisories and Warnings
>
Advisories and Warnings for Using the Printer with
…
17
Advisories and Warnings for Transporting or Storing the Printer
❏When storing or transporting the printer, avoid tilting it, placing it vertically, or turning it upside down;
otherwise ink may leak.
❏Before transporting the printer, make sure that the print head is in the home (far right) position.
Protecting Your Personal Information
When you give the printer to someone else or dispose of it, erase all the personal information stored in the printer's
memory by selecting the menus on the control panel as described below.
❏Settings > General Settings > System Administration > Restore Default Settings > Clear All Data and
Settings
❏Settings > General Settings > System Administration > HDD Erase Settings > Erase All Memory > High
Speed, Overwrite, or Triple Over write
Data on the HDD can be completely erased by High Speed.
❏Overwriting it once is enough to erase the data on the HDD.
To overwrite to an additional level, select Triple Overwrite.
e Overwrite or Triple Overwrite function overwrites any invalid data in the memory which can take some
time to process.
❏Settings > General Settings > System Administration > Clear Internal Memory Data > PDL Font, Macro,
and Working Area
Important Instructions
>
Protecting Your Personal Information
18
Front
See related information for a description of the optional items.
AControl panel Allows you to make settings and perform operations on the printer.
Also displays the printer’s status.
BExternal interface USB port Connects memory devices.
CPrint head Fires ink.
DOutput guide Holds the ejected paper.
EOutput tray Holds the ejected paper. When you start printing paper larger than A4
size, this tray is ejected automatically. To store the tray, push it in
manually.
FDocument holder Holds the manuals.
GFront cover (A) Open when removing jammed paper inside the printer.
HCleaning cloth holder Holds the cleaning cloth.
ICleaning cloth Use to clean the glass surface of the scanner unit and the ADF.
Part Names and Functions
>
Front
20
AManual stapler Staples printed paper. Use when this option is installed. See related
information for more details.
BPaper cassette 1 (C1) Loads paper.
CPaper cassette 2 (C2) Loads paper. Optional paper casette unit. Use when this option is
installed. See related information for more details.
DPaper cassette 3 (C3)
EPaper cassette 4 (C4)
FPrinter stand Place the printer on this to prevent it from falling. You can move the
stand around on its casters. Use when this option is installed. See
related information for more details.
GEdge guide Feeds the paper straight into the printer. Slide to the edges of the
paper.
Part Names and Functions
>
Front
21
HPaper cassette Loads paper.
IInk supply unit tray Sets an ink supply unit.
JCover lock Locks the ink supply unit cover.
KInk supply unit cover (P) Open when replacing ink supply units.
ADocument cover Blocks external light while scanning.
BScanner glass Place the originals. You can place the originals that are not fed from
the ADF such as envelopes or thick books.
CADF (Automatic Document Feeder) cover
(F)
Open when removing jammed originals in the ADF.
DADF edge guide Feeds originals straight into the printer. Slide to the edge of the
originals.
EADF input tray Feeds originals automatically.
FStopper Prevents the ejected originals from falling from the ADF output tray.
GADF output tray Holds originals ejected from the ADF.
Part Names and Functions
>
Front
22
APaper support Supports loaded paper.
BPaper tray (B) Loads paper.
CPaper tray cover Prevents foreign substances from entering the printer. This cover
should usually be closed.
DEdge guide Feeds the paper straight into the printer. Slide to the edges of the
paper.
EFeeder guard Prevents foreign substance from entering the printer. Usually keep
this guard closed.
FEdge guide Feeds the paper straight into the printer. Slide to the edges of the
paper.
Related Information
&“List of Optional Items” on page 318
Part Names and Functions
>
Front
23
CAC inlet Connects the power cord.
DRear cover (D3) Open when removing jammed paper.
ERear cover (E)
FRear cover (D1) Open when replacing the maintenance box or removing jammed
paper.
GDuplexing unit (D2) Remove when removing jammed paper.
HMaintenance box Collects a very small amount of surplus ink during cleaning or
printing
ILAN port Connects a LAN cable.
JUSB port Connects a USB cable.
KService USB port USB port for future use. Do not remove the sticker.
Related Information
&“List of Optional Items” on page 318
Part Names and Functions
>
Rear
25
Guide to the Control Panel
Control Panel.....................................................27
Home Screen Conguration.......................................... 28
Menu Screen Conguration...........................................30
Job/Status Screen Conguration....................................... 31
Entering Characters................................................ 32
Viewing Animations................................................32
Control Panel
ATurns the printer on or o.
Unplug the power cord when the power light is o.
BDisplays the home screen.
CLogs o from the printer when Access Control is enabled.
When Access Control is disabled, this is also disabled.
DDisplays the Help screen. You can check solutions to problems from here.
EPauses the current job and allows you to interrupt another job. Press this button again to restart a paused job.
FResets the current settings to user default settings. If user default settings have not been made, resets to the
factory default.
GDisplays the Contacts list. You can register, edit or delete the contacts.
HClears number settings such as the number of copies.
IEnters numbers, characters, and symbols.
JDisplays the Job/Status menu. You can check the printer's status and job history.
The error light on the left ashes or turns on when an error occurs.
The data light on the right ashes when the printer is processing data. It turns on when there are queued jobs.
KDisplays the Paper Setting screen. You can select the paper size and paper type settings for each paper source.
LStops the current operation.
MDisplays menus and messages.
You can change the angle of the control panel. When no operations are performed for a specic length of time,
the printer enters sleep mode and the display turns o. Tap anywhere on the touch screen to turn on the display.
Depending on the current settings, pressing the buttons on the control panel wakes the printer from sleep mode.
NReturns to the previous screen.
OTurns on when received documents that have not yet been read, printed, or saved, are stored in the printer's
memory.
Guide to the Control Panel
>
Control Panel
27
Home Screen Conguration
ADisplays the Printer Status screen.
You can check the approximate ink levels and the approximate service life of the maintenance
box.
BDisplays the network connection status. See the following for more details.
“Guide to the Network Icon” on page 29
CDisplays the Device Sound Settings screen.
You can set Mute and Quiet Mode. You can access the Sounds menu from this screen. You can
also make this setting from the Settings menu.
Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Sounds
Indicates whether or not Quiet Mode is set for the printer. When this
feature is enabled, the noise made by printer operations is reduced, but
print speed may slow down. However, noises may not be reduced
depending on the selected paper type and print quality.
Indicates that Mute is set for the printer.
DEnters the printer into sleep mode.
EIndicates that the user restriction feature is enabled. Select this icon to log in to the printer. You
need to select a user name and then enter a password. Contact your printer administrator for
login information.
When is displayed, a user with access permission has logged in. Select the icon to logout.
FDisplays the Fax Data Information screen. The number displayed indicates the number of faxes
that have not yet been read, printed, or saved.
Guide to the Control Panel
>
Home Screen Conguration
28
GDisplays each menu.
❏Copy
Allows you to copy documents.
❏Fax
Allows you to send faxes.
❏Scan
Allows you to scan documents and save them to a memory device or a computer.
❏Presets
Allows you to register frequently used settings for copying, scanning, or faxing as a preset.
❏Memory Device
Allows you to print JPEG,TIFF, or PDF data on a memory device such as a USB memory device connected to the
printer.
❏Fax Box
Allows you to store received documents, documents to be sent, or documents for polling faxes.
❏Condential Job
Allows you to print a password protected job sent from the printer driver.
❏Settings
Allows you to make settings related to maintenance, printer settings, and operations.
HJob/Status Displays on-going jobs that are standing by. Tap to display the type of jobs, arrival timer, user
names, and so on as a list. The number displayed indicates the number of jobs that are standing
by.
IScrolls the screen to the right.
Guide to the Network Icon
The printer is not connected to a wired (Ethernet) network or unset it.
The printer is connected to a wired (Ethernet) network.
The printer is not connected to a wireless (Wi-Fi) network.
The printer is searching for SSID, unset IP address, or having a problem with a wireless
(Wi-Fi) network.
The printer is connected to a wireless (Wi-Fi) network.
The number of bars indicates the signal strength of the connection. The more bars
there are, the stronger the connection.
The printer is not connected to a wireless (Wi-Fi) network in Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP)
mode.
The printer is connected to a wireless (Wi-Fi) network in Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) mode.
Guide to the Control Panel
>
Home Screen Conguration
>
Guide to the Network Icon
29
Menu Screen Conguration
AReturns to the previous screen.
BSwitches the list of settings using the tabs. The Basic Settings tab displays frequently used items. The Advanced tab
displays other items that you can set as necessary.
C
Displays the list of setting items. When is displayed, you can view additional information by selecting the icon.
Make settings by selecting the item or adding a check mark. When you have changed an item from the user default
or the factory default, is displayed on the item.
Grayed out items are not available. Select the item to check why it is unavailable.
If any problems occur, is displayed on the item. Select the icon to check how to solve the problem.
DStarts operations using the current settings. Items vary depending on the menu.
Presets Displays the preset list. You can register current setting as a preset, or load registered presets.
Copies Displays the on-screen keypad allowing you to enter the number of copies.
Preview Displays a preview of the image before printing, copying, scanning, or sending faxes.
x
Starts printing, copying, scanning, or sending faxes.
Guide to the Control Panel
>
Menu Screen Conguration
30
Job/Status Screen Conguration
Press the button to display the Job/Status menu. You can check the status of the printer or the jobs.
ASwitches the displayed lists.
BFilter the jobs by functional.
CWhen Active is selected, displays the list of ongoing jobs and jobs waiting to be processed.
When Log is selected, displays the job history.
You can cancel jobs or check the error code displayed in the history when the job has failed.
DIndicates the approximate ink levels.
EIndicates the approximate service life of the maintenance box.
FDisplays any errors that have occurred in the printer. Select the error from the list to display the error message.
When you are using the additional interface slot, you can switch tabs to display the status of the optional item. See
related information for more details.
Related Information
&“List of Optional Items” on page 318
&“Error Code is Displayed on the Status Menu” on page 253
Guide to the Control Panel
>
Job/Status Screen Conguration
31
Entering Characters
You can enter characters and symbols by using on-screen keyboard when you make network settings, and so on.
AIndicates the character count.
BMoves the cursor to the input position.
CSwitches between upper case and lower case or numbers and symbols.
DSwitches the character type.
: You can enter numbers and symbols.
: You can enter letters.
EEnters frequently used email domain addresses or URLs by simply selecting the item.
FEnters a space.
GEnters character.
HDeletes a character to the left.
Viewing Animations
You can view animations of operating instructions such as loading paper or removing jammed paper on the LCD
screen.
❏Select : Displays the help screen. Select How To and select the items that you want to view.
Guide to the Control Panel
>
Viewing Animations
32
Paper Handling Precautions
❏Read the instruction sheets supplied with the paper.
❏To achieve high-quality printouts with genuine Epson paper, use the paper in the environment stated on the
sheets supplied with the paper.
❏Fan and align the edges of the paper before loading. Do not fan or curl photo paper. Doing so may damage the
printable side.
❏If the paper is curled, atten it or curl it slightly in the opposite direction before loading. Printing on curled
paper may cause paper jams and smears on the printout.
❏Paper feed problems may occur frequently for manual 2-sided printing when printing on one side of pre-
printed paper. Reduce the number of sheets to half or less, or load one sheet of paper at a time if paper jams
continue.
❏Do not use short-grain paper with a width of less than 105 mm.
❏Make sure you are using long-grain paper. If you are not sure what type of paper you are using, check the paper
packaging or contact the manufacturer to conrm the paper specications.
❏Fan and align the edges of the envelopes before loading. When the stacked envelopes are pued up with air,
press them down to atten them before loading.
Related Information
&“Unavailable Paper Types” on page 361
Loading Paper
>
Paper Handling Precautions
35
Paper Size and Type Settings
If you register the paper size and type on the screen displayed when you insert the paper cassette, the printer
informs you when the registered information and print settings dier. is prevents you from wasting paper and
ink by making sure you are not printing on the wrong paper size or printing in the wrong color due to using
settings that do not match the paper type.
If displayed paper size and type dier from the loaded paper, select the item to change. If the settings match the
loaded paper, close the screen.
Note:
❏You can also display the paper size and paper type settings screen by pressing the button on the control panel.
❏You can register frequently used user-dened sizes in Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Paper Source
Settings > User-Dened Paper Size List.
List of Paper Type
To obtain optimum printing results, select the paper type that suits the paper.
Media Name Media Type
Control Panel Printer Driver PostScript Printer
Driver
Epson Universal Printer
Driver
Epson Business
Paper
Epson Bright White
Ink Jet Paper
Epson Bright White
Paper
Plain paper Plain paper Plain Plain
Epson Ultra Glossy
Photo Paper
Ultra Glossy Epson Ultra Glossy Epson Ultra Glossy -
Epson Premium
Glossy Photo Paper
Prem. Glossy Epson Premium
Glossy
Epson Premium
Glossy
-
Epson Premium
Semigloss Photo
Paper
Prem. Semigloss Epson Premium
Semigloss
Epson Premium
Semigloss
-
Epson Photo Paper
Glossy
Glossy Photo Paper Glossy Photo Paper Glossy -
Loading Paper
>
Paper Size and Type Settings
>
List of Paper Type
36
Media Name Media Type
Control Panel Printer Driver PostScript Printer
Driver
Epson Universal Printer
Driver
Epson Matte Paper-
Heavyweight
Matte Epson Matte Epson Matte -
Epson Photo Quality
Ink Jet Paper
Matte Epson Matte Photo Quality Ink
Jet Paper
-
Thick paper
(91 to 150 g/m)
Thick paper1 Thick-Paper1 Thick-Paper1 Thick-Paper1
Thick paper
(151 to 200 g/m)
Thick paper2 Thick-Paper2 Thick-Paper2 Thick-Paper2
Thick paper
(201 to 256 g/m)
Thick paper3 Thick-Paper3 Thick-Paper3 Thick-Paper3
List of Detected Paper Sizes
When you enable Paper Size Auto Detect, the following paper sizes are detected automatically when they are
loaded in the paper cassette.
A6, B6, A5, Half letter, B5, A4, Letter, B4, Legal, A3, 11×17 in.
Similar paper sizes such as A4 and Letter may not be detected correctly. If Half letter, Letter, Legal, and Leger sizes
are detected as A5, A4, B4, and A3 sizes, press the button and then set the correct size.
If the sizes cannot be automatically detected, press the button, disable the Paper Size Auto Detect feature, and
then set the paper size that you loaded.
Loading Paper
You can load paper or envelopes by referring to the animations displayed on the printer's LCD screen.
Select , and then select How To > Load paper. Select the paper type and paper source you want to use to display
the animations. Select Finish to close the animation screen.
Loading Paper
>
Loading Paper
37
Loading Envelopes
Load envelopes in the center of the paper tray short edge rst with the ap facing down, and slide the edge guides
to the edges of the envelopes.
Loading Pre-punched Paper
Load a single sheet of pre-punched paper in the paper tray.
❏Adjust the print position of your le to avoid printing over the holes.
❏Automatic 2-sided printing is not available for pre-punched paper.
Loading Paper
>
Loading Paper
>
Loading Pre-punched Paper
38
Loading Long Papers
Load long paper in the paper tray by allowing the leading edge of the paper to roll over. Select User-Dened as the
paper size setting.
❏Long paper cannot be held in the output tray. Prepare a box and so on to make sure that paper does not fall on
the oor.
❏Do not touch paper that is being fed or ejected. It could injure your hand or cause print quality to decline.
Loading Paper
>
Loading Paper
>
Loading Long Papers
39
Placing Originals
You can place the originals by referring to the animations displayed on the printer's LCD screen.
Select , and then select How To > Place Originals. Select the method of placing originals that you want to view.
Select Finish to close the animation screen.
If you want to copy multiple originals, place all of the originals on the ADF.
When using the scanner glass
!
Caution:
Be careful not to trap your ngers when closing the document cover. Otherwise you may be injured.
c
Important:
❏When placing bulky originals such as books, prevent exterior light from shining directly onto the scanner glass.
If exterior light is too strong, the size of your original may not be automatically detected or the result of copying
or scanning may become white.
❏Do not apply too much force to the scanner glass. Otherwise, it may be damaged.
❏Do not press with too much force on the original. If you press with too much force, blurring, smudges, and spots
may occur.
❏If the original has marks from folding or wrinkles, smooth them out, and then place them on the scanner glass.
Images may be blurred at the parts where the original is not in close contact with the scanner glass.
❏If there is any trash or dirt on the scanner glass, the scanning range may expand to include it, so the image of the
original may be displaced or reduced. Remove any trash and dirt on the scanner glass before scanning.
❏Remove the originals aer scanning. If you leave the originals on the scanner glass for a long time, they may stick
to the surface of the glass.
Placing Originals
>
Placing Originals
41
Note:
❏A range of 1.5 mm from the edges of the scanner glass is not scanned.
❏When originals are placed in the ADF and on the scanner glass, priority is given to the originals in the ADF.
❏Some sizes may not be automatically detected. In this situation, manually select the size of the originals.
When using the ADF
c
Important:
❏Do not load originals above the line just under the triangle symbol inside the ADFedge guide.
❏Do not add originals while scanning.
Note:
❏You can place originals smaller than A4 size with the long edge facing toward the ADF.
❏Some sizes may not be automatically detected. In this situation, manually select the size of the originals.
Related Information
&“Originals that are not Supported by the ADF” on page 43
&“Detecting the Original Size Automatically” on page 43
&“Scanner Specications” on page 405
&“ADF Specications” on page 406
Placing Originals
>
Placing Originals
42
Detecting the Original Size Automatically
When you select Auto Detectas the paper setting, the following types of paper size are identied automatically.
❏Placing vertically: A4, B5, A5
Place the long edge of the original toward the paper feed entrance of the ADF or the le side of the scanner
glass.
❏Placing horizontally: A3, B4, A4, B5, A5 (scanner glass only)
Place the short edge of the original toward the paper feed entrance of the ADF or the le side of the scanner
glass.
Note:
e sizes for the following originals may not be detected correctly. If the sizes are not detected, set the size manually on the
control panel.
❏Originals that are torn, folded, wrinkled, or curled (if the originals are curled, atten the curl before placing the
originals.)
❏Originals with a lot of binder holes
❏OHPs, translucent originals, or glossy originals
Originals that are not Supported by the ADF
c
Important:
Do not feed photographs or valuable original artwork into the ADF. Misfeeding may wrinkle or damage the
original. Scan these documents on the scanner glass instead.
To prevent paper jams, avoid placing the following originals in the ADF. For these types, use the scanner glass.
❏Originals that are torn, folded, wrinkled, deteriorated, or curled
❏Originals with binder holes
❏Originals held together with tape, staples, paper clips etc.
❏Originals that have stickers or labels stuck to them
❏Originals that are cut irregularly or not right angled
❏Originals that are bound
❏OHPs, thermal transfer paper, or carbon backs
Placing Originals
>
Originals that are not Supported by the ADF
43
Inserting an External USB Device
Insert an external USB device into the external interface USB port.
Related Information
&“Memory Device Specications” on page 412
Removing an External USB Device
Remove the external USB device.
c
Important:
If you remove the external USB device while operating the printer, the data on the external USB device may be lost.
Inserting and Removing a Memory Device
>
Removing an External USB Device
45
Sharing Data on a Memory Device
From a computer, you can write or read data on a memory device such as a USB ash drive that has been
connected to the printer.
c
Important:
When sharing a memory device inserted in the printer between computers connected by USB or over a network,
write access is only allowed to the computers that are connected by the method you selected on the printer. To write
to the memory device, enter Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Memory Device Interface > File
Sharing on the control panel and then select a connection method.
Note:
It takes a while to recognize data from a computer if a large memory device, such as 2 TB HDD, is connected.
Windows
Select a memory device from Computer or My Computer. e data on the memory device is displayed.
Note:
If you connected the printer to the network without using the soware disc or Web Installer, map an external interface USB
port as a network drive. Open Run and enter a printer name \\XXXXX or a printer's IP address \\XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX to
Open:. Right-click a device icon displayed to assign the network. e network drive appears in Computer or My Computer.
Mac OS
Select a corresponding device icon. e data on the external storage device is displayed.
Note:
❏To remove a memory device, drag and drop the device icon to the trash icon. Otherwise, data on the shared drive may
not be displayed correctly when another memory device is inserted.
❏To access a memory device through the network, select Go > Connect to Server from the menu on the desktop. Enter a
printer name cifs://XXXXX or smb://XXXXX (Where "XXXXX" is the printer name) in the Server Address, and then
click Connect.
Related Information
&“Memory Device Specications” on page 412
Inserting and Removing a Memory Device
>
Sharing Data on a Memory Device
46
Printing
Printing Documents................................................48
Printing on Envelopes...............................................91
Printing Photos....................................................92
Printing Web Pages.................................................94
Printing Using a Cloud Service........................................ 95
Printing Documents
Printing from a Computer - Windows
If you cannot change some of the printer driver settings, they may have been restricted by the administrator.
Contact your printer administrator for assistance.
Printing Using Easy Settings
Note:
Operations may dier depending on the application. See the application's help for details.
1. Load paper in the printer.
“Loading Paper” on page 37
2. Open the le you want to print.
3. Select Print or Print Setup from the File menu.
4. Select your printer.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
48
5. Select Preferences or Properties to access the printer driver window.
6. Change the settings as necessary.
See the menu options for the printer driver for details.
Note:
❏You can also see the online help for explanations of the setting items. Right-clicking an item displays Help.
❏When you select Print Preview, you can see a preview of your document before printing.
❏When you only want to print on one side of the paper, set 2-Sided Printing to O.
7. Click OK to close the printer driver window.
8. Click Print.
Note:
❏When you select Print Preview, a preview window is displayed. To change the settings, click Cancel, and then repeat
the procedure from step 3.
❏If you want to cancel printing, on your computer right-click on your printer in Devices and Printers, Printer, or in
Printers and Faxes. Click See what's printing, right-click on the job you want to cancel, and then select Cancel.
However, you cannot cancel a print job from the computer once it has been completely sent to the printer. In this
case, cancel the print job by using the printer's control panel.
Related Information
&“Available Paper and Capacities” on page 355
&“List of Paper Type” on page 36
&“Menu Options for the Printer Driver” on page 50
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
49
Menu Options for the Printer Driver
Open the print window in an application, select the printer, and then access the printer driver window.
Note:
Menus vary depending on the option you selected.
Main Tab
Printing Presets:
Add/Remove Presets:
You can add or remove your own presets for frequently used print settings. Select the preset you want
to use from the list.
Ink Levels:
Displays the approximate ink level. You need to install EPSON Status Monitor 3 to enable this feature.
You can download it from the Epson website.
Show Settings/Hide Settings:
Displays a list of items currently set on the Main and More Options tabs. You can show or hide the
current setting list screen.
Restore Defaults:
Return all settings to their factory default values. e settings on the More Options tab are also reset
to their defaults.
Print Preview:
Displays a preview of your document before printing.
Job Arranger Lite:
Job Arranger Lite allows you to combine several les created by dierent applications and print them
as a single print job.
Paper Source:
Select the paper source from which the paper is fed. Select Auto Select to automatically select the
paper source selected in the print settings on the printer.
Document Size:
Select the paper size on which you want to print. If you select User-Dened, enter the paper width
and height, and then register the size.
Output Paper:
Select the paper size on which you want to print. If the Document Size diers from the Output
Paper, Reduce/Enlarge Document is selected automatically. You do not have to select it when
printing without reducing or enlarging the size of a document.
Reduce/Enlarge Document:
Allows you to reduce or enlarge the size of a document.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
50
Fit to Page:
Automatically reduce or enlarge the document to t to the paper size selected in Output
Paper.
Zoom to:
Prints with a specic percentage.
Center:
Prints images in the center of the paper.
Paper Type:
Select the type of paper on which you print. If you select Auto Select (plain papers), printing is
performed from the paper source for which the paper type is set to the following in the printer's
settings.
plain papers, Preprinted, Letterhead, Color, Recycled, High quality plain paper
However, paper cannot be fed from a paper source for which the paper source is set to o in the
printer's Auto Select Settings.
Quality:
Select the pint quality you want to use for printing. Available settings depend on the paper type you
select. Selecting High provides higher quality printing, but the printing speed may be slower.
Paper Source Information:
Displays the paper information set for each paper source.
Orientation:
Select the orientation you want to use to print.
Color:
Select whether to print in color or in monochrome.
2-Sided Printing:
Allows you to perform 2-sided printing.
Settings:
You can specify the binding edge and the binding margins. When printing multi-page
documents, you can select to print starting from either the front or the back side of the page.
Print Density:
Select the document type to adjust the print density. If the appropriate print density is selected,
you can prevent images from bleeding through to the reverse side. Select Manual to adjust the
print density manually.
Multi-Page:
Allows you to print several pages on one sheet or perform poster printing. Click Layout Order to
specify the order in which pages are printed.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
51
Reverse Order:
Allows you to print from the last page so that the pages are stacked in the correct order aer printing.
Collate/Uncollated:
Select Collate to print multi-page documents collated in order and sorted into sets.
Copies:
Set the number of copies you want to print.
More Options Tab
Printing Presets:
Add/Remove Presets:
You can add or remove your own presets for frequently used print settings. Select the preset you want
to use from the list.
Show Settings/Hide Settings:
Displays a list of items currently set on the Main and More Options tabs. You can show or hide the
current setting list screen.
Restore Defaults:
Return all settings to their factory default values. e settings on the Main tab are also reset to their
defaults.
Job Type:
Select Condential Job to set a password to protect condential documents when printing. If you use
this feature, the print data is stored in the printer and can only be printed aer the password has been
entered using the printer's control panel. Click Condential Job Settings to change the settings.
Color Correction:
Automatic:
Adjusts the tone of images automatically.
Custom:
Allows you to perform manual color correction. Clicking Advanced opens the Color
Correction screen where you can select a detailed method of color correction. Click Image
Options to enable Color Universal Print, Fix Red-Eye, and sharpen printing for thin lines.
Additional Settings:
Watermark Features:
Allows you to make settings for anti-copy patterns, watermarks, or headers and footers.
Add/Delete:
Allows you to add or remove any anti-copy patterns or watermarks that you want to use.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
52
Settings:
Allows you to set the printing method for anti-copy patterns or watermarks.
Header/Footer:
You can print information such as a user name and printing date in headers or footers.
Rotate 180°:
Rotates pages 180 degrees before printing. Select this item when printing on paper such as
envelopes that are loaded in xed direction in the printer.
Bidirectional Printing:
Prints when the print head moves in both directions. e print speed is faster, but the quality
may decline.
Mirror Image:
Inverts the image so that it prints as it would appear in a mirror.
Quiet Mode:
Reduces the noise the printer makes. However, enabling this may reduce print speed.
Maintenance Tab
Job Arranger Lite:
Opens the Job Arranger Lite window. Here you can open and edit previously saved data.
EPSON Status Monitor 3:
Opens the EPSON Status Monitor 3 window. Here you can conrm the status of the printer and the
consumables. You need to install EPSON Status Monitor 3 to enable this feature. You can download it
from the Epson website.
Monitoring Preferences:
Allows you to make settings for items on the EPSON Status Monitor 3 window. You need to install
EPSON Status Monitor 3 to enable this feature. You can download it from the Epson website.
Extended Settings:
Allows you to make a variety of settings. Right-click each item to view the Help for more details.
Print Queue:
Displays the jobs waiting to be printed. You can check, pause, or resume print jobs.
Printer and Option Information:
Displays the number of sheets of paper fed into the printer or the ADF. You need to install EPSON
Status Monitor 3 to check the total number of sheets. You can download it from the Epson website.
Language:
Changes the language to be used on the printer driver window. To apply the settings, close the printer
driver, and then open it again.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
53
Software Update:
Starts EPSON Soware Updater to check for the latest version of applications on the Internet.
Technical Support:
If the manual is installed on your computer, the manual is displayed. If it is not installed, you can
connect to the Epson Web site to check the manual and available technical support.
Adding Printing Presets for Easy Printing
If you create your own preset of frequently used print settings on the printer driver, you can print easily by
selecting the preset from the list.
1. On the printer driver's Main or More Options tab, set each item (such as Document Size and Paper Type).
2. Click Add/Remove Presets in Printing Presets.
3. Enter a Name and, if necessary, enter a comment.
4. Click Save.
Note:
To delete an added preset, click Add/Remove Presets, select the preset name you want to delete from the list, and then
delete it.
“Main Tab” on page 50
“More Options Tab” on page 52
5. Click Print.
e next time you want to print using the same settings, select the registered setting name from Printing Presets,
and click OK.
Related Information
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48
Printing on 2-Sides
You can use either of the following methods to print on both sides of the paper.
❏Automatic 2-sided printing
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
54
❏Manual 2-sided printing
When the printer has nished printing the rst side, ip the paper over to print on the other side.
Note:
❏If you do not use paper that is suitable for 2-sided printing, the print quality may decline and paper jams may occur.
“Paper for 2-Sided Printing” on page 360
❏Depending on the paper and the data, ink may bleed through to the other side of the paper.
❏is needs to be installed if you want to check the printing status with EPSON Status Monitor 3. You can download it
from the Epson website.
❏However, it may not be available when the printer is accessed over a network or is used as a shared printer.
1. Select the method of 2-Sided Printing on the Main tab.
2. Click Settings, make the appropriate settings, and then click OK.
3. Click Print Density, make the appropriate settings, and then click OK.
When setting Print Density, you can adjust print density according to the document type.
Note:
❏is setting is not available when you select manual 2-sided printing.
❏Printing may be slow depending on the combination of options selected for Select Document Type in the Print
Density Adjustment window and for Quality on the Main tab.
4. Set the other items on the Main and More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 50
“More Options Tab” on page 52
5. Click Print.
For manual 2-sided printing, when the rst side has nished printing, a pop-up window is displayed on the
computer. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Related Information
&“Available Paper and Capacities” on page 355
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
55
Printing a Booklet
You can also print a booklet that can be created by re-ordering the pages and folding the printout.
Note:
❏If you do not use paper that is suitable for 2-sided printing, the print quality may decline and paper jams may occur.
“Paper for 2-Sided Printing” on page 360
❏Depending on the paper and the data, ink may bleed through to the other side of the paper.
❏is needs to be installed if you want to check the printing status with EPSON Status Monitor 3. You can download it
from the Epson website.
❏However, it may not be available when the printer is accessed over a network or is used as a shared printer.
1. Select the method of 2-Sided Printing on the Main tab.
2. On the printer driver's Settings, select Booklet.
3. Click OK.
❏Center Binding: Use this method when printing a small number of pages that can be stacked and easily
folded in half.
❏Side Binding. Use this method when printing one sheet (four pages) at a time, folding each in half, and then
putting them together in one volume.
4. Click Print Density, make the appropriate settings, and then click OK.
When setting Print Density, you can adjust print density according to the document type.
Note:
Printing may be slow depending on the combination of options selected for Select Document Type in the Print Density
Adjustment window and for Quality on the Main tab.
5. Set the other items on the Main and More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 50
“More Options Tab” on page 52
6. Click Print.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
56
Related Information
&“Available Paper and Capacities” on page 355
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48
Printing Several Pages on One Sheet
You can print several pages of data on a single sheet of paper.
1. On the printer driver's Main tab, select 2-Up, 4-Up, 6-Up, 8-Up, 9-Up, or 16-Up as the Multi-Page setting.
2. Click Layout Order, make the appropriate settings, and then click OK.
3. Set the other items on the Main and More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 50
“More Options Tab” on page 52
4. Click Print.
Related Information
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
57
Printing to Fit the Paper Size
Select the paper size you loaded in the printer as the Destination Paper Size setting.
1. On the printer driver's Main tab, make the following settings.
❏Document Size: Select the size of the paper you set in the application setting.
❏Output Paper: Select the paper size you loaded in the printer.
Fit to Page is automatically selected.
Note:
Click Center to print the reduced image in the middle of the paper.
2. Set the other items on the Main and More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 50
“More Options Tab” on page 52
3. Click Print.
Related Information
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
58
Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document at any Magnication
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a document by a specic percentage.
1. On the printer driver's Main tab, select the document size from the Document Size setting.
2. Select the paper size you want to print on from the Output Paper setting.
3. Select Reduce/Enlarge Document, Zoom to, and then enter a percentage.
4. Set the other items on the Main and More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 50
“More Options Tab” on page 52
5. Click Print.
Related Information
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48
Printing One Image on Multiple Sheets for Enlargement (Creating a Poster)
is feature allows you to print one image on multiple sheets of paper. You can create a larger poster by taping
them together.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
59
1. On the printer driver's Main tab, select 2x1 Poster, 2x2 Poster, 3x3 Poster, or 4x4 Poster as the Multi-Page
setting.
2. Click Settings, make the appropriate settings, and then click OK.
Note:
Print Cutting Guides allows you to print a cutting guide.
3. Set the other items on the Main and More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 50
“More Options Tab” on page 52
4. Click Print.
Related Information
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48
Making Posters Using Overlapping Alignment Marks
Here is an example of how to make a poster when 2x2 Poster is selected, and Overlapping Alignment Marks is
selected in Print Cutting Guides.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
60
1. Prepare Sheet 1 and Sheet 2. Cut o the margins of Sheet 1 along the vertical blue line through the center of
the top and bottom cross marks.
2. Place the edge of Sheet 1 on top of Sheet 2 and align the cross marks, then temporarily tape the two sheets
together from the back.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
61
3. Cut the taped sheets in two along the vertical red line through the alignment markers (this time, the line to the
le of the cross marks).
4. Tape the sheets together from the back.
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 to tape Sheet 3 and Sheet 4 together.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
62
6. Cut o the margins of Sheet 1 and Sheet 2 along the horizontal blue line through the center of the le and right
side cross marks.
7. Place the edge of Sheet 1 and Sheet 2 on top of Sheet 3 and Sheet 4 and align the cross marks, and then
temporarily tape them together from the back.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
63
10. Cut o the remaining margins along the outer guide.
Printing with a Header and Footer
You can print information such as a user name and printing date in headers or footers.
1. On the printer driver's More Options tab, click Watermark Features, and then select the Header/Footer
checkbox.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
65
2. Select Settings, select the items you want to print, and click OK.
Note:
❏To specify the rst page number, select Page Number from the position you want to print in the header or footer, and
then select the number in Starting number.
❏If you want to print text in the header or footer, select the position you want to print, and then select Te xt. Enter the
text you want to print in the text input eld.
3. Set the other items on the Main and More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 50
“More Options Tab” on page 52
4. Click Print.
Related Information
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48
Printing a Watermark
You can print a watermark such as "Condential" or an anti-copy pattern on your printouts. If you print with an
anti-copy pattern, the hidden letters appear when photocopied in order to distinguish the original from the copies.
Anti-Copy Pattern is available under the following conditions:
❏Paper Type: Plain paper, Copy paper, Letterhead, Recycled, Color, Preprinted, High Quality Plain Paper, or
ick paper 1
❏Quality: Standard
❏2-Sided Printing: O
❏Color Correction: Automatic
❏Short Grain Paper: Not selected
Note:
You can also add your own watermark or anti-copy pattern.
1. On the printer driver's More Options tab, click Watermark Features, and then select Anti-Copy Pattern or
Watermark.
2. Click Settings to change details such as the size, density, or position of the pattern or the mark.
3. Set the other items on the Main and More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 50
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
66
“More Options Tab” on page 52
4. Click Print.
Related Information
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48
Printing Password-Protected Files
Yon can set a password for a print job so that it starts printing only aer entering the password on the printer's
control panel.
1. On the printer driver's More Options tab, select Condential Job as the Job Type and then enter a password.
2. Set the other items on the Main and More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 50
“More Options Tab” on page 52
3. Click Print.
4. To print the job, select Condential Job on the home screen of the printer's control panel. Select the job you
want to print, and then enter the password.
Related Information
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
67
Printing Multiple Files Together
Job Arranger Lite allows you to combine several les created by dierent applications and print them as a single
print job. You can specify the print settings for combined les, such as multi-page layout, and 2-sided printing.
1. On the printer driver's Main tab, select Job Arranger Lite.
“Main Tab” on page 50
2. Click Print.
When you start printing, the Job Arranger Lite window is displayed.
3. With the Job Arranger Lite window opened, open the le that you want to combine with the current le, and
then repeat the above steps.
4. When you select a print job added to Print Project Lite in the Job Arranger Lite window, you can edit the page
layout.
5. Click Print from the File menu to start printing.
Note:
If you close the Job Arranger Lite window before adding all the print data to the Print Project, the print job you are
currently working on is canceled. Click Save from the File menu to save the current job. e extension of the saved les
is "ecl".
To open a Print Project, click Job Arranger Lite on the printer driver's Maintenance tab to open the Job Arranger Lite
window. Next, select Open from the File menu to select the le.
Related Information
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48
Printing Using the Color Universal Print Feature
You can enhance the visibility of texts and images in printouts.
Color Universal Print is only available when the following settings are selected.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
68
❏Paper Type: Plain paper, Copy paper, Letterhead, Recycled paper, Colored paper, Preprinted paper, High quality
plain paper, or ick paper 1
❏Quality: Standard or a higher quality
❏Print Color:Color
❏Applications: Microso® Oce 2007 or later
❏Text Size: 96 pts or smaller
1. On the printer driver's More Options tab, click Image Options in the Color Correction setting.
2. Select an option from the Color Universal Print setting.
3. Enhancement Options to make further settings.
4. Set the other items on the Main and More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 50
“More Options Tab” on page 52
5. Click Print.
Note:
❏Certain characters may be altered by patterns, such as "+" appearing as "±".
❏Application-specic patterns and underlines may alter content printed using these settings.
❏Print quality may decrease in photos and other images when using Color Universal Print settings.
❏Printing is slower when using Color Universal Print settings.
Related Information
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48
Adjusting the Print Color
You can adjust the colors used in the print job. ese adjustments are not applied to the original data.
PhotoEnhance produces sharper images and more vivid colors by automatically adjusting the contrast, saturation,
and brightness of the original image data.
Note:
PhotoEnhance adjusts the color by analyzing the location of the subject. erefore, if you have changed the location of the
subject by reducing, enlarging, cropping, or rotating the image, the color may change unexpectedly. If the image is out of
focus, the tone may be unnatural. If the color is changed or becomes unnatural, print in a mode other than PhotoEnhance.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
69
1. On the printer driver's More Options tab, select the method of color correction from the Color Correction
setting.
❏Automaticis setting automatically adjusts the tone to match the paper type and print quality settings.
❏If you select Custom and click Advanced, you can make your own settings.
2. Set the other items on the Main and More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 50
“More Options Tab” on page 52
3. Click Print.
Related Information
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48
Printing to Emphasize Thin Lines
You can thicken thin lines that are too thin to print.
1. On the printer driver's More Options tab, click Image Options in the Color Correction setting.
2. Select Emphasize in Lines.
3. Set the other items on the Main and More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 50
“More Options Tab” on page 52
4. Click Print.
Related Information
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Windows
70
Printing Clear Bar Codes
If printed bar codes cannot be read correctly, you can print clearly using reduced ink bleeding. Only enable this
feature if the bar code you printed cannot be scanned.
You can use this feature under the following conditions.
❏Paper: Plain paper, Copy paper, Letterhead, Recycled, Color, Preprinted, High Quality Plain Paper, ick paper,
Epson Photo Quality Ink Jet, Epson Matte, or Envelope
❏Paper Type: Set the correct paper type according to the paper that will be printed on.
“List of Paper Type” on page 36
❏Quality: Standard, High
Epson Photo Quality Ink Jet, Epson Matte, and thick paper up to 151-256g/m² are not compatible with High.
Note:
Deblurring may not always be possible depending on the circumstances.
1. On the printer driver's Maintenance tab, click Extended Settings, and then select Barcode mode.
2. Set the other items on the Main and More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 50
“More Options Tab” on page 52
3. Click Print.
Related Information
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48
Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)
A PostScript Printer Driver is a driver that outputs printing commands to a printer using a PostScript Page
Description Language.
1. Open the le you want to print.
Load paper in the printer if it has not already been loaded.
2. Select Print or Print Setup from the File menu
3. Select your printer.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)
71
4. Select Preferences or Properties to access the printer driver window.
5. Change the settings as necessary.
See the menu options for the printer driver for details.
6. Click OK to close the printer driver for details.
7. Click Print.
Related Information
&“Available Paper and Capacities” on page 355
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“List of Paper Type” on page 36
&“Paper/Quality Tab” on page 72
&“Layout Tab” on page 73
Menu Options for the PostScript Printer Driver
Open the print window on an application, select the printer, and then access the printer driver window.
Note:
Menus vary depending on the option you selected.
Paper/Quality Tab
Tray Selection:
Select the paper source and media.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)
72
Paper Source:
Select the paper source from which the paper is fed.
Select Automatically Select to automatically select the paper source selected in the Paper
Setting on the printer.
Media:
Select the type of paper on which you print. If you select Unspecied, printing is performed
from the paper source for which the paper type is set to the following in the printer's settings.
plain papers, Preprinted, Letterhead, Color, Recycled, High quality plain paper
However, paper cannot be fed from a paper source for which the paper source is set to o in
the printer's Auto Select Settings.
Color:
Select the color for your print job.
Layout Tab
Orientation:
Select the orientation you want to use to print.
Print on Both Sides:
Allows you to perform 2-sided printing.
Page Order:
Select to print from the top or the last page. If you select Back to Front, the pages are stacked in the
correct order based on page number aer printing.
Page Format:
Pages per Sheet:
Pages per Sheet Layout:
Allows you to specify the page layout when printing several pages on one sheet.
Booklet:
Booklet Binding:
Select the binding position for booklet.
Draw Borders:
Select this if you want to place a border line for each page when printing several pages on one
sheet or when creating a booklet.
Access Control Settings Tab
Printer usage may have been restricted by the administrator. Printing is available aer registering your account to
the printer driver. Contact the administrator for details on your user account.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)
73
Access Control Settings:
Set Access Control Settings.
User Registration:
Allows you to enter a user name and password.
User Name:
Enter a user name.
Password:
Enter a password.
Advanced Options
Paper/Output:
Select the paper size and number of copies.
Paper Size:
Select the paper size on which you want to print.
Copies:
Set the number of copies you want to print.
Graphic:
Set the following menu items.
Print Quality:
Select the pint quality you want to use for printing.
Image Color Management:
Select the ICM method or intent.
Scaling:
Allows you to reduce or enlarge the document.
TrueType Font:
Sets the font substitute to TrueType Font.
Document Options:
Advanced Printing Features:
Allows you to make detailed settings for printing features.
PostScript Options:
Allows you to make optional settings.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)
74
Printer Features:
Set the following menu items.
Color Mode:
Select whether to print in color or in monochrome.
Press Simulation:
You can select a CMYK ink color to simulate when you print by reproducing the CMYK
ink color of the oset press.
Ink Save Mode:
Conserves ink by reducing the print density.
Rotate by 180º:
Rotates the data 180 degrees before printing.
Printing from a Computer - Mac OS
Printing Using Easy Settings
Note:
Operations and screens dier depending on the application. See the application's help for details.
1. Load paper in the printer.
“Loading Paper” on page 37
2. Open the le you want to print.
3. Select Print from the File menu or another command to access the print dialog.
If necessary, click Show Details or
d
to expand the print window.
4. Select your printer.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Mac OS
75
5. Select Print Settings from the pop-up menu.
Note:
If the Print Settings menu is not displayed on macOS High Sierra, macOS Sierra, OS X El Capitan, OS X Yosemite, OS
X Mavericks, OS X Mountain Lion, the Epson printer driver has not been installed correctly. Enable it from the
following menu. macOS Catalina and macOS Mojave cannot access Print Settings in applications made by Apple such
as TextEdit.
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), remove the
printer, and then add the printer again. See the following to add a printer.
“Adding the Printer (for Mac OS Only)” on page 183
6. Change the settings as necessary.
See the menu options for the printer driver for details.
7. Click Print.
Note:
If you want to cancel printing, on your computer click the printer icon in the Dock. Select the job you want to cancel,
and then do one of the following. However, you cannot cancel a print job from the computer once it has been completely
sent to the printer. In this case, cancel the print job by using the printer's control panel.
❏OS X Mountain Lion or later
Click next to the progress meter.
❏Mac OS X v10.6.8 to v10.7.x
Click Delete.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Mac OS
76
Related Information
&“Available Paper and Capacities” on page 355
&“List of Paper Type” on page 36
&“Menu Options for Print Settings” on page 78
Menu Options for the Printer Driver
Open the print window in an application, select the printer, and then access the printer driver window.
Note:
Menus vary depending on the option you selected.
Menu Options for Layout
Pages per Sheet:
Select the number of pages to be printed on one sheet.
Layout Direction:
Specify the order in which the pages will be printed.
Border:
Prints a border around the pages.
Reverse page orientation:
Rotates pages 180 degrees before printing. Select this item when printing on paper such as envelopes
that are loaded in xed direction in the printer.
Flip horizontally:
Inverts an image to print as it would appear in a mirror.
Menu Options for Color Matching
ColorSync/EPSON Color Controls:
Select the method for color adjustment. ese options adjusts colors between the printer and the
computer display to minimize the dierence in color.
Menu Options for Paper Handling
Collate pages:
Prints multi-page documents collated in order and sorted into sets.
Pages to Print:
Select to print only odd pages or even pages.
Page Order:
Select to print from the top or the last page.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Mac OS
77
Scale to t paper size:
Prints to t to the paper size you loaded.
❏Destination Paper Size:
Select the paper size to print on.
❏Scale down only:
Select when reducing the size of the document.
Menu Options for Cover Page
Print Cover Page:
Select whether or not to print a cover page. When you want to add a back cover, select Aer document.
Cover Page Type:
Select the contents of the cover page.
Menu Options for Print Settings
Paper Source:
Select the paper source from which the paper is fed. Select Auto Select to automatically select the paper
source selected in the print settings on the printer.
Media Type:
Select the type of paper on which you print. If you select Auto Select (plain papers), printing is
performed from the paper source for which the paper type is set to the following in the printer's
settings.
plain papers, Preprinted, Letterhead, Color, Recycled, High quality plain paper
However, paper cannot be fed from a paper source for which the paper source is set to o in the
printer's Auto Select Settings.
Print Quality:
Select the pint quality you want to use for printing. e options vary depending on the paper type.
Grayscale:
Select when you want to print in black or shades of gray.
Mirror Image:
Inverts the image so that it prints as it would appear in a mirror.
Menu Options for Color Options
Manual Settings:
Adjusts the color manually. In Advanced Settings, you can select detailed settings.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Mac OS
78
PhotoEnhance:
Produces sharper images and more vivid colors by automatically adjusting the contrast, saturation, and
brightness of the original image data.
O (No Color Adjustment):
Print without enhancing or adjusting the color in any way.
Menu Options for Two-sided Printing Settings
Two-sided Printing:
Prints on both sides of the paper.
Adding Printing Presets for Easy Printing
If you create your own preset of frequently used print settings on the printer driver, you can print easily by
selecting the preset from the list.
1. Set each item such as Print Settings and Layout (Paper Size, Media Type, and so on).
2. Click Presets to save the current settings as a preset.
3. Click OK.
Note:
To delete an added preset, click Presets > Show Presets, select the preset name you want to delete from the list, and then
delete it.
4. Click Print.
e next time you want to print using the same settings, select the registered preset name from the Presets.
Related Information
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 75
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Mac OS
79
Printing on 2-Sides
You can print on both sides of the paper.
Note:
❏If you do not use paper that is suitable for 2-sided printing, the print quality may decline and paper jams may occur.
“Paper for 2-Sided Printing” on page 360
❏Depending on the paper and the data, ink may bleed through to the other side of the paper.
1. Select Two-sided Printing Settings from the pop-up menu.
2. Select the bindings in Two-sided Printing.
3. Select the type of original in Document Type.
Note:
❏Printing may be slow depending on the Document Type setting.
❏If you are printing high-density data such as photos or graphs, select Tex t & P hoto s or Text & Grap hics as the
Document Type setting. If scung occurs or the image bleeds through to the reverse side, adjust the print density
and ink drying time by clicking the arrow mark next to Adjustments.
4. Set the other items as necessary.
5. Click Print.
Related Information
&“Available Paper and Capacities” on page 355
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 75
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Mac OS
80
Printing Several Pages on One Sheet
You can print several pages of data on a single sheet of paper.
1. Select Layout from the pop-up menu.
2. Set the number of pages in Pages per Sheet, the Layout Direction (page order), and Border.
“Menu Options for Layout” on page 77
3. Set the other items as necessary.
4. Click Print.
Related Information
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 75
Printing to Fit the Paper Size
Select the paper size you loaded in the printer as the Destination Paper Size setting.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Mac OS
81
1. Select the size of the paper you set in the application as the Paper Size setting.
2. Select Paper Handling from the pop-up menu.
3. Select Scale to t paper size.
4. Select the paper size you loaded in the printer as the Destination Paper Size setting.
5. Set the other items as necessary.
6. Click Print.
Related Information
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 75
Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document at any Magnication
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a document by a specic percentage.
1. Select Print from the File menu or another command to access the print dialog.
2. Select Page Setup from the File menu of the application.
3. Select Printer, Paper Size, enter percentage in Scale, and then click OK.
Note:
Select the paper size you set in the application as the Paper Size setting.
4. Set the other items as necessary.
5. Click Print.
Related Information
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing from a Computer - Mac OS
82
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 75
Adjusting the Print Color
You can adjust the colors used in the print job. ese adjustments are not applied to the original data.
PhotoEnhance produces sharper images and more vivid colors by automatically adjusting the contrast, saturation,
and brightness of the original image data.
Note:
PhotoEnhance adjusts the color by analyzing the location of the subject. erefore, if you have changed the location of the
subject by reducing, enlarging, cropping, or rotating the image, the color may change unexpectedly. If the image is out of
focus, the tone may be unnatural. If the color is changed or becomes unnatural, print in a mode other than PhotoEnhance.
1. Select Color Matching from the pop-up menu, and then select EPSON Color Controls.
2. Select Color Options from the pop-up menu, and then select one of the available options.
3. Click the arrow next to Advanced Settings and make the appropriate settings.
4. Set the other items as necessary.
5. Click Print.
Related Information
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 75
Printing Using a PostScript Printer Driver - Mac OS X
1. Load paper in the printer.
2. Open the le you want to print.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing Using a PostScript Printer Driver - Mac OS X
83
3. Access the print dialog.
4. Make the following settings.
❏Printer: Select your printer.
❏Paper Size: Select the paper size you loaded in the printer.
❏Orientation: Select the orientation you set in the application.
5. Select Paper Feed from the pop-up menu, and then select the paper source in which you loaded the paper.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing Using a PostScript Printer Driver - Mac OS X
84
6. Select Printer Features from the pop-up menu, select Quality as the Feature Sets setting, and then select the
type of paper you loaded as the MediaType setting.
7. Select Color as the Feature Sets setting, and then select the setting for Color Mode.
8. Click Print.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing Using a PostScript Printer Driver - Mac OS X
85
Related Information
&“Available Paper and Capacities” on page 355
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“List of Paper Type” on page 36
&“Menu Options for Printer Features” on page 87
Menu Options for the PostScript Printer Driver
Open the print window on an application, select the printer, and then access the printer driver window.
Note:
Menus vary depending on the option you selected.
Menu Options for Layout
Pages per Sheet:
Select the number of pages to be printed on one sheet.
Layout Direction:
Specify the order in which the pages will be printed.
Border:
Prints a border around the pages.
Two-Sided:
Allows you to perform 2-sided printing.
Reverse page orientation:
Rotates pages 180 degrees before printing.
Flip horizontally:
Inverts the image so that it prints as it would appear in a mirror.
Menu Options for Color Matching
ColorSync/In Printer:
Select the method for color adjustment. ese options adjusts color between the printer and the
computer display to minimize the dierence in color.
Menu Options for Paper Handling
Collate pages:
Prints multi-page documents collated in order and sorted into sets.
Pages to Print:
Select to print only odd pages or even pages.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing Using a PostScript Printer Driver - Mac OS X
86
Page Order:
Select to print from the top or the last page.
Scale to t paper size:
Prints to t to the paper size you loaded.
Destination Paper Size:
Select the paper size to print on.
Scale down only:
Select when reducing the size of the document.
Menu Options for Paper Feed
Select the paper source from which the paper is fed.
All Pages From:
Selecting Auto Select selects the paper source that matches the Paper Setting on the printer
automatically.
First Page From/Remaining From:
You can also select the paper source for page.
Menu Options for Cover Page
Print Cover Page:
Select whether or not to print a cover page. When you want to add a back cover, select Aer
document.
Cover Page Type:
Select the contents of the cover page.
Menu Options for Printer Features
Feature Sets:
Quality:
MediaType:
Select the type of paper on which you print. If you select Unspecied, printing is
performed from the paper source for which the paper type is set to the following in the
printer's settings.
plain papers, Preprinted, Letterhead, Color, Recycled, High quality plain paper
However, paper cannot be fed from a paper source for which the paper source is set to
o in the printer's Auto Select Settings.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing Using a PostScript Printer Driver - Mac OS X
87
Print Quality:
Select the pint quality you want to use for printing.
Color:
Color Mode:
Select whether to print in color or in monochrome.
Press Simulation:
You can select a CMYK ink color to simulate when you print by reproducing the CMYK
ink color of the oset press.
Others:
Ink Save Mode:
Conserves ink by reducing the print density.
Printing PDF Files from a Memory Device
You can print PDF les from a memory device connected to the printer.
1. Connect the memory device to the printer's external interface USB port.
“Inserting an External USB Device” on page 45
2. Select Memory Device on the home screen.
3. Select PDF.
4. Select the le, and then proceed to the next screen.
5. Tap x.
PDF Settings
You can make print settings for PDF format les on your memory devices.
(Display order) :
Select a sort setting to display the les on the LCD screen.
Basic Settings:
❏Paper Setting
Specify the paper source settings which you want to print on.
❏Color Mode
Select a color setting whether you normally print in B&W or Color.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing PDF Files from a Memory Device
88
Advanced:
❏2-Sided
Select On to print PDF les using 2-Sided printing. You can also select the binding method by
selecting Binding(Copy).
❏Print Order
Select the order for printing multi-page PDF les.
Printing Documents from Smart Devices (iOS)
You can print documents from a smart device such as a smartphone or tablet.
Printing Documents Using Epson iPrint
Note:
Operations may dier depending on the device.
1. Connect your printer and your smart device using Wi-Fi Direct.
“Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi-Fi Direct)” on page 297
2. If Epson iPrint is not installed, install it.
“Installing Epson iPrint” on page 368
3. Start Epson iPrint.
4. Tap Document on the home screen.
5. Tap the location of the document you want to print.
6. Select the document, and then tap Next.
7. Tap Print.
Printing Documents Using AirPrint
AirPrint enables instant wireless printing from iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, and Mac without the need to install
drivers or download soware.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing Documents from Smart Devices (iOS)
89
Note:
If you disabled paper conguration messages on your printer control panel, you cannot use AirPrint. See the link below to
enable the messages, if necessary.
1. Set up your printer for wireless printing. See the link below.
http://epson.sn
2. Connect your Apple device to the same wireless network that your printer is using.
3. Print from your device to your printer.
Note:
For details, see the AirPrint page on the Apple website.
Related Information
&“Cannot Print Even ough a Connection has been Established (iOS)” on page 223
Printing Documents from Smart Devices (Android)
You can print documents from a smart device such as a smartphone or tablet.
Printing Documents Using Epson iPrint
Note:
Operations may dier depending on the device.
1. Connect your printer and your smart device using Wi-Fi Direct.
“Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi-Fi Direct)” on page 297
2. If Epson iPrint is not installed, install it.
“Installing Epson iPrint” on page 368
3. Start Epson iPrint.
4. Tap Document on the home screen.
5. Tap the location of the document you want to print.
6. Select the document, and then tap Next.
7. Tap Print.
Printing
>
Printing Documents
>
Printing Documents from Smart Devices (Android)
90
Printing Documents Using Epson Print Enabler
You can wirelessly print your documents, emails, photos, and web pages right from your Android phone or tablet
(Android v4.4 or later). With a few taps, your Android device will discover an Epson printer that is connected to
the same wireless network.
Note:
Operations may dier depending on the device.
1. Connect your printer and your smart device using Wi-Fi Direct.
“Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi-Fi Direct)” on page 297
2. On your Android device, install the Epson Print Enabler plug-in from Google Play.
3. Go to Settings on your Android device, select Printing, and then enable Epson Print Enabler.
4. From an Android application such as Chrome, tap the menu icon and print whatever is on the screen.
Note:
If you do not see your printer, tap All Printers and select your printer.
Printing on Envelopes
Printing on Envelopes from a Computer (Windows)
1. Load envelopes in the printer.
“Loading Envelopes” on page 38
2. Open the le you want to print.
3. Access the printer driver window.
4. Select the envelope size from Document Size on the Main tab, and then select Envelope from Paper Type.
5. Set the other items on the Main and More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
6. Click Print.
Printing on Envelopes from a Computer (Mac OS)
1. Load envelopes in the printer.
“Loading Envelopes” on page 38
2. Open the le you want to print.
3. Select Print from the File menu or another command to access the print dialog.
Printing
>
Printing on Envelopes
>
Printing on Envelopes from a Computer (Mac OS)
91
4. Select the size as the Paper Size setting.
5. Select Print Settings from the pop-up menu.
6. Select Envelope as the Media Type setting.
7. Set the other items as necessary.
8. Click Print.
Printing Photos
Printing JPEG Files from a Memory Device
You can print JPEG les from a memory device connected to the printer.
1. Connect the memory device to the printer's external interface USB port.
“Inserting an External USB Device” on page 45
2. Select Memory Device on the home screen.
3. Select JPEG.
4. Select the le, and then proceed to the next screen.
5. Tap
x
.
JPEG Settings
(Options) :
Make settings for ordering, selecting, and deselecting image data.
Basic Settings:
❏Paper Setting
Specify the paper source settings which you want to print on.
❏Color Mode
Select a color setting whether you normally print in B&W or Color.
Advanced:
❏Layout
Select how to layout the JPEG les. 1-up is for printing one le per sheet. 20-up is for printing 20
les on one sheet. Index is for making index printing with information.
Printing
>
Printing Photos
>
Printing JPEG Files from a Memory Device
92
❏Fit Frame
Select On to crop the image to t into the selected print layout automatically. If the aspect ratio of
the image data and the paper size is dierent, the image is automatically enlarged or reduced so that
the short sides match the short sides of the paper. e long side of the image is cropped if it extends
beyond the long side of the paper. is feature may not work for panorama photos.
❏Quality
Select Best for higher quality printing, but the printing speed may be slower.
❏Date
Select the format of the date the photo was taken or saved. e date is not printed for some layouts.
❏Fix Photo
Select this mode to improve the brightness, contrast, and saturation of the photo automatically. To
turn o automatic improvement, select Enhance O.
❏Fix Red-Eye
Select On to automatically x the red-eye eect in photos. Corrections are not applied to the
original le, only to the printouts. Depending on the type of photo, parts of the image other than the
eyes may be corrected.
Printing TIFF Files from a Memory Device
You can print TIFF les from a memory device connected to the printer.
1. Connect the memory device to the printer's external interface USB port.
“Inserting an External USB Device” on page 45
2. Select Memory Device on the home screen.
3. Select TIFF.
4. Select the le, and then proceed to the next screen.
5. Tap
x
.
TIFF Settings
You can make print settings for TIFF format les in you memory devices.
(Display order) :
Changes the order of the les.
Basic Settings:
❏Paper Setting
Specify the paper source settings which you want to print on.
❏Color Mode
Select a color setting whether you normally print in B&W or Color.
Printing
>
Printing Photos
>
Printing TIFF Files from a Memory Device
93
Advanced:
❏Layout
Select how to layout the Multi-TIFF le. 1-up is for printing one page per sheet. 20-up is for printing
20 pages on one sheet. Index is for making index printing with information.
❏Fit Frame
Select On to crop the photo to t into the selected photo layout automatically. If the aspect ratio of
the image data and the paper size is dierent, the image is automatically enlarged or reduced so that
the short sides match the short sides of the paper. e long side of the image is cropped if it extends
beyond the long side of the paper. is feature may not work for panorama photos.
❏Quality
Select Best for higher quality printing, but the printing speed may be slower.
❏Print Order
Select the order for printing multi-page TIFF les.
❏Date
Select the format of the date the photo was taken or saved. e date is not printed for some layouts.
Printing Web Pages
Printing Web Pages from a Computer
1. Select the printing method from the E-Web Print Toolbar.
❏Print: Print the entire web page to t on the paper.
❏Clip: Print only the area you selected.
2. Make the print settings, and then click the Print button.
Printing Web Pages from Smart Devices
Note:
Operations may dier depending on the device.
1. Connect your printer and your smart device using Wi-Fi Direct.
“Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi-Fi Direct)” on page 297
2. If Epson iPrint is not installed, install it.
“Installing Epson iPrint” on page 368
3. Open the web page you want to print in your web browser app.
4. Tap Share from the menu of the web browser application.
5. Select iPrint.
Printing
>
Printing Web Pages
>
Printing Web Pages from Smart Devices
94
6. Tap Print.
Printing Using a Cloud Service
By using Epson Connect service available on the Internet, you can print from your smart phone, tablet PC, or
laptop, anytime and practically anywhere. To use this service, you need to register the user and the printer in
Epson Connect.
e features available on the Internet are as follows.
❏Email Print
When you send an email with attachments such as documents or images to an email address assigned to the
printer, you can print that email and the attachments from remote locations such as your home or oce printer.
❏Epson iPrint
is Application is for iOS and Android, and allows you to print or scan from a smart phone or tablet. You can
print documents, images, and web sites by sending them directly to a printer on the same wireless LAN.
❏Remote Print Driver
is is a shared driver supported by Remote Print Driver. When printing using a printer in a remote location,
you can print by changing the printer on the usual applications window.
See the Epson Connect web portal for details on how to setup or print.
https://www.epsonconnect.com/
http://www.epsonconnect.eu (Europe only)
Registering to Epson Connect Service from the Control Panel
Follow the steps below to register the printer.
Printing
>
Printing Using a Cloud Service
>
Registering to Epson Connect Service from the Control Panel
95
1. Select Settings on the control panel.
2. Select General Settings > Web Service Settings > Epson Connect Services > Unregister to print the
registration sheet.
3. Follow the instructions on the registration sheet to register the printer.
Printing
>
Printing Using a Cloud Service
>
Registering to Epson Connect Service from the Control Panel
96
Available Copying Methods
Place the originals on the scanner glass or the ADF, and then select the Copy menu on the home screen.
Copying Originals
You can copy the originals of xed size or custom size by color or monochrome.
1. Place the originals.
“Placing Originals” on page 41
2. Select Copy on the home screen.
3. Select the Basic Settings tab, and then select Auto or Color, B&W.
4. Tap
x
.
Copying on 2-Sides
Copy multiple originals on both sides of the paper.
Copying
>
Available Copying Methods
>
Copying on 2-Sides
98
1. Place all originals face up in the ADF.
c
Important:
If you want to copy originals that are not supported by the ADF, use the scanner glass.
“Originals that are not Supported by the ADF” on page 43
Note:
You can also place the originals on the scanner glass.
“Placing Originals” on page 41
2. Select Copy on the home screen.
3. Select the Basic Settings tab, select 2-Sided, and then select 2→2-Sided or 1→2-Sided
4. Specify other settings such as the original orientation and the binding position.
5. Tap
x
.
Copying by Enlarging or Reducing
You can copy originals at a specied magnication.
1. Place the originals.
“Placing Originals” on page 41
2. Select Copy on the home screen.
3. Select the Basic Settings tab, and then select Reduce/Enlarge.
4. Specify the amount of enlargement or reduction.
5. Tap
x
.
Copying
>
Available Copying Methods
>
Copying by Enlarging or Reducing
99
Copying Multiple Originals onto One Sheet
You can copy the multiple originals onto a single sheet.
1. Place all originals face up in the ADF.
Place them in the direction shown in the illustration.
❏Readable Direction
❏Le Direction
c
Important:
If you want to copy originals that are not supported by the ADF, use the scanner glass.
“Originals that are not Supported by the ADF” on page 43
Note:
You can also place the originals on the scanner glass.
“Placing Originals” on page 41
2. Select Copy on the home screen.
3. Select the Advanced tab, select Multi-Page, and then select 2-up or 4-up.
Copying
>
Available Copying Methods
>
Copying Multiple Originals onto One Sheet
100
4. Specify the layout order and the original orientation.
5. Tap
x
.
Copying in Page Order
When making multiple copies of a multi-page document, you can discharge one copy at a time in page order.
1. Place the originals.
“Placing Originals” on page 41
2. Select Copy on the home screen.
3. Select the Advanced tab, and then select Finishing > Collate (Page Order).
4. Tap
x
.
Copying Originals Using Good Quality
You can copy originals without shadows and punched holes.
1. Place the originals.
“Placing Originals” on page 41
2. Select Copy on the home screen.
3. Select the Advanced tab, and then enable Remove Shadow or Remove Punch Holes or adjust the image
quality in Image Quality.
4. Tap
x
.
Copying
>
Available Copying Methods
>
Copying Originals Using Good Quality
101
Copying ID card
Scans both sides of an ID card and copies onto one side of a paper.
1. Place the originals.
“Placing Originals” on page 41
2. Select Copy on the home screen.
3. Select the Advanced tab, select ID Card Copy, and then enable the setting.
4. Specify the Orientation (Original).
5. Tap
x
.
Copying Books
Copies two facing pages of a book and so on onto separate sheets of paper.
1. Place the original on the scanner glass.
“Placing Originals” on page 41
2. Select Copy on the home screen.
3. Select the Advanced tab, select Book->2 Pages, and then enable the setting.
4. Specify Scan Order.
5. Tap
x
.
Copying
>
Available Copying Methods
>
Copying Books
102
Copying Bar Codes Clearly
You can copy a bar code clearly and make it easy to scan. Only enable this feature if the bar code you printed
cannot be scanned.
You can use this feature with the following paper types.
❏Plain paper
❏Preprinted paper
❏Letterhead
❏Color paper
❏Recycled paper
❏ick paper
❏Envelope
❏Epson Bright White Ink Jet Paper
❏Epson Business Paper
1. Place the originals.
“Placing Originals” on page 41
2. Select Copy on the home screen.
3. Select the Basic Settings tab, and then select Original Type > Barcode.
4. Tap
x
.
Basic Menu Options for Copying
Note:
e items may not be available depending on other settings you made.
Color Mode:
Select whether to copy in color or in monochrome.
Copying
>
Basic Menu Options for Copying
103
❏Auto
Detects whether the original is color or monochrome, and automatically copies using the most
suitable color mode.
Depending on the original, monochrome originals may be detected as colored, or colored originals
as monochrome. If auto detection is not operating correctly, copy by selecting Color or B&W as
the color mode, or set the detection sensitivity. You can set the sensitivity by selecting Settings on
the home screen > General Settings > System Administration > Copy Color Sensitivity.
❏Color
Copies the original in color.
❏B&W
Copies the original in black and white (monochrome).
Density:
Increase the level of density when the copying results are faint. Decrease the level of density when ink
smears.
Paper Setting:
Select the paper source that you want to use. When Auto is selected, a suitable size is fed
automatically depending on the auto detected original size and the specied magnication ratio.
Reduce/Enlarge:
Congures the magnication ratio of the enlargement or reduction. Tap the value and specify the
magnication used to enlarge or reduce the original within a range of 25 to 400%.
❏Auto
Detects the scan area and automatically enlarges or reduces the original to t to the paper size you
selected. When there are white margins around the original, the white margins from the corner
mark ( ) of the scanner glass are detected as the scan area, but the margins at the opposite side
may be cropped.
❏Reduce to Fit Paper
Copies the scanned image at a smaller size than the Reduce/Enlarge value to t within the paper
size. If the Reduce/Enlarge value is larger than the paper size, data may be printed beyond the
edges of the paper.
❏Actual Size
Copies at 100 % magnication.
Copying
>
Basic Menu Options for Copying
104
❏A3→A4 and others
Automatically enlarges or reduces the original to t to a specic paper size.
Original Type:
Select the type of your original. Copies in optimal quality to match the type of original.
2-Sided:
Select 2-sided layout.
❏1→1-Sided
Copies one side of an original onto a single side of paper.
❏2→2-Sided
Copies both sides of a double-sided original onto both sides of a single sheet of paper. Select the
orientation of your original and the binding position of the original and the paper.
❏1→2-Sided
Copies two single-sided originals onto both sides of a single sheet of paper. Select the orientation
of your original and the binding position of the paper.
❏2→1-Sided
Copies both sides of a double-sided original onto one side of two sheets of paper. Select the
orientation of your original and the binding position of the original.
Advanced Menu Options for Copying
Note:
e items may not be available depending on other settings you made.
Multi-Page:
Select the copy layout.
❏Single Page
Copies a single-sided original onto a single sheet.
❏2-up
Copies two single-sided originals onto a single sheet in 2-up layout. Select the layout order and the
orientation of your original.
❏4-up
Copies four single-sided originals onto a single sheet in 4-up layout. Select the layout order and
the orientation of your original.
Original Size:
Select the size of your original. When you select Auto Detect, the size of your original is
automatically detected. When copying non-standard size originals, select User-Dened, and then
specify the original size.
Finishing:
Select how to eject the paper for multiple copies of multiple originals.
Copying
>
Advanced Menu Options for Copying
105
❏Group (Same Pages)
Copies the originals by page as a group.
❏Collate (Page Order)
Copies the originals collated in order and sorted into sets.
Mixed Size Originals:
You can place the following combination of sizes in the ADF at the same time. A3 and A4; B4 and B5.
When using these combinations, originals are copied at the actual size of the originals. Place your
originals by aligning the width of the originals as shown below.
Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of your original.
Book->2 Pages:
Copies two facing pages of a booklet onto separate sheets of paper.
Select which page of a booklet to scan.
Continuous Scanning:
You can place a large number of originals in the ADF in batches, and scan them as a single scaninng
job.
Image Quality:
Adjust image settings.
❏Contrast
Adjust the dierence between the bright and dark parts.
❏Saturation
Adjust the vividness of the colors.
❏Red Balance, Green Balance, Blue Balance
Adjust the density for each color.
Copying
>
Advanced Menu Options for Copying
106
❏Sharpness
Adjust the outline of the image.
❏Hue Regulation
Adjust the color tone of the skin. Tap + to make it cold (increase green) and tap - to make it warm
(increase red).
❏Remove Background
Adjust the density of the background color. Tap + to make it bright (white) and tap - to make it
dark (black).
Binding Margin:
Select such as the binding position, margin, and orientation of your original.
Reduce to Fit Paper:
Copies the scanned image at a smaller size than the Reduce/Enlarge value to t within the paper size.
If the Reduce/Enlarge value is larger than the paper size, data may be printed beyond the edges of the
paper.
Remove Shadow:
Removes shadows that appear around copies when copying thick paper or that appear in the center of
copies when copying a booklet.
Remove Punch Holes:
Removes the binding holes when copying.
ID Card Copy:
Scans both sides of an ID card and copies onto one side of a paper.
Copying
>
Advanced Menu Options for Copying
107
Scanning
Available Scanning Methods.........................................109
Scanning Originals to a Network Folder.................................109
Scanning Originals to an Email.......................................113
Scanning Originals to a Computer.....................................116
Scanning Originals to a Memory Device.................................117
Scanning Originals to the Cloud...................................... 119
Scanning Using WSD.............................................. 121
Scanning Originals to a Smart Device...................................123
Available Scanning Methods
You can use any of the following methods to scan using this printer.
Scanning to a Network Folder
You can save the scanned image to a pre-congured folder on a network.
“Scanning Originals to a Network Folder” on page 109
Scanning to an Email
You can send scanned image les by email directly from the printer through a pre-congured email
server.
“Scanning Originals to an Email” on page 113
Scanning to a Computer
You can save the scanned image to a computer connected to the printer.
“Scanning Originals to a Computer” on page 116
Scanning to a Memory Device
You can save scanned images directly to a memory device inserted into the printer.
“Scanning Originals to a Memory Device” on page 117
Sending to a Cloud Service
You can send scanned images from the printer's control panel to cloud services that have been
registered in advance.
“Scanning Originals to the Cloud” on page 119
Scanning Using WSD
You can save the scanned image to a computer connected to the printer, using WSD feature.
“Scanning Using WSD” on page 121
Scanning Directly from Smart Devices
You can save scanned images directly to a smart device such as a smart phone or tablet by using the
Epson iPrint application on the smart device.
“Scanning Originals to a Smart Device” on page 123
Scanning Originals to a Network Folder
Check the following before scanning.
❏Make sure that a network folder is prepared. See the following when creating a shared folder on a network.
“Creating the Shared Folder” on page 451
❏Register a network folder path in your contacts in advance to easily specify the folder.
“Making Contacts Available” on page 467
Scanning
>
Scanning Originals to a Network Folder
109
Note:
Make sure the printer's Date/Time and Time Dierence settings are correct. Access the menus from Settings > General
Settings > Basic Settings > Date/Time Settings.
1. Place the originals.
“Placing Originals” on page 41
2. Select Scan > Network Folder/FTP on the control panel.
3. Specify the destination.
“Destination Menu Options for Scanning to a Folder” on page 110
Note:
You can print the history of the folder in which documents are saved, by selecting .
4. Select Scan Settings, and then check settings such as the save format, and change them if necessary.
“Scan Menu Options for Scanning to a Folder” on page 111
Note:
Select to save your settings as a preset.
5. Tap
x
.
Destination Menu Options for Scanning to a Folder
Keyboard:
Open the Edit Location screen. Enter the folder path and set each item on the screen.
Edit Location:
Enter the folder path and set each item on the screen.
❏Communication Mode:
Select the communication mode for the folder.
❏Location (Required):
Enter a folder path in which to save the scanned image.
Selecting the Browse searches a folder on computers connected to the network. You can use the
Browse only when Communication Mode is set to SMB.
❏User Name:
Enter a user name to log on to the specied folder.
❏Password:
Enter a password corresponding to the user name.
❏Connection Mode:
Select the connection mode for the folder.
❏Port Number:
Enter a port number for the folder.
Scanning
>
Scanning Originals to a Network Folder
>
Destination Menu Options for Scanning to a Folder
110
❏Proxy Server Settings:
Select whether or not to use a proxy server.
Contacts:
Select a destination from the contacts list.
You can search for a contact from the contacts list. Enter the search keyword into the box at the top of
the screen.
Scan Menu Options for Scanning to a Folder
Note:
e items may not be available depending on other settings you made.
Color Mode:
Select whether to scan in color or in monochrome.
File Format:
Select the format in which to save the scanned image.
When you select PDF, PDF/A, or TIFF as the le format, select whether to save all originals as one le
(multi-page) or save each original separately (single page).
❏Compression Ratio:
Select how much to compress the scanned image.
❏PDF Settings:
When you have selected PDF as the save format setting, use these settings to protect PDF les.
To create a PDF le that requires a password when opening, set Document Open Password. To
create a PDF le that requires a password when printing or editing, set Permissions Password.
Resolution:
Select the scanning resolution.
2-Sided:
Scan both sides of the original.
❏Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
❏Binding(Original):
Select the binding direction of the original.
Scan Area:
Select the scan area. To scan at the maximum area of the scanner glass, select Max Area.
❏Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
Original Type:
Select the type of your original.
Scanning
>
Scanning Originals to a Network Folder
>
Scan Menu Options for Scanning to a Folder
111
Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
Mixed Size Originals:
You can place the following combination of sizes in the ADF at the same time. A3 and A4; B4 and B5.
When using these combinations, originals are scanned at the actual size of the originals. Place your
originals by aligning the width of the originals as shown below.
Density:
Select the contrast of the scanned image.
Remove Shadow:
Remove the shadows of the original that appear in the scanned image.
❏Frame:
Remove the shadows at the edge of the original.
❏Center:
Remove the shadows of the binding margin of the booklet.
Remove Punch Holes:
Remove the punch holes that appear in the scanned image. You can specify the area to erase the
punch holes by entering a value in the box on the right.
❏Erasing Position:
Select the position to remove the punch holes.
❏Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
Continuous Scan(ADF):
You can place a large number of originals in the ADF in batches, and scan them as a single scanning
job.
File Name:
❏Filename Prex:
Enter a prex for the name of the images in alphanumeric characters and symbols.
❏Add Date:
Add the date to the le name.
❏Add Time:
Add the time to the le name.
Scanning
>
Scanning Originals to a Network Folder
>
Scan Menu Options for Scanning to a Folder
112
Scanning Originals to an Email
You need to setup the following before scanning.
❏Congure the email server.
“Conguring a Mail Server” on page 447
❏Register an email address in your contacts in advance so that you can easily specify the address by selecting it
from your contacts.
❏Make sure the printer's Date/Time and Time Dierence settings are correct. Access the menus from Settings >
General Settings > Basic Settings > Date/Time Settings.
1. Place the originals.
“Placing Originals” on page 41
2. Select Scan > Email on the control panel.
3. Specify the recipient.
“Recipient Menu Options for Scanning to an Email” on page 113
Note:
❏e number of recipients you selected is displayed on the right of the screen. You can send emails to up to 10
addresses and groups.
If groups is included in recipients, you can select up to 200 individual addresses in total, taking addresses in the
groups into account.
❏Select the address box at the top of the screen to display the list of selected addresses.
❏Select to display or print the sending history, or change the email server settings.
4. Select Scan Settings, and then check settings such as the save format, and change them if necessary.
“Scan Menu Options for Scanning to an Email” on page 114
Note:
Select to save your settings as a preset.
5. Tap
x
.
Recipient Menu Options for Scanning to an Email
Keyboard:
Enter the email address manually.
Contacts:
Select a destination from the contacts list.
You can search for a contact from the contacts list. Enter the search keyword into the box at the top of
the screen.
History:
Select the address from the history list.
Scanning
>
Scanning Originals to an Email
>
Recipient Menu Options for Scanning to an Email
113
Scan Menu Options for Scanning to an Email
Note:
e items may not be available depending on other settings you made.
Color Mode:
Select whether to scan in color or in monochrome.
File Format:
Select the format in which to save the scanned image.
When you select PDF, PDF/A, or TIFF as the le format, select whether to save all originals as one le
(multi-page) or save each original separately (single page).
❏Compression Ratio:
Select how much to compress the scanned image.
❏PDF Settings:
When you have selected PDF as the save format setting, use these settings to protect PDF les.
To create a PDF le that requires a password when opening, set Document Open Password. To
create a PDF le that requires a password when printing or editing, set Permissions Password.
Resolution:
Select the scanning resolution.
2-Sided:
Scan both sides of the original.
❏Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
❏Binding(Original):
Select the binding direction of the original.
Scan Area:
Select the scan area. To scan at the maximum area of the scanner glass, select Max Area.
❏Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
Original Type:
Select the type of your original.
Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
Scanning
>
Scanning Originals to an Email
>
Scan Menu Options for Scanning to an Email
114
Mixed Size Originals:
You can place the following combination of sizes in the ADF at the same time. A3 and A4; B4 and B5.
When using these combinations, originals are scanned at the actual size of the originals. Place your
originals by aligning the width of the originals as shown below.
Density:
Select the contrast of the scanned image.
Remove Shadow:
Remove the shadows of the original that appear in the scanned image.
❏Frame:
Remove the shadows at the edge of the original.
❏Center:
Remove the shadows of the binding margin of the booklet.
Remove Punch Holes:
Remove the punch holes that appear in the scanned image. You can specify the area to erase the
punch holes by entering a value in the box on the right.
❏Erasing Position:
Select the position to remove the punch holes.
❏Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
Continuous Scan(ADF):
You can place a large number of originals in the ADF in batches, and scan them as a single scanning
job.
Subject:
Enter a subject for the email in alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Attached File Max Size:
Select the maximum le size that can be attached to the email.
File Name:
❏Filename Prex:
Enter a prex for the name of the images in alphanumeric characters and symbols.
❏Add Date:
Add the date to the le name.
❏Add Time:
Add the time to the le name.
Scanning
>
Scanning Originals to an Email
>
Scan Menu Options for Scanning to an Email
115
Mail Encryption:
Encrypt emails when sending.
Digital Signature:
Add a digital signature to emails.
Scanning Originals to a Computer
You can save the scanned image to a computer connected over a network.
e method of saving images is registered as a job in Document Capture Pro installed on your computer. Preset
jobs are available that allow you to save scanned images to a computer. You can also create and register new jobs
using Document Capture Pro on your computer.
Note:
You need to setup the following before scanning.
❏Install the following applications on your computer.
❏Document Capture Pro
❏Epson Scan 2 (application required to use the scanner feature)
See the following to check for installed applications.
Windows 10: Click on the start button, and then select Windows System-Control Panel-Programs-Programs and
Features.
Windows 8.1/Windows 8: Select Desktop-Settings-Control Panel-Programs-Programs and Features.
Windows 7: Click the start button, and then select Control Panel-Programs-Programs and Features
Mac OS: Select Go > Applications > Epson Soware.
❏Connect the printer and the computer over a network.
❏If you are using Windows Server, make the settings on the control panel.
1. Place the originals.
“Placing Originals” on page 41
2. Select Scan > Computer on the control panel.
3. Select Select Computer., and then select the computer on which Document Capture Pro is installed.
Note:
❏e printer's control panel displays up to 100 computers on which Document Capture Pro is installed.
❏If Server Mode is set as the operation mode, you do not need to perform this step.
4. Select Select Job., and then select the job.
Note:
If you have set only one job, you do not need to select the job. Proceed to the next step.
5. Select the area in which the job content is displayed, and then check the job details.
6. Tap
x
.
Document Capture Pro automatically starts on your computer, and scanning starts.
Scanning
>
Scanning Originals to a Computer
116
Note:
❏See the Document Capture Pro help for details on using the features, such as creating and registering new jobs.
❏You can not only start scanning from the printer but also from your computer by using Document Capture Pro. See
the Document Capture Pro help for details.
Related Information
&“Application for Scanning Documents(Document Capture Pro)” on page 368
&“Installing the Applications Separately” on page 179
&“Using Document Capture Pro Server” on page 479
Scanning Originals to a Memory Device
1. Place the originals.
“Placing Originals” on page 41
2. Insert a memory device into the printer.
“Inserting an External USB Device” on page 45
3. Select Scan > Memory Device on the control panel.
4. Make the scan settings.
“Basic Menu Options for Scanning to a Memory Device” on page 117
“Advanced Menu Options for Scanning to a Memory Device” on page 118
Note:
Select to save your settings as a preset.
5. Tap
x
.
Basic Menu Options for Scanning to a Memory Device
Note:
e items may not be available depending on other settings you made.
B&W/Color
Select whether to scan in monochrome or in color.
File Format:
Select the format in which to save the scanned image.
When you select PDF, PDF/A, or TIFF as the le format, select whether to save all originals as one le
(multi-page) or save each original separately (single page).
❏Compression Ratio:
Select how much to compress the scanned image.
Scanning
>
Scanning Originals to a Memory Device
>
Basic Menu Options for Scanning to a Memory Device
117
❏PDF Settings:
When you have selected PDF as the save format setting, use these settings to protect PDF les.
To create a PDF le that requires a password when opening, set Document Open Password. To
create a PDF le that requires a password when printing or editing, set Permissions Password.
Resolution:
Select the scanning resolution.
2-Sided:
Scan both sides of the original.
❏Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
❏Binding(Original):
Select the binding direction of the original.
Scan Area:
Select the scan area. To scan at the maximum area of the scanner glass, select Max Area.
❏Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
Original Type:
Select the type of your original.
Advanced Menu Options for Scanning to a Memory Device
Note:
e items may not be available depending on other settings you made.
Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
Mixed Size Originals:
You can place the following combination of sizes in the ADF at the same time. A3 and A4; B4 and B5.
When using these combinations, originals are scanned at the actual size of the originals. Place your
originals by aligning the width of the originals as shown below.
Density:
Select the contrast of the scanned image.
Remove Shadow:
Remove the shadows of the original that appear in the scanned image.
Scanning
>
Scanning Originals to a Memory Device
>
Advanced Menu Options for Scanning to a Memory Device
118
❏Frame:
Remove the shadows at the edge of the original.
❏Center:
Remove the shadows of the binding margin of the booklet.
Remove Punch Holes:
Remove the punch holes that appear in the scanned image. You can specify the area to erase the
punch holes by entering a value in the box on the right.
❏Erasing Position:
Select the position to remove the punch holes.
❏Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
Continuous Scan(ADF):
You can place a large number of originals in the ADF in batches, and scan them as a single scanning
job.
File Name:
❏Filename Prex:
Enter a prex for the name of the images in alphanumeric characters and symbols.
❏Add Date:
Add the date to the le name.
❏Add Time:
Add the time to the le name.
Scanning Originals to the Cloud
Before using this feature, make settings using Epson Connect. See the following Epson Connect portal website for
details.
https://www.epsonconnect.com/
http://www.epsonconnect.eu (Europe only)
1. Place the originals.
“Placing Originals” on page 41
2. Select Scan > Cloud on the control panel.
3. Select on the top of the screen, and then select a destination.
4. Make the scan settings.
“Basic Menu Options for Scanning to the Cloud” on page 120
“Advanced Menu Options for Scanning to the Cloud” on page 120
Scanning
>
Scanning Originals to the Cloud
119
Note:
Select to save your settings as a preset.
5. Tap
x
.
Basic Menu Options for Scanning to the Cloud
Note:
e items may not be available depending on other settings you made.
B&W/Color
Select whether to scan in monochrome or in color.
File Format:
Select the format in which to save the scanned image.
When you select PDF as the le format, select whether to save all originals as one le (multi-page) or
save each original separately (single page).
2-Sided:
Scan both sides of the original.
❏Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
❏Binding(Original):
Select the binding direction of the original.
Scan Area:
Select the scan area. To scan at the maximum area of the scanner glass, select Max Area.
❏Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
Advanced Menu Options for Scanning to the Cloud
Note:
e items may not be available depending on other settings you made.
Original Type:
Select the type of your original.
Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
Density:
Select the contrast of the scanned image.
Scanning
>
Scanning Originals to the Cloud
>
Advanced Menu Options for Scanning to the Cloud
120
Remove Shadow:
Remove the shadows of the original that appear in the scanned image.
❏Frame:
Remove the shadows at the edge of the original.
❏Center:
Remove the shadows of the binding margin of the booklet.
Remove Punch Holes:
Remove the punch holes that appear in the scanned image. You can specify the area to erase the
punch holes by entering a value in the box on the right.
❏Erasing Position:
Select the position to remove the punch holes.
❏Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
Continuous Scan(ADF):
You can place a large number of originals in the ADF in batches, and scan them as a single scanning
job.
Scanning Using WSD
Note:
❏is feature is only available for computers running Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/Windows Vista.
❏If you are using Windows 7/Windows Vista, you need to setup your computer in advance using this feature.
“Setting Up a WSD Port” on page 121
1. Place the originals.
“Placing Originals” on page 41
2. Select Scan > WSD on the control panel.
3. Select a computer.
4. Tap
x
.
Setting Up a WSD Port
is section explains how to set up a WSD port for Windows 7/Windows Vista.
Note:
For Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8, the WSD port is set up automatically.
e following is necessary to set up a WSD port.
❏e printer and the computer are connected to the network.
❏e printer driver is installed on the computer.
Scanning
>
Scanning Using WSD
>
Setting Up a WSD Port
121
1. Turn the printer on.
2. Click start, and then click Network on the computer.
3. Right-click the printer, and then click Install.
Click Continue when the User Account Control screen is displayed.
Click Uninstall and start again if the Uninstall screen is displayed.
Note:
e printer name you set on the network and model name (EPSON XXXXXX (XX-XXXX)) are displayed on the
network screen. You can check the printer's name set on the network from the printer's control panel or by printing a
network status sheet.
4. Click Your device is ready to use.
Scanning
>
Scanning Using WSD
>
Setting Up a WSD Port
122
5. Check the message, and then click Close.
6. Open the Devices and Printers screen.
❏Windows 7
Click start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound (or Hardware) > Devices and Printers.
❏Windows Vista
Click start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
7. Check that an icon with the printer's name on the network is displayed.
Select the printer name when using with WSD.
Scanning Originals to a Smart Device
Note:
❏Before scanning, install Epson iPrint on your smart device.
❏Epson iPrint screens are subject to change without notice.
❏Epson iPrint contents may vary depending on the product.
1. Place the originals.
“Placing Originals” on page 41
2. Start Epson iPrint.
3. Tap Scan on the home screen.
4. Tap Scan.
Note:
You can set the scan settings. Tap the icon at the top-right of the screen.
Scanning starts.
5. Check the scanned image, and then select the saving method.
❏ : Displays the screen where you can save the scanned images.
❏ : Displays the screen where you can send scanned images by email.
❏ : Displays the screen where you can print scanned images.
Scanning
>
Scanning Originals to a Smart Device
123
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
Before Using Fax Features...........................................126
Overview of this Printer's Fax Features..................................126
Sending Faxes Using the Printer.......................................131
Receiving Faxes on the Printer........................................139
Menu Options for Faxing............................................145
Menu Options for Fax Box...........................................149
Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs.................................156
Sending a Fax from a Computer.......................................158
Receiving Faxes on a Computer.......................................162
Before Using Fax Features
Check the following before you start using the fax features.
❏e printer and the phone line, and (if necessary) the phone machine are connected correctly
❏Fax basic settings (Fax Setting Wizard) is complete
❏Other necessary Fax Settings are complete
If your organization has a printer administrator, contact your administrator to check the status or conditions of the
connection and settings.
See "Related Information" below to make settings.
“Connecting the Printer to a Phone Line” on page 481
“Making the Printer Ready to Send and Receive Faxes” on page 484
“Making Settings for the Printer's Fax Features According to Use” on page 486
“Fax Settings (Fax-Capable Printers Only)” on page 383
“Conguring a Mail Server” on page 447
“Setting a Shared Network Folder” on page 451
“Making Contacts Available” on page 467
See the following for information on adding optional faxes to the printer.
“Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board” on page 337
Related Information
&“Report Settings” on page 395
Overview of this Printer's Fax Features
Feature: Sending Faxes
“Before Using Fax Features” on page 126
Sending Methods
❏Sending automatically
When you scan an original by tapping
x
(Send), the printer dials the recipients and sends the fax.
“Sending Faxes Using the Printer” on page 131
❏Sending manually
When you perform a manual check on the line connection by dialing the recipient, tap
x
(Send) to start
sending a fax directly.
“Sending Faxes Manually Aer Conrming the Recipient's Status” on page 133
“Sending Faxes Dialing from the External Phone Device” on page 134
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Overview of this Printer's Fax Features
>
Feature: Sending Faxes
126
Recipient Designation when Sending a Fax
You can enter recipients using Keypad, Contacts, and Recent.
“Recipient” on page 145
“Making Contacts Available” on page 467
Scan Settings when Sending a Fax
You ca n s elect it e ms such a s Resolution or Original Size (Glass) when sending faxes.
“Scan Settings:” on page 146
Using Fax Send Settings when Sending a Fax
You can use Fax Send Settings such as Direct Send (to send a large document stably) or Backup when normal
sending fails. If you make settings to back up sent faxes when sending a fax but the backup fails, the printer can
send an email notication automatically when the backup is performed.
“Fax Send Settings:” on page 146
“Backup Error Report:” on page 395
“Conguring a Mail Server” on page 447
Reports on Sent Result
You can get various reports on sent results.
“Features: Various Fax Reports” on page 129
Secure Send
You can send faxes securely.
“Feature: Security when Sending and Receiving Faxes” on page 131
Other Sending Related Features
ere are other useful features related to sending faxes.
“Quick Operation Button 1, Quick Operation Button 2, Quick Operation Button 3:” on page 384
“Quick Operation Button:” on page 145
Feature: Receiving Faxes
“Before Using Fax Features” on page 126
Receive Mode
There are two options in Receive Mode for receiving incoming faxes.
❏Manual
Mainly for phoning, but also for faxing
“Usage of Manual Mode” on page 140
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Overview of this Printer's Fax Features
>
Feature: Receiving Faxes
127
❏Auto
- Only for faxing (external phone device is not required)
- Mainly for faxing, and sometimes phoning
“Usage of Auto Mode” on page 140
Receiving Faxes by Operating a Connected Phone
You can receive faxes by only operating an external phone device.
“Basic Settings” on page 384
“Making Settings When You Connect a Phone Device” on page 487
Destinations of Received Faxes
❏Output without conditions: Received faxes are printed unconditionally by default. You can set up destinations
for received faxes to the inbox, a computer, an external memory, emails, folders, or other faxes. If you save in the
inbox, you can check the contents on the screen.
“Unconditional Save/Forward:” on page 388
“Inbox settings:” on page 392
“Viewing Received Faxes Saved in the Printer on the LCD Screen” on page 144
❏Output when conditions match: You can set up destinations for received faxes to the inbox or a condential box,
an external memory, an email, a folder, or another fax when specic conditions are met. If you save in the inbox
or a condential box, you can check the contents on the screen.
“Conditional Save/Forward:” on page 390
“Conditional Save/Forward list:” on page 148
Output Various Reports
Receiving related reports is also supported.
“Features: Various Fax Reports” on page 129
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Overview of this Printer's Fax Features
>
Feature: Receiving Faxes
128
Security when Receiving Faxes
Faxes can be received securely.
“Feature: Security when Sending and Receiving Faxes” on page 131
Feature: PC-FAX Send/Receive (Windows/Mac OS)
PC-FAX Send
You can send faxes from a computer.
“PC to FAX Function:” on page 388
“Soware for Faxing” on page 370
“Sending a Fax from a Computer” on page 158
PC-FAX Receive
You can receive faxes on a computer.
“Making Settings to Send and Receive Faxes on a Computer” on page 495
“Soware for Faxing” on page 370
“Receiving Faxes on a Computer” on page 162
Features: Various Fax Reports
You can check the status of sent and received faxes in a report.
“Report Settings” on page 395
“Fax Send Settings:” on page 146
“Transmission Log:” on page 148
“Fax Report:” on page 148
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Overview of this Printer's Fax Features
>
Features: Various Fax Reports
129
Feature: Status or Logs for Fax Jobs
You can check the fax jobs in progress or check the job history.
“Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs” on page 156
Feature: Fax Box
Inbox and condential boxes
“Inbox/Condential” on page 149
Stored Documents Box
“Stored Documents:” on page 151
Polling Send/Board Box
“Polling Send/Board” on page 152
Security for Fax Box feature
You can set a p a ssword for e ach b ox.
“Feature: Security when Sending and Receiving Faxes” on page 131
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Overview of this Printer's Fax Features
>
Feature: Fax Box
130
Feature: Security when Sending and Receiving Faxes
You can use many security features such as Direct Dialing Restrictions to prevent sending to the wrong
destination, or Backup Data Auto Clear to prevent information leakage. You can set a password for each fax box
in the printer.
“Security Settings” on page 396
“Inbox Password Settings:” on page 393
“Menu Options for Fax Box” on page 149
“Box Document Delete Settings:” on page 393
Features: Other Useful Features
Blocking Junk Faxes
“Rejection Fax:” on page 386
Receiving Faxes After Dialing
“Receiving Faxes by Making a Phone Call” on page 141
“Polling Receive:” on page 148
Regarding Sending Faxes
“Quick Operation Button 1, Quick Operation Button 2, Quick Operation Button 3:” on page 384
“Quick Operation Button:” on page 145
Sending Faxes Using the Printer
You can send faxes by entering fax numbers for recipients on the control panel.
Note:
❏When sending a fax in monochrome, you can preview the scanned image on the LCD screen before sending.
❏You can reserve up to 50 monochrome fax jobs even while the phone line is in use for a voice call, sending another fax, or
receiving a fax. You can check or cancel reserved fax jobs from .
1. Place the originals.
You can send up to 200 pages in one transmission; however depending on the remaining amount of memory,
you may not be able to send faxes even with less than 200 pages.
2. Select Fax on the home screen.
3. Specify the recipient.
“Selecting Recipients” on page 132
See the following for information on adding optional faxes to the printer.
“Sending Faxes Using the Printer with Optional Fax Boards” on page 340
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Sending Faxes Using the Printer
131
4. Select the Fax Settings tab, and then make settings as necessary.
5. Tap
x
to send the fax .
Note:
❏If the fax number is busy or there is some problem, the printer automatically redials aer one minute.
❏To cancel sending, tap
y
.
❏It takes longer to send a fax in color because the printer performs scanning and sending simultaneously. While the
printer is sending a fax in color, you cannot use the other features.
Related Information
&“Fax Settings” on page 145
&“Checking Fax Jobs in Progress” on page 157
Selecting Recipients
You can specify recipients on the Recipient tab to send the fax using the following methods.
Entering Fax Number Manually
Select Keypad, enter a fax number on the screen displayed, and then tap OK.
- To add a pause (pause for three seconds during dialing), enter a hyphen(-).
- If you have set an external access code in Line Type, enter "#" (hash) instead of the actual external access code at
the beginning of the fax number.
Note:
If you cannot manually enter a fax number, Direct Dialing Restrictions in Security Settings is set to On. Select fax
recipients from the contacts list or the sent fax history.
Selecting recipients from the contacts list
Select Contacts and select recipients you want to send. If the recipient you want to send to has not been registered
in Contacts yet, tap to register it.
Selecting recipients from the sent fax history
Select Recent, and then select a recipient.
Selecting recipients from the list on the Recipient tab
Select a recipient from the list registered in Settings > Contacts Manager > Frequent.
Note:
To delete recipients you entered, display the list of recipients by tapping on the eld of a fax number or the number of
recipients on the LCD screen, select the recipient from the list, and then select Remove.
Related Information
&“Making Contacts Available” on page 467
&“Recipient” on page 145
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Sending Faxes Using the Printer
>
Selecting Recipients
132
Various Ways of Sending Faxes
Sending a Fax after Checking the Scanned Image
You can preview the scanned image on the LCD screen before sending the fax. (Monochrome fax only)
1. Place the originals.
“Placing Originals” on page 41
2. Select Fax on the home screen.
3. Specify the recipient.
“Selecting Recipients” on page 132
See the following for information on adding optional faxes to the printer.
“Sending Faxes Using the Printer with Optional Fax Boards” on page 340
4. Select the Fax Settings tab, and then make settings as necessary.
“Fax Settings” on page 145
5. Tap on the fax top screen to scan, check the scanned document image.
6. Select Start Sending. Otherwise, select Cancel
- : Moves the screen in the direction of the arrows.
- : Reduces or enlarges.
- : Moves to the previous or the next page.
Note:
❏When Direct Send is enabled, you cannot preview.
❏When the preview screen is le untouched for the time set in Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Send
Settings > Fax Preview Display Time, the fax is sent automatically.
❏e image quality of a sent fax may be dierent from what you previewed depending on the capability of the
recipient machine.
Sending Faxes Manually After Conrming the Recipient's Status
You can send a fax while listening to sounds or voices through the printer's speaker while dialing, communicating,
and transmitting.
1. Select Fax on the home screen.
2. Make necessary settings on the Fax Settings tab.
3. On the Recipient tab, tap and then specify the recipient.
Note:
You can adjust the sound volume of the speaker.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Sending Faxes Using the Printer
>
Various Ways of Sending Faxes
133
4. When you hear a fax tone, select Send/Receive at the upper right corner of the LCD screen, and then select
Send.
Note:
When receiving a fax from a fax polling service, and you hear the audio guidance, follow the guidance to make the
printer operations.
5. Tap
x
to send the fax.
Related Information
&“Fax Settings” on page 145
Sending Faxes Dialing from the External Phone Device
You can send a fax by dialing using the connected telephone when you want to talk over the phone before sending
a fax, or when the recipient's fax machine does not switch to the fax automatically.
1. Pick up the handset of the connected telephone, and then dial the recipient's fax number using the phone.
Note:
When the recipient answers the phone, you can talk with the recipient.
2. Select Fax on the home screen.
3. Make necessary settings on theFax Settings.
“Fax Settings” on page 145
4. When you hear a fax tone, tap
x
, and then hang up the handset.
Note:
When a number is dialed using the connected telephone, it takes longer to send a fax because the printer performs
scanning and sending simultaneously. While sending the fax, you cannot use the other features.
Related Information
&“Fax Settings” on page 145
Sending Faxes on Demand (Using Polling Send/Bulletin Board Box)
If you store a monochrome document in the printer in advance, the stored document can be sent upon request
from another fax machine that has a polling receive feature. ere is one Polling Send box and 10 bulletin board
boxes in the printer for this feature. In each box, you can store one document with up to 100 pages. To use a
bulletin board box, the one box to store a document must be registered beforehand, and the fax machine of the
recipient must support the subaddress/password feature.
Related Information
&“Setting the Polling Send Box” on page 135
&“Registering a Bulletin Board Box” on page 135
&“Storing a Document in the Polling Send/Bulletin Board Box” on page 136
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Sending Faxes Using the Printer
>
Various Ways of Sending Faxes
134
Setting the Polling Send Box
You can store a document in the Polling Send Box without registering. Make the following settings as necessary.
1. Select Fax Box > Polling Send/Board from the home screen.
2. Select Polling Send, tap , and then select Settings.
Note:
If a password entry screen is displayed, enter the password.
3. Make the appropriate settings, such as Notify Send Result.
Note:
If you set a password in Box Open Password, you will be asked to enter the password from the next time you open the
box.
4. Select OK to apply the settings.
Related Information
&“Polling Send:” on page 152
Registering a Bulletin Board Box
You must register a bulletin board box for storing a document beforehand. Follow the steps below to register the
box.
1. Select Fax Box > Polling Send/Board from the home screen.
2. Select one of the boxes named Unregistered Bulletin Board.
Note:
If a password entry screen is displayed, enter the password.
3. Make settings for the items on the screen.
❏Enter a name in Name (Required)
❏Enter a subaddress in Subaddress(SEP)
❏Enter a password in Password(PWD)
4. Make the appropriate settings such as Notify Send Result.
Note:
If you set a password in Box Open Password, you will be asked to enter the password from the next time you open the
box.
5. Select OK to apply the settings.
To display the screen for changing settings or deleting registered boxes, select the box you want to change/delete,
and then tap .
Related Information
&“Unregistered Bulletin Board:” on page 154
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Sending Faxes Using the Printer
>
Various Ways of Sending Faxes
135
Storing a Document in the Polling Send/Bulletin Board Box
1. Select Fax Box on the home screen, and then select Polling Send/Board.
2. Select Polling Send or one of the bulletin board boxes that have already been registered.
If the password entry screen is displayed, enter the password to open the box.
3. Tap Add Document.
4. On the fax top screen that is displayed, check the fax settings, and then tap
x
to scan and store the document.
To check the document you stored, select Fax Box > Polling Send/Board, select the box containing the document
you want to check, and then tap Check Document. On the screen that is displayed, you can view, print or delete
the scanned document.
Related Information
&“Each Registered Bulletin Board” on page 154
Sending Many Pages of a Monochrome Document (Direct Send)
When sending a fax in monochrome, the scanned document is temporarily stored in the printer's memory.
erefore, sending a lot of pages may cause the printer to run out of memory and stop sending the fax. You can
avoid this by enabling the Direct Send feature, however, it takes longer to send the fax because the printer
performs scanning and sending simultaneously. You can use this feature when there is only one recipient.
Accessing the Menu
You can nd the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Fax > Fax Settings > Direct Send.
Sending a Fax Preferentially (Priority Send)
You can send an urgent document ahead of the other faxes waiting to be sent.
Note:
You cannot send your document preferentially while one of the following is in progress because the printer cannot accept
another fax.
❏Sending a monochrome fax with Direct Send enabled
❏Sending a color fax
❏Sending a fax using a connected telephone
❏Sending a fax sent from the computer (except when sending from memory)
Accessing the Menu
You can nd the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Fax > Fax SettingsPriority Send.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Sending Faxes Using the Printer
>
Various Ways of Sending Faxes
136
Related Information
&“Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs” on page 156
Sending Faxes in Monochrome at Specied Time of the Day (Send Fax Later)
You can set to send a fax at a specied time. Only monochrome faxes can be sent when the time to send is
specied.
Accessing the Menu
You can nd the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Fax > Fax Settings
Enable Send Fax Later, and then specify the time of day to send the fax.
Note:
To cancel the fax while the printer is waiting for the specied time to arrive, cancel it from .
Related Information
&“Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs” on page 156
Sending Dierent Size Documents Using ADF (Continuous Scan(ADF))
Sending faxes by placing originals one by one, or by placing originals by size, you can send them as one document
at their original sizes.
If you place dierent sized originals in the ADF, all of the originals are sent at the largest size among them. To send
originals at their original sizes, do not place originals with mixed sizes.
1. Place the rst batch of originals at the same size.
2. Select Fax on the home screen.
3. Specify the recipient.
4. Select the Fax Settings tab, and then tap Continuous Scan(ADF) to set this to On.
You can also make settings such as the resolution and the sending method as necessary.
5. Tap
x
(Send).
6. When scanning the rst set of originals is complete and a message is displayed on the control panel asking you
to scan the next set of originals, set the next originals, and then select Start Scanning.
Note:
If you leave the printer untouched for the time set in Wait Time for Next Original aer you have been prompted to set
the next originals, the printer stops storing and starts sending the document.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Sending Faxes Using the Printer
>
Various Ways of Sending Faxes
137
Sending a Fax with a Subaddress(SUB) and Password(SID)
You can send faxes to the condential boxes or the relay boxes in the recipient's fax machine when the recipient's
fax machine has the feature to receive condential faxes or relay faxes. e recipients can receive them securely, or
can forward them to specied fax destinations.
1. Place the originals.
2. Select Fax on the home screen.
3. Select Contacts and select a recipient with a registered subaddress and password.
You can also select the recipient from Recent if it was sent with a subaddress and password.
4. Select the Fax Settings tab, and then make settings such as the resolution and the sending method as
necessary.
5. Send the fax.
Related Information
&“Making Contacts Available” on page 467
Sending the Same Documents Multiple Times
Related Information
&“Storing a Fax Without Specifying a Recipient (Store Fax Data)” on page 138
&“Sending Faxes Using the Stored Document Feature” on page 139
Storing a Fax Without Specifying a Recipient (Store Fax Data)
Since you can send faxes using documents stored in the printer, you can save the time spent scanning documents
when you need to send the same document frequently. You can store up to 100 pages of a single document in
monochrome. You can store 10 documents in the printer's stored documents box.
Note:
Saving 10 documents may not be possible depending on the usage conditions such as the le size of stored documents.
1. Place the originals.
2. Select Fax Box on the home screen.
3. Select Stored Documents, tap (Box Menu), and then select Store Fax Data.
4. In the Fax Settings tab that is displayed, make settings such as the resolution as necessary.
5. Tap
x
to store the document.
Aer storing a document is complete, you can preview the scanned image by selecting Fax Box > Stored
Documents and then tapping the box for the document, or you can delete it by tapping on the right of the box
for the document.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Sending Faxes Using the Printer
>
Various Ways of Sending Faxes
138
Related Information
&“Stored Documents:” on page 151
Sending Faxes Using the Stored Document Feature
1. Select Fax Box on the home screen, and then select Stored Documents.
2. Select the document you want to send, check the content of the document, and then select Start Sending.
When the message Delete this document aer sending? is displayed, select Ye s or No.
3. Specify the recipient.
4. Select the Fax Settings tab, and then make settings such as the sending method as necessary.
5. Tap
x
to send the fax.
Related Information
&“Stored Documents:” on page 151
&“Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs” on page 156
Receiving Faxes on the Printer
If the printer is connected to the phone line and basic settings have been completed using the Fax Setting Wizard,
you can receive faxes.
ere are two ways of receiving faxes.
❏Receiving an incoming fax
❏Receiving a fax by making a call (Polling Receive)
Received faxes are printed in the printer's initial settings.
You can save received faxes, check them on the printer screen, and forward them.
To check the status of the fax settings, you can print a Fax Settings List by selecting Fax > (More) > Fax Report
> Fax Settings List.
Related Information
&“More” on page 148
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Receiving Faxes on the Printer
139
Receiving Incoming Faxes
ere are two options in Receive Mode.
Related Information
&“Usage of Manual Mode” on page 140
&“Usage of Auto Mode” on page 140
Usage of Manual Mode
is mode is mainly for making phone calls, but is also for faxing.
Receiving Faxes
When the telephone rings, you can answer the ringing manually by picking up the handset.
❏When you hear a fax signal (baud):
Select Fax on the printer's home screen, select Send/Receive > Receive, and then tap
x
. Next, hang up the
handset.
❏If the ringing is for a voice call:
You can answer the phone as normal.
Receiving Faxes Using only the Connected Telephone
When Remote Receive is set, you can receive faxes by simply entering the Start Code.
When the telephone rings, pick up the handset. When you hear a fax tone (baud), dial the two digit Start Code,
and then hang up the handset. If you do not know the start code, ask the administrator.
Usage of Auto Mode
is mode allows you to use the line for the following uses.
❏Using the line for faxing only (external telephone is not necessary)
❏Using the line for faxing mainly, and sometimes phoning
Receiving Faxes Without an External Phone Device
e printer automatically switches to receive faxes when the number of rings you set in Rings to Answer is
complete.
Receiving Faxes With an External Phone Device
A printer with an external phone device works as follows.
❏When the answering machine answers within the number of rings set in Rings to Answer:
- If the ringing is for a fax: e printer automatically switches to receive faxes.
- If the ringing is for a voice call; e answering machine can receive voice calls and record voice messages.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Receiving Faxes on the Printer
>
Receiving Incoming Faxes
140
❏When you pick up the handset within the number of rings set in Rings to Answer:
- If the ringing is for a fax: Hold the line until the printer automatically starts receiving the fax. Once the printer
starts receiving the fax, you can hang up the handset. To start receiving the fax immediately, use the same steps
as for Manual. You can receive the fax using the same steps as for Manual. Select Fax on the home screen, and
then select Send/Receive > Receive. Next, tap
x
, and then hang up the handset.
- If the ringing is for a voice call: You can answer the phone as normal.
❏When the ringing stops and the printer automatically switches to receive faxes:
- If the ringing is for a fax: e printer starts receiving faxes.
- If the ringing is for a voice call: You cannot answer the phone. Ask the person to call you back.
Note:
Set the number of rings to answer for the answering machine to a lower number than the number set in Rings to Answer.
Otherwise, the answering machine cannot receive voice calls to record voice messages. For details on setting up the answering
machine, see the manual supplied with the answering machine.
Receiving Faxes by Making a Phone Call
You can receive a fax stored on another fax machine by dialing the fax number.
Related Information
&“Receiving Faxes Aer Conrming the Sender's Status” on page 141
&“Receiving Faxes by Polling (Polling Receive)” on page 142
&“Receiving Faxes from a Board with a Subaddress (SEP) and Password (PWD) (Polling Receive)” on page 142
Receiving Faxes After Conrming the Sender's Status
You can receive a fax while listening to sounds or voices through the printer's speaker while dialing,
communicating, and transmitting. You can use this feature when you want to receive a fax from a fax information
service by following an audio guide.
1. Select Fax on the home screen.
2. Tap , and then specify the sender.
Note:
You can adjust the sound volume of the speaker.
3. Wait until the sender answers your call. When you hear a fax tone, select Send/Receive at the upper right
corner of the LCD screen, and then select Receive.
Note:
When receiving a fax from a fax information service, and you hear the audio guidance, follow the guidance to make the
printer operations.
4. Tap
x
.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Receiving Faxes on the Printer
>
Receiving Faxes by Making a Pho
…
141
Receiving Faxes by Polling (Polling Receive)
You can receive a fax stored on another fax machine by dialing the fax number. Use this feature to receive a
document from a fax information service.
Note:
❏If the fax information service has an audio guidance feature that you need to follow to receive a document, you cannot
use this feature.
❏To receive a document from a fax information service that uses audio guidance, just dial the fax number using the On
Hook feature or the connected telephone, and operate the phone and the printer following the audio guidance.
1. Select Fax on the home screen.
2. Tap (More).
3. Select Extended Fax.
4. Tap the Polling Receive box to set this to On.
5. Tap Close, and then tap Close again.
6. Enter the fax number.
Note:
If you cannot manually enter a fax number, Direct Dialing Restrictions in Security Settings is set to On. Select fax
recipients from the contacts list or the sent fax history.
7. Tap
x
.
Related Information
&“Polling Receive:” on page 148
Receiving Faxes from a Board with a Subaddress (SEP) and Password (PWD)
(Polling Receive)
By dialing to a sender, you can receive faxes from a board stored on sender's fax machine with a subaddress (SEP)
and password (PWD) feature. To use this feature, register the contact with the subaddress (SEP) and password
(PWD) in the contacts list in advance.
1. Select Fax on the home screen.
2. Select (More).
3. Select Extended Fax.
4. Tap Polling Receive to set this to On.
5. Tap Close, and then tap Close again.
6. Select Contacts, and then select the contact with the registered subaddress (SEP) and password (PWD) to
match the destination board.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Receiving Faxes on the Printer
>
Receiving Faxes by Making a Pho
…
142
7. Tap
x
.
Related Information
&“Making Contacts Available” on page 467
&“Making Contacts Available” on page 467
&“Sending Faxes Dialing from the External Phone Device” on page 134
&“Receiving Faxes Aer Conrming the Sender's Status” on page 141
&“More” on page 148
Saving and Forwarding Received Faxes
Summary of the Features
If your organization has a printer administrator, contact your administrator to check the status of the printer
settings.
Saving Received Faxes in the Printer
e received faxes can be saved in the printer, and you can view them on the printer's screen. You can print only
the faxes you want to print or delete unnecessary faxes.
Saving and/or Forwarding Received Faxes to Destinations Other than the Printer
e following can be set as destinations.
❏Computer (PC-FAX reception)
❏External memory device
❏Email address
❏Shared folder on a network
❏Another fax machine
Note:
❏e fax data is saved as PDF or TIFF format.
❏Color documents cannot be forwarded to another fax machine. ey are processed as documents that failed to be
forwarded.
Sorting Received Faxes by Conditions such as Subaddress and Password
You can sort and save received faxes to your Inbox or bulletin board boxes. You can also forward received faxes to
destinations other than the printer.
❏Email address
❏Shared folder on a network
❏Another fax machine
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Receiving Faxes on the Printer
>
Saving and Forwarding Received
…
143
Note:
❏e fax data is saved as PDF or TIFF format.
❏Color documents cannot be forwarded to another fax machine. ey are processed as documents that failed to be
forwarded.
❏You can print the save/forward conditions set in the printer. Select Fax on the home screen, and then select (More) >
Fax Report > Conditional Save/Forward list.
❏If your organization has a printer administrator, contact the administrator to set or change the save/forward conditions.
For administrators, see "Related Information" below to check or change settings.
Related Information
&“Making Settings to Save and Forward Received Faxes” on page 488
&“Making Settings to Save and Forward Received Faxes with Specic Conditions” on page 491
&“More” on page 148
&“Viewing Received Faxes Saved in the Printer on the LCD Screen” on page 144
Viewing Received Faxes Saved in the Printer on the LCD Screen
If you set up to save received faxes in the printer, you can view the contents and print as necessary.
“Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes” on page 488
“Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes with Specic Conditions” on page 491
1. Select Fax Box on the home screen.
Note:
When there are received faxes that have not been read, the number of unread documents is displayed on the on the
home screen.
2. Select Inbox/Condential.
3. Select the inbox or the condential box you want to view.
4. If the inbox, or the condential box has been password protected, enter the inbox password, the condential
box password, or the administrator password.
5. Select the fax you want to view from the list.
e contents of the fax are displayed.
❏: Rotates the image to the right by 90 degrees.
❏: Moves the screen in the direction of the arrows.
❏: Reduces or enlarges.
❏: Moves to the previous or the next page.
❏ : Displays menus such as save and forward.
❏To hide the operation icons, tap anywhere on the preview screen except for the icons. Tap again to display
the icons.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Receiving Faxes on the Printer
>
Viewing Received Faxes Saved in t
…
144
6. Select whether to print or delete the document you have viewed, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
c
Important:
If the printer runs out of memory, receiving and sending faxes is disabled. Delete documents that you have
already read or printed.
Related Information
&“Inbox/Condential” on page 149
Menu Options for Faxing
Recipient
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Fax > Recipient
See the following for information on adding optional faxes to the printer.
“Sending Faxes Using the Printer with Optional Fax Boards” on page 340
Keypad:
Manually enter a fax number.
Contacts:
Select a recipient from the contacts list. You can also add or edit a contact.
Recent:
Select a recipient from the sent fax history. You can also add the recipient to the contacts list.
Fax Settings
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Fax > Fax Settings
Quick Operation Button:
Assigning up to three frequently used items such as Transmission Log and Original Type in
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Quick Operation Button, displays the items at the top
of the Fax Settings tab.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Menu Options for Faxing
>
Fax Settings
145
Scan Settings:
Resolution:
Select the resolution of the outgoing fax. If you select a higher resolution, the data size
becomes larger and it takes time to send the fax.
Density:
Sets the density of the outgoing fax. + makes the density darker, and - makes it lighter.
Original Type:
Select the type of your original.
Remove Background:
Detects the paper color (background color) of the original document, and removes or lightens
the color. Depending on the darkness and vividness of the color, it may not be removed or
lightened
Sharpness:
Enhances or defocuses the outline of the image. + enhances the sharpness, and - defocuses the
sharpness.
ADF 2-Sided:
Scans both sides of originals placed in the ADF and sends a monochrome fax.
Continuous Scan(ADF):
Sending faxes by placing originals one by one, or by placing originals by size, you can send
them as one document at their original sizes. See the related information below on this topic.
Original Size (Glass):
Select the size and orientation of the original you placed on the scanner glass.
Color Mode:
Select whether to scan in color or in monochrome.
Fax Send Settings:
Direct Send:
Sends a monochrome fax while scanning the originals. Since scanned originals are not stored
temporarily in the printer's memory even when sending a large volume of pages, you can avoid
printer errors due to a lack of memory. Note that sending using this feature takes longer than
not using this feature. See the related information below on this topic.
You cannot use this feature when:
❏Sending a fax using the ADF 2-Sided option
❏Sending a fax to multiple recipients
Priority Send:
Sends the current fax before other faxes waiting to be sent. See the related information below
on this topic.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Menu Options for Faxing
>
Fax Settings
146
Send Fax Later:
Sends a fax at a time you specied. Only a monochrome fax is available when using this
option. See the related information below on this topic.
Add Sender Information:
❏Add Sender Information
Select the position where you want to include the header information (sender name and fax
number) in the outgoing fax, or not to include the information.
- O: Sends a fax with no header information.
- Outside of Image: Sends a fax with header information in the top white margin of the fax.
is keeps the header from overlapping with the scanned image, however, the fax received
by the recipient may be printed across two sheets depending on the size of the originals.
- Inside of Image: Sends a fax with header information approximately 7 mm lower than the
top of the scanned image. e header may overlap with the image, however, the fax received
by the recipient will not be split into two documents.
❏Fax Header
Select the header for the recipient. To use this feature, you should register multiple headers
in advance.
❏Additional Information
Select the information you want to add. You can select one from You r Pho ne Numb e r,
Destination List, and None.
Notify Send Result:
Sends a notication aer you send a fax.
Transmission Report:
Prints a transmission report aer you send the fax.
Print on Error prints a report only when an error occurs.
When Attach Fax image to report has been set in Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings
> Report Settings, faxes with errors are also printed with the report.
Backup:
Saves a backup of the sent fax that is scanned and saved to the printer's memory automatically.
e backup feature is available when:
❏Sending a fax in monochrome
❏Sending a fax using the Send Fax Later feature
❏Sending a fax using the Batch Send feature
❏Sending a fax using the Store Fax Data feature
Related Information
&“Sending Dierent Size Documents Using ADF (Continuous Scan(ADF))” on page 137
&“Sending Many Pages of a Monochrome Document (Direct Send)” on page 136
&“Sending a Fax Preferentially (Priority Send)” on page 136
&“Sending Faxes in Monochrome at Specied Time of the Day (Send Fax Later)” on page 137
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Menu Options for Faxing
>
Fax Settings
147
More
Selecting in Fax on the home screen displays the More menu.
Transmission Log:
You can check the history of sent or received fax jobs.
Note that you can also check the history of sent or received fax jobs from Job/Status.
Fax Report:
Last Transmission:
Prints a report for the previous fax that was sent or received through polling.
Fax Log:
Prints a transmission report. You can set to print this report automatically using the following
menu.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Report Settings > Fax Log Auto Print
Stored Fax Documents:
Prints a list of fax documents stored in the printer’s memory, such as unnished jobs.
Fax Settings List:
Prints the current fax settings.
Conditional Save/Forward list:
Prints the Conditional Save/Forward List.
Protocol Trace:
Prints a detailed report for the previous fax that was sent or received.
Extended Fax:
Polling Receive:
When this is set to On and you call the sender's fax number, you can receive documents from
the sender's fax machine. See the related information below for details on how to receive faxes
using Polling Receive.
When you leave the Fax menu, the setting returns to O (default).
Polling Send/Board:
When this is set to On by selecting the polling send box or a bulletin board box, you can scan
and store documents to the box you selected by tapping
x
on the Fax Settings tab.
You can store one document to the polling send box. You can store up to 10 documents to up
to 10 bulletin boards in the printer, but you must register them from Fax Box before storing
documents. See the related information below for details on how to register a bulletin board
box.
When you leave the Fax menu, the setting returns to O (default).
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Menu Options for Faxing
>
More
148
Store Fax Data:
When this is set to On, and you tap x on the Fax Settings tab, you can scan and store
documents to the Stored Documents box. You can store up to 10 documents.
You can also scan and save documents to the Stored Documents box from Fax Box. See the
related information below for details on how to store documents from Fax Box
When you leave the Fax menu, the setting returns to O (default).
Fax Box:
Accesses the Fax Box on the home screen.
Fax Settings:
Accesses Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings. Access the setting menu as an administrator.
Related Information
&“Receiving Faxes by Polling (Polling Receive)” on page 142
&“Setting the Polling Send Box” on page 135
&“Registering a Bulletin Board Box” on page 135
&“Storing a Document in the Polling Send/Bulletin Board Box” on page 136
&“Polling Send/Board” on page 152
&“Storing a Fax Without Specifying a Recipient (Store Fax Data)” on page 138
&“Stored Documents:” on page 151
&“Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs” on page 156
&“Checking the Fax Job History” on page 157
Menu Options for Fax Box
Inbox/Condential
You ca n n d Inbox/Condential in Fax Box on the home screen.
Inbox and Condential Boxes
Inbox and condential boxes are in Fax Box > Inbox/Condential.
You can save up to 200 documents in the inbox and the condential box in total.
You can use one Inbox and register up to 10 condential boxes. e box name is displayed on the
box. Condential XX is the default name for each condential box.
Inbox and Condential Boxes
Displays the received faxes list by date received, sender name, and pages.
Tapping one of the faxes from the list opens the preview screen, and you can check the
contents of the fax. You can print or delete the fax while you are previewing.
preview screen
❏: Reduces or enlarges.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Menu Options for Fax Box
>
Inbox/Condential
149
❏: Rotates the image to the right by 90 degrees.
❏: Moves the screen in the direction of the arrows.
❏: Moves to the previous or the next page.
To hide the operation icons, tap anywhere on the preview screen except for the icons.
Tap again to display the icons.
(Preview menu)
❏Save to Memory Device
❏Forward(Email)
❏Forward(Network Folder)
❏Send Fax
❏Details
When the message Delete When Complete is displayed, select On to delete faxes aer
completing processes such as Save to Memory Device or Forward(Email).
(Box Menu)
Print All:
is is displayed only when there are stored faxes in the box. Prints all faxes in the box.
Selecting On in Delete When Complete deletes all faxes when printing is complete.
Save All to Memory Device:
is is displayed only when there are stored faxes in the box. Saves all faxes to external
memory devices in the box. Selecting On in Delete When Complete deletes all
documents when saving is complete.
Delete All Reads:
is is displayed when there are already fax documents that have been read in the box.
Deletes all read faxes in the box.
Delete All Unreads:
is is displayed when there are unread fax documents in the box. Deletes all unread
faxes in the box.
Delete All:
is is displayed only when there are stored fax documents in the box. Deletes all faxes
in the box.
Settings:
e following items are displayed when you select Inbox > Box Menu > Settings.
❏Options when memory is full: Select one option to print or to decline incoming faxes
aer the Inbox is full.
❏Inbox Password Settings: You can set a password or change it.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Menu Options for Fax Box
>
Inbox/Condential
150
❏Auto Delete Received Faxes: Selecting On automatically deletes received fax
documents in the inbox aer a certain period of time. When Follow Fax Settings is
selected, the following settings are used.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward
Settings > Common Settings > Box Document Delete Settings
e following items are displayed when you select a condential box and select Box
Menu > Settings.
❏Name: Enter a name for the condential box.
❏Box Open Password: You can set a password or change it.
Delete Box:
is item is displayed only when you select a condential box and select Box Menu.
Clears the current settings for Condential Boxes and deletes all stored documents.
Related Information
&“Checking the Fax Job History” on page 157
Stored Documents:
You ca n n d Stored Documents in Fax Box on the home screen.
You can store up to 200 pages of a single document in monochrome, and up to 10 documents in the box. is
allows you to save time spent scanning documents when you need to send the same document frequently.
Note:
You may not be able to save 10 documents depending on the usage conditions such as the size of saved documents.
Stored Documents Box
Displays the stored documents list with stored dates and pages.
Tapping one of the stored documents from the list displays the preview screen. Tap Start Sending to
go to the fax sending screen, or tap Delete to delete the document while you are previewing.
preview screen
❏: Reduces or enlarges.
❏: Rotates the image to the right by 90 degrees.
❏: Moves the screen in the direction of the arrows.
❏: Moves to the previous or the next page.
To hide the operation icons, tap anywhere on the preview screen except for the icons. Tap
again to display the icons.
(Preview menu)
❏Save to Memory Device
❏Forward(Email)
❏Forward(Network Folder)
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Menu Options for Fax Box
>
Stored Documents:
151
❏Print
When the message Delete When Complete is displayed, select On to delete faxes aer
completing processes such as Save to Memory Device or Forward(Email).
(Box Menu)
Store Fax Data:
Displays the screen for the Fax > Fax Settings tab. Tapping
x
on the screen starts scanning
documents to store to the Stored Documents Box.
Print All:
is is displayed only when there are stored faxes in the box. Prints all faxes in the box.
Selecting On in Delete When Complete deletes all faxes when printing is complete.
Save All to Memory Device:
is is displayed only when there are stored faxes in the box. Saves all faxes to external
memory devices in the box. Selecting On in Delete When Complete deletes all documents
when saving is complete.
Delete All:
is is displayed only when there are stored faxes in the box. Deletes all faxes in the box.
Settings:
Box Open Password: You can set a password or change it.
Related Information
&“Sending the Same Documents Multiple Times” on page 138
&“Checking the Fax Job History” on page 157
Polling Send/Board
You ca n n d Polling Send/Board in Fax Box on the home screen.
ere is a Polling Send Box and 10 bulletin boards. You can store up to 200 pages of a single document in
monochrome, and one document in each box.
Related Information
&“Sending Faxes on Demand (Using Polling Send/Bulletin Board Box)” on page 134
Polling Send:
You ca n n d Polling Send in Fax Box > Polling Send/Board.
Polling Send Box:
Displays the setting items and values in Settings in (Menu).
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Menu Options for Fax Box
>
Polling Send/Board
152
Add Document:
Displays the screen for the Fax > Fax Settings tab. Tapping x on the screen starts scanning
documents to store them in the box.
When a document is in the box, Check Document is displayed instead.
Check Document:
Displays the preview screen when a document is in the box. You can print or delete the document
while you are previewing.
preview screen
❏: Reduces or enlarges.
❏: Rotates the image to the right by 90 degrees.
❏: Moves the screen in the direction of the arrows.
❏: Moves to the previous or the next page.
To hide the operation icons, tap anywhere on the preview screen except for the icons. Tap
again to display the icons.
(Preview menu)
❏Save to Memory Device
❏Forward(Email)
❏Forward(Network Folder)
❏Send Fax
When the message Delete When Complete is displayed, select On to delete faxes aer
completing processes such as Save to Memory Device or Forward(Email).
(Menu)
Delete Document:
is item is displayed only when there is a stored document in the box. Deletes the document
stored in the box.
Settings:
❏Box Open Password: You can set a password or change it.
❏Delete Document Aer Sending: Setting this to On deletes the document in the box when
the next request from a recipient to send the document (Polling Send) is completed.
❏Notify Send Result: When Email Notications is set to On, the printer sends a notication
to the destination specied in Recipient when a request to send the document (Polling
Send) is completed.
Related Information
&“Checking the Fax Job History” on page 157
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Menu Options for Fax Box
>
Polling Send/Board
153
Unregistered Bulletin Board:
You ca n n d Unregistered Bulletin Board in Fax Box > Polling Send/Board. Select one of the Unregistered
Bulletin Board boxes. Aer registering a board, the registered name is displayed on the box instead of
Unregistered Bulletin Board.
You can register up to 10 bulletin boards.
Bulletin Board Box Settings:
Name (Required):
Enter a name for the bulletin board box.
Subaddress(SEP):
Make or change the conditions for a recipient to receive the fax.
Password(PWD):
Make or change the conditions for a recipient to receive the fax.
Box Open Password:
Set or change the password used to open the box.
Delete Document After Sending:
Setting this to On deletes the document in the box when the next request from a recipient to
send the document (Polling Send) is completed.
Notify Send Result:
When Email Notications is set to On, the printer sends a notication to the Recipient when
a request to send the document (Polling Send) is completed.
Related Information
&“Each Registered Bulletin Board” on page 154
Each Registered Bulletin Board
You ca n nd bulletin boards in Fax Box > Polling Send/Board. Select the box for which the registered name is
displayed. e name displayed on the box is the name registered in Unregistered Bulletin Board.
You can register up to 10 bulletin boards.
(Registered Bulletin Board Name)
Displays the setting values of the items in Settings in (Menu).
Add Document:
Displays the screen for the Fax > Fax Settings tab. Tapping
x
on the screen starts scanning
documents to store them in the box.
When a document is in the box, Check Document is displayed instead.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Menu Options for Fax Box
>
Polling Send/Board
154
Check Document:
Displays the preview screen when a document is in the box. You can print or delete the document
while you are previewing.
preview screen
❏: Reduces or enlarges.
❏: Rotates the image to the right by 90 degrees.
❏: Moves the screen in the direction of the arrows.
❏: Moves to the previous or the next page.
To hide the operation icons, tap anywhere on the preview screen except for the icons. Tap
again to display the icons.
(Preview menu)
❏Save to Memory Device
❏Forward(Email)
❏Forward(Network Folder)
❏Send Fax
When the message Delete When Complete is displayed, select On to delete faxes aer
completing processes such as Save to Memory Device or Forward(Email).
(Menu)
Delete Document:
is item is displayed only when there is a stored document in the box. Deletes the document
stored in the box.
Settings:
❏Box Open Password: You can set a password or change it.
❏Delete Document Aer Sending: Setting this to On deletes the document in the box when
the next request from a recipient to send the document (Polling Send) is completed.
❏Notify Send Result: When Email Notications is set to On, the printer sends a notication
to the destination specied in Recipient when a request to send the document (Polling
Send) is completed.
Delete Box:
is item is displayed only when you select a condential box and select Box Menu. Clears the
current settings for Condential Boxes and deletes all stored documents.
Related Information
&“Unregistered Bulletin Board:” on page 154
&“Checking the Fax Job History” on page 157
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Menu Options for Fax Box
>
Polling Send/Board
155
Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs
Displaying Information when Received Faxes are Unprocessed
(Unread/Not Printed/Not Saved/Not Forwarded)
When there are unprocessed received documents, the number of unprocessed jobs is displayed on the on the
home screen. See the table below for a denition of the "unprocessed".
c
Important:
When the inbox is full, receiving faxes is disabled. You should delete the documents from the inbox once they have
been checked.
Received Fax Save/Forward
Setting
Unprocessed Status
Printing
*1
There are received documents waiting to be printed or printing is in progress.
Saving in the inbox or the
condential box
There are unread received documents in the inbox or the condential box.
Saving in an external memory
device
There are received documents that have not been saved in the device because there is
no device containing a folder specically created to save received documents connected
to the printer or for other reasons.
Saving on a computer There are received documents that have not been saved on the computer because the
computer is in sleep mode or for other reasons.
Forwarding There are received documents that have not been forwarded or failed to be forwarded
*2
.
*1 : When you have not set any of the fax save/forward settings, or when you have set to print received documents while
saving them to an external memory device or a computer.
*2 : When you have set to save documents that could not be forwarded in the inbox, there are unread documents that failed to
be forwarded in the inbox. When you have set to print documents that failed to be forwarded, printing is not complete.
Note:
If you are using more than one of the fax save/forward settings, the number of unprocessed jobs may be displayed as "2" or
"3" even if only one fax has been received. For example, if you have set to save faxes in the inbox and on a computer and one
fax is received, the number of unprocessed jobs is displayed as "2" if the fax has not been saved to the inbox and on a
computer.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs
>
Displaying Information
…
156
Related Information
&“Viewing Received Faxes Saved in the Printer on the LCD Screen” on page 144
&“Checking Fax Jobs in Progress” on page 157
Checking Fax Jobs in Progress
You can display the screen to check fax jobs for which processing is incomplete. e following jobs are displayed
on the check screen. From this screen, you can also print documents that have not yet been printed, or you can
resend documents that have failed to send.
❏Received fax jobs below
❏Not printed yet (When the jobs are set to be printed)
❏Not saved yet (When the jobs are set to be saved)
❏Not forwarded yet (When the jobs are set to be forwarded)
❏Outgoing fax jobs that have failed to be sent (If you have enabled Save Failure Data)
Follow the steps below to display the check screen.
1. Tap Job/Status on the home screen.
2. Tap the Job Status tab, and then tap Active.
3. Select the job you want to check.
Related Information
&“Displaying Information when Received Faxes are Unprocessed (Unread/Not Printed/Not Saved/Not
Forwarded)” on page 156
Checking the Fax Job History
You can check the history of sent or received fax jobs, such as the date, time and result for each job.
1. Tap Job/Status on the home screen.
2. Select Log on the Job Status tab.
3. Tap
d
on the right, and then select Send or Receive.
e log for sent or received fax jobs is displayed in reverse chronological order. Tap a job you want to check to
display the details.
You can also check the fax history by printing Fax Log by selecting Fax > (More) > Fax Report > Fax Log.
Related Information
&“More” on page 148
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs
>
Checking the Fax Job Hi
…
157
Reprinting Received Documents
You can reprint received documents from the logs of printed fax jobs.
Note that the printed received documents are deleted in chronological order when the printer runs out of memory.
1. Tap Job/Status on the home screen.
2. Select Log on the Job Status tab.
3. Tap
d
on the right, and then select Print.
e history of sent or received fax jobs is displayed in reverse chronological order.
4. Select a job with from the history list.
Check the date, time, and result to determine if it is the document you want print.
5. Tap Print Again to print the document.
Sending a Fax from a Computer
You can send faxes from the computer by using the FAX Utility and PC-FAX driver.
Note:
❏Check if the FAX Utility and the printer's PC-FAX driver has been installed before using this feature.
“Application for Conguring Fax Operations and Sending Faxes (FAX Utility)” on page 370
“Application for Sending Faxes (PC-FAX Driver)” on page 371
❏If the FAX Utility is not installed, use one of the following methods and install the FAX Utility.
❏Using the EPSON Soware Updater (application for updating soware)
“Application for Updating Soware and Firmware (EPSON Soware Updater)” on page 374
❏Using the disc supplied with your printer. (Windows users Only )
Related Information
&“Enabling Sending Faxes from a Computer” on page 495
Sending Documents Created Using an Application (Windows)
By selecting a printer fax from the Print menu of an application like Microso Word or Excel, you can directly
transmit data such as documents, drawings, and tables you have created, with a cover sheet.
Note:
e following explanation uses Microso Word as an example. e actual operation may dier depending on the application
you use. For details, see the application’s help.
1. Using an application, create a document to transmit by fax.
You can send up to 200 pages in monochrome or 100 pages in color including cover sheet in one fax
transmission.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Sending a Fax from a Computer
>
Sending Documents Created Usi
…
158
2. Click Print from the File menu.
e application’s Print window appears.
3. Select XXXXX (FAX) (where XXXXX is your printer name) in Printer, and then check the settings for fax
sending.
Specify 1 in Number of copies. Fax may not be transmitted correctly if you specify 2 or more.
4. Click Printer Properties or Properties if you want to specify Paper Size, Orientation, Color, Image Quality,
or Character Density.
For details, see the PC-FAX driver help.
5. Click Print.
Note:
When Using FAX Utility for the rst time, a window for registering your information is displayed. Enter the necessary
information, and then click OK.
Recipient Settings screen of FAX Utility is displayed.
6. When you want to send other documents in the same fax transmission, select Add documents to send
checkbox.
e screen for adding documents is displayed when you click Next in step 10.
7. Select Attach a cover sheet checkbox if necessary.
8. Specify a recipient.
❏Selecting a recipient (name, fax number and so on) from PC-FAX Phone Book:
If the recipient is saved in the phone book, do the steps below.
A
Click the PC-FAX Phone Book tab.
B
Select the recipient from the list and click Add.
❏Selecting a recipient (name, fax number and so on) from the contacts on the printer:
If the recipient is saved in the contacts on the printer, do the steps below.
A
Click the Contacts on Printer tab.
B
Select contacts from the list and click Add to proceed to Add to Recipient window.
C
Select the contacts from the list displayed, and then click Edit.
D
Add the personal data such as Company/Corp. and Title as necessary, and then click OK to return to
the Add to Recipient window.
E
As necessary, select the checkbox of Register in the PC-FAX Phone Book to save the contacts to PC-
FAX Phone Book.
F
Click OK.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Sending a Fax from a Computer
>
Sending Documents Created Usi
…
159
❏Specifying a recipient (name, fax number and so on) directly:
Do the steps below.
A
Click the Manual Dial tab.
B
Enter the necessary information.
C
Click Add.
Furthermore, by clicking Save to Phone Book, you can save the recipient in the list under the PC-FAX
Phone Book tab.
Note:
❏If your printer's Line Type is set to PBX and the access code has been set to use # (hash) instead of entering the exact
prex code, enter # (hash). For details, see Line Type in Basic Settings from related information link below.
❏If you have selected Enter fax number twice in the Optional Settings on the FAX Utility main screen, you need to
enter the same number again when you click Add or Next.
e recipient is added to the Recipient List displayed in the upper part of the window.
9. Click Sending options tab, and make the transmission option settings
See the following for information on adding optional faxes to the printer.
“Sending Documents Created in an Application Using an Optional Fax Board (Windows)” on page 341
❏Transmission mode:
Select how the printer transmits the document.
- Memory Trans.: Sends a fax by storing the data temporarily in the printer's memory. If you want to send a
fax to multiple recipients or from multiple computers at the same time, select this item.
- Direct Trans.: Sends a fax without storing the data temporarily in the printer's memory. If you want to
send a large volume of monochrome pages, select this item to avoid an error due to insucient printer's
memory.
❏Time specication:
Select Specify the transmission time to send a fax at a specic time, and then enter the time in
Transmission time.
10. Click Next.
❏When you have selected Add documents to send checkbox, follow the steps below to add documents in the
Document Merging window.
A
Open a document you want to add, and then select the same printer (fax name) in the Print window.
e document is added to the Document List to Merge list.
B
Click Preview to check the merged document.
C
Click Next.
Note:
e Image Quality and Color settings you have selected for the rst document are applied to other documents.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Sending a Fax from a Computer
>
Sending Documents Created Usi
…
160
❏When you have selected Attach a cover sheet checkbox, specify the content of the cover sheet in the Cover
Sheet Settings window.
A
Select a cover sheet from samples in the Cover Sheet list. Note that there is no function to create an
original cover sheet or to add an original cover sheet to the list.
B
Enter the Subject and Message.
C
Click Next.
Note:
Perform the following as necessary in Cover Sheet Settings.
❏Click Cover Sheet Formatting if you want to change the order of the items on the cover sheet. You can select the
cover sheet size in Paper Size. You can also select a cover sheet at a dierent size to the document being transmitted.
❏Click Font if you want to change the font used for the text on the cover sheet.
❏Click Sender Settings if you want to change the sender information.
❏Click Detailed Preview if you want to check the cover sheet with the subject and the message you entered.
11. Check the transmission content and click Send.
Make sure the name and fax number of the recipient are correct before transmitting. Click Preview to preview
the cover sheet and document to transmit.
Once transmission starts, a window displaying the transmission status appears.
Note:
❏To stop transmitting, select the data, and click Cancel . You can also cancel using the printer's control panel.
❏If an error occurs during transmission, the Communication error window appears. Check the error information
and retransmit.
❏e Fax Status Monitor screen (the screen mentioned above where you can check the transmission status) is not
displayed if Display Fax Status Monitor During Transmission is not selected in the Optional Settings screen of the
FAX Utility main screen.
Related Information
&“Basic Settings” on page 384
Sending Documents Created Using an Application (Mac OS)
By selecting a fax-capable printer from the Print menu of a commercially available application, you can send data
such as documents, drawings, and tables, you have created.
Note:
e following explanation uses Text Edit, a standard Mac OS application as an example.
1. Create the document you want to send by fax in an application.
You can send up to 200 pages in monochrome, or 100 pages in color including cover sheet, and up to a size of
2GB, in one fax transmission.
2. Click Print from the File menu.
e application’s Print window is displayed.
3. Select your printer (fax name) in Name, click
d
to display the detailed settings, check the print settings, and
then click OK.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Sending a Fax from a Computer
>
Sending Documents Created Usi
…
161
4. Make settings for each item.
Specify 1 in Number of copies. Even if you specify 2 or more, only 1 copy is sent.
Note:
e page size of documents you can send is the same as the paper size you can fax from the printer.
5. Select Fax Settings from the popup menu, and then make settings for each item.
See the PC-FAX driver's help for explanations on each setting item.
Click at the bottom le of the window to open the PC-FAX driver's help.
6. Select the Recipient Settings menu, and then specify the recipient.
❏Specifying a recipient (name, fax number, and so on) directly:
Click the Add item, enter the necessary information, and then click . e recipient is added to the
Recipient List displayed in the upper part of the window.
If you have selected "Enter fax number twice" in the PC-FAX driver settings, you need to enter the same
number again when you click .
If your fax connection line requires a prex code, enter External Access Prex.
Note:
If your printer's Line Type is set to PBX and the access code has been set to use # (hash) instead of entering the exact
prex code, enter # (hash). For details, see Line Type in Basic Settings from Related Information link below.
❏Selecting a recipient (name, fax number, and so on) from the phone book:
If the recipient is saved in the phone book, click . Select the recipient from the list, and then click Add
> OK.
If your fax connection line requires a prex code, enter External Access Prex.
Note:
If your printer's Line Type is set to PBX and the access code has been set to use # (hash) instead of entering the exact
prex code, enter # (hash). For details, see Line Type in Basic Settings from Related Information link below.
7. Check the recipient settings, and then click Fax.
Sending starts.
Make sure the name and fax number of the recipient are correct before transmitting.
Note:
❏If you click the printer icon in Dock, the transmission status check screen is displayed. To stop sending, click the data,
and then click Delete.
❏If an error occurs during transmission, the Sending failed message is displayed. Check the transmission records on
the Fax Transmission Record screen.
❏Mixed paper size documents may not be sent correctly.
Receiving Faxes on a Computer
You can receive faxes and save them as PDF or TIFF les to the computer connected to the printer. e FAX Utility
comes with features including how to specify a folder in which to save the faxes.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Receiving Faxes on a Computer
162
Note:
❏Check if the FAX Utility and the printer's PC-FAX driver has been installed before using this feature.
“Application for Conguring Fax Operations and Sending Faxes (FAX Utility)” on page 370
“Application for Sending Faxes (PC-FAX Driver)” on page 371
❏If the FAX Utility is not installed, use one of the following methods and install the FAX Utility.
❏Using the EPSON Soware Updater (application for updating soware)
“Application for Updating Soware and Firmware (EPSON Soware Updater)” on page 374
❏Using the disc supplied with your printer. (Windows users Only )
c
Important:
❏To receive faxes on a computer, the Receive Mode on the printer's control panel must be set to Auto. Contact
your administrator for information on the printer settings status.
❏e computer set to receive faxes should always be on. Received documents are saved in the printer's memory
temporarily before the documents are saved on the computer. If you turn o the computer, the printer's memory
might become full as it cannot send the documents to the computer.
❏e number of documents that have been temporarily saved to the printer’s memory are displayed on the on
the home screen.
❏To read received faxes saved as PDF les, you need to install a PDF viewer such as Adobe Reader on the
computer.
Related Information
&“Receiving Incoming Faxes” on page 140
Saving Incoming Faxes on a Computer
You can make settings to save incoming faxes on a computer by using the FAX Utility. Install the FAX Utility on
the computer in advance.
For details, see Basic Operations in the FAX Utility help (displayed on the main window). If the password entry
screen is displayed on the computer screen while you are making settings, enter the password. If you do not know
the password, contact your administrator.
Note:
You can receive faxes on a computer and print from the printer at the same time. Contact your administrator for details on
the printer settings status.
Related Information
&“Receiving Faxes on a Computer” on page 162
&“Making Save to Computer Setting to Also Print on the Printer to Receive Faxes” on page 495
Canceling the Feature that Saves Incoming Faxes to the Computer
You can cancel saving faxes to the computer by using the FAX Utility.
For details, see Basic Operations in the FAX Utility help (displayed on the main window).
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Receiving Faxes on a Computer
>
Canceling the Feature that Saves
…
163
Note:
❏If there are any faxes that have not been saved to the computer, you cannot cancel the feature that saves faxes on the
computer.
❏You cannot change settings that have been locked by your administrator.
❏You can also change the settings on the printer. Contact your administrator for information on canceling settings to save
received faxes on the computer.
Related Information
&“Making Save to Computer Setting not to Receive Faxes” on page 496
&“Application for Conguring Fax Operations and Sending Faxes (FAX Utility)” on page 370
Checking for New Faxes (Windows)
By setting up a computer to save faxes received by the printer, you can check the processing status of received faxes,
and whether or not there are any new faxes using the fax icon on the Windows task bar. By setting up the computer
to display a notication when new faxes are received, a notication screen pops up near the Windows system tray,
and you can check the new faxes.
Note:
❏Received fax data saved to the computer is removed from the printer's memory.
❏You need Adobe Reader to view the received faxes saved as PDF les.
Using the Fax Icon on the Task Bar (Windows)
You can check for new faxes and the operation status by using the fax icon displayed on the Windows taskbar.
1. Check the icon.
❏: Standing by.
❏: Checking for new faxes.
❏: Importing new faxes is complete.
2. Right-click the icon, and then click View Receiving Fax Record.
e Receiving Fax Record screen is displayed.
3. Check the date and the sender in the list, and then open the le received as a PDF or TIFF.
Note:
❏Received faxes are automatically renamed using the following naming format.
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS_xxxxxxxxxx_nnnnn (Year/Month/Day/Hour/Minute/Second_sender’s number)
❏You can also open the received fax folder directly when you right-click the icon. For details, see Optional Settings in
the FAX Utility or see its help (displayed on the main window).
While the fax icon indicates that it is standing by, you can check for new faxes instantly by selecting Check new
faxes now.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Receiving Faxes on a Computer
>
Checking for New Faxes (Windows)
164
Using the Notication Window (Windows)
When you set to notify you the new faxes exist, a notication window is displayed near the task bar for each the
fax.
1. Check the notication screen displayed on your computer screen.
Note:
e notication screen disappears if no operation is performed for a given length of time. You can change the
notication settings such as the display time.
2. Click anywhere in the notication screen, except for the button.
e Receiving Fax Record screen is displayed.
3. Check the date and the sender in the le name, and then open the le received as a PDF or TIFF.
Note:
❏Received faxes are automatically renamed using the following naming format.
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS_xxxxxxxxxx_nnnnn (Year/Month/Day/Hour/Minute/Second_sender’s number)
❏You can also open the received fax folder directly when you right-click the icon. For details, see Optional Settings in
the FAX Utility or see its help (displayed on the main window).
Checking for New Faxes (Mac OS)
You can check for new faxes using one of the following methods. is is available only on computers set to "Save"
(save faxes on this computer).
❏Open the received fax folder (specied in Received Fax Output Settings.)
❏Open the Fax Receive Monitor and click Check new faxes now.
❏Notication that new faxes have been received
Select the Notify me of new faxes via a dock icon in the Fax Receive Monitor > Preferences in the FAX Utility,
the fax receive monitor icon on the Dock jumps to notify you that new faxes have arrived.
Open the Received Fax Folder from Received Fax Monitor (Mac OS)
You can open the save folder from the computer specied to receive faxes when selecting "Save" (save faxes on
this computer).
1. Click the received fax monitor icon on the Dock to open Fax Receive Monitor.
2. Select the printer and click Open folder, or double click the printer name.
3. Check the date and the sender in the le name, and then open the PDF le.
Note:
Received faxes are automatically renamed using the following naming format.
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS_xxxxxxxxxx_nnnnn (Year/Month/Day/Hour/Minute/Second_sender's number)
Information sent from the sender is displayed as the sender's number. is number may not be displayed depending on
the sender.
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
>
Receiving Faxes on a Computer
>
Checking for New Faxes (Mac OS)
165
Maintaining the Printer
Checking the Consumables Status....................................167
Improving Paper Feeding Problems for Paper Cassette...................... 167
Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality.............................168
Saving Power.................................................... 179
Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately..........................179
Moving and Transporting the Printer...................................187
Replacing Maintenance Rollers in Paper Cassette 1.........................189
Replacing Maintenance Rollers in Paper Cassette 2 to 4......................194
Checking the Consumables Status
You can check the approximate ink levels and the approximate service life of the maintenance box from the
printer's control panel. Select on the home screen.
1. Press the button on the control panel.
2. Select Printer Status.
e indicator on the far right indicates the available space in the maintenance box.
Note:
❏You can also check the approximate ink levels and the approximate service life of the maintenance box from the
computer. See the related information link below for details.
❏You can continue printing while the ink low message is displayed. Replace the ink supply units when required.
Related Information
&“Guide to Mac OS Printer Driver” on page 365
&“It is Time to Replace Ink Supply Units” on page 267
&“It is Time to Replace the Maintenance Box” on page 268
Improving Paper Feeding Problems for Paper Cassette
When paper is not fed from paper cassette correctly, clean the roller inside.
1. Pull out the paper cassette.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Improving Paper Feeding Problems for Paper Cassette
167
2. Wipe the roller using a so, moist cloth.
c
Important:
Using a dry cloth may damage the surface of the roller.
3. Insert the paper cassette.
Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality
Adjusting the Print Quality
If you notice a misaligned vertical lines, blurred images, or horizontal banding, adjust the print quality. If you want
to adjust the print quality per paper, make this setting rst. e setting value per paper is reset if you make this
setting aer adjusting per paper.
1. Select Settings on the home screen.
2. Select Maintenance > Print Quality Adjustment.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to check the printer to improve print quality.
If a message is displayed recommending that you clean the print head, perform print head cleaning.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to print the patterns for print head alignment, and then align the print head.
❏is pattern allows you to perform alignment if vertical ruled lines appear misaligned or your printouts
look blurry.
❏Find and enter the number for the pattern that has the least misaligned vertical line.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality
>
Adjusting the Print Quality
168
❏is pattern allows you to perform alignment if you see horizontal banding at regular intervals.
Find and enter the number for the least separated and overlapping pattern.
Checking and Cleaning the Print Head
If the nozzles are clogged, the printouts become faint, there is visible banding, or unexpected colors appear. If the
nozzles are severely clogged, a blank sheet will be printed. When print quality has declined, rst use the nozzle
check feature to check if the nozzles are clogged. If the nozzles are clogged, clean the print head.
c
Important:
❏Do not open the Ink supply unit cover or turn o the printer during head cleaning. If the head cleaning is
incomplete, you may not be able to print.
❏Head cleaning consumes ink and should not be performed more than necessary.
❏When ink is low, you may not be able to clean the print head.
❏If print quality has not improved aer repeating nozzle check and head cleaning 4 times, wait for at least 6 hours
without printing, and then run the nozzle check again and repeat the head cleaning if necessary. We recommend
turning o the printer by using the
P
button. If print quality has still not improved, run Power Cleaning.
❏To prevent the print head from drying out, do not unplug the printer while the power is on.
Related Information
&“Running Power Cleaning” on page 170
Checking and Cleaning the Print Head (Control Panel)
1. Select Settings on the home screen.
2. Select Maintenance > Print Head Nozzle Check.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to print the nozzle check pattern.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality
>
Checking and Cleaning the Print Head
169
4. Check the printed pattern to see if the print head nozzles are clogged.
❏A:
All lines are printed. Select . No further steps are needed.
❏B or close to B
Some nozzles are clogged. Select , and then select Print Head Cleaning on the next screen.
❏C or close to C
If most lines are missing or not printed, this indicates most nozzles are clogged. Run Power Cleaning. For
details, see "Related information" below.
5. When Print Head Cleaning is nished, print the nozzle check pattern again. Repeat cleaning and printing the
pattern until all lines are printed completely.
c
Important:
If print quality has not improved aer repeating nozzle check and head cleaning 4 times, wait for at least 6 hours
without printing, and then run the nozzle check again and repeat the head cleaning if necessary. We recommend
turning o the printer by using the
P
button. If print quality has still not improved, run Power Cleaning.
Related Information
&“Running Power Cleaning (Control Panel)” on page 171
Running Power Cleaning
e Power Cleaning feature may improve print quality in the following cases.
❏When the most nozzles are clogged.
❏When you performed the nozzle check and head cleaning 4 times and then waited for at least 6 hours without
printing, but print quality still did not improve.
Note:
e maintenance box reaches its capacity earlier by running this feature. Replace the maintenance box when the absorbing
capacity of the maintenance box has reached its limit.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality
>
Running Power Cleaning
170
Running Power Cleaning (Control Panel)
Read the instructions for Power Cleaning before running this feature.
1. Press the
P
button to turn o the printer.
2. While holding down the button and button, press the
P
power button until the power light ashes to
display the conrmation screen.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to run the Power Cleaning feature.
Note:
If you cannot run this feature, solve the problems that are displayed on the screen. Next, follow this procedure from step
1 to run this feature again.
4. Aer running this feature, run the nozzle check to make sure the nozzles are not clogged.
For details on how to run the nozzle check, see the related information below.
c
Important:
If print quality has not improved aer running Power Cleaning, wait for at least 6 hours without printing, and
then print the nozzle check pattern again. Run Print Head Cleaning or Power Cleaning again depending on the
printed pattern. If quality still does not improve, contact Epson support.
Related Information
&“Checking and Cleaning the Print Head” on page 169
Preventing nozzle clogging
Always use the power button when turning the printer on and o.
Check that the power light is o before you disconnect the power cord.
e ink itself can dry out if it is not covered. Just like placing a cap on a fountain pen or an oil pen to prevent it
from drying, make sure the print head is capped properly to prevent the ink from drying.
When the power cord is unplugged or a power outage occurs while the printer is in operation, the print head may
not be capped properly. If the print head is le as it is, it will dry out causing nozzles (ink outlets) to clog.
In these cases, turn the printer on and o again as soon as possible to cap the print head.
Aligning Ruled Lines
If vertical lines look misaligned, align the ruled lines.
1. Load A4-size plain paper in the printer.
2. Select Settings on the home screen.
3. Select Maintenance > Ruled Line Alignment.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to print an alignment pattern.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality
>
Aligning Ruled Lines
171
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to align the ruled lines. Find and enter the number for the pattern that has
the least misaligned vertical line.
Cleaning the Paper Path for Ink Smears
When the printouts are smeared or scued, clean the roller inside.
c
Important:
Do not use tissue paper to clean the inside of the printer. e print head nozzles may be clogged with lint.
1. Load A3-size plain paper in the paper source that you want to clean.
2. Select Settings on the home screen.
3. Select Maintenance > Paper Guide Cleaning.
4. Select the paper source, and then follow the on-screen instructions to clean the paper path.
Note:
Repeat this procedure until the paper is not smeared with ink. If the printouts are still smeared, clean the other paper
sources.
Cleaning the Scanner Glass
When the copies or scanned images are smeared, clean the scanner glass.
!
Caution:
Be careful not to trap your hand or ngers when opening or closing the document cover. Otherwise you may be
injured.
c
Important:
Never use alcohol or thinner to clean the printer. ese chemicals can damage the printer.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality
>
Cleaning the Scanner Glass
172
c
Important:
❏If the glass surface is stained with grease or some other hard-to-remove material, use a small amount of
glass cleaner and a so cloth to remove it. Wipe o all remaining liquid.
❏Do not press the glass surface too hard.
❏Be careful not to scratch or damage the surface of the glass. A damaged glass surface can decrease the scan
quality.
4. Return the cleaning cloth to the cleaning cloth holder.
5. Close the document cover.
Cleaning the ADF
When the copied or scanned images from the ADF are smeared or the originals do not feed in the ADF correctly,
clean the ADF.
c
Important:
Never use alcohol or thinner to clean the printer. ese chemicals can damage the printer.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality
>
Cleaning the ADF
174
6. Use the cleaning cloth to clean the part that is shown in the illustration.
c
Important:
❏If the glass surface is stained with grease or some other hard-to-remove material, use a small amount of
glass cleaner and a so cloth to remove it. Wipe o all remaining liquid.
❏Do not press the glass surface too hard.
❏Be careful not to scratch or damage the surface of the glass. A damaged glass surface can decrease the scan
quality.
7. Return the cleaning cloth to the cleaning cloth holder.
8. Close the document cover.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality
>
Cleaning the ADF
177
Adjusting Print Quality per Paper
Making the print quality settings per paper. Plain paper, recycle paper, high quality plain paper, preprinted paper,
color paper, letterhead paper, and thick paper is supported.
1. Load paper which you want to adjust the print quality in the printer.
2. Select Settings on the home screen on the printer's control panel.
3. Select Maintenance > Print Quality Adjustment per Paper.
If the item is not displayed, ick the screen upward to display it.
4. Select how to adjust from Print Pattern or Enter Set Value.
5. Select the paper type you loaded in the printer.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to align the print head.
is pattern aligns if you see horizontal banding at regular intervals.
Find and enter the number for the least separated and overlapping pattern.
Note:
When you print the paper that can be adjusted the quality, select Auto Select (plain papers) on Paper Type for printer
driver, so adjustment value is automatically applied.
7. Close the information screen.
If the print quality is not improved aer performing this adjustment, performPrint Quality Adjustment to set
the standard adjustment values, and then perform adjustments again according to the paper type.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality
>
Adjusting Print Quality per Paper
178
Saving Power
e printer enters sleep mode or turns o automatically if no operations are performed for a set period. You can
adjust the time before power management is applied. Any increase will aect the product's energy eciency. Please
consider the environment before making any change.
Depending on the location of purchase, the printer may have a feature that turns it o automatically if it is not
connected to the network for 30 minutes.
Saving Power (Control Panel)
1. Select Settings on the home screen.
2. Select General Settings > Basic Settings.
3. Do one of the following.
Note:
Your product may have the Power O Settings or Power O Timer feature depending on the location of purchase.
❏Select Sleep Timer or Power O Settings > Power O If Inactive or Power O If Disconnected, and then
make settings.
❏Select Sleep Timer or Power O Timer, and then make settings.
Related Information
&“Power O Settings:” on page 375
Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately
Connect your computer to the network and install the latest version of applications from the website. Log in to
your computer as an administrator. Enter the administrator password if the computer prompts you.
Installing the Applications Separately
Note:
When reinstalling an application, you need to uninstall it rst.
1. Make sure the printer and the computer are available for communication, and the printer is connected to the
Internet.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately
>
Installing the Applications Separ
…
179
2. Start EPSON Soware Updater.
e screenshot is an example on Windows.
3. For Windows, select your printer, and then click to check for the latest available applications.
4. Select the items you want to install or update, and then click the install button.
c
Important:
Do not turn o or unplug the printer until the update is complete. Doing so may result in malfunction of the
printer.
Note:
❏You can download the latest applications from the Epson website.
http://www.epson.com
❏If you use Windows Server operating systems, you cannot use Epson Soware Updater. Download the latest
applications from the Epson website.
Related Information
&“Application for Updating Soware and Firmware (EPSON Soware Updater)” on page 374
&“Uninstalling Applications” on page 183
Checking if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed - Windows
You can check if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed on your computer by using one of the following
methods.
Select Control Panel > View devices and printers (Printers, Printers and Faxes), and then do the following to
open the print server properties window.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately
>
Installing the Applications Separ
…
180
❏Windows Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server 2016/
Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2008 R2
Click the printer icon, and then click Print server properties at the top of the window.
❏Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008
Right-click on the Printers folder, and then click Run as administrator > Server Properties.
❏Windows XP/Windows Server 2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
From the File menu, select Server Properties.
Click the Driver tab. If your printer name is displayed in the list, a genuine Epson printer driver is installed on
your computer.
Related Information
&“Installing the Applications Separately” on page 179
Checking if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed - Mac OS
You can check if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed on your computer by using one of the following
methods.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately
>
Installing the Applications Separ
…
181
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and then
select the printer. Click Options & Supplies, and if the Options tab and Utility tab are displayed on the window, a
genuine Epson printer driver is installed on your computer.
Related Information
&“Installing the Applications Separately” on page 179
Installing a PostScript Printer Driver
Installing a PostScript Printer Driver - Windows
1. Start the installation process from one of the following options.
❏Use the soware disc supplied with the printer.
Insert the soware disc into the computer, access the following folder path, and then run SETUP64.EXE (or
SETUP.EXE).
Driver\PostScript\WINX64 (or WINX86)\SETUP\SETUP64.EXE ( or SETUP.EXE)
❏Use the website.
Access your printer page from the following website, download the PostScript printer driver, and then run
the execution le.
http://www.epson.eu/Support (Europe)
http://support.epson.net/ (outside Europe)
2. Select your printer.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
4. Select the connection method from the network connection or USB connection.
❏For network connection.
A list of available printers in the same network is displayed.
Select the printer you want to use.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately
>
Installing a PostScript Printer Driver
182
❏For USB connection.
Follow the on-screen instructions to connect the printer to the computer.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the PostScript printer driver.
Installing a PostScript Printer Driver - Mac OS
Download the printer driver from the Epson Support website, and then install it.
http://www.epson.eu/Support (Europe)
http://support.epson.net/ (outside Europe)
You need the IP address of the printer while installing the printer driver.
Select the network icon on the printer's home screen, and then select the active connection method to conrm the
printer's IP address.
Adding the Printer (for Mac OS Only)
1. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax).
2. Click +, and then select Add Other Printer or Scanner.
3. Select your printer, and then select your printer from the Use.
4. Click Add.
Note:
❏If your printer is not listed, check that it is correctly connected to the computer and that the printer is on.
❏For a USB, IP, or Bonjour connection, set the optional paper cassette unit manually aer adding the printer.
Uninstalling Applications
Log in to your computer as an administrator. Enter the administrator password if the computer prompts you.
Uninstalling Applications - Windows
1. Press the
P
button to turn o the printer.
2. Quit all running applications.
3. Open Control Panel:
❏Windows 10/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server 2016
Click on the start button, and then select Windows System > Control Panel.
❏Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012
Select Desktop > Settings > Control Panel.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately
>
Uninstalling Applications
183
❏Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server
2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
Click the start button and select Control Panel.
4. Open Uninstall a program (or Add or Remove Programs):
❏Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server
2016/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008
Select Uninstall a program in Programs.
❏Windows XP/Windows Server 2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
Click Add or Remove Programs.
5. Select the application you want to uninstall.
You cannot uninstall the printer driver if there is any print jobs. Delete or wait to be printed the jobs before
uninstalling.
6. Uninstall the applications:
❏Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server
2016/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008
Click Uninstall/Change or Uninstall.
❏Windows XP/Windows Server 2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
Click Change/Remove or Remove.
Note:
If the User Account Control window is displayed, click Continue.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Uninstalling Applications - Mac OS
1. Download the Uninstaller using EPSON Soware Updater.
Once you have downloaded the Uninstaller, you do not need to download it again each time you uninstall the
application.
2. Press the
P
button to turn o the printer.
3. To uninstall the printer driver or PC-FAX driver, select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers &
Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and then remove the printer from the enabled printers list.
4. Quit all running applications.
5. Select Go > Applications > Epson Soware > Uninstaller.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately
>
Uninstalling Applications
184
6. Select the application you want to uninstall, and then click Uninstall.
c
Important:
e Uninstaller removes all drivers for Epson inkjet printers on the computer. If you use multiple Epson inkjet
printers and you only want to delete some drivers, delete all of them rst, and then install the necessary printer
driver again.
Note:
If you cannot nd the application you want to uninstall in the application list, you cannot uninstall using the
Uninstaller. In this situation, select Go > Applications > Epson Soware, select the application you want to uninstall,
and then drag it to the trash icon.
Related Information
&“Application for Updating Soware and Firmware (EPSON Soware Updater)” on page 374
Updating Applications and Firmware
You may be able to clear certain problems and improve or add functions by updating the applications and the
rmware. Make sure you use the latest version of the applications and rmware.
1. Make sure that the printer and the computer are connected, and the computer is connected to the internet.
2. Start EPSON Soware Updater, and update the applications or the rmware.
c
Important:
Do not turn o the computer or the printer until the update is complete; otherwise, the printer may
malfunction.
Note:
If you cannot nd the application you want to update in the list, you cannot update using the EPSON Soware Updater.
Check for the latest versions of the applications from your local Epson website.
http://www.epson.com
Related Information
&“Application for Updating Soware and Firmware (EPSON Soware Updater)” on page 374
Updating the Printer's Firmware using the Control Panel
If the printer can be connected to the Internet, you can update the printer's rmware using the control panel. You
can also set the printer to regularly check for rmware updates and notify you if any are available.
You cannot change settings that have been locked by your administrator.
1. Select Settings on the home screen.
2. Select General Settings > System Administration > Firmware Update > Update.
Note:
Select Notication > On to set the printer to regularly check for available rmware updates.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately
>
Updating Applications and Firm
…
185
3. Select Start Checking.
e printer starts searching for available updates.
4. If a message is displayed on the LCD screen informing you that a rmware update is available, follow the on-
screen instructions to start the update.
c
Important:
❏Do not turn o or unplug the printer until the update is complete; otherwise, the printer may malfunction.
❏If the rmware update is not completed or is unsuccessful, the printer does not start up normally and
"Recovery Mode" is displayed on the LCD screen the next time the printer is turned on. In this situation, you
need to update the rmware again using a computer. Connect the printer to the computer with a USB cable.
While "Recovery Mode" is displayed on the printer, you cannot update the rmware over a network
connection. On the computer, access your local Epson website, and then download the latest printer
rmware. See the instructions on the website for the next steps.
Updating Firmware Using Web Cong
When the printer can connect to the Internet, you can update the rmware from Web Cong.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Device Management tab > Firmware Update.
2. Click Start, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
e rmware conrmation starts, and the rmware information is displayed if the updated rmware exists.
Note:
You can also update the rmware using Epson Device Admin. You can visually conrm the rmware information on the
device list. It is useful when you want to update multiple devices' rmware. See the Epson Device Admin guide or help for
more details.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Updating Firmware without Connecting to the Internet
You can download the device's rmware from Epson website on the computer, and then connect the device and the
computer by USB cable to update the rmware. If you cannot update over the network, try this method.
1. Access Epson website and download the rmware.
2. Connect the computer that contains the downloaded rmware to the printer by USB cable.
3. Double-click the downloaded .exe le.
Epson Firmware Updater starts.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately
>
Updating Applications and Firm
…
186
Moving and Transporting the Printer
!
Caution:
❏When carrying the printer, li it using a stable position. Liing the printer using an unstable position may result
in injury.
❏Because this printer is heavy, it should always be carried by four or more people when unpacking and
transporting.
❏When liing the printer, place your hands in the positions shown below. If you li the printer holding other
positions, the printer may fall or you may trap your ngers when placing the printer.
❏When carrying the printer, do not tilt it more than 10 degrees; otherwise the printer may fall.
Moving the Printer
!
Caution:
Do not attach the output tray to the ADF as it is unstable. If the printer moves unexpectedly while it is being moved,
you may be injured.
1. Turn o the printer by pressing the
P
button.
2. Make sure the power light turns o, and then unplug the power cord.
c
Important:
Unplug the power cord when the power light is o. Otherwise, the print head does not return to the home
position causing the ink to dry, and printing may become impossible.
3. Disconnect all cables such as the power cord and USB cable.
4. Make sure there is no external USB device inserted.
5. Remove all of the paper from the printer.
6. Make sure there are no originals on the printer.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Moving and Transporting the Printer
>
Moving the Printer
187
7. Remove the output tray.
8. Store the paper support.
9. Set the cover lock to the locked position. e cover lock prevents the ink supply unit cover from being opened.
e printer is ready to be moved.
See Related Information if you are installing any optional items.
Related Information
&“Moving the Printer While the Printer Stand is Attached” on page 326
&“Moving the Printer While the Paper Cassette Units are Attached” on page 333
Transporting the Printer
Follow the steps for moving the printer, and then pack the printer in its box using the protective materials.
c
Important:
❏When storing or transporting the printer, avoid tilting it, placing it vertically, or turning it upside down;
otherwise ink may leak.
❏Leave the ink supply units installed. Removing the ink supply units can dry out the print head and may prevent
the printer from printing.
❏Leave the maintenance box installed; otherwise ink may leak during transporting.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Moving and Transporting the Printer
>
Transporting the Printer
188
If print quality has declined the next time you print, clean and align the print head.
Related Information
&“Moving the Printer” on page 187
&“Checking and Cleaning the Print Head” on page 169
&“Aligning Ruled Lines” on page 171
Replacing Maintenance Rollers in Paper Cassette 1
ere are two places for replacing the maintenance rollers: on the back of the printer (two rollers) and on the paper
cassette (one roller).
1. Tur n o the printer by pressing the
P
button, and then unplug the power cord.
2. Remove the new maintenance rollers from their package.
c
Important:
❏e maintenance rollers for the paper cassette 1 and paper cassette 2 to 4 are dierent. Check the direction
of the arrow at the center of the maintenance rollers, and make sure the maintenance rollers are the ones for
paper cassette 1. If you attach the wrong rollers, the printer may not feed the paper.
❏Be careful not to stain the surface of the maintenance rollers. If dust collects on the surface of the
maintenance rollers, clean the rollers by using a so and moist cloth. Using a dry cloth may damage the
surface of the rollers.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Replacing Maintenance Rollers in Paper Cassette 1
189
6. Remove the cover inside the back of the printer.
7. Slide out the two used maintenance rollers, and remove them.
8. Insert two new maintenance rollers until they click into place.
Note:
Insert the maintenance rollers by rolling them so that you can insert them smoothly.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Replacing Maintenance Rollers in Paper Cassette 1
191
12. Release the lever of the paper cassette.
13. Slide the maintenance roller toward the lever, and then remove them by taking the sha out of the holder.
14. Insert the sha of the new maintenance roller into the hole in the holder, and then slide the sha on the lever
side along the slot while it is facing the at surface at the front.
15. Lock the lever.
16. Insert the paper cassette.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Replacing Maintenance Rollers in Paper Cassette 1
193
17. Turn on the printer, select Settings > Maintenance > Maintenance Roller Information>Reset Maintenance
Roller Counter, and then select the paper cassette in which you replaced the maintenance rollers.
Related Information
&“Maintenance Rollers Codes” on page 362
Replacing Maintenance Rollers in Paper Cassette 2 to
4
ere are two places for replacing the maintenance rollers: on the back of the printer (two rollers) and on the paper
cassette (one roller).
1. Turn o the printer by pressing the
P
button, and then unplug the power cord.
2. Remove the new maintenance rollers from their package.
c
Important:
❏e maintenance rollers for the paper cassette 1 and paper cassette 2 to 4 are dierent. Check the direction
of arrow on the center of the maintenance rollers, and make sure the maintenance rollers are the ones for
paper cassette 2 to 4. If you attach the wrong rollers, the printer may not feed the paper.
❏Be careful not to stain the surface of the maintenance rollers. If the dust collects on the surface of the
maintenance rollers, clean the rollers by using a so and moist cloth. Using a dry cloth may damage the
surface of the rollers.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Replacing Maintenance Rollers in Paper Cassette 2 to 4
194
3. Pull out the paper cassette for which you want to replace the rollers.
4. Turn the printer around, and then open the printer's rear cover.
5. Remove the screws by a screwdriver and remove the cover on the rear of inside the printer.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Replacing Maintenance Rollers in Paper Cassette 2 to 4
195
6. Slide out two used maintenance rollers, and remove both of them.
7. Insert two new maintenance rollers until they click into place.
Note:
Insert the maintenance rollers by rolling them so that you can insert them smoothly.
8. Fasten the screws to reattach the cover.
Maintaining the Printer
>
Replacing Maintenance Rollers in Paper Cassette 2 to 4
196
12. Insert the sha of the new maintenance roller into the hole in the holder, and then slide the sha on the lever
side along the slot while it is facing the at surface at the front.
13. Lock the lever.
14. Insert the paper cassette.
15. Turn on the printer, select Settings > Maintenance > Maintenance Roller Information > Reset Maintenance
Roller Counter, and then select the paper cassette in which you replaced the maintenance rollers.
Related Information
&“Maintenance Rollers Codes” on page 362
Maintaining the Printer
>
Replacing Maintenance Rollers in Paper Cassette 2 to 4
198
Solving Problems
e Printer Does Not Work as Expected.................................200
A Message is Displayed on the LCD Screen...............................264
Paper Gets Jammed................................................266
It is Time to Replace Ink Supply Units.................................. 267
It is Time to Replace the Maintenance Box...............................268
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor.....................269
Cannot Solve Problem Aer Trying All Solutions..........................288
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
The Printer Does Not Turn On or O
Power Does Not Turn On
e following causes can be considered.
The power cord is not plugged in properly to the electrical outlet.
Solutions
Make sure the power cord is securely plugged in.
The
P
button was not pressed for long enough.
Solutions
Hold down the
P
button for a little longer.
Power Does Not Turn O
The
P
button was not pressed for long enough.
Solutions
Hold down the
P
button for a little longer. If you still cannot turn o the printer, unplug the power cord.
To prevent the print head from drying out, turn the printer back on and turn it o by pressing the
P
button.
Printer Turns O During Use
The overcurrent protection function was activated.
Solutions
Unplug and plug in the power cord, and then turn the printer back on. If the problem cannot be cleared,
contact Epson support.
Power Turns O Automatically
The Power O Settings or Power O Timer feature is enabled.
Solutions
❏Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Power O Settings, and then disable the Power
O If Inactive and Power O If Disconnected settings.
❏Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings, and then disable the Power O Timer Setting.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
The Printer Does Not Turn On or O
200
Note:
Your product may have the Power O Settings or Power O Timer feature depending on the location of purchase.
Paper Does Not Feed or Eject Correctly
No Paper Feeds
e following causes can be considered.
The installation location is inappropriate.
Solutions
Place the printer on a at surface and operate in the recommended environmental conditions.
&“Environmental Specications” on page 414
Unsupported paper is being used.
Solutions
Use paper supported by this printer.
&“Available Paper and Capacities” on page 355
&“Unavailable Paper Types” on page 361
Paper handling is inappropriate.
Solutions
Follow paper handling precautions.
&“Paper Handling Precautions” on page 35
Too many sheets are loaded in the printer.
Solutions
Do not load more than the maximum number of sheets specied for the paper. For plain paper, do not
load above the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide.
&“Available Paper and Capacities” on page 355
The paper settings on the printer are incorrect.
Solutions
Make sure the paper size and paper type settings match the actual paper size and paper type loaded in the
printer.
&“Paper Size and Type Settings” on page 36
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Paper Does Not Feed or Eject Correctly
201
Paper slips when paper dust adheres to the roller.
Solutions
Clean the roller.
&“Improving Paper Feeding Problems for Paper Cassette” on page 167
Paper Feeds at a Slant
e following causes can be considered.
The installation location is inappropriate.
Solutions
Place the printer on a at surface and operate in the recommended environmental conditions.
&“Environmental Specications” on page 414
Unsupported paper is being used.
Solutions
Use paper supported by this printer.
&“Available Paper and Capacities” on page 355
&“Unavailable Paper Types” on page 361
Paper handling is inappropriate.
Solutions
Follow paper handling precautions.
&“Paper Handling Precautions” on page 35
The paper is loaded incorrectly.
Solutions
Load paper in the correct direction, and slide the edge guide against the edge of the paper.
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
The paper settings on the printer are incorrect.
Solutions
Make sure the paper size and paper type settings match the actual paper size and paper type loaded in the
printer.
&“Paper Size and Type Settings” on page 36
Paper slips when paper dust adheres to the roller.
Solutions
Clean the roller.
&“Improving Paper Feeding Problems for Paper Cassette” on page 167
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Paper Does Not Feed or Eject Correctly
202
Several Sheets of Paper are Fed at a Time
e following causes can be considered.
The installation location is inappropriate.
Solutions
Place the printer on a at surface and operate in the recommended environmental conditions.
&“Environmental Specications” on page 414
Unsupported paper is being used.
Solutions
Use paper supported by this printer.
&“Available Paper and Capacities” on page 355
&“Unavailable Paper Types” on page 361
Paper handling is inappropriate.
Solutions
Follow paper handling precautions.
&“Paper Handling Precautions” on page 35
The paper is moist or damp.
Solutions
Load new paper.
Static electricity is causing sheets of paper to stick to each other.
Solutions
Fan the paper before loading. If the paper still does not feed, load one sheet of paper at a time.
Too many sheets are loaded in the printer.
Solutions
Do not load more than the maximum number of sheets specied for the paper. For plain paper, do not
load above the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide.
&“Available Paper and Capacities” on page 355
The paper settings on the printer are incorrect.
Solutions
Make sure the paper size and paper type settings match the actual paper size and paper type loaded in the
printer.
&“Paper Size and Type Settings” on page 36
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Paper Does Not Feed or Eject Correctly
203
Paper slips when paper dust adheres to the roller.
Solutions
Clean the roller.
&“Improving Paper Feeding Problems for Paper Cassette” on page 167
Multiple sheets of paper feed at the same time during manual 2-sided printing.
Solutions
Remove any paper that is loaded in the paper source before you reload the paper.
Paper Does Not Feed Correctly After Replacing the Maintenance Rollers
The maintenance rollers may not have been replaced correctly.
Solutions
Check if they have been installed correctly.
Paper Out Error Occurs
Paper is not loaded in the center of the paper tray.
Solutions
When a paper out error occurs although paper is loaded in the paper tray, reload paper in the center of
the paper tray.
Original Does Not Feed in the ADF
e following causes can be considered.
Originals that are not supported by the ADF are being used.
Solutions
Use originals supported by the ADF.
&“ADF Specications” on page 406
The originals are loaded incorrectly.
Solutions
Load originals in the correct direction, and slide the ADF edge guides against the edges of the originals.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Paper Does Not Feed or Eject Correctly
204
Too many originals are loaded in the ADF.
Solutions
Do not load originals above the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the ADF.
The original slips when paper dust adheres to the roller.
Solutions
Clean the inside of the ADF.
&“Cleaning the ADF” on page 174
Originals are not detected.
Solutions
On the screen for copy or scan, or fax, check that the ADF icon is on. If it is o, place the originals again.
Paper is Not Stacked in Order
The lever on the right side of the output tray has not been pulled.
Solutions
If you pull the lever on the right side of the output tray, the problem may be improved, but the holding
capacity will be reduced.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Paper Does Not Feed or Eject Correctly
205
Paper is Ejected in an Unexpected Direction
Output documents for ling is disabled.
Solutions
If paper is ejected in an unexpected direction when landscape pages and portrait pages are mixed, or 2-
sided printing and 1-sided printing are mixed, enable the Output documents for ling setting in the
printer driver. is ejects pages in the same direction for easy ling.
❏Windows
Select Output documents for ling in Extended Settings on the Maintenance tab.
❏Mac OS
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print &
Fax), and then select the printer. Click Options & Supplies > Options (or Driver). Select On as the
Output documents for ling setting.
Cannot Print
Cannot Print from Windows
Make sure the computer and the printer are connected correctly.
e cause and solution to the problem dier depending on whether or not they are connected.
Checking the Connection Status
Use Epson Printer Connection Checker to check the connection status for the computer and the printer. You may
be able to solve the problem depending on the results of the check.
1. Double-click the Epson Printer Connection Checker icon on the desktop.
Epson Printer Connection Checker starts.
If there is no icon on the desktop, follow the methods below to start Epson Printer Connection Checker.
❏Windows 10
Click the start button, and then select Epson Soware > Epson Printer Connection Checker.
❏Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.
❏Windows 7
Click the start button, and then select All Programs > Epson Soware > Epson Printer Connection
Checker.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to check.
Note:
If the printer name is not displayed, install a genuine Epson printer driver.
“Checking if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed - Windows” on page 180
When you have identied the problem, follow the solution displayed on the screen.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Print
206
When you cannot solve the problem, check the following according to your situation.
❏e printer is not recognized over a network connection
“Cannot connect to a Network” on page 207
❏e printer is not recognized using a USB connection
“e Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Windows)” on page 209
❏e printer is recognized, but printing cannot be performed.
“Cannot Print Even ough a Connection has been Established (Windows)” on page 210
Cannot connect to a Network
e problem could be one of the following issues.
Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.
Solutions
Turn o the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.
Devices cannot receive signals from the wireless router because they are too far apart.
Solutions
Aer moving the computer or the smart device and the printer closer to the wireless router, turn o the
wireless router, and then turn it back on.
When changing the wireless router, the settings do not match the new router.
Solutions
Make the connection settings again so that they match the new wireless router.
&“When Replacing the Wireless Router” on page 291
The SSIDs connected from the computer or smart device and computer are dierent.
Solutions
When you are using multiple wireless routers at the same time or the wireless router has multiple SSIDs
and devices are connected to dierent SSIDs, you cannot connect to the wireless router.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Print
207
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.
A privacy separator on the wireless router is available.
Solutions
Most wireless routers have a privacy separator feature that blocks communication between connected
devices. If you cannot communicate between the printer and the computer or smart device even if they
are connected to the same network, disable the privacy separator on the wireless router. See the manual
provided with the wireless router for details.
The IP address is incorrectly assigned.
Solutions
If the IP address assigned to the printer is 169.254.XXX.XXX, and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP
address may not be assigned correctly.
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced on the printer’s control panel, and
then check the IP address and the subnet mask assigned to the printer.
Restart the wireless router or reset the network settings for the printer.
&“Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 291
There is a problem with the network settings on the computer.
Solutions
Try accessing any website from your computer to make sure that your computer's network settings are
correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the computer.
Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the computer for
details.
The printer has been connected by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy
Ecient Ethernet).
Solutions
When you connect the printer by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy Ecient
Ethernet), the following problems may occur depending on the hub or router that you are using.
❏Connection becomes unstable, the printer is connected and disconnected again and again.
❏Cannot connect to the printer.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Print
208
❏e communication speed becomes slow.
Follow the steps below to disable IEEE802.3az for the printer and then connect.
1. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.
2. When IEEE802.3az for the computer is enabled, disable it.
See the documentation provided with the computer for details.
3. Connect the computer and the printer with an Ethernet cable directly.
4. On the printer, print a network connection report.
“Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 309
5. Check the printer's IP address on the network connection report.
6. On the computer, access Web Cong.
Launch a Web browser, and then enter the printer's IP address.
“Running Web Cong on a Web Browser” on page 372
7. Select the Network Settings tab > Wired LAN.
8. Select OFF for IEEE 802.3az.
9. Click Next.
10. Click OK.
11. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.
12. If you disabled IEEE802.3az for the computer in step 2, enable it.
13. Connect the Ethernet cables that you removed in step 1 to the computer and the printer.
If the problem still occurs, devices other than the printer may be causing the problem.
The Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Windows)
e following causes can be considered.
The USB cable is not plugged into the electrical outlet correctly.
Solutions
Connect the USB cable securely to the printer and the computer.
There is a problem with the USB hub.
Solutions
If you are using a USB hub, try to connect the printer directly to the computer.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Print
209
There is a problem with the USB cable or the USB inlet.
Solutions
If the USB cable cannot be recognized, change the port, or change the USB cable.
You need to recongure the USB connection.
Solutions
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer. Right-click on the printer icon displayed on the computer,
and then select Remove Device. Next, connect the USB cable to the computer.
If you cannot use a USB cable, reset the USB connection by following the steps for changing the method
of connecting to a computer. See the related information link below for details.
&“Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 291
The printer is connected to a SuperSpeed USB port.
Solutions
If you connect the printer to a SuperSpeed USB port using a USB 2.0 cable, a communication error may
occur on some computers. In this case, re-connect the printer using one of the following methods.
❏Use a USB 3.0 cable.
❏Connect to a Hi-Speed USB port on the computer.
❏Connect to a SuperSpeed USB port other than the port that generated the communication error.
Cannot Print Even Though a Connection has been Established (Windows)
e following causes can be considered.
There is a problem with the software or data.
Solutions
❏Make sure that a genuine Epson printer driver (EPSON XXXXX) is installed. If a genuine Epson
printer driver is not installed, the available functions are limited. We recommend using a genuine
Epson printer driver.
❏If you are printing a large data size image, the computer may run out of memory. Print the image at a
lower resolution or a smaller size.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Print
210
❏If you have tried all of the solutions and have not solved the problem, try uninstalling and then
reinstalling the printer driver
&“Checking if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed - Windows” on page 180
&“Checking if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed - Mac OS” on page 181
&“Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately” on page 179
There is a problem with the printer's status.
Solutions
Click EPSON Status Monitor 3 on the printer driver's Maintenance tab, and then check the printer
status. You need to install EPSON Status Monitor 3 to enable this feature. You can download it from the
Epson website.
There is still a job waiting to be printed.
Solutions
Click Print Queue on the printer driver's Maintenance tab. If unnecessary data remains, select Cancel all
documents from the Printer menu.
The printer is pending or oine.
Solutions
Click Print Queue on the printer driver's Maintenance tab.
If the printer is oine or pending, clear the oine or pending setting from the Printer menu.
The printer is not selected as the default printer.
Solutions
Right-click the printer icon in Control Panel > View devices and printers (or Printers, Printers and
Faxes) and click Set as default printer.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Print
211
Note:
If there are multiple printer icons, see the following to select the correct printer.
Example)
USB connection: EPSON XXXX Series
Network connection: EPSON XXXX Series (network)
If you install the printer driver multiple times, copies of the printer driver may be created. If copies such
as "EPSON XXXX Series (copy 1)" are created, right-click the copied driver icon, and then click Remove
Device.
The printer port is not set correctly.
Solutions
Click Print Queue on the printer driver's Maintenance tab.
Make sure the printer port is set correctly as shown below in Property > Port from the Printer menu.
USB connection: USBXXX, Network connection: EpsonNet Print Port
If you cannot change the port, select Run as administrator on the Printer menu. If Run as
administrator is not displayed, contact your system administrator.
Printer Does Not Print While Using PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)
e following causes can be considered.
The Printing Language setting needs to be changed.
Solutions
Set the Printing Language setting to Auto or PS on the control panel.
A large number of jobs have been sent.
Solutions
In Windows, if a large number of jobs are sent, the printer may not print. Select Print directly to the
printer on the Advanced tab in the printer properties.
Suddenly the Printer Cannot Print over a Network Connection
e problem could be one of the following issues.
The network environment has been changed.
Solutions
When you have changed the network environment, such as the wireless router or provider, try making
network settings for the printer again.
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.
&“Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 291
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Print
212
Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.
Solutions
Turn o the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.
The printer is not connected to the network.
Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Connection Check, and then print the network
connection report. If the report shows that the network connection failed, check the network connection
report and then follow the printed solutions.
&“Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 309
There is a problem with the network settings on the computer.
Solutions
Try accessing any website from your computer to make sure that your computer's network settings are
correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the computer.
Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the computer for
details.
There is still a job waiting to be printed.
Solutions
Click Print Queue on the printer driver's Maintenance tab. If unnecessary data remains, select Cancel all
documents from the Printer menu.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Print
213
The printer is pending or oine.
Solutions
Click Print Queue on the printer driver's Maintenance tab.
If the printer is oine or pending, clear the oine or pending setting from the Printer menu.
The printer is not selected as the default printer.
Solutions
Right-click the printer icon in Control Panel > View devices and printers (or Printers, Printers and
Faxes) and click Set as default printer.
Note:
If there are multiple printer icons, see the following to select the correct printer.
Example)
USB connection: EPSON XXXX Series
Network connection: EPSON XXXX Series (network)
If you install the printer driver multiple times, copies of the printer driver may be created. If copies such
as "EPSON XXXX Series (copy 1)" are created, right-click the copied driver icon, and then click Remove
Device.
The printer port is not set correctly.
Solutions
Click Print Queue on the printer driver's Maintenance tab.
Make sure the printer port is set correctly as shown below in Property > Port from the Printer menu.
USB connection: USBXXX, Network connection: EpsonNet Print Port
If you cannot change the port, select Run as administrator on the Printer menu. If Run as
administrator is not displayed, contact your system administrator.
Cannot Print from Mac OS
Make sure the computer and the printer are connected correctly.
e cause and solution to the problem dier depending on whether or not they are connected.
Checking the Connection Status
Use EPSON Status Monitor to check the connection status for the computer and the printer.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Print
214
1. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and
then select the printer.
2. Click Options & Supplies > Utility > Open Printer Utility.
3. Click EPSON Status Monitor.
When the remaining ink levels are displayed, a connection has been successfully established between the computer
and the printer.
Check the following if a connection has not been established.
❏e printer is not recognized over a network connection
“Cannot connect to a Network” on page 215
❏e printer is not recognized using a USB connection
“e Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Mac OS)” on page 218
Check the following if a connection has been established.
❏e printer is recognized, but printing cannot be performed.
“Cannot Print Even ough a Connection has been Established (Mac OS)” on page 219
Cannot connect to a Network
e problem could be one of the following issues.
Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.
Solutions
Turn o the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.
Devices cannot receive signals from the wireless router because they are too far apart.
Solutions
Aer moving the computer or the smart device and the printer closer to the wireless router, turn o the
wireless router, and then turn it back on.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Print
215
When changing the wireless router, the settings do not match the new router.
Solutions
Make the connection settings again so that they match the new wireless router.
&“When Replacing the Wireless Router” on page 291
The SSIDs connected from the computer or smart device and computer are dierent.
Solutions
When you are using multiple wireless routers at the same time or the wireless router has multiple SSIDs
and devices are connected to dierent SSIDs, you cannot connect to the wireless router.
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.
A privacy separator on the wireless router is available.
Solutions
Most wireless routers have a privacy separator feature that blocks communication between connected
devices. If you cannot communicate between the printer and the computer or smart device even if they
are connected to the same network, disable the privacy separator on the wireless router. See the manual
provided with the wireless router for details.
The IP address is incorrectly assigned.
Solutions
If the IP address assigned to the printer is 169.254.XXX.XXX, and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP
address may not be assigned correctly.
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced on the printer’s control panel, and
then check the IP address and the subnet mask assigned to the printer.
Restart the wireless router or reset the network settings for the printer.
&“Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 291
There is a problem with the network settings on the computer.
Solutions
Try accessing any website from your computer to make sure that your computer's network settings are
correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the computer.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Print
216
Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the computer for
details.
The device connected to the USB 3.0 port causes radio frequency interference.
Solutions
When you connect a device to the USB 3.0 port on a Mac, radio frequency interference may occur. Try
the following if you cannot connect to wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) or if operations become unstable.
❏Place the device that is connected to the USB 3.0 port further away from the computer.
❏Connect to the SSID for the 5 GHz range.
See the following to connect the printer to the SSID.
&“Making Wi-Fi Settings by Entering the SSID and Password” on page 295
The printer has been connected by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy
Ecient Ethernet).
Solutions
When you connect the printer by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy Ecient
Ethernet), the following problems may occur depending on the hub or router that you are using.
❏Connection becomes unstable, the printer is connected and disconnected again and again.
❏Cannot connect to the printer.
❏e communication speed becomes slow.
Follow the steps below to disable IEEE802.3az for the printer and then connect.
1. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.
2. When IEEE802.3az for the computer is enabled, disable it.
See the documentation provided with the computer for details.
3. Connect the computer and the printer with an Ethernet cable directly.
4. On the printer, print a network connection report.
“Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 309
5. Check the printer's IP address on the network connection report.
6. On the computer, access Web Cong.
Launch a Web browser, and then enter the printer's IP address.
“Running Web Cong on a Web Browser” on page 372
7. Select the Network Settings tab > Wired LAN.
8. Select OFF for IEEE 802.3az.
9. Click Next.
10. Click OK.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Print
217
11. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.
12. If you disabled IEEE802.3az for the computer in step 2, enable it.
13. Connect the Ethernet cables that you removed in step 1 to the computer and the printer.
If the problem still occurs, devices other than the printer may be causing the problem.
The Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Mac OS)
e following causes can be considered.
The USB cable is not plugged into the electrical outlet correctly.
Solutions
Connect the USB cable securely to the printer and the computer.
There is a problem with the USB hub.
Solutions
If you are using a USB hub, try to connect the printer directly to the computer.
There is a problem with the USB cable or the USB inlet.
Solutions
If the USB cable cannot be recognized, change the port, or change the USB cable.
You need to recongure the USB connection.
Solutions
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer. Right-click on the printer icon displayed on the computer,
and then select Remove Device. Next, connect the USB cable to the computer.
If you cannot use a USB cable, reset the USB connection by following the steps for changing the method
of connecting to a computer. See the related information link below for details.
&“Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 291
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Print
218
The printer is connected to a SuperSpeed USB port.
Solutions
If you connect the printer to a SuperSpeed USB port using a USB 2.0 cable, a communication error may
occur on some computers. In this case, re-connect the printer using one of the following methods.
❏Use a USB 3.0 cable.
❏Connect to a Hi-Speed USB port on the computer.
❏Connect to a SuperSpeed USB port other than the port that generated the communication error.
Cannot Print Even Though a Connection has been Established (Mac OS)
e following causes can be considered.
There is a problem with the software or data.
Solutions
❏Make sure that a genuine Epson printer driver (EPSON XXXXX) is installed. If a genuine Epson
printer driver is not installed, the available functions are limited. We recommend using a genuine
Epson printer driver.
❏If you are printing a large data size image, the computer may run out of memory. Print the image at a
lower resolution or a smaller size.
❏If you have tried all of the solutions and have not solved the problem, try uninstalling and then
reinstalling the printer driver
&“Checking if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed - Windows” on page 180
&“Checking if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed - Mac OS” on page 181
&“Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately” on page 179
There is a problem with the status of the printer.
Solutions
Make sure the printer status is not Pause.
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax),
and then double-click the printer. If the printer is paused, click Resume.
User feature restrictions are enabled for the printer.
Solutions
e printer may not print when the user feature restriction is enabled. Contact your printer
administrator.
Printer Does Not Print While Using PostScript Printer Driver (Mac OS)
The Printing Language setting needs to be changed.
Solutions
Set the Printing Language setting to Auto or PS on the control panel.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Print
219
Suddenly the Printer Cannot Print over a Network Connection
e problem could be one of the following issues.
The network environment has been changed.
Solutions
When you have changed the network environment, such as the wireless router or provider, try making
network settings for the printer again.
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.
&“Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 291
Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.
Solutions
Turn o the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.
The printer is not connected to the network.
Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Connection Check, and then print the network
connection report. If the report shows that the network connection failed, check the network connection
report and then follow the printed solutions.
&“Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 309
There is a problem with the network settings on the computer.
Solutions
Try accessing any website from your computer to make sure that your computer's network settings are
correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the computer.
Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the computer for
details.
Cannot Print from Smart Device
Make sure the smart device and the printer are connected correctly.
e cause and solution to the problem dier depending on whether or not they are connected.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Print
220
Checking the Connection Status
Use Epson iPrint to check the connection status for the smart device and the printer.
See the following to install Epson iPrint if it is not already installed.
“Application for Printing Easily from a Smart Device (Epson iPrint)” on page 367
1. On the smart device, start Epson iPrint.
2. Check that the printer name is displayed on the home screen.
When the printer name is displayed, a connection has been successfully established between the smart device
and the printer.
If the following are displayed, a connection has not been established between the smart device and the printer.
❏Printer is not selected.
❏Communication error.
Check the following if a connection has not been established.
❏e printer is not recognized over a network connection
“Cannot connect to a Network” on page 221
Check the following if a connection has been established.
❏e printer is recognized, but printing cannot be performed.
“Cannot Print Even ough a Connection has been Established (iOS)” on page 223
Cannot connect to a Network
e problem could be one of the following issues.
Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.
Solutions
Turn o the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.
Devices cannot receive signals from the wireless router because they are too far apart.
Solutions
Aer moving the computer or the smart device and the printer closer to the wireless router, turn o the
wireless router, and then turn it back on.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Print
221
When changing the wireless router, the settings do not match the new router.
Solutions
Make the connection settings again so that they match the new wireless router.
&“When Replacing the Wireless Router” on page 291
The SSIDs connected from the computer or smart device and computer are dierent.
Solutions
When you are using multiple wireless routers at the same time or the wireless router has multiple SSIDs
and devices are connected to dierent SSIDs, you cannot connect to the wireless router.
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.
A privacy separator on the wireless router is available.
Solutions
Most wireless routers have a privacy separator feature that blocks communication between connected
devices. If you cannot communicate between the printer and the computer or smart device even if they
are connected to the same network, disable the privacy separator on the wireless router. See the manual
provided with the wireless router for details.
The IP address is incorrectly assigned.
Solutions
If the IP address assigned to the printer is 169.254.XXX.XXX, and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP
address may not be assigned correctly.
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced on the printer’s control panel, and
then check the IP address and the subnet mask assigned to the printer.
Restart the wireless router or reset the network settings for the printer.
&“Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 291
There is a problem with the network settings on the smart device.
Solutions
Try accessing any website from your smart device to make sure that your smart device's network settings
are correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the smart device.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Print
222
Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the smart device
for details.
Cannot Print Even Though a Connection has been Established (iOS)
e following causes can be considered.
Paper Setup Auto Display is disabled.
Solutions
Enable Paper Setup Auto Display in the following menu.
Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Paper Source Settings > Paper Setup Auto Display
AirPrint is disabled.
Solutions
Enable the AirPrint setting on Web Cong.
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Suddenly the Printer Cannot Print over a Network Connection
e problem could be one of the following issues.
The network environment has been changed.
Solutions
When you have changed the network environment, such as the wireless router or provider, try making
network settings for the printer again.
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.
&“Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 291
Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.
Solutions
Turn o the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Print
223
The printer is not connected to the network.
Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Connection Check, and then print the network
connection report. If the report shows that the network connection failed, check the network connection
report and then follow the printed solutions.
&“Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 309
There is a problem with the network settings on the smart device.
Solutions
Try accessing any website from your smart device to make sure that your smart device's network settings
are correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the smart device.
Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the smart device
for details.
Cannot Start Scanning
Cannot Start Scanning from Windows
Make sure the computer and the printer are connected correctly.
e cause and solution to the problem dier depending on whether or not they are connected.
Checking the Connection Status
Use Epson Printer Connection Checker to check the connection status for the computer and the printer. You may
be able to solve the problem depending on the results of the check.
1. Double-click the Epson Printer Connection Checker icon on the desktop.
Epson Printer Connection Checker starts.
If there is no icon on the desktop, follow the methods below to start Epson Printer Connection Checker.
❏Windows 10
Click the start button, and then select Epson Soware > Epson Printer Connection Checker.
❏Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.
❏Windows 7
Click the start button, and then select All Programs > Epson Soware > Epson Printer Connection
Checker.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to check.
Note:
If the printer name is not displayed, install a genuine Epson printer driver.
“Checking if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed - Windows” on page 180
When you have identied the problem, follow the solution displayed on the screen.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Start Scanning
224
When you cannot solve the problem, check the following according to your situation.
❏e printer is not recognized over a network connection
“Cannot connect to a Network” on page 207
❏e printer is not recognized using a USB connection
“e Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Windows)” on page 209
❏e printer is recognized, but scanning cannot be performed.
“Cannot Scan Even ough a Connection has been Correctly Established (Windows)” on page 228
Cannot connect to a Network
e problem could be one of the following issues.
Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.
Solutions
Turn o the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.
Devices cannot receive signals from the wireless router because they are too far apart.
Solutions
Aer moving the computer or the smart device and the printer closer to the wireless router, turn o the
wireless router, and then turn it back on.
When changing the wireless router, the settings do not match the new router.
Solutions
Make the connection settings again so that they match the new wireless router.
&“When Replacing the Wireless Router” on page 291
The SSIDs connected from the computer or smart device and computer are dierent.
Solutions
When you are using multiple wireless routers at the same time or the wireless router has multiple SSIDs
and devices are connected to dierent SSIDs, you cannot connect to the wireless router.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Start Scanning
225
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.
A privacy separator on the wireless router is available.
Solutions
Most wireless routers have a privacy separator feature that blocks communication between connected
devices. If you cannot communicate between the printer and the computer or smart device even if they
are connected to the same network, disable the privacy separator on the wireless router. See the manual
provided with the wireless router for details.
The IP address is incorrectly assigned.
Solutions
If the IP address assigned to the printer is 169.254.XXX.XXX, and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP
address may not be assigned correctly.
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced on the printer’s control panel, and
then check the IP address and the subnet mask assigned to the printer.
Restart the wireless router or reset the network settings for the printer.
&“Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 291
There is a problem with the network settings on the computer.
Solutions
Try accessing any website from your computer to make sure that your computer's network settings are
correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the computer.
Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the computer for
details.
The printer has been connected by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy
Ecient Ethernet).
Solutions
When you connect the printer by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy Ecient
Ethernet), the following problems may occur depending on the hub or router that you are using.
❏Connection becomes unstable, the printer is connected and disconnected again and again.
❏Cannot connect to the printer.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Start Scanning
226
❏e communication speed becomes slow.
Follow the steps below to disable IEEE802.3az for the printer and then connect.
1. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.
2. When IEEE802.3az for the computer is enabled, disable it.
See the documentation provided with the computer for details.
3. Connect the computer and the printer with an Ethernet cable directly.
4. On the printer, print a network connection report.
“Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 309
5. Check the printer's IP address on the network connection report.
6. On the computer, access Web Cong.
Launch a Web browser, and then enter the printer's IP address.
“Running Web Cong on a Web Browser” on page 372
7. Select the Network Settings tab > Wired LAN.
8. Select OFF for IEEE 802.3az.
9. Click Next.
10. Click OK.
11. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.
12. If you disabled IEEE802.3az for the computer in step 2, enable it.
13. Connect the Ethernet cables that you removed in step 1 to the computer and the printer.
If the problem still occurs, devices other than the printer may be causing the problem.
The Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Windows)
e following causes can be considered.
The USB cable is not plugged into the electrical outlet correctly.
Connect the USB cable securely to the printer and the computer.
There is a problem with the USB hub.
If you are using a USB hub, try to connect the printer directly to the computer.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Start Scanning
227
There is a problem with the USB cable or the USB inlet.
If the USB cable cannot be recognized, change the port, or change the USB cable.
You need to recongure the USB connection.
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer. Right-click on the printer icon displayed on the computer, and then
select Remove Device. Next, connect the USB cable to the computer.
If you cannot use a USB cable, reset the USB connection by following the steps for changing the method of
connecting to a computer. See the related information link below for details.
Related Information
&“Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 291
The printer is connected to a SuperSpeed USB port.
If you connect the printer to a SuperSpeed USB port using a USB 2.0 cable, a communication error may occur on
some computers. In this case, re-connect the printer using one of the following methods.
❏Use a USB 3.0 cable.
❏Connect to a Hi-Speed USB port on the computer.
❏Connect to a SuperSpeed USB port other than the port that generated the communication error.
Cannot Scan Even Though a Connection has been Correctly Established (Windows)
Scanning at a high resolution over a network.
Try scanning at a lower resolution.
Cannot Start Scanning from Mac OS
Make sure the computer and the printer are connected correctly.
e cause and solution to the problem dier depending on whether or not they are connected.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Start Scanning
228
Checking the Connection Status
Use EPSON Status Monitor to check the connection status for the computer and the printer.
1. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and
then select the printer.
2. Click Options & Supplies > Utility > Open Printer Utility.
3. Click EPSON Status Monitor.
When the remaining ink levels are displayed, a connection has been successfully established between the computer
and the printer.
Check the following if a connection has not been established.
❏e printer is not recognized over a network connection
“Cannot connect to a Network” on page 215
❏e printer is not recognized using a USB connection
“e Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Mac OS)” on page 218
Check the following if a connection has been established.
❏e printer is recognized, but scanning cannot be performed.
“Cannot Scan Even ough a Connection has been Correctly Established (Mac OS)” on page 233
Cannot connect to a Network
e problem could be one of the following issues.
Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.
Solutions
Turn o the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.
Devices cannot receive signals from the wireless router because they are too far apart.
Solutions
Aer moving the computer or the smart device and the printer closer to the wireless router, turn o the
wireless router, and then turn it back on.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Start Scanning
229
When changing the wireless router, the settings do not match the new router.
Solutions
Make the connection settings again so that they match the new wireless router.
&“When Replacing the Wireless Router” on page 291
The SSIDs connected from the computer or smart device and computer are dierent.
Solutions
When you are using multiple wireless routers at the same time or the wireless router has multiple SSIDs
and devices are connected to dierent SSIDs, you cannot connect to the wireless router.
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.
A privacy separator on the wireless router is available.
Solutions
Most wireless routers have a privacy separator feature that blocks communication between connected
devices. If you cannot communicate between the printer and the computer or smart device even if they
are connected to the same network, disable the privacy separator on the wireless router. See the manual
provided with the wireless router for details.
The IP address is incorrectly assigned.
Solutions
If the IP address assigned to the printer is 169.254.XXX.XXX, and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP
address may not be assigned correctly.
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced on the printer’s control panel, and
then check the IP address and the subnet mask assigned to the printer.
Restart the wireless router or reset the network settings for the printer.
&“Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 291
There is a problem with the network settings on the computer.
Solutions
Try accessing any website from your computer to make sure that your computer's network settings are
correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the computer.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Start Scanning
230
Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the computer for
details.
The device connected to the USB 3.0 port causes radio frequency interference.
Solutions
When you connect a device to the USB 3.0 port on a Mac, radio frequency interference may occur. Try
the following if you cannot connect to wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) or if operations become unstable.
❏Place the device that is connected to the USB 3.0 port further away from the computer.
❏Connect to the SSID for the 5 GHz range.
See the following to connect the printer to the SSID.
&“Making Wi-Fi Settings by Entering the SSID and Password” on page 295
The printer has been connected by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy
Ecient Ethernet).
Solutions
When you connect the printer by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy Ecient
Ethernet), the following problems may occur depending on the hub or router that you are using.
❏Connection becomes unstable, the printer is connected and disconnected again and again.
❏Cannot connect to the printer.
❏e communication speed becomes slow.
Follow the steps below to disable IEEE802.3az for the printer and then connect.
1. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.
2. When IEEE802.3az for the computer is enabled, disable it.
See the documentation provided with the computer for details.
3. Connect the computer and the printer with an Ethernet cable directly.
4. On the printer, print a network connection report.
“Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 309
5. Check the printer's IP address on the network connection report.
6. On the computer, access Web Cong.
Launch a Web browser, and then enter the printer's IP address.
“Running Web Cong on a Web Browser” on page 372
7. Select the Network Settings tab > Wired LAN.
8. Select OFF for IEEE 802.3az.
9. Click Next.
10. Click OK.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Start Scanning
231
11. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.
12. If you disabled IEEE802.3az for the computer in step 2, enable it.
13. Connect the Ethernet cables that you removed in step 1 to the computer and the printer.
If the problem still occurs, devices other than the printer may be causing the problem.
The Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Mac OS)
e following causes can be considered.
The USB cable is not plugged into the electrical outlet correctly.
Connect the USB cable securely to the printer and the computer.
There is a problem with the USB hub.
If you are using a USB hub, try to connect the printer directly to the computer.
There is a problem with the USB cable or the USB inlet.
If the USB cable cannot be recognized, change the port, or change the USB cable.
You need to recongure the USB connection.
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer. Right-click on the printer icon displayed on the computer, and then
select Remove Device. Next, connect the USB cable to the computer.
If you cannot use a USB cable, reset the USB connection by following the steps for changing the method of
connecting to a computer. See the related information link below for details.
Related Information
&“Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 291
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Start Scanning
232
The printer is connected to a SuperSpeed USB port.
If you connect the printer to a SuperSpeed USB port using a USB 2.0 cable, a communication error may occur on
some computers. In this case, re-connect the printer using one of the following methods.
❏Use a USB 3.0 cable.
❏Connect to a Hi-Speed USB port on the computer.
❏Connect to a SuperSpeed USB port other than the port that generated the communication error.
Cannot Scan Even Though a Connection has been Correctly Established (Mac OS)
Scanning at a high resolution over a network.
Try scanning at a lower resolution.
Cannot Start Scanning from Smart Device
Make sure the smart device and the printer are connected correctly.
e cause and solution to the problem dier depending on whether or not they are connected.
Checking the Connection Status
Use Epson iPrint to check the connection status for the smart device and the printer.
See the following to install Epson iPrint if it is not already installed.
“Application for Printing Easily from a Smart Device (Epson iPrint)” on page 367
1. On the smart device, start Epson iPrint.
2. Check that the printer name is displayed on the home screen.
When the printer name is displayed, a connection has been successfully established between the smart device
and the printer.
If the following are displayed, a connection has not been established between the smart device and the printer.
❏Printer is not selected.
❏Communication error.
Check the following if a connection has not been established.
❏e printer is not recognized over a network connection
“Cannot connect to a Network” on page 221
Check the following if a connection has been established.
❏e printer is recognized, but scanning cannot be performed.
“Cannot Print Even ough a Connection has been Established (iOS)” on page 223
Cannot connect to a Network
e problem could be one of the following issues.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Start Scanning
233
Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.
Solutions
Turn o the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.
Devices cannot receive signals from the wireless router because they are too far apart.
Solutions
Aer moving the computer or the smart device and the printer closer to the wireless router, turn o the
wireless router, and then turn it back on.
When changing the wireless router, the settings do not match the new router.
Solutions
Make the connection settings again so that they match the new wireless router.
&“When Replacing the Wireless Router” on page 291
The SSIDs connected from the computer or smart device and computer are dierent.
Solutions
When you are using multiple wireless routers at the same time or the wireless router has multiple SSIDs
and devices are connected to dierent SSIDs, you cannot connect to the wireless router.
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Start Scanning
234
A privacy separator on the wireless router is available.
Solutions
Most wireless routers have a privacy separator feature that blocks communication between connected
devices. If you cannot communicate between the printer and the computer or smart device even if they
are connected to the same network, disable the privacy separator on the wireless router. See the manual
provided with the wireless router for details.
The IP address is incorrectly assigned.
Solutions
If the IP address assigned to the printer is 169.254.XXX.XXX, and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP
address may not be assigned correctly.
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced on the printer’s control panel, and
then check the IP address and the subnet mask assigned to the printer.
Restart the wireless router or reset the network settings for the printer.
&“Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 291
There is a problem with the network settings on the smart device.
Solutions
Try accessing any website from your smart device to make sure that your smart device's network settings
are correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the smart device.
Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the smart device
for details.
Cannot Save Scanned Images to the Shared Folder
Messages are Displayed on the Control Panel
When error messages are displayed on the control panel, check the message itself or the following list to solve the
problems.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Start Scanning
235
Messages Solutions
DNS error. Check DNS settings. Cannnot connect to the computer. Check the following.
❏Make sure that the address in the contacts list on the printer and the address
of the shared folder are the same.
❏If the IP address of the computer is static and is set manually, change the
computer name in the network path to the IP address.
Example: \\EPSON02\SCAN to \\192.168.xxx.xxx\SCAN
❏Make sure that the computer is turned on and does not sleep. If the computer
sleeps, you cannot save scanned images to the shared folder.
❏Temporarily disable the computer's Firewall and security software. If this clears
the error, check the settings in the security software.
❏If Public network is selected as the network place, you cannot save the
scanned images to the shared folder. Set the forward settings for each port.
❏If you are using a laptop computer and the IP address is set as DHCP, the IP
address may change when reconnecting to the network. Obtain the IP address
again.
❏Make sure the DNS setting is correct. Contact your network administrator
about the DNS settings.
❏The computer name and the IP address may dier when the management
table of the DNS server is not updated. Contact your DNS server administrator.
Authentication error. Check the
authentication method, authenticated
account, and authenticated password.
Make sure the user name and the password are correct on the computer and the
contacts on the printer. Also, make sure that the password has not expired.
Communication error. Check the Wi-Fi/
network connection.
Cannot communicate with a network folder that is registered on the contacts list.
Check the following.
❏Make sure that Use Microsoft network sharing is enabled on the Web Cong.
Select Network > MS Network on the Web Cong.
❏Make sure that the address in the contacts list on the printer and the address
of the shared folder are the same.
❏Access rights for the user in the contacts list should be added on the Sharing
tab and the Security tab of the shared folder's properties. Also, the
permissions for the user should be set to "allowed".
The le name is already in use. Rename
the le and scan again.
Change the le name settings. Otherwise, move or delete the les, or change the
le name on the shared folder.
Scanned le(s) are too large. Only XX
page(s) have been sent. Check if the
destination has enough space.
There is not enough disk space on the computer. Increase the free space on the
computer.
Checking the Point where the Error Occurred
Solutions
When saving scanned images to the shared folder, saving process proceeds as following. You can then
check the point where the error occurred.
Items Operation Error Messages
Connecting Connect to the computer from the printer. DNS error. Check DNS settings.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Start Scanning
236
Items Operation Error Messages
Logging on to the
computer
Log on to the computer with the user name and
the password.
Authentication error. Check the
authentication method, authenticated
account, and authenticated password.
Checking the folder to
save
Check the network path of the shared folder. Communication error. Check the Wi-Fi/
network connection.
Checking the le name Check if there is a le with the same name as the
le you want to save in the folder.
The le name is already in use. Rename
the le and scan again.
Writing the le Write a new le. Scanned le(s) are too large. Only XX
page(s) have been sent. Check if the
destination has enough space.
Saving the Scanned Images Takes a Long Time
It takes a long time for the name resolution to correspond to the "Domain Name" and the "IP
Address".
Solutions
Check the following points.
❏Make sure the DNS setting is correct.
❏Make sure each DNS setting is correct when checking the Web Cong.
❏Make sure the DNS domain name is correct.
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
e following causes can be considered.
There are some problems in telephone wall jack.
Solutions
Check that the telephone wall jack works by connecting a phone to it and testing it. If you cannot make or
receive calls, contact your telecommunication company.
There are some problems in connecting to the telephone line.
Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Check Fax Connection on the control panel to run
the automatic fax connection check. Try the solutions printed on the report.
Communication error occurs.
Solutions
Select Slow(9,600bps) in Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Fax Speed on
the control panel.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
237
Connected to a DSL phone line without DSL lter.
Solutions
To connect to a DSL phone line, you need to use a DSL modem equipped with a built-in DSL lter, or
install a separate DSL lter to the line. Contact your DSL provider.
“Connecting to DSL or ISDN” on page 482
There are some problems in the DSL lter when you connect to a DSL phone line.
Solutions
If you can not send or receive fax, connect the printer directly to a telephone wall jack to see if the printer
can send a fax. If it works, the problem may be caused by the DSL lter. Contact your DSL provider.
Cannot Send Faxes
e following causes can be considered.
The connection line is set to PSTN in a facility where a private branch exchange (PBX) is
being used.
Solutions
Select PBX in Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Line Type on the control
panel.
Sending faxes without entering an access code in an environment in which a PBX is
installed.
Solutions
If your phone system requires an external access code to get an outside line, register the access code to the
printer, and enter # (hash) at the beginning of a fax number when sending.
The header information for outgoing faxes is not registered.
Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Header and set up the header
information. Some fax machines automatically reject incoming faxes that do not include header
information.
Your caller ID is blocked.
Solutions
Contact your telecommunication company to unblock your caller ID. Some phones or fax machines
automatically reject anonymous calls.
The recipient's fax number is wrong.
Solutions
Check that the recipient's number registered in your contacts list or that you entered directly using the
keypad is correct. Or, check with the recipient that the fax number is correct.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
238
The recipient's fax machine is not ready to receive faxes.
Solutions
Ask the recipient if the recipient's fax machine is ready to receive a fax.
Sending a fax accidently using the subaddress feature.
Solutions
Check if you accidentally sent a fax using the subaddress feature. If you select a recipient with a
subaddress from the contact list, the fax may be sent using the subaddress feature.
The recipient's fax machine is not capable of receiving faxes using the subaddress feature.
Solutions
When sending faxes using the subaddress feature, ask the recipient if their fax machine is capable of
receiving faxes using the subaddress feature.
The subaddress and password are wrong.
Solutions
When sending faxes using the subaddress feature, check that the subaddress and password are correct.
Check with the recipient that the subaddress and password match.
The data being sent is too large.
Solutions
You can send faxes at a smaller data size using one of the following methods.
❏When you send the fax in monochrome, enable Direct Send in Fax > Fax Settings > Fax Send
Settings.
“Sending Many Pages of a Monochrome Document (Direct Send)” on page 136
❏Using the connected phone
“Sending Faxes Dialing from the External Phone Device” on page 134
❏Using On Hook
“Sending Faxes Manually Aer Conrming the Recipient's Status” on page 133
❏Separating the originals
Cannot Send Faxes (When Optional Fax Boards Installed)
Attempted to send from a line port set to Receiving Only
Solutions
Send the fax from a line for which Transmission Setting By Line is set to Sending and Receiving or
Sending Only.
You can access Transmission Setting By Line by selecting Settings > General Settings >
Fax Settings > Basic Settings from the printer’s control panel.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
239
Cannot Receive Faxes
e following causes can be considered.
We also recommend checking the printer status in Job/Status, such as whether or not the printer is currently
receiving the fax.
Subscribing to a call forwarding service.
Solutions
If you have subscribed to a call forwarding service, the printer may not be able to receive faxes. Contact
the service provider.
The Receive Mode is set to Manual while an external phone device is connected to the
printer.
Solutions
If an external phone device is connected to the printer and is sharing a phone line with the printer, select
Settings >General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings, and then set Receive Mode to Auto.
The available memory of the inbox and the condential box is not enough.
Solutions
200 received documents have been saved in the inbox and the condential box in total. Delete the
unnecessary documents.
The computer that will save the received faxes is not turned on.
Solutions
When you have made settings to save received faxes to a computer, turn on the computer. e received
fax is deleted once it has been saved to the computer.
The subaddress and password are wrong.
Solutions
When receiving faxes using the subaddress feature, check that the subaddress and password are correct.
Check with the sender that the subaddress and password match.
The sender's fax number has been registered to the Rejection Number List.
Solutions
Make sure that the sender's number can be deleted from the Rejection Number List before deleting it.
Delete it from Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Rejection Fax > Edit
Blocked Number list. Or disable the Rejection Number List in Settings > General Settings > Fax
Settings > Basic Settings > Rejection Fax > Rejection Fax. Faxes sent from numbers that have not been
registered to this list are blocked when this setting is enabled.
The sender's fax number has not been registered in the contacts list.
Solutions
Register the sender's fax number to contact list. Or disable Unregistered Contacts in Settings > General
Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Rejection Fax > Rejection Fax. Faxes sent from numbers that
have not been registered to this list are blocked.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
240
The sender has sent the fax without header information.
Solutions
Ask the sender if header information is setup on their fax machine. Or, disable Fax Header Blank in
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Rejection Fax > Rejection Fax. Faxes that
do not include header information are blocked when this setting is enabled.
Cannot Receive Faxes (When Optional Fax Boards Installed)
Sender attempted to send a fax to a line port set to Sending Only
Solutions
Tell the sender the fax number for the line port for which Transmission Setting By Line is set to Sending
and Receiving or Receiving Only
You can access Transmission Setting By Line by selecting Settings > General Settings > Fax
Settings > Basic Settings from the printer’s home screen.
Cannot Send Faxes to a Specic Recipient
e following causes can be considered.
The recipient's machine takes a long time to answer.
Solutions
If the recipient machine does not pick up your call within 50 seconds aer the printer has nished
dialing, the call ends with an error. Dial using the (On Hook) feature or using a connected
telephone to check how long it takes before you hear a fax tone. If it takes more than 50 seconds, add
pauses aer the fax number to send the fax. Tap to enter the pause. A hyphen is entered as the pause
mark. One pause is about three seconds. Add multiple pauses as needed.
The Fax Speed setting registered in the contact list is wrong.
Solutions
Select the recipient from the contact list, and then select Edit > Fax Speed > Slow(9,600bps).
Cannot Send Faxes at a Specied Time
The printer's date and time is wrong.
Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Date/Time Settings, and then set the correct date
and time.
Cannot Save Received Faxes to a Memory Device
e following causes can be considered.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
241
The setting for saving received faxes to external memory is disabled.
Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings, and then enable Save to Memory
Device in each menu.
A memory device is not connected to the printer.
Solutions
Connect a memory device, in which you have created a folder to save faxes, to the printer. Once the faxes
are saved in the device, they are deleted from the printer's memory.
There is not enough free space in the device.
Solutions
Delete unnecessary data from the device to increase the amount of free space. Or, connect another device
that has enough free space.
The memory device is write protected.
Solutions
Check if the device is write protected.
Faxes Are Sent at the Wrong Size
e following causes can be considered.
The recipient's fax machine does not support A3 size.
Solutions
Before you send an A3 size document, ask the recipient if the recipient's machine supports A3 size. If you
see OK (Reduced Size) in the fax transmission report, the recipient's fax machine does not support A3
size. You can print a fax transmission report from Fax > (More) > Fax Report > Last Transmission.
The originals are not placed correctly.
Solutions
❏Make sure the original is placed correctly against the alignment marks.
❏If the edge of the scanned image is missing, move the original slightly away from the edge of the
scanner glass. You cannot scan the area within approximately 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) from the edge of the
scanner glass.
&“Placing Originals” on page 41
There is dust or dirt on the scanner glass.
Solutions
When scanning from the control panel and selecting auto scan area cropping function, remove any trash
or dirt from the scanner glass and document cover. If there is any trash or dirt around the original, the
scanning range expands to include it.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
242
“Cleaning the Scanner Glass” on page 172
&“Cleaning the Scanner Glass” on page 172
Cannot Receive A3 Size Faxes
e following causes can be considered.
The paper source setting is wrong.
Solutions
Check that the paper size setting of the paper source that contains A3 paper has been set to A3, and that
the paper source is set for use with the fax feature. Select Settings > General Settings >Printer Settings >
Paper Source Settings > Auto Select Settings > Fax, and then check the enabled paper source(s).
A3 is not selected in Receiving Paper Size.
Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings >Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Receiving Paper Size, and then
check that A3 is selected. is menu allows you to set the maximum size of fax that the printer can
receive.
Received Faxes Are Not Printed
e following causes can be considered.
An error has occurred in the printer such as a paper jam.
Solutions
Clear the printer error, and then ask the sender to resend the fax.
Printing received faxes is disabled under the current settings.
Solutions
Make settings to print received faxes in Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings >
Save/Forward Settings.
Cannot Send and Receive Faxes (Windows)
Make sure the computer and the printer are connected correctly. e cause and solution to the problem dier
depending on whether or not they are connected.
Checking the Connection Status
Use Epson Printer Connection Checker to check the connection status for the computer and the printer. You may
be able to solve the problem depending on the results of the check.
1. Double-click the Epson Printer Connection Checker icon on the desktop.
Epson Printer Connection Checker starts.
If there is no icon on the desktop, follow the methods below to start Epson Printer Connection Checker.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
243
❏Windows 10
Click the start button, and then select Epson Soware > Epson Printer Connection Checker.
❏Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.
❏Windows 7
Click the start button, and then select All Programs > Epson Soware > Epson Printer Connection
Checker.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to check.
Note:
If the printer name is not displayed, install a genuine Epson printer driver.
“Checking if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed - Windows” on page 180
When you have identied the problem, follow the solution displayed on the screen.
When you cannot solve the problem, check the following according to your situation.
❏e printer is not recognized over a network connection
“Cannot connect to a Network” on page 207
❏e printer is not recognized using a USB connection
“e Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Windows)” on page 209
❏e printer is recognized, but printing cannot be performed.
“Cannot Print Even ough a Connection has been Established (Windows)” on page 210
Cannot connect to a Network
e problem could be one of the following issues.
Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.
Solutions
Turn o the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
244
Devices cannot receive signals from the wireless router because they are too far apart.
Solutions
Aer moving the computer or the smart device and the printer closer to the wireless router, turn o the
wireless router, and then turn it back on.
When changing the wireless router, the settings do not match the new router.
Solutions
Make the connection settings again so that they match the new wireless router.
&“When Replacing the Wireless Router” on page 291
The SSIDs connected from the computer or smart device and computer are dierent.
Solutions
When you are using multiple wireless routers at the same time or the wireless router has multiple SSIDs
and devices are connected to dierent SSIDs, you cannot connect to the wireless router.
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.
A privacy separator on the wireless router is available.
Solutions
Most wireless routers have a privacy separator feature that blocks communication between connected
devices. If you cannot communicate between the printer and the computer or smart device even if they
are connected to the same network, disable the privacy separator on the wireless router. See the manual
provided with the wireless router for details.
The IP address is incorrectly assigned.
Solutions
If the IP address assigned to the printer is 169.254.XXX.XXX, and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP
address may not be assigned correctly.
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced on the printer’s control panel, and
then check the IP address and the subnet mask assigned to the printer.
Restart the wireless router or reset the network settings for the printer.
&“Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 291
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
245
There is a problem with the network settings on the computer.
Solutions
Try accessing any website from your computer to make sure that your computer's network settings are
correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the computer.
Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the computer for
details.
The printer has been connected by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy
Ecient Ethernet).
Solutions
When you connect the printer by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy Ecient
Ethernet), the following problems may occur depending on the hub or router that you are using.
❏Connection becomes unstable, the printer is connected and disconnected again and again.
❏Cannot connect to the printer.
❏e communication speed becomes slow.
Follow the steps below to disable IEEE802.3az for the printer and then connect.
1. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.
2. When IEEE802.3az for the computer is enabled, disable it.
See the documentation provided with the computer for details.
3. Connect the computer and the printer with an Ethernet cable directly.
4. On the printer, print a network connection report.
“Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 309
5. Check the printer's IP address on the network connection report.
6. On the computer, access Web Cong.
Launch a Web browser, and then enter the printer's IP address.
“Running Web Cong on a Web Browser” on page 372
7. Select the Network Settings tab > Wired LAN.
8. Select OFF for IEEE 802.3az.
9. Click Next.
10. Click OK.
11. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.
12. If you disabled IEEE802.3az for the computer in step 2, enable it.
13. Connect the Ethernet cables that you removed in step 1 to the computer and the printer.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
246
If the problem still occurs, devices other than the printer may be causing the problem.
The Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Windows)
e following causes can be considered.
The USB cable is not plugged into the electrical outlet correctly.
Solutions
Connect the USB cable securely to the printer and the computer.
There is a problem with the USB hub.
Solutions
If you are using a USB hub, try to connect the printer directly to the computer.
There is a problem with the USB cable or the USB inlet.
Solutions
If the USB cable cannot be recognized, change the port, or change the USB cable.
You need to recongure the USB connection.
Solutions
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer. Right-click on the printer icon displayed on the computer,
and then select Remove Device. Next, connect the USB cable to the computer.
If you cannot use a USB cable, reset the USB connection by following the steps for changing the method
of connecting to a computer. See the related information link below for details.
&“Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 291
The printer is connected to a SuperSpeed USB port.
Solutions
If you connect the printer to a SuperSpeed USB port using a USB 2.0 cable, a communication error may
occur on some computers. In this case, re-connect the printer using one of the following methods.
❏Use a USB 3.0 cable.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
247
❏Connect to a Hi-Speed USB port on the computer.
❏Connect to a SuperSpeed USB port other than the port that generated the communication error.
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes Even Though a Connection has been Correctly
Established (Windows)
The software is not installed.
Solutions
Make sure that the PC-FAX driver have been installed on the computer. e PC-FAX driver is installed
with FAX Utility. Follow the steps below to check if it is installed.
Make sure the printer (fax) is displayed in Devices and Printers, Printer, or Printers and Other
Hardware. e printer (fax) is displayed as "EPSON XXXXX (FAX)". If the printer (fax) is not displayed,
uninstall and then re-install the FAX Utility. See the following to access Devices and Printers, Printer, or
Printers and Other Hardware.
❏Windows 10
Click on the start button, and then select Windows System > Control Panel > View devices and
printers in Hardware and Sound.
❏Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Select Desktop > Settings > Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound or
Hardware.
❏Windows 7
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound
or Hardware.
❏Windows Vista
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > Printers in Hardware and Sound.
❏Windows XP
Click the start button, and select Settings > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Printers
and Faxes.
User authentication failed when a fax is sent from a computer.
Solutions
Set the user name and password in the printer driver. When sending a fax from a computer when the
security function that restrict users from using the printer's fax function is set, user authentication is
performed with the user name and password set in the printer driver.
There are some problems with fax connection and fax settings.
Solutions
Try the resolutions for fax connection and fax settings.
Cannot Send and Receive Faxes (Mac OS)
Make sure the computer and the printer are connected correctly. e cause and solution to the problem dier
depending on whether or not they are connected.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
248
Checking the Connection Status
Use EPSON Status Monitor to check the connection status for the computer and the printer.
1. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and
then select the printer.
2. Click Options & Supplies > Utility > Open Printer Utility.
3. Click EPSON Status Monitor.
When the remaining ink levels are displayed, a connection has been successfully established between the computer
and the printer.
Check the following if a connection has not been established.
❏e printer is not recognized over a network connection
“Cannot connect to a Network” on page 215
❏e printer is not recognized using a USB connection
“e Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Mac OS)” on page 218
Check the following if a connection has been established.
❏e printer is recognized, but printing cannot be performed.
“Cannot Print Even ough a Connection has been Established (Mac OS)” on page 219
Cannot connect to a Network
e problem could be one of the following issues.
Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.
Solutions
Turn o the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.
Devices cannot receive signals from the wireless router because they are too far apart.
Solutions
Aer moving the computer or the smart device and the printer closer to the wireless router, turn o the
wireless router, and then turn it back on.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
249
When changing the wireless router, the settings do not match the new router.
Solutions
Make the connection settings again so that they match the new wireless router.
&“When Replacing the Wireless Router” on page 291
The SSIDs connected from the computer or smart device and computer are dierent.
Solutions
When you are using multiple wireless routers at the same time or the wireless router has multiple SSIDs
and devices are connected to dierent SSIDs, you cannot connect to the wireless router.
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.
A privacy separator on the wireless router is available.
Solutions
Most wireless routers have a privacy separator feature that blocks communication between connected
devices. If you cannot communicate between the printer and the computer or smart device even if they
are connected to the same network, disable the privacy separator on the wireless router. See the manual
provided with the wireless router for details.
The IP address is incorrectly assigned.
Solutions
If the IP address assigned to the printer is 169.254.XXX.XXX, and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP
address may not be assigned correctly.
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced on the printer’s control panel, and
then check the IP address and the subnet mask assigned to the printer.
Restart the wireless router or reset the network settings for the printer.
&“Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 291
There is a problem with the network settings on the computer.
Solutions
Try accessing any website from your computer to make sure that your computer's network settings are
correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the computer.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
250
Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the computer for
details.
The printer has been connected by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy
Ecient Ethernet).
Solutions
When you connect the printer by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy Ecient
Ethernet), the following problems may occur depending on the hub or router that you are using.
❏Connection becomes unstable, the printer is connected and disconnected again and again.
❏Cannot connect to the printer.
❏e communication speed becomes slow.
Follow the steps below to disable IEEE802.3az for the printer and then connect.
1. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.
2. When IEEE802.3az for the computer is enabled, disable it.
See the documentation provided with the computer for details.
3. Connect the computer and the printer with an Ethernet cable directly.
4. On the printer, print a network connection report.
“Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 309
5. Check the printer's IP address on the network connection report.
6. On the computer, access Web Cong.
Launch a Web browser, and then enter the printer's IP address.
“Running Web Cong on a Web Browser” on page 372
7. Select the Network Settings tab > Wired LAN.
8. Select OFF for IEEE 802.3az.
9. Click Next.
10. Click OK.
11. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.
12. If you disabled IEEE802.3az for the computer in step 2, enable it.
13. Connect the Ethernet cables that you removed in step 1 to the computer and the printer.
If the problem still occurs, devices other than the printer may be causing the problem.
The Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Mac OS)
e following causes can be considered.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
251
The USB cable is not plugged into the electrical outlet correctly.
Solutions
Connect the USB cable securely to the printer and the computer.
There is a problem with the USB hub.
Solutions
If you are using a USB hub, try to connect the printer directly to the computer.
There is a problem with the USB cable or the USB inlet.
Solutions
If the USB cable cannot be recognized, change the port, or change the USB cable.
You need to recongure the USB connection.
Solutions
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer. Right-click on the printer icon displayed on the computer,
and then select Remove Device. Next, connect the USB cable to the computer.
If you cannot use a USB cable, reset the USB connection by following the steps for changing the method
of connecting to a computer. See the related information link below for details.
&“Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 291
The printer is connected to a SuperSpeed USB port.
Solutions
If you connect the printer to a SuperSpeed USB port using a USB 2.0 cable, a communication error may
occur on some computers. In this case, re-connect the printer using one of the following methods.
❏Use a USB 3.0 cable.
❏Connect to a Hi-Speed USB port on the computer.
❏Connect to a SuperSpeed USB port other than the port that generated the communication error.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
252
Cannot Send or Receive Even Though a Connection has been Correctly Established
(Mac OS)
The software is not installed.
Solutions
Make sure that the PC-FAX driver have been installed on the computer. e PC-FAX driver is installed
with FAX Utility. Follow the steps below to check if it is installed.
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax),
and then make sure the printer (fax) is displayed. e printer (fax) is displayed as "FAX XXXX (USB)" or
"FAX XXXX (IP)". If the printer (fax) is not displayed, click [+] and then register the printer (fax).
PC-FAX driver is paused.
Solutions
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax),
and then double-click the printer (fax). If the printer is paused, click Resume (or Resume Printer).
User authentication failed when a fax is sent from a computer.
Solutions
Set the user name and password in the printer driver. When sending a fax from a computer when the
security function that restrict users from using the printer's fax function is set, user authentication is
performed with the user name and password set in the printer driver.
There are some problems with fax connection and fax settings.
Solutions
Try the resolutions for fax connection and fax settings.
Error Code is Displayed on the Status Menu
If a job does not complete successfully, check the error code displayed on the history of each job. You can check the
error code by pressing the button, and then selecting Job Status. See the following table to nd the problem and
its solution.
Code Problem Solution
001 The product was turned o by a power failure. -
101 The memory is full. Try the methods below to reduce the size of the print
job.
❏Lower the print quality and the resolution.
❏Change the format setting.
❏Reduce the number of images, letters or fonts
used in the print job.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Error Code is Displayed on the Status Menu
253
Code Problem Solution
102 Collated printing has failed due to a lack of available
memory.
❏Select Settings > General Settings > System
Administration > Clear Internal Memory Data
> PDL Font, Macro, and then clear the fonts and
the macros that you have downloaded.
❏Try the methods below to reduce the size of the
print job. If you do not want to use these
methods, try printing one copy at a time.
❏Lower the print quality and the
resolution.
❏Change the format setting.
❏Reduce the number of images, letters or
fonts used in the print job.
103 Printing quality has been lowered due to a lack of
available memory.
If you do not want to lower the print quality, try the
following methods to reduce the size of the print job.
❏Change the format setting.
❏Reduce the number of images, letters or fonts
used in the print job.
104 Reverse printing has failed due to a lack of available
memory.
❏Select Settings > General Settings > System
Administration > Clear Internal Memory Data
> PDL Font, Macro, and then clear the fonts and
the macros that you have downloaded.
❏If you want to print in reverse, try the following
methods to reduce the size of the print job.
❏Lower the print quality and the
resolution.
❏Change the format setting.
❏Reduce the number of images, letters or
fonts used in the print job.
106 Cannot print from the computer due to the access
control settings.
Contact your printer administrator.
107 User authentication failed. The job has been
canceled.
❏Make sure that the user name and password are
correct.
❏Select Settings > General Settings > System
Administration > Security Settings > Access
Control. Enable the user restriction function, and
then allow the job without an authentication
information.
108 Condential job data was deleted when the printer
was turned o.
-
109 The received fax was already deleted. -
110 The job was printed on one side only because the
paper loaded does not support double sided
printing.
If you want to perform 2-sided printing, load paper
that supports 2-sided printing.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Error Code is Displayed on the Status Menu
254
Code Problem Solution
111 Available memory is running low. Try the methods below to reduce the size of the print
job.
❏Lower the print quality and the resolution.
❏Change the format setting.
❏Reduce the number of images, letters or fonts
used in the print job.
120 Cannot communicate with the server that is
connected using an open platform.
Make sure there are no errors on the server or the
network.
201 The memory is full. ❏Print received faxes from Job Status in Job/
Status .
❏Delete received faxes saved in the inbox from Job
Status in Job/Status.
❏If you are sending a monochrome fax to a single
destination, you can send it by using Direct Send.
❏Divide your originals in two or more to send them
in several batches.
202 The line was disconnected by the recipient machine. Wait for a while and then try again.
203 The product cannot detect the dial tone. ❏Make sure that the phone cable is connected
correctly and the phone line is working.
❏When the printer is connected to the PBX or the
terminal adapter, change the Line Type setting to
PBX.
❏Select Settings > General Settings > Fax
Settings > Basic Settings > Dial Tone
Detection, and then disable the dial tone setting.
204 The recipient machine is busy. ❏Wait for a while and then try again.
❏Check the recipient's fax number.
205 The recipient machine does not answer. Wait for a while and then try again.
206 The phone cable is incorrectly connected to the LINE
and EXT. port of the product.
Check the connection of the LINE port and the EXT.
port of the printer.
207 The product is not connected to the phone line. Connect the phone cable to the phone line.
208 The fax could not be sent to some of the specied
recipients.
Print a Fax Log or Last Transmission report for
previous faxes from Fax Report in the Fax mode to
check the failed destination. When the Save Failure
Data setting is enabled, you can resend a fax from
Job Status in Job/Status.
301 There is not enough storage space available to save
the data in the memory device.
❏Increase the storage space in the memory device.
❏Reduce the number of documents.
❏Lower the scanning resolution or increase the
compression ratio to reduce the size of the
scanned image.
302 The memory device is write-protected. Disable write protection on the memory device.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Error Code is Displayed on the Status Menu
255
Code Problem Solution
303 No folder has been created to save the scanned
image.
Insert another memory device.
304 The memory device has been removed. Reinsert the memory device.
305 An error occurred while saving the data to the
memory device.
If the external device is accessed from a computer,
wait for a while and then try again.
306 The memory is full. Wait until other ongoing jobs are nished.
311 A DNS error has occurred. ❏Select Settings > General Settings > Network
Settings > Advanced > TCP/IP, and then check
the DNS settings.
❏Check the DNS settings for the server, the
computer, or the access point.
312 An authentication error has occurred. Select Settings > General Settings > Network
Settings > Advanced > Email Server > Server
Settings, and then check the server settings.
313 A communication error has occurred. ❏Print a network connection report to check if the
printer is connected to the network.
❏Select Settings > General Settings > Network
Settings > Advanced > Email Server > Server
Settings to check the email server settings. You
can check the cause of the error by running
connection check.
❏The authentication method of the settings and
the email server may not match. When you select
O as the authentication method, make sure the
authentication method of the email server is set
to None.
314 The data size exceeds the maximum size for attached
les.
❏Increase the Attached File Max Size setting in
the scan settings.
❏Lower the scanning resolution or increase the
compression ratio to reduce the size of the
scanned image.
315 The memory is full. Retry after other ongoing jobs are nished.
316 A mail encryption error has occurred. ❏Make sure that the encryption certicate setting
is correct.
❏Make sure that the printer's time setting is correct.
317 A mail signature error has occurred. ❏Make sure that the signing certicate setting is
correct.
❏Make sure that the printer's time setting is correct.
321 A DNS error has occurred. ❏Select Settings > General Settings > Network
Settings > Advanced > TCP/IP, and then check
the DNS settings.
❏Check the DNS settings for the server, the
computer, or the access point.
322 An authentication error has occurred. Check the Location settings.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Error Code is Displayed on the Status Menu
256
Code Problem Solution
323 A communication error has occurred. ❏Check the Location settings.
❏Print a network connection report to check if the
printer is connected to the network.
324 A le with the same name already exists in the
specied folder.
❏Delete the le with the same name.
❏Change the le name prex in File Settings.
325
326
There is not enough storage space available in the
specied folder.
❏Increase the storage space in the specied folder.
❏Reduce the number of documents.
❏Lower the scanning resolution or increase the
compression ratio to reduce the size of the
scanned image.
327 The memory is full. Wait until other ongoing jobs are nished.
328 The destination was wrong or the destination does
not exist.
Check the Location settings.
330 An FTPS/FTPS secure connection error has occurred. ❏Check the location in the destination settings.
❏Run Web Cong, and then update the root
certicate.
❏Run Web Cong, and then import or update the
CA certicate.
If the error cannot be cleared, set the certicate
verication to o in the destination settings.
331 A communication error occurred while acquiring the
destination list.
Print a network connection report to check if the
printer is connected to the network.
332 There is not enough storage space available to save
the scanned image in the destination storage.
Reduce the number of documents.
333 The destination could not be found because the
destination information was uploaded to the server
before sending the scanned image.
Select the destination again.
334 An error occurred while sending the scanned image. -
341 A communication error has occurred. ❏Check the connections for the printer and the
computer. If you are connecting over a network,
print a network connection report to check if the
printer is connected to the network.
❏Make sure that Document Capture Pro is installed
on the computer.
350 An FTPS/HTTPS certicate error has occurred. ❏Make sure that the date/time and time dierence
settings are correct.
❏Run Web Cong, and then update the root
certicate.
❏Run Web Cong, and then import or update the
CA certicate.
If the error cannot be cleared, set the certicate
verication to o in the destination settings.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Error Code is Displayed on the Status Menu
257
Code Problem Solution
401 There is not enough storage space available to save
the data in the memory device.
Increase the storage space in the memory device.
402 The memory device is write-protected. Disable write protection on the memory device.
404 The memory device has been removed. Reinsert the memory device.
405 An error occurred while saving the data to the
memory device.
❏Reinsert the memory device.
❏Use a dierent memory device on which you have
created a folder using the Create a folder to save
fax data function.
411 A DNS error has occurred. ❏Select Settings > General Settings > Network
Settings > Advanced > TCP/IP, and then check
the DNS settings.
❏Check the DNS settings for the server, the
computer, or the access point.
412 An authentication error has occurred. Select Settings > General Settings > Network
Settings > Advanced > Email Server > Server
Settings, and then check the server settings.
413 A communication error has occurred. ❏Select Settings > General Settings > Network
Settings > Advanced > Email Server > Server
Settings to check the email server settings. You
can check the cause of the error by running
connection check.
❏The authentication method of the settings and
the email server may not match. When you select
O as the authentication method, make sure the
authentication method of the email server is set
to None.
❏Print a network connection report to check if the
printer is connected to the network.
421 A DNS error has occurred. ❏Select Settings > General Settings > Network
Settings > Advanced > TCP/IP, and then check
the DNS settings.
❏Check the DNS settings for the server, the
computer, or the access point.
422 An authentication error has occurred. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings >
Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings, and
then check the settings of the folder selected in
Save/Forward Destination.
423 A communication error has occurred. ❏Print a network connection report to check if the
printer is connected to the network.
❏Select Settings > General Settings > Fax
Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward
Settings, and then check the settings of the
folder selected in Save/Forward Destination.
425 There is not enough storage space available in the
forwarding destination folder.
Increase the storage space in the forwarding
destination folder.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Error Code is Displayed on the Status Menu
258
Code Problem Solution
428 The destination was wrong or the destination does
not exist.
Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings >
Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings, and
then check the settings of the folder selected in
Save/Forward Destination.
Cannot Operate the Printer as Expected
Operations are Slow
Printing Is Too Slow
e following causes can be considered.
Unnecessary applications are running.
Solutions
Close any unnecessary applications on your computer or smart device.
The print quality is set to high.
Solutions
Lower the quality setting.
Bidirectional printing is disabled.
Solutions
Enable the bidirectional (or high speed) setting. When this setting is enabled, the print head prints while
moving in both directions, and the printing speed increases.
❏Control panel
Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings, and then enable Bidirectional.
❏Windows
Select Bidirectional Printing on the printer driver's More Options tab.
❏Mac OS
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print
&Fax), and then select the printer. Click Options & Supplies > Options (or Driver). Select On as the
Bidirectional Printing setting.
Quiet Mode is enabled.
Solutions
Disable Quiet Mode. e printing speed slows down when the printer is running in Quiet Mode.
❏Control panel
Select on the home screen, and then select O.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Operate the Printer as Expected
259
❏Windows
Select O as the Quiet Mode setting on the printer driver's More Options tab.
❏Mac OS
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print &
Fax), and then select the printer. Click Options & Supplies > Options (or Driver). Select O as the
Quiet Mode setting.
Drying takes a while for 2-sided printing.
Solutions
For 2-sided printing, one side of paper is printed and dried, and then the other side is printed. Because
the drying time diers depending on the environment, such as temperature or humidity, or the print data,
the printing speed may be slower.
Printing Slows Down Dramatically During Continuous Printing
The function that prevents the printer mechanism from overheating and being damaged is
operating.
Solutions
You can continue printing. To return to normal printing speed, leave the printer idle for at least 30
minutes. Printing speed does not return to normal if the power is o.
Printing Is Too Slow While Using PostScript Printer Driver
The Print quality setting is high.
Solutions
Set the Print Quality setting to Fast in the printer driver.
Scanning Speed Is Slow
Scanning at a high resolution.
Solutions
Try scanning at a lower resolution.
LCD Screen Gets Dark
The printer is in sleep mode.
Solutions
Tap anywhere on the LCD screen to return it to its former state.
Touch Screen Does Not Respond
e following causes can be considered.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Operate the Printer as Expected
260
A protective sheet has been stuck on the touch screen.
Solutions
If you stick a protective sheet on the touch screen, the optical touch screen may not respond. Remove the
sheet.
The screen is smeared.
Solutions
Turn o the printer, and then wipe the screen using a so, dry cloth. If the screen is smeared, it may not
respond.
Cannot Operate from the Control Panel
When the user feature restriction is enabled, a user ID and password are required to print.
Solutions
If you do not know the password, contact your printer administrator.
"x" is Displayed on the Screen and you Cannot Select Photos
The image le is not supported.
Solutions
"x" is displayed on the LCD screen when the image le is not supported by the product. Use les
supported by the product.
&“Supported Data Specications” on page 413
Printing is Paused
The covers of the printer are open.
Solutions
Close the covers if you have opened them during printing.
Memory Device Is not Recognized
The memory device is set to disabled.
Solutions
On the control panel, select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Memory Device Interface,
and the enable the memory device.
Cannot Save Data to a Memory Device
e following causes can be considered.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Operate the Printer as Expected
261
The memory device is write-protected.
Solutions
Disable write protection on the memory device.
There is not enough free space on the memory device.
Solutions
Delete unnesesary data or insert another memory device.
Operation Sounds Are Loud
Quiet Mode is disabled on the printer.
Solutions
If operations sounds are too loud, enable Quiet Mode. Enabling this feature may reduce printing speed.
❏Control panel
Select on the home screen, and then select On.
❏Windows
Select On as the Quiet Mode on the printer driver's More Options tab.
❏Mac OS
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print &
Fax), and then select the printer. Click Options & Supplies > Options (or Driver). Select On as the
Quiet Mode setting.
The Date and Time Are Incorrect
Error occurred in power supply.
Solutions
Aer a power failure caused by a lightning strike or if the power is le o for a long time, the clock may
show the wrong time. Set the date and the time correctly in Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings
> Date/Time Settings on the control panel.
The Root Certicate Needs to be Updated
The root certicate has expired.
Solutions
Run Web Cong, and then update the root certicate.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Operate the Printer as Expected
262
Cannot Cancel Printing from a Computer Running Mac OS X v10.6.8
There is a problem with your AirPrint setup.
Solutions
Run Web Cong, and then select Port9100 as the Top Priority Protocol setting in AirPrint Setup. Select
System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), remove
the printer, and then add the printer again.
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Copies are Made or Faxes are Sent Unintentionally
Foreign objects are touching the optical touch panel.
Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Wake from Sle ep, and then turn o Wake with
LCD Screen Touch. e printer will not return from sleep mode (power saving) until you press the
P
button.
Sender's Fax Number Not Displayed
The sender's fax number is not set to the sender's machine.
Solutions
e sender may not have set the fax number. Contact the sender.
Sender's Fax Number Displayed on Received Faxes is Wrong
The sender's fax number set to the sender's machine is wrong.
Solutions
e sender may have set the fax number incorrectly. Contact the sender.
Cannot Make Calls on the Connected Telephone
The phone cable is not connected correctly.
Solutions
Connect the telephone to the EXT. port on the printer, and pick up the receiver. If you cannot hear a dial
tone through the receiver, connect the phone cable correctly.
Solving Problems
>
The Printer Does Not Work as Expected
>
Cannot Operate the Printer as Expected
263
Answering Machine Cannot Answer Voice Calls
The printer's Rings to Answer setting is set to less than the number of rings for your
answering machine.
Solutions
Select Slow(9,600bps) in Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Rings to
Answer, and then set to a number higher than the number of rings for your answering machine.
A Lot of Junk Faxes Have Been Received
The printer's feature to block junk faxes has not been set up.
Solutions
Make Rejection Fax settings in Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings.
“Making Settings for Blocking Junk Faxes” on page 495
A Message is Displayed on the LCD Screen
If an error message is displayed on the LCD screen, follow the on-screen instructions or the solutions below to
solve the problem. If a message is displayed when you cannot scan to the shared folder from the control panel, see
the related information below.
Error Messages Solutions
Printer error. Turn the power o and on again. If
the problem persists, contact Epson Support.
❏Remove any paper or protective material in the printer and the paper
cassette. If the error message is still displayed after turning the power
o and on again, contact Epson support.
❏When the following error codes are displayed, check the paper for
the maximum number of sheets that can be loaded in each paper
source.
000181, 000184, 000201, 000204, 000221, 000224
Printer error. Contact Epson Support. Non-
printing features are available.
The printer may be damaged. Contact Epson support or an authorised
Epson service provider to request repairs. However, non-printing
features such as scanning are available.
Printer error. For details, see your
documentation.
The printer may be damaged. Contact Epson support or an authorised
Epson service provider to request repairs.
Paper out in XX. Load paper. Paper Size: XX/
Paper Type: XX
Load paper, and then insert the paper cassette all the way.
Too many paper cassette units are installed. Turn
the power o and uninstall the extra units. See
your documentation for details.
You can install up to three paper cassette units. For other paper cassette
units, uninstall them by following the reverse steps to installation.
Unsupported Paper Cassette Units have been
installed. Turn the power o and uninstall. For
details, see your documentation.
Unsupported paper cassette units have been installed. Uninstall them
by following the reverse steps to installation.
Cannot print because XX is out of order. You can
print from another cassette.
Turn the power o and on again, and then reinsert the paper cassette. If
the error message is still displayed, contact Epson support or an
authorised Epson service provider to request repairs.
Solving Problems
>
A Message is Displayed on the LCD Screen
264
Error Messages Solutions
Maintenance Roller in XX is nearing the end of
its service life.
The maintenance rollers need to be replaced periodically. Paper is not
fed correctly from the paper cassette when it is time for replacement.
Prepare new maintenance rollers.
Maintenance Roller in XX is at the end of its
service life. Replace it and reset the maintenance
roller counter.
Replace the maintenance rollers. After replacing the rollers, tap Settings
> Maintenance > Maintenance Roller Information > Reset
Maintenance Roller Counter, and then select the paper cassette for
which you replaced the maintenance rollers.
You need to replace Ink Supply Unit(s). To ensure you receive premium print quality and to help protect your
print head, a variable ink safety reserve remains in the ink supply unit
when your printer indicates it is time to replace the ink supply unit.
Replace to new ink supply units.
Paper Setup Auto Display is set to O. Some
features may not be available. For details, see
your documentation.
If Paper Setup Auto Display is disabled, you cannot use AirPrint.
No dial tone is detected. This problem might be resolved by tapping Settings > General
Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Line Type, and then
selecting PBX. If your phone system requires an external access code to
get an outside line, set the access code after selecting PBX. Use # (hash)
instead of the actual access code when entering an outside fax number.
This makes connection more secure.
If the error message is still displayed, set the Dial Tone Detection
settings to disabled. However, disabling this feature may drop the rst
digit of a fax number and send the fax to the wrong number.
Failed to receive faxes because the fax data
capacity is full. Touch the Job/Status at the
bottom of the Home Screen for details.
Received faxes may accumulate without being processed due to the
following reasons.
❏Cannot print because a printer error has occurred.
Clear the printer error. To check the details and solutions to the error,
press the button and then tap Printer Status.
❏Cannot save in the computer or the memory device.
To check whether or not received faxes have been saved, press the
button and then tap Job Status. To save received faxes, turn on
the computer or connect a memory device to the printer.
The combination of the IP address and the
subnet mask is invalid. See your documentation
for more details.
Enter the correct IP address or default gateway. Contact your network
administrator for assistance.
To use cloud services, update the root certicate
from the Epson Web Cong utility.
Run Web Cong, and then update the root certicate.
Check that the printer driver is installed on the
computer and that the port settings for the
printer are correct.
Make sure the printer port is selected correctly in Property > Port from
the Printer menu as follows.
Select "USBXXX" for a USB connection, or "EpsonNet Print Port" for a
network connection.
Recovery Mode
Update Firmware
The printer has started in recovery mode because the rmware update
failed. Follow the steps below to try to update the rmware again.
1. Connect the computer and the printer with a USB cable. (During
recovery mode, you cannot update the rmware over a network
connection.)
2. Visit your local Epson website for further instructions.
Solving Problems
>
A Message is Displayed on the LCD Screen
265
Related Information
&“Messages are Displayed on the Control Panel” on page 235
Paper Gets Jammed
Check the error displayed on the control panel and follow the instructions to remove the jammed paper including
any torn pieces. e LCD screen displays an animation that shows you how to remove jammed paper. Next, select
OK to clear the error.
!
Caution:
Never touch the buttons on the control panel while your hand is inside the printer. If the printer starts operating, it
could cause an injury. Be careful not to touch the protruding parts to avoid injury.
c
Important:
❏Remove the jammed paper carefully. Removing the paper vigorously may cause damage to the printer.
Note:
If any torn pieces of paper remain, select Settings > Maintenance > Remove Paper aer clearing the paper jam error. is
helps you to remove the remaining pieces of paper.
Preventing Paper Jams
Check the following if paper jams occur frequently.
❏Place the printer on a at surface and operate in the recommended environmental conditions.
“Environmental Specications” on page 414
❏Use the paper supported by this printer.
“Available Paper and Capacities” on page 355
❏Follow paper handling precautions.
“Paper Handling Precautions” on page 35
❏Load paper in the correct direction, and slide the edge guide against the edge of the paper.
“Loading Paper” on page 37
❏Do not load more than the maximum number of sheets specied for paper.
❏Load one sheet of paper at a time if you have loaded several sheets of paper.
❏Make sure the paper size and paper type settings match the actual paper size and paper type loaded in the
printer.
“List of Paper Type” on page 36
❏Do not open the rear cover while printing. is causes a paper jam.
❏Clean the roller inside the printer.
“Improving Paper Feeding Problems for Paper Cassette” on page 167
Solving Problems
>
Paper Gets Jammed
>
Preventing Paper Jams
266
It is Time to Replace Ink Supply Units
Ink Supply Unit Handling Precautions
Storing precautions for ink
❏Keep the ink supply units out of direct sunlight.
❏Do not store the ink supply units in high or freezing temperatures.
❏Epson recommends using the ink supply unit before the date printed on the package.
❏For best results, store ink supply unit packages with their bottom down.
❏Aer bringing an ink supply unit inside from a cold storage site, allow it to warm up at room temperature for at
least 12 hours before using it.
❏Do not drop or knock the ink supply unit against hard objects; otherwise, the ink may leak.
Handling precautions for replacing ink
❏Do not touch the sections shown in the illustration. Doing so may prevent normal operation and printing.
❏Install all ink supply units; otherwise you cannot print.
❏Do not turn o the printer during ink charging. If the ink charging is incomplete, you may not be able to print.
❏Do not leave the printer with the ink supply units removed; otherwise, ink remaining in the print head nozzles
may dry out and you may not be able to print.
❏If you need to remove an ink supply unit temporarily, make sure you protect the ink supply area from dirt and
dust. Store the ink supply unit in the same environment as the printer. Because the ink supply port is equipped
with a valve designed to contain the release of excess ink, there is no need to supply your own covers or plugs.
❏Removed ink supply units may have ink around the ink supply port, so be careful not to get any ink on the
surrounding area when removing the ink supply units.
❏is printer uses ink supply units equipped with a green chip that monitors information such as the amount of
remaining ink for each ink supply unit. is means that even if the ink supply unit is removed from the printer
before it is expended, you can still use the ink supply unit aer reinserting it back into the printer.
❏To ensure you receive premium print quality and to help protect your print head, a variable ink safety reserve
remains in the ink supply unit when your printer indicates to replace the ink supply unit. e yields quoted for
you do not include this reserve.
❏Do not disassemble or remodel the ink supply unit, otherwise you may not be able to print normally.
Solving Problems
>
It is Time to Replace Ink Supply Units
>
Ink Supply Unit Handling Precautions
267
❏You cannot use the ink supply units that came with the printer for the replacement.
❏If the ink supply unit has changed shape due to being dropped and so on, x the shape before inserting it in the
printer; otherwise, it may not be set correctly.
Consumption of ink
❏To maintain optimum print head performance, some ink is consumed from all ink supply units during
maintenance operations such as print head cleaning. Ink may also be consumed when you turn on the printer.
❏When printing in monochrome or grayscale, color inks instead of black ink may be used depending on the
paper type or print quality settings. is is because a mixture of color inks is used to create black.
❏e ink in the ink supply units supplied with your printer is partly used during initial setup. In order to produce
high quality printouts, the print head in your printer will be fully charged with ink. is one-o process
consumes a quantity of ink and therefore these ink supply units may print fewer pages compared to subsequent
ink supply units.
❏Quoted yields may vary depending on the images that you are printing, the paper type that you are using, the
frequency of your prints and environmental conditions such as temperature.
❏For best results, use up ink supply unit within two years of installation.
Replacing Ink Supply Units
When a message is displayed prompting you to replace the ink supply units, select How To and then view the
animations displayed on the control panel to learn how to replace the ink supply units.
Related Information
&“Ink Supply Unit Codes” on page 362
&“Ink Supply Unit Handling Precautions” on page 267
It is Time to Replace the Maintenance Box
Maintenance Box Handling Precautions
Read the following instructions before replacing the maintenance box.
❏Do not touch the green chip on the side of the maintenance box. Doing so may prevent normal operation and
printing.
❏Do not remove the lm on the top of the box; otherwise ink may leak.
❏Do not tilt the used maintenance box until aer it is sealed in the plastic bag; otherwise ink may leak.
❏Keep the maintenance box out of direct sunlight.
❏Do not replace the maintenance box during printing; otherwise, ink may leak.
❏Do not reuse a maintenance box which has been removed and le detached for a long period. Ink inside the box
will have solidied and no more ink can be absorbed.
Solving Problems
>
It is Time to Replace the Maintenance Box
>
Maintenance Box Handling Precautions
268
Replacing a Maintenance Box
In some print cycles a very small amount of surplus ink may be collected in the maintenance box. To prevent ink
leakage from the maintenance box, the printer is designed to stop printing when the absorbing capacity of the
maintenance box has reached its limit. Whether and how oen this is required will vary according to the number
of pages you print, the type of material that you print and the number of cleaning cycles that the printer performs.
When a message is displayed prompting you to replace the maintenance box, refer to the animations displayed on
the control panel. e need for replacement of the box does not mean that your printer has ceased to operate in
accordance with its specications. e Epson warranty does not cover the cost of this replacement. It is a user-
serviceable part.
Note:
When the maintenance box is full, you cannot print and clean the print head until it is replaced to avoid ink leakage.
However, you can perform operations that do not use ink such as scanning.
Related Information
&“Maintenance Box Code” on page 362
&“Maintenance Box Handling Precautions” on page 268
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is
Poor
Print Quality is Poor
Color Missing, Banding, or Unexpected Colors Appear in Printout
The print head nozzles may be clogged.
Solutions
Use the Print Quality Adjustment feature. If you have not used the printer for a long time, the print head
nozzles may be clogged and ink drops may not be discharged.
&“Adjusting the Print Quality” on page 168
Solving Problems
>
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor
>
Print Quality is Poor
269
Colored Banding Appears at Intervals of Approximately 3.3 cm
e following causes can be considered.
The paper type setting does not match the paper loaded.
Solutions
Select the appropriate paper type setting for the type of paper loaded in the printer.
&“List of Paper Type” on page 36
The print head position is out of alignment.
Solutions
Align the print head using the Print Quality Adjustment feature.
&“Adjusting the Print Quality” on page 168
The print quality is set to low.
Solutions
When printing on plain paper, print using a higher quality setting.
❏Control panel
Select Best as the Quality on the Advanced tab in print settings.
❏Windows
Select High from Quality on the printer driver's Main tab.
❏Mac OS
Select Fine as Print Quality from the print dialog's Print Settings menu.
Blurry Prints, Vertical Banding, or Misalignment
e following causes can be considered.
Solving Problems
>
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor
>
Print Quality is Poor
270
The print head position is out of alignment.
Solutions
Align the print head using the Print Quality Adjustment feature.
&“Adjusting the Print Quality” on page 168
The bidirectional printing setting is enabled.
Solutions
If print quality does not improve even aer aligning the print head, disable the bidirectional setting.
During bidirectional (or high speed) printing, the print head prints while moving in both directions, and
vertical lines may be misaligned. Disabling this setting may slow down printing speed but improve print
quality.
❏Control panel
Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings, and then disable Bidirectional.
❏Windows
Clear Bidirectional Printing on the printer driver’s More Options tab.
❏Mac OS
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print &
Fax), and then select the printer. Click Options & Supplies > Options (or Driver). Select O as the
Bidirectional Printing setting.
Printouts are Blank or Only Some Lines are Printed
The print head nozzles may be clogged.
Solutions
Try Power Cleaning.
&“Running Power Cleaning” on page 170
The print settings and the paper size loaded in the printer are dierent.
Solutions
Change the print settings according to the paper size loaded in the paper cassette. Load paper in the
paper cassette that matches the print settings.
Solving Problems
>
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor
>
Print Quality is Poor
271
Multiple sheets of paper are fed into the printer at the same time.
Solutions
See the following to prevent multiple sheets of paper being fed into the printer at the same time.
&“Several Sheets of Paper are Fed at a Time” on page 203
Paper Is Smeared or Scued
e following causes can be considered.
Paper is loaded incorrectly.
Solutions
When horizontal banding (perpendicular to the printing direction) appears, or the top or bottom of the
paper is smeared, load paper in the correct direction and slide the edge guides to the edges of the paper.
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
The paper path is smeared.
Solutions
When vertical banding (horizontal to the printing direction) appears, or the paper is smeared, clean the
paper path.
&“Cleaning the Paper Path for Ink Smears” on page 172
The paper is curled.
Solutions
Place the paper on a at surface to check if it is curled. If it is, atten it.
The print head is rubbing the surface of the paper.
Solutions
When printing on thick paper, the print head is close to the printing surface and the paper may be
scued. In this case, enable the reduce scu setting. If you enable this setting, print quality may decline or
printing may slow down.
❏Control panel
Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings, and then enable ick Paper.
Solving Problems
>
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor
>
Print Quality is Poor
272
❏Windows
Click Extended Settings on the printer driver's Maintenance tab, and then select ick Paper and
Envelopes.
If the paper is still scued aer selecting the ick Paper and Envelopes setting, select Short Grain
Paper in the Extended Settings window of the printer driver.
❏Mac OS
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print &
Fax), and then select the printer. Click Options & Supplies > Options (or Driver). Select On as
theick paper and envelopes setting.
The back of the paper was printed before the side that had already been printed was dry.
Solutions
When performing manual 2-sided printing, make sure that the ink is completely dry before reloading the
paper.
When printing using automatic 2-sided printing, the print density is too high and the drying
time is too short.
Solutions
When using the automatic 2-sided printing feature and printing high density data such as images and
graphs, set the print density to lower and the drying time to longer.
&“Printing on 2-Sides” on page 54
&“Printing on 2-Sides” on page 80
Printed Photos are Sticky
The print was made on the wrong side of the photo paper.
Solutions
Make sure you are printing on the printable side. When printing on the wrong side of the photo paper,
you need to clean the paper path.
&“Cleaning the Paper Path for Ink Smears” on page 172
Images or Photos are Printed in Unexpected Colors
Solving Problems
>
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor
>
Print Quality is Poor
273
e following causes can be considered.
The print head nozzles may be clogged.
Solutions
Use the Print Quality Adjustment feature. If you have not used the printer for a long time, the print head
nozzles may be clogged and ink drops may not be discharged.
&“Adjusting the Print Quality” on page 168
Color correction has been applied.
Solutions
When printing from the control panel or from the Windows printer driver, the Epson auto photo
adjustment setting is applied by default depending on the paper type. Try change the setting.
❏Control panel
Change the Fix Photo setting from Auto to any other option. If changing the setting does not work,
select Enhance O as the Fix Photo setting.
❏Windows printer driver
On the More Options tab, select Custom in Color Correction, and then click Advanced. Change the
Scene Correction setting from Automatic to any other option. If changing the setting does not work,
use any color correction method other than PhotoEnhance in Color Management.
&“JPEG Settings” on page 92
&“Adjusting the Print Color” on page 69
The Position, Size, or Margins of the Printout Are Incorrect
e following causes can be considered.
The paper is loaded incorrectly.
Solutions
Load paper in the correct direction, and slide the edge guide against the edge of the paper.
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
The size of the paper is set incorrectly.
Solutions
Select the appropriate paper size setting.
Solving Problems
>
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor
>
Print Quality is Poor
274
The margin setting in the application software is not within the print area.
Solutions
Adjust the margin setting in the application so that it falls within the printable area.
&“Printable Area” on page 405
Printed Characters Are Incorrect or Garbled
e following causes can be considered.
The USB cable is not connected correctly.
Solutions
Connect the USB cable securely to the printer and the computer.
There is a job waiting to be printed.
Solutions
If there are any paused print jobs, printed characters may be corrupted.
The computer has been manually put into the Hibernate mode or the Sleep mode while
printing.
Solutions
Do not put the computer manually into the Hibernate mode or the Sleep mode while printing. Pages of
garbled text may be printed next time you start the computer.
You are using the printer driver for a dierent printer.
Solutions
Make sure that the printer driver you are using is for this printer. Check the printer name on the top of
the printer driver window.
The Printed Image Is Inverted
Solving Problems
>
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor
>
Print Quality is Poor
275
The image is set to invert horizontally in the print settings.
Solutions
Clear any mirror image settings in the printer driver or the application.
❏Windows
Clear Mirror Image on the printer driver’s More Options tab.
❏Mac OS
Clear Mirror Image from the print dialog's Print Settings menu.
Mosaic-Like Patterns in the Prints
Images or photos with a low resolution were printed.
Solutions
When printing images or photos, print using high-resolution data. Images on web sites are oen low
resolution although they look good enough on the display, and so print quality may decline.
Unintentionally Printing on 2-Sides
The 2-sided printing setting is enabled.
Solutions
Clear any 2-sided printing settings in the printer driver.
❏Windows
Select O from 2-Sided Printing on the printer driver's Main tab.
❏Mac OS
Select O from Two-sided Printing on the print dialog's Two-sided Printing Settings menu.
Printer Does Not Print Correctly While Using PostScript Printer Driver
e following causes can be considered.
There is a problem with the data.
Solutions
❏If the le is created in an application that allows you to change the data format, such as Adobe
Photoshop, make sure that the settings in the application match the settings in the printer driver.
❏EPS les made in binary format may not be printed correctly. Set the format to ASCII when making
EPS les in an application.
Solving Problems
>
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor
>
Print Quality is Poor
276
❏For Windows, the printer cannot print binary data when it is connected to the computer using a USB
interface. Set the Output Protocol setting on the Device Settings tab in the printer properties to
ASCII or TBCP.
❏For Windows, select the appropriate substitution fonts on the Device Settings tab in the printer
properties.
Print Quality Is Poor While Using PostScript Printer Driver
Color settings have not been made.
Solutions
You cannot make color settings on the Paper/Quality tab in the printer driver. Click Advanced, and then
set the Color Mode setting.
Copy Quality is Poor
Color Missing, Banding, or Unexpected Colors Appear in Copies
The print head nozzles may be clogged.
Solutions
Use the Print Quality Adjustment feature. If you have not used the printer for a long time, the print head
nozzles may be clogged and ink drops may not be discharged.
&“Adjusting the Print Quality” on page 168
Colored Banding Appears at Intervals of Approximately 3.3 cm
e following causes can be considered.
Solving Problems
>
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor
>
Copy Quality is Poor
277
The paper type setting does not match the paper loaded.
Solutions
Select the appropriate paper type setting for the type of paper loaded in the printer.
&“List of Paper Type” on page 36
The print head position is out of alignment.
Solutions
Align the print head using the Print Quality Adjustment feature.
&“Adjusting the Print Quality” on page 168
Blurry Copies, Vertical Banding, or Misalignment
e following causes can be considered.
The print head position is out of alignment.
Solutions
Align the print head using the Print Quality Adjustment feature.
&“Adjusting the Print Quality” on page 168
The bidirectional printing setting is enabled.
Solutions
If print quality does not improve even aer aligning the print head, disable the bidirectional setting.
During bidirectional (or high speed) printing, the print head prints while moving in both directions, and
vertical lines may be misaligned. Disabling this setting may slow down printing speed but improve print
quality.
Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings, and then disable Bidirectional on the control
panel.
Solving Problems
>
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor
>
Copy Quality is Poor
278
Printouts are Blank or Only Some Lines are Printed
The print head nozzles may be clogged.
Solutions
Try Power Cleaning.
&“Running Power Cleaning” on page 170
The print settings and the paper size loaded in the printer are dierent.
Solutions
Change the print settings according to the paper size loaded in the paper cassette. Load paper in the
paper cassette that matches the print settings.
Multiple sheets of paper are fed into the printer at the same time.
Solutions
See the following to prevent multiple sheets of paper being fed into the printer at the same time.
&“Several Sheets of Paper are Fed at a Time” on page 203
Paper Is Smeared or Scued
e following causes can be considered.
Paper is loaded incorrectly.
Solutions
When horizontal banding (perpendicular to the printing direction) appears, or the top or bottom of the
paper is smeared, load paper in the correct direction and slide the edge guides to the edges of the paper.
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
Solving Problems
>
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor
>
Copy Quality is Poor
279
The paper path is smeared.
Solutions
When vertical banding (horizontal to the printing direction) appears, or the paper is smeared, clean the
paper path.
&“Cleaning the Paper Path for Ink Smears” on page 172
The paper is curled.
Solutions
Place the paper on a at surface to check if it is curled. If it is, atten it.
The printhead is rubbing the surface of the paper.
Solutions
When copying on thick paper, the print head is close to the printing surface and the paper may be
scued. In this case, enable the reduce scu setting.
Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings, and then enable ick Paper on the control panel.
If you enable this setting, copy quality may decline or may slow down.
The Position, Size, or Margins of the Copies are Incorrect
e following causes can be considered.
The paper is loaded incorrectly.
Solutions
Load paper in the correct direction, and slide the edge guide against the edge of the paper.
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
The originals are not placed correctly.
Solutions
❏Make sure the original is placed correctly against the alignment marks.
❏If the edge of the scanned image is missing, move the original slightly away from the edge of the
scanner glass. You cannot scan the area within approximately 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) from the edge of the
scanner glass.
&“Placing Originals” on page 41
Solving Problems
>
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor
>
Copy Quality is Poor
280
There is some dust or stains on the scanner glass.
Solutions
Clean the scanner glass and the document cover using a dry, so, clean cloth. If there is dust or stains
around the originals on the glass, the copy area may extend to include the dust or stains, resulting in the
wrong copying position or small images.
&“Cleaning the Scanner Glass” on page 172
Original Size is wrong in copy setting.
Solutions
Select the appropriate Original Size in the copy setting.
The size of the paper is set incorrectly.
Solutions
Select the appropriate paper size setting.
Uneven Colors, Smears, Dots, or Straight Lines Appear in the Copied Image
e following causes can be considered.
The paper path is dirty.
Solutions
Load and eject paper without printing to clean the paper path.
&“Cleaning the Paper Path for Ink Smears” on page 172
There is dust or dirt on the originals or the scanner glass.
Solutions
Remove any dust or dirt that adheres to the originals, and clean the scanner glass.
&“Cleaning the Scanner Glass” on page 172
There is dust or dirt on the ADF or originals.
Solutions
Clean the ADF, and remove any dust or dirt that adheres to the originals.
&“Cleaning the ADF” on page 174
Solving Problems
>
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor
>
Copy Quality is Poor
281
The original was pressed with too much force.
Solutions
If you press with too much force, blurring, smudges, and spots may occur.
Do not press with too much force on the original or the document cover.
&“Placing Originals” on page 41
The copy density setting is too high.
Solutions
Lower the copy density setting.
&“Basic Menu Options for Copying” on page 103
Moiré (Cross-Hatch) Patterns Appear in the Copied Image
If the original is a printed document such as a magazine or a catalog, a dotted moiré pattern
appears.
Solutions
Change the reduce and enlarge setting. If a moiré pattern still appears, place the original at a slightly
dierent angle.
&“Basic Menu Options for Copying” on page 103
An Image of the Reverse Side of the Original Appears in the Copied Image
e following causes can be considered.
When scanning thin originals, images on the back may be scanned at the same time.
Solutions
Place the original on the scanner glass and then place a piece of black paper over it.
&“Placing Originals” on page 41
Solving Problems
>
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor
>
Copy Quality is Poor
282
The copy density setting is too high.
Solutions
Lower the copy density setting.
&“Basic Menu Options for Copying” on page 103
Scanned Image Problems
Uneven Colors, Dirt, Spots, and so on Appear when Scanning from the Scanner
Glass
There is dust or dirt on the originals or the scanner glass.
Solutions
Remove any dust or dirt that adheres to the originals, and clean the scanner glass.
&“Cleaning the Scanner Glass” on page 172
The original was pressed with too much force.
Solutions
If you press with too much force, blurring, smudges, and spots may occur.
Do not press with too much force on the original or the document cover.
&“Placing Originals” on page 41
Straight Lines Appear when Scanning from ADF
There is dust or dirt on the ADF or originals.
Solutions
Clean the ADF, and remove any dust or dirt that adheres to the originals.
&“Cleaning the ADF” on page 174
Solving Problems
>
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor
>
Scanned Image Problems
283
Oset Appears in the Background of Scanned Images
When scanning thin originals, images on the back may be scanned at the same time.
Solutions
When scanning from the scanner glass, place black paper or a desk pad over the original.
&“Placing Originals” on page 41
Cannot Scan the Correct Area on the Scanner Glass
The originals are not placed correctly.
Solutions
❏Make sure the original is placed correctly against the alignment marks.
❏If the edge of the scanned image is missing, move the original slightly away from the edge of the
scanner glass. You cannot scan the area within approximately 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) from the edge of the
scanner glass.
&“Placing Originals” on page 41
There is dust or dirt on the scanner glass.
Solutions
When scanning from the control panel and selecting auto scan area cropping function, remove any trash
or dirt from the scanner glass and document cover. If there is any trash or dirt around the original, the
scanning range expands to include it.
Cannot Solve Problems in the Scanned Image
Check the following if you have tried all of the solutions and have not solved the problem.
There are problems with the scanning software settings.
Solutions
Use Epson Scan 2 Utility to initialize the settings for the scanner driver "Epson Scan 2”.
Note:
Epson Scan 2 Utility is an application that comes with Epson Scan 2.
Solving Problems
>
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor
>
Scanned Image Problems
284
1. Start the Epson Scan 2 Utility.
❏Windows 10
Click the start button, and then select EPSON > Epson Scan 2 Utility.
❏Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.
❏Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP
Click the start button, and then select All Programs or Programs > EPSON > Epson Scan 2 >
Epson Scan 2 Utility.
❏Mac OS
Select Go > Applications > Epson Soware > Epson Scan 2 Utility.
2. Select the Other tab.
3. Click Reset.
If initialization does not solve the problem, uninstall and re-install Epson Scan 2.
&“Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately” on page 179
The Quality of the Sent Fax is Poor
Quality of the Sent Fax is Poor
e following causes can be considered.
There is dust or dirt on the originals or the scanner glass.
Solutions
Remove any dust or dirt that adheres to the originals, and clean the scanner glass.
&“Cleaning the Scanner Glass” on page 172
The original was pressed with too much force.
Solutions
If you press with too much force, blurring, smudges, and spots may occur.
Do not press with too much force on the original or the document cover.
&“Placing Originals” on page 41
Solving Problems
>
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor
>
The Quality of the Sent Fax is Poor
285
Straight Lines Appear when Sending Faxes from the ADF
e following causes can be considered.
There is dust or dirt on the ADF or originals.
Solutions
Clean the ADF, and remove any dust or dirt that adheres to the originals.
&“Cleaning the ADF” on page 174
The Iimage Quality of the Sent Fax is Poor
e following causes can be considered.
The Original Type setting is wrong.
Solutions
Select Fax > Fax Settings > Scan Settings > Original Type, and then change the setting. When the
original you are sending contains text and images, set this to Photo.
The resolution is set to low.
Solutions
If you do not know the performance of the sender’s fax machine, set the following before sending a fax.
❏Select Fax > Fax Settings and then make the Resolution setting to set the highest quality image.
❏Select Fax > Fax Settings and then enable Direct Send.
Note that if you set Resolution to Super Fine or Ultra Fine but you send the fax without enabling
Direct Send, the fax may be sent at a lower resolution.
ECM setting is disabled.
Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings and enable the ECM setting on the
control panel. is may clear errors that occur due to connection problems. Note that the speed of
sending and receiving faxes may be slower than when ECM is disabled.
Solving Problems
>
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor
>
The Quality of the Sent Fax is Poor
286
An Image of the Reverse Side of the Original Appears in the Sent Fax
e following causes can be considered.
When scanning thin originals, images on the back may be scanned at the same time.
Solutions
Place the original on the scanner glass and then place a piece of black paper over it.
&“Placing Originals” on page 41
The density setting is high when sending faxes.
Solutions
Select Fax > Fax Settings > Scan Settings > Density, and then lower the setting.
Received Fax Quality is Poor
The Image Quality of Received Faxes is Poor
e following causes can be considered.
ECM setting is disabled.
Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings and enable the ECM setting on the
control panel. is may clear errors that occur due to connection problems. Note that the speed of
sending and receiving faxes may be slower than when ECM is disabled.
The image quality setting is low on the sender's fax machine.
Solutions
Ask the sender to send faxes at a higher quality.
Solving Problems
>
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor
>
Received Fax Quality is Poor
287
Cannot Solve Problem After Trying All Solutions
If you cannot solve the problem aer trying all of the solutions, contact Epson support.
If you cannot solve printing or copying problems, see the following related information.
Related Information
&“Cannot Solve Printing or Copying Problems” on page 288
Cannot Solve Printing or Copying Problems
Try the following problems in order starting at the top until you solve the problem.
❏Make sure you match the paper type loaded in the printer and the paper type set on the printer to the paper
type settings in the printer driver.
“Paper Size and Type Settings” on page 36
❏Use a higher quality setting on the control panel or the printer driver.
❏Reinstall the ink supply units already installed in the printer.
Reinstalling the ink supply units may clear clogging in the print head nozzles and allow the ink to ow
smoothly.
However, because ink is consumed when the ink supply unit is reinstalled, a message asking you to replace the
ink supply unit may be displayed depending on the amount of ink remaining.
❏Use the Print Quality Adjustment feature.
“Adjusting the Print Quality” on page 168
❏Check that you are using genuine Epson ink supply units.
Try to use genuine Epson ink supply units. is product is designed to adjust colors based on the use of genuine
Epson ink supply units. e use of non-genuine ink supply units may cause print quality to decline.
❏Make sure that there are no paper fragments le inside the printer.
❏Check the paper.
Check if the paper is curled or loaded with the printable side facing up.
“Paper Handling Precautions” on page 35
“Available Paper and Capacities” on page 355
“Unavailable Paper Types” on page 361
If you cannot solve the problem by checking the solutions above, you may need to request repairs. Contact Epson
support.
Related Information
&“Before Contacting Epson” on page 559
&“Contacting Epson Support” on page 559
Solving Problems
>
Cannot Solve Problem After Trying All Solutions
>
Cannot Solve Printing or Copying Problems
288
Adding or Replacing the Computer or
Devices
Connecting to a Printer that has been Connected to the Network...............290
Re-setting the Network Connection....................................291
Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi-Fi Direct)................297
Checking the Network Connection Status................................308
Connecting to a Printer that has been Connected to
the Network
When the printer has already been connected to the network, you can connect a computer or a smart device to the
printer over the network.
Using a Network Printer from a Second Computer
We recommend using the installer to connect the printer to a computer. You can run the installer using one of the
following methods.
❏Setting up from the website
Access the following website, and then enter the product name. Go to Setup, and then start setting up.
http://epson.sn
❏Setting up using the soware disc (only for the models that come with a soware disc and users with Windows
computers with disc drives.)
Insert the soware disc into the computer, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
Selecting the Printer
Follow the on-screen instructions until the following screen is displayed, select the printer name you want to
connect to, and then click Next.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Connecting to a Printer that has been Connected t
…
290
Using a Network Printer from a Smart Device
You can connect a smart device to the printer using one of the following methods.
Connecting over a wireless router
Connect the smart device to the same network as the printer.
See the following for more details.
“Making Settings for Connecting to the Smart Device” on page 292
Connecting by Wi-Fi Direct
Connect the smart device to the printer directly without a wireless router.
See the following for more details.
“Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi-Fi Direct)” on page 297
Re-setting the Network Connection
is section explains how to make the network connection settings and change the connection method when
replacing the wireless router or the computer.
When Replacing the Wireless Router
When you replace the wireless router, make settings for the connection between the computer or the smart device
and the printer.
You need to make these settings if you change your Internet service provider and so on.
Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer
We recommend using the installer to connect the printer to a computer. You can run the installer using one of the
following methods.
❏Setting up from the website
Access the following website, and then enter the product name. Go to Setup, and then start setting up.
http://epson.sn
❏Setting up using the soware disc (only for the models that come with a soware disc and users with Windows
computers with disc drives.)
Insert the soware disc into the computer, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
Selecting the Connection Methods
Follow the on-screen instructions until the following screen is displayed.
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Re-setting the Network Connection
>
When Repl
…
291
Select Change connection method for printer (for new network router or changing USB to network, etc.) on
the Select Your Operation screen, and then click Next.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
If you cannot connect, see the following to try to solve the problem.
❏Windows: “Cannot connect to a Network” on page 207
❏Mac OS: “Cannot connect to a Network” on page 215
Making Settings for Connecting to the Smart Device
You can use the printer from a smart device when you connect the printer to the same Wi-Fi network (SSID) as the
smart device. To use the printer from a smart device, set up from the following website. Access to the website from
the smart device that you want to connect to the printer.
http://epson.sn > Setup
When Changing the Computer
When changing the computer, make connection settings between the computer and the printer.
Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer
We recommend using the installer to connect the printer to a computer. You can run the installer using one of the
following methods.
❏Setting up from the website
Access the following website, and then enter the product name. Go to Setup, and then start setting up.
http://epson.sn
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Re-setting the Network Connection
>
When Chan
…
292
❏Setting up using the soware disc (only for the models that come with a soware disc and users with Windows
computers with disc drives.)
Insert the soware disc into the computer, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Changing the Connection Method to the Computer
is section explains how to change the connection method when the computer and the printer have been
connected.
Changing the Network Connection from Ethernet to Wi-Fi
Change the Ethernet connection to Wi-Fi connection from the printer's control panel. e changing connection
method is basically the same as the Wi-Fi connection settings.
Related Information
&“Making Wi-Fi Settings from the Control Panel” on page 295
Changing the Network Connection from Wi-Fi to Ethernet
Follow the steps below to change from a Wi-Fi connection to an Ethernet connection.
1. Select Settings on the home screen.
2. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Wired LAN Setup.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Changing from USB to a Network Connection
Using the installer and re-set up in a dierent connection method.
❏Setting up from the website
Access the following website, and then enter the product name. Go to Setup, and then start setting up.
http://epson.sn
❏Setting up using the soware disc (only for the models that come with a soware disc and users with Windows
computers with disc drives.)
Insert the soware disc into the computer, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
Selecting Change the Connection Methods
Follow the on-screen instructions until the following screen is displayed.
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Re-setting the Network Connection
>
Changing t
…
293
Select Change connection method for printer (for new network router or changing USB to network, etc.) on
the Select Your Operation screen, and then click Next.
Select the network connection that you want to use, Connect via wireless network (Wi-Fi) or Connect via wired
LAN (Ethernet), and then click Next.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Re-setting the Network Connection
>
Changing t
…
294
Making Wi-Fi Settings from the Control Panel
You can make network settings from the printer's control panel in several ways. Choose the connection method
that matches the environment and conditions that you are using.
If you know the information for the wireless router such as SSID and password, you can make settings manually.
If the wireless router supports WPS, you can make settings by using push button setup.
Aer connecting the printer to the network, connect to the printer from the device that you want to use (computer,
smart device, tablet, and so on.)
Related Information
&“Making Wi-Fi Settings by Entering the SSID and Password” on page 295
&“Making Wi-Fi Settings by Push Button Setup (WPS)” on page 296
&“Making Wi-Fi Settings by PIN Code Setup (WPS)” on page 297
Making Wi-Fi Settings by Entering the SSID and Password
You can set up a Wi-Fi network by entering the information necessary to connect to a wireless router from the
printer's control panel. To set up using this method, you need the SSID and password for a wireless router.
Note:
If you are using an wireless router with its default settings, the SSID and password are on the label. If you do not know the
SSID and password, contact the person who set up the wireless router, or see the documentation provided with the wireless
router.
1. Tap on the home screen.
2. Select Router.
3. Tap Start Setup.
If the network connection is already set up, the connection details are displayed. Tap Change to Wi-Fi
connection. or Change Settings to change the settings.
4. Select Wi-Fi Setup Wizard .
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to select the SSID, enter the password for the wireless router, and start setup.
If you want to check the network connection status for the printer aer setup is complete, see the related
information link below for details.
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Re-setting the Network Connection
>
Making Wi-
…
295
Note:
❏If you do not know the SSID, check if it is written on the label of the wireless router. If you are using the wireless
router with its default settings, use the SSID written on the label. If you cannot nd any information, see the
documentation provided with the wireless router.
❏e password is case-sensitive.
❏If you do not know the password, check if the information is written on the label of the wireless router. On the label,
the password may be written "Network Key", "Wireless Password", and so on. If you are using the wireless router
with its default settings, use the password written on the label.
Related Information
&“Entering Characters” on page 32
&“Checking the Network Connection Status” on page 308
Making Wi-Fi Settings by Push Button Setup (WPS)
You can automatically set up a Wi-Fi network by pressing a button on the wireless router. If the following
conditions are met, you can set up by using this method.
❏e wireless router is compatible with WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup).
❏e current Wi-Fi connection was established by pressing a button on the wireless router.
Note:
If you cannot nd the button or you are setting up using the soware, see the documentation provided with the wireless
router.
1. Tap on the home screen.
2. Select Router.
3. Tap Start Setup.
If the network connection is already set up, the connection details are displayed. Tap Change to Wi-Fi
connection. or Change Settings to change the settings.
4. Select Push Button Setup(WPS).
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.
If you want to check the network connection status for the printer aer setup is complete, see the related
information link below for details.
Note:
If connection fails, restart the wireless router, move it closer to the printer, and try again. If it still does not work, print a
network connection report and check the solution.
Related Information
&“Checking the Network Connection Status” on page 308
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Re-setting the Network Connection
>
Making Wi-
…
296
Making Wi-Fi Settings by PIN Code Setup (WPS)
You can automatically connect to an wireless router by using a PIN code. You can use this method to set up if an
wireless router is capable of WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup). Use a computer to enter a PIN code into the wireless
router.
1. Tap on the home screen.
2. Select Router.
3. Tap Start Setup.
If the network connection is already set up, the connection details are displayed. Tap Change to Wi-Fi
connection. or Change Settings to change the settings.
4. Select Others > PIN Code Setup(WPS)
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.
If you want to check the network connection status for the printer aer setup is complete, see the related
information link below for details.
Note:
See the documentation provided with your wireless router for details on entering a PIN code.
Related Information
&“Checking the Network Connection Status” on page 308
Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi-Fi
Direct)
Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) allows you to connect a smart device directly to the printer without a wireless router and
print from the smart device.
About Wi-Fi Direct
Use this connection method when you are not using Wi-Fi at home or at the oce, or when you want to connect
the printer and the computer or smart device directly. In this mode, the printer acts as an wireless router and you
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi
…
297
can connect the devices to the printer without having to use a standard wireless router. However, devices directly
connected to the printer cannot communicate with each other through the printer.
e printer can be connected by Wi-Fi or Ethernet, and Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection simultaneously.
However, if you start a network connection in Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection when the printer is connected
by Wi-Fi, the Wi-Fi is temporarily disconnected.
Connecting to an iPhone, iPad or iPod touch using Wi-Fi Direct
is method allows you to connect the printer directly to an iPhone, iPad or iPod touch without a wireless router.
e following conditions are required to use this function. If your environment does not match these conditions,
you can connect by selecting Other OS Devices. See the related information link below for details on connecting.
❏iOS 11 or later
❏Using the standard camera application to scan the QR code
❏Epson iPrint version 7.0 or later
Epson printing app, such as Epson iPrint, is used to print from a smart device. Install Epson printing app on the
smart device in advance.
Note:
You only need to make these settings for the printer and the smart device that you want to connect to once. Unless you
disable Wi-Fi Direct or restore the network settings to their defaults, you do not need to make these settings again.
1. Tap on the home screen.
2. Tap Wi-Fi Direct.
3. Tap Start Setup.
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi
…
298
4. Tap iOS.
e QR code is displayed on the printer's control panel.
5. On your iPhone, iPad or iPod touch, start the standard Camera app, and then scan the QR code displayed on
the printer's control panel in PHOTO mode.
Use the Camera app for iOS 11 or later. You cannot connect to the printer using the Camera app for iOS 10 or
earlier. Also, you cannot connect using an app for scanning QR codes. If you cannot connect, select Other
Methods on the printer's control panel. See the related information link below for details on connecting.
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi
…
299
6. Tap the notication displayed on the screen of the iPhone, iPad or iPod touch.
7. Tap Join.
8. On the printer's control panel, select Next.
9. On the iPhone, iPad or iPod touch, start Epson printing app.
Examples of Epson printing apps
10. On the Epson printing app screen, tap Printer is not selected..
11. Select the printer that you want to connect to.
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi
…
300
See the information displayed on the printer's control panel to select the printer.
12. On the printer's control panel, select Complete.
For smart devices that have been connected to the printer before, select the network name (SSID) on the smart
device's Wi-Fi screen to connect them again.
Related Information
&“Application for Printing Easily from a Smart Device (Epson iPrint)” on page 367
&“Connecting to Devices other than iOS and Android using Wi-Fi Direct” on page 303
Connecting to Android Devices using Wi-Fi Direct
is method allows you to connect the printer directly to your Android device without a wireless router. e
following conditions are required to use this function.
❏Android 4.4 or later
❏Epson iPrint version 7.0 or later
Epson iPrint is used to print from a smart device. Install Epson iPrint on the smart device in advance.
Note:
You only need to make these settings for the printer and the smart device that you want to connect to once. Unless you
disable Wi-Fi Direct or restore the network settings to their defaults, you do not need to make these settings again.
1. Tap on the home screen.
2. Tap Wi-Fi Direct.
3. Tap Start Setup.
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi
…
301
See the information displayed on the printer's control panel to select the printer.
Note:
Printers may not been displayed depending on the Android device. If printers are not displayed, connect by selecting
Other OS Devices. See the related information link below for connecting.
8. When the device connection approval screen is displayed, select Approve.
9. When the device registration conrmation screen is displayed, select whether you register the approved device
to the printer.
10. On the printer's control panel, select Complete.
For smart devices that have been connected to the printer before, select the network name (SSID) on the smart
device's Wi-Fi screen to connect them again.
Related Information
&“Application for Printing Easily from a Smart Device (Epson iPrint)” on page 367
&“Connecting to Devices other than iOS and Android using Wi-Fi Direct” on page 303
Connecting to Devices other than iOS and Android using Wi-Fi
Direct
is method allows you to connect the printer directly to smart devices without a wireless router.
Note:
You only need to make these settings for the printer and the smart device that you want to connect to once. Unless you
disable Wi-Fi Direct or restore the network settings to their defaults, you do not need to make these settings again.
1. Tap on the home screen.
2. Tap Wi-Fi Direct.
3. Tap Start Setup.
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi
…
303
7. On the smart device, start Epson printing app.
Examples of Epson printing apps
8. On the Epson printing app screen, tap Printer is not selected..
9. Select the printer that you want to connect to.
See the information displayed on the printer's control panel to select the printer.
10. On the printer's control panel, select Complete.
For smart devices that have been connected to the printer before, select the network name (SSID) on the smart
device's Wi-Fi screen to connect them again.
Related Information
&“Application for Printing Easily from a Smart Device (Epson iPrint)” on page 367
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi
…
306
Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) Connection
ere are two methods available to disable a Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection; you can disable all connections
by using the printer's control panel, or disable each connection from the computer or the smart device. When you
want to disable all connections, see the related information link below for details.
c
Important:
When Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection disabled, all computers and smart devices connected to the printer in
Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection are disconnected.
Note:
If you want to disconnect a specic device, disconnect from the device instead of the printer. Use one of the following
methods to disconnect the Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection from the device.
❏Disconnect the Wi-Fi connection to the printer's network name (SSID).
❏Connect to another network name (SSID).
Related Information
&“Changing the Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) Settings Such as the SSID” on page 307
Changing the Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) Settings Such as the SSID
When Wi-Fi Direct (simple AP) connection is enabled, you can change the settings from > Wi-Fi
Direct > Start Setup > Change, and then the following menu items are displayed.
Change Network Name
Change the Wi-Fi Direct (simple AP) network name (SSID) used for connecting to the printer to your arbitrary
name. You can set the network name (SSID) in ASCII characters that is displayed on the soware keyboard on the
control panel. You can enter up to 22 characters.
When changing the network name (SSID), all connected devices are disconnected. Use the new network name
(SSID) if you want to re-connect the device.
Change Password
Change the Wi-Fi Direct (simple AP) password for connecting to the printer to your arbitrary value. You can set
the password in ASCII characters that is displayed on the soware keyboard on the control panel. You can enter 8
to 22 characters.
When changing the password, all connected devices are disconnected. Use the new password if you want to re-
connect the device.
Change Frequency Range
Change the frequency range of Wi-Fi Direct used for connecting to the printer. You can select 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz.
When changing the frequency range, all connected devices are disconnected. Re-connect the device.
Note that you cannot re-connect from devices that do not support 5 GHz frequency range when changing to 5
GHz.
Depending on the region, this setting may not be displayed.
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi
…
307
Disable Wi-Fi Direct
Disable Wi-Fi Direct (simple AP) settings of the printer. When disabling it, all devices connected to the printer in
Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection are disconnected.
Restore Default Settings
Restore all Wi-Fi Direct (simple AP) settings to their defaults.
e Wi-Fi Direct (simple AP) connection information of the smart device saved to the printer is deleted.
Note:
You can also set up from the Network tab > Wi-Fi Direct on Web Cong for the following settings.
❏Enabling or disabling Wi-Fi Direct (simple AP)
❏Changing network name (SSID)
❏Changing password
❏Changing the frequency range
Depending on the region, this setting may not be displayed.
❏Restoring the Wi-Fi Direct (simple AP) settings
Checking the Network Connection Status
You can check the network connection status in the following way.
Related Information
&“Checking the Network Connection Status from the Control Panel” on page 308
&“Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 309
Checking the Network Connection Status from the Control Panel
You can check the network connection status using the network icon or the network information on the printer’s
control panel.
Checking the Network Connection Status using the Network Icon
You can check the network connection status and strength of the radio wave using the network icon on the
printer's home screen.
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Checking the Network Connection Status
>
Chec
…
308
Related Information
&“Guide to the Network Icon” on page 29
Displaying Detailed Network Information on the Control Panel
When your printer is connected to the network, you can also view other network-related information by selecting
the network menus you want to check.
1. Select Settings on the home screen.
2. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Network Status.
3. To check the information, select the menus that you want to check.
❏Wired LAN/Wi-Fi Status
Displays the network information (device name, connection, signal strength, and so on) for Ethernet or Wi-
Fi connections.
❏Wi-Fi Direct Status
Displays whether Wi-Fi Direct is enabled or disabled, and the SSID, password and so on for Wi-Fi Direct
connections.
❏Email Server Status
Displays the network information for email server.
❏Print Status Sheet
Prints a network status sheet. e information for Ethernet, Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct, and so on is printed on
two or more pages.
Printing a Network Connection Report
You can print a network connection report to check the status between the printer and the wireless router.
1. Select Settings on the home screen.
2. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Connection Check.
e connection check starts.
3. Select Print Check Report.
4. Print the network connection report.
If an error has occurred, check the network connection report, and then follow the printed solutions.
Related Information
&“Messages and Solutions on the Network Connection Report” on page 310
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Checking the Network Connection Status
>
Printi
…
309
Messages and Solutions on the Network Connection Report
Check the messages and error codes on the network connection report, and then follow the solutions.
a. Error code
b. Messages on the Network Environment
Related Information
&“E-1” on page 311
&“E-2, E-3, E-7” on page 311
&“E-5” on page 312
&“E-6” on page 312
&“E-8” on page 312
&“E-9” on page 313
&“E-10” on page 313
&“E-11” on page 313
&“E-12” on page 314
&“E-13” on page 314
&“Message on the Network Environment” on page 315
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Checking the Network Connection Status
>
Printi
…
310
E-1
Solutions:
❏Make sure the Ethernet cable is securely connected to your printer and to your hub or other network device.
❏Make sure your hub or other network device is turned on.
❏If you want to connect the printer by Wi-Fi, make Wi-Fi settings for the printer again because it is disabled.
E-2, E-3, E-7
Solutions:
❏Make sure your wireless router is turned on.
❏Conrm that your computer or device is connected correctly to the wireless router.
❏Turn o the wireless router. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it on.
❏Place the printer closer to your wireless router and remove any obstacles between them.
❏If you have entered the SSID manually, check if it is correct. Check the SSID from the Network Status part on
the network connection report.
❏If an wireless router has multiple SSIDs, select the SSID that is displayed. When the SSID is using a non-
compliant frequency, the printer does not display them.
❏If you are using push button setup to establish a network connection, make sure your wireless router supports
WPS. You cannot use push button setup if your wireless router does not support WPS.
❏Makes sure your SSID uses only ASCII characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols). e printer cannot
display an SSID that contains non-ASCII characters.
❏Makes sure you know your SSID and password before connecting to the wireless router. If you are using a
wireless router with its default settings, the SSID and password are located on a label on the wireless router. If
you do not know your SSID and password, contact the person who set up the wireless router, or see the
documentation provided with the wireless router.
❏If you are connecting to an SSID generated from a tethering smart device, check for the SSID and password in
the documentation provided with the smart device.
❏If your Wi-Fi connection suddenly disconnects, check for the conditions below. If any of these conditions are
applicable, reset your network settings by downloading and running the soware from the following website.
http://epson.sn > Setup
❏Another smart device was added to the network using push button setup.
❏e Wi-Fi network was set up using any method other than push button setup.
Related Information
&“Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 292
&“Making Wi-Fi Settings from the Control Panel” on page 295
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Checking the Network Connection Status
>
Printi
…
311
E-5
Solutions:
Make sure the wireless router’s security type is set to one of the following. If it is not, change the security type on
the wireless router, and then reset the printer’s network settings.
❏WEP-64 bit (40 bit)
❏WEP-128 bit (104 bit)
❏WPA PSK (TKIP/AES)
*
❏WPA2 PSK (TKIP/AES)
*
❏WPA (TKIP/AES)
❏WPA2 (TKIP/AES)
❏WPA3-SAE (AES)
❏WPA2/WPA3-Enterprise
* WPA PSK is also known as WPA Personal. WPA2 PSK is also known as WPA2 Personal.
E-6
Solutions:
❏Check if MAC address ltering is disabled. If it is enabled, register the printer’s MAC address so that it is not
ltered. See the documentation provided with the wireless router for details. You can check the printer’s MAC
address from the Network Status part on the network connection report.
❏If your wireless router is using shared authentication with WEP security, make sure the authentication key and
index are correct.
❏If the number of connectable devices on the wireless router is less than the number of network devices that you
want to connect, make settings on the wireless router to increase the number of connectable devices. See the
documentation provided with the wireless router to make settings.
Related Information
&“Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 292
E-8
Solutions:
❏Enable DHCP on the wireless router if the printer’s Obtain IP Address setting is set to Auto.
❏If the printer’s Obtain IP Address setting is set to Manual, the IP address you manually set is invalid due to out
of range (for example: 0.0.0.0). Set a valid IP address from the printer’s control panel.
Related Information
&“Network Settings” on page 381
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Checking the Network Connection Status
>
Printi
…
312
E-9
Solutions:
Check the following.
❏Devices are turned on.
❏You can access the Internet and other computers or network devices on the same network from the devices you
want to connect to the printer.
If still does not connect your printer and network devices aer conrming the above, turn o the wireless router.
Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it on. en reset your network settings by downloading and running the
installer from the following website.
http://epson.sn > Setup
Related Information
&“Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 292
E-10
Solutions:
Check the following.
❏Other devices on the network are turned on.
❏Network addresses (IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway) are correct if you have set the printer’s
Obtain IP Address to Manual.
Reset the network address if they are incorrect. You can check the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
from the Network Status part on the network connection report.
If DHCP is enabled, change the printer’s Obtain IP Address setting to Auto. If you want to set the IP address
manually, check the printer’s IP address from the Network Status part on the network connection report, and then
select Manual on the network settings screen. Set the subnet mask to [255.255.255.0].
If still does not connect your printer and network devices, turn o the wireless router. Wait for about 10 seconds,
and then turn it on.
Related Information
&“Network Settings” on page 381
E-11
Solutions:
Check the following.
❏e default gateway address is correct if you set the printer’s TCP/IP Setup setting to Manual.
❏e device that is set as the default gateway is turned on.
Set the correct default gateway address. You can check the default gateway address from the Network Status part
on the network connection report.
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Checking the Network Connection Status
>
Printi
…
313
Related Information
&“Network Settings” on page 381
E-12
Solutions:
Check the following.
❏Other devices on the network are turned on.
❏e network addresses (IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway) are correct if you are entering them
manually.
❏e network addresses for other devices (subnet mask and default gateway) are the same.
❏e IP address does not conict with other devices.
If still does not connect your printer and network devices aer conrming the above, try the following.
❏Turn o the wireless router. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it on.
❏Make network settings again using the installer. You can run it from the following website.
http://epson.sn > Setup
❏You can register several passwords on a wireless router that uses WEP security type. If several passwords are
registered, check if the rst registered password is set on the printer.
Related Information
&“Network Settings” on page 381
&“Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 292
E-13
Solutions:
Check the following.
❏Network devices such as a wireless router, hub, and router are turned on.
❏e TCP/IP Setup for network devices has not been set up manually. (If the printer’s TCP/IP Setup is set
automatically while the TCP/IP Setup for other network devices is performed manually, the printer’s network
may dier from the network for other devices.)
If it still does not work aer checking the above, try the following.
❏Turn o the wireless router. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it on.
❏Make network settings on the computer that is on the same network as the printer using the installer. You can
run it from the following website.
http://epson.sn > Setup
❏You can register several passwords on a wireless router that uses the WEP security type. If several passwords are
registered, check if the rst registered password is set on the printer.
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Checking the Network Connection Status
>
Printi
…
314
Related Information
&“Network Settings” on page 381
&“Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 292
Message on the Network Environment
Message Solution
The Wi-Fi environment needs to be
improved. Turn the wireless router o and
then turn it on. If the connection does not
improve, see the documentation for the
wireless router.
After moving the printer closer to the wireless router and removing any
obstacles between them, turn o the wireless router. Wait for about 10
seconds, and then turn it on. If it still does not connect, see the
documentation supplied with the wireless router.
*No more devices can be connected.
Disconnect one of the connected devices if
you want to add another one.
Computer and smart devices that can be connected simultaneously are
connected in full in the Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection. To add another
computer or smart device, disconnect one of the connected devices or
connect it to the other network rst.
You can conrm the number of wireless devices which can be connected
simultaneously and the number of connected devices by checking the
network status sheet or the printer’s control panel.
The same SSID as Wi-Fi Direct exists in the
environment. Change the Wi-Fi Direct SSID
if you cannot connect a smart device to the
printer.
On the printer’s control panel, go to Wi-Fi Direct Setup screen and select the
menu to change the setting. You can change the network name following
after DIRECT-XX-. Enter within 22 characters.
Printing a Network Status Sheet
You can check the detailed network information by printing it.
1. Select Settings on the home screen.
2. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Network Status.
3. Select Print Status Sheet.
4. Check the message, and then print the network status sheet.
Checking the Network of the Computer (Windows only)
By using the command prompt, check the connection status of the computer and the connection path to the
printer. is will lead you to solve the problems.
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Checking the Network Connection Status
>
Chec
…
315
❏ipcong command
Display the connection status of the network interface that is currently used by the computer.
By comparing the setting information with actual communication, you can check whether the connection is
correct. In case there are multiple DHCP servers on the same network, you can nd out the actual address
assigned to the computer, the referred DNS server, etc.
❏Format : ipcong /all
❏Examples :
❏pathping command
You c a n conrm the list of routers passing through the destination host and the routing of communication.
❏Format : pathping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
❏Examples : pathping 192.0.2.222
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices
>
Checking the Network Connection Status
>
Chec
…
316
Using Optional Items
List of Optional Items..............................................318
Printer Stand.....................................................320
Optional Cassette Unit..............................................327
Manual Stapler...................................................334
Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board........................................337
10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
List of Optional Items
No. Optional Item Code Overview
AManual Stapler C12C934361
C12C934371 (For users in India)
Allows you to staple by simply inserting the
paper you want to staple.
“Manual Stapler” on page 334
BOptional Cassette Unit C12C932611
C12C932621 (For users in India,
Bangladesh, Sri Lanka)
Allows you to load up to 500 sheets of plain
paper (64 to 90 g/m
2
).
“Optional Cassette Unit” on page 327
CPrinter Stand C12C934321
C12C934331 (For users in India)
Use the printer stand whenever you install the
printer on the oor; otherwise the printer may
fall.
“Printer Stand” on page 320
Using Optional Items
>
List of Optional Items
318
No. Optional Item Code Overview
A10/100/1000 Base-T,
Ethernet
C12C934471
C12C934481 (For users in India)
Two wired LAN networks are available. The
communication speed is a high-speed interface
that supports 1 Gbit/s.
“10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet” on page 343
BSuper G3/G3 Multi Fax
Board
C12C934491
C12C935271 (For users in Australia
and New Zealand)
C12C934501 (For users in India)
C12C935691 (For users in Taiwan)
You can add up to 2 lines. You can use it as a fax,
or use it as a network fax to send and receive
documents on your computer. In addition, you
can connect to multiple phone lines by adding
a fax board. This allows you to send to a
number of destinations in a short time, or you
can dedicate one line to receiving faxes thereby
reducing the time that you cannot receive
calls.
*
“Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board” on page 337
*: External phones are not available.
Using Optional Items
>
List of Optional Items
319
Wiring Codes with Clamps
Wire codes using clamps as shown below.
Printer Stand
c
Important:
When installing the printer on the oor, install the printer stand. e printer may fall without the printer stand.
❏When carrying the printer, be sure to li it in a stable position. Liing the printer while it is unstable may result
in injury.
❏Because this printer is heavy, it should always be carried by four or more people when unpacking and
transporting.
❏Because this printer stand is heavy, it should always be carried by two or more people when unpacking and
transporting.
Installing the Printer Stand
e printer stand can be attached to the printer and the paper cassette units.
Using Optional Items
>
Printer Stand
>
Installing the Printer Stand
320
!
Caution:
❏Make sure you turn o the printer, unplug the power cord from the printer, and disconnect any cables before
starting installation. Otherwise, the power cord may be damaged resulting in re or electric shock.
❏Lock the casters of the printer stand before starting installation. If the printer stand moves unexpectedly, you may
be injured.
❏When liing the printer, place your hands in the positions shown below. If you li the printer holding other
positions, the printer may fall or you may trap your ngers when placing the printer.
1. Turn o the printer by pressing the
P
button, and then unplug the power cord.
2. Disconnect any connected cables.
Note:
if the paper cassette unit has been installed, uninstall it as well.
3. Remove the output tray.
4. Remove the printer stand from the box, and then remove any protective materials.
Using Optional Items
>
Printer Stand
>
Installing the Printer Stand
321
5. Check the items supplied.
Note:
e shape of the stands may dier from this illustration.
6. Place the stands inside the printer stand's casters.
7. Secure the stands with the attachments and screws.
c
Important:
Make absolutely sure both stands are attached securely, otherwise the printer may fall.
Using Optional Items
>
Printer Stand
>
Installing the Printer Stand
322
11. Pull out the ink supply unit tray for black ink and the paper cassette.
12. Lower the printer or a paper cassette unit gently onto the printer stand aligning the corners, and then secure
them with the screws.
Note:
Some screws will be le over aer assembly.
Using Optional Items
>
Printer Stand
>
Installing the Printer Stand
324
17. Connect the cables and plug in the printer.
Note:
When uninstalling the printer stand, turn o the printer, unplug the power cord, disconnect any cables, and then
perform the installation procedure in reverse.
Related Information
&“List of Optional Items” on page 318
&“Wiring Codes with Clamps” on page 320
Moving the Printer While the Printer Stand is Attached
Before moving the printer, uninstall the printer stand. Complete the steps for moving the printer, and then perform
the steps in the following images.
Using Optional Items
>
Printer Stand
>
Moving the Printer While the Printer Stand is Attached
326
Related Information
&“Moving the Printer” on page 187
Printer Stand Specications
Dimensions ❏Width: 772mm(30.4 in.)
❏Depth: 797 mm (31.4 in.)
❏Height: 116 mm (4.6in.)
(When installing: 83 mm (3.3in.))
Weight Approx. 30.5 kg (67.2 lb)
Related Information
&“Installation Location and Space” on page 415
Optional Cassette Unit
Installing the Paper Cassette Units
You can install up to 3 paper cassette units.
!
Caution:
❏Make sure you turn o the printer, unplug the power cord from the printer, and disconnect any cables before
starting installation. Otherwise, the power cord may be damaged resulting in re or electric shock.
❏When liing the printer, place your hands in the positions shown below. If you li the printer holding other
positions, the printer may fall or you may trap your ngers when placing the printer.
c
Important:
If you are using the printer stand, install it under the bottom of the paper cassette unit in advance.
1. Tur n o the printer by pressing the
P
button, and then unplug the power cord.
Using Optional Items
>
Optional Cassette Unit
>
Installing the Paper Cassette Units
327
2. Disconnect any connected cables.
Note:
If other paper cassette units have been installed, uninstall them as well.
3. Remove the output tray.
4. Remove the paper cassette unit from its box, and then remove any protective materials.
5. Check the items supplied.
6. Place the paper cassette unit where you want to set up the printer.
Using Optional Items
>
Optional Cassette Unit
>
Installing the Paper Cassette Units
328
9. Lower the printer gently onto the paper cassette unit aligning the corners, and then secure them with the
screws.
Note:
Some screws will be le over aer assembly.
10. Secure the paper cassette unit and the printer at the back with the attachments and screws.
Using Optional Items
>
Optional Cassette Unit
>
Installing the Paper Cassette Units
330
11. Insert a label showing the size of the paper to be loaded in the cassette into the holder.
12. Insert the ink supply unit tray for black ink and the paper cassette.
13. Place the sticker indicating the cassette number.
14. Insert the output tray.
Using Optional Items
>
Optional Cassette Unit
>
Installing the Paper Cassette Units
331
15. Reconnect the power cord and any other cables, and then plug in the printer.
16. Turn on the printer by pressing the
P
button.
17. Press the button, and check that the paper cassette unit that you installed is displayed on the Paper Setting
screen.
Note:
When uninstalling the paper cassette unit, turn o the printer, unplug the power cord, disconnect any cables, and then
perform the installation procedure in reverse.
Proceed with the printer driver settings.
Related Information
&“List of Optional Items” on page 318
&“Installing the Printer Stand” on page 320
&“Wiring Codes with Clamps” on page 320
Setting the Paper Cassette Unit in the Printer Driver
To use the installed paper cassette unit, the printer driver needs to acquire the necessary information.
Setting the Paper Cassette Unit in the Printer Driver - Windows
Note:
Log on to your computer as an administrator.
1. Open the printer list on the computer.
❏Windows 10/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server 2016
Click on the start button, and then select Windows System > Control Panel > View devices and printers
in Hardware and Sound.
❏Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012
Select Desktop > Settings > Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound.
❏Windows 7/Windows Server 2008 R2
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound.
❏Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008
Click the start button, and then select Control Panel > Printers in Hardware and Sound.
❏Windows XP/Windows Server 2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click on your printer, or press and hold it, select Printer properties or Property, and then click the
Optional Settings tab.
3. Select Acquire from Printer, and then click Get.
Optional Paper Sources information is displayed in Current Printer Information.
Using Optional Items
>
Optional Cassette Unit
>
Setting the Paper Cassette Unit in the Printer Driver
332
4. Click OK.
Setting the Paper Cassette Unit in the Printer Driver - Mac OS
1. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and
then select the printer. Click Options & Supplies > Options (or Driver).
2. Set Lower Cassette according to the number of paper cassettes.
3. Click OK.
Moving the Printer While the Paper Cassette Units are Attached
Complete the steps for moving the printer and then remove paper cassette 2, 3 and 4. Next, perform the steps in
the following images.
Related Information
&“Moving the Printer” on page 187
Problems with the Paper Cassette Unit
Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Cassette Units
If you have added paper cassette units, you need to make settings in the printer driver.
Using Optional Items
>
Optional Cassette Unit
>
Problems with the Paper Cassette Unit
333
Related Information
&“Setting the Paper Cassette Unit in the Printer Driver” on page 332
Paper Cassette Unit Specications
Supported Paper Type Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Thick Paper
Size A5 to A3
Weight of Paper 64 to 200g/m
Capacity Maximum 500 Sheets
Dimensions ❏Width: 567 mm (22.3 in.)
❏Depth: 568 mm (22.4 in.)
❏Height: 160 mm (6.3in.)
(When installing: 128 mm (5.0in.)
Weight Approx. 11.7 kg (25.8 lb)
Related Information
&“Installation Location and Space” on page 415
Manual Stapler
Using Optional Items
>
Manual Stapler
334
Using the Manual Stapler
1. Insert the paper you want to staple into the manual stapler.
e staple position is located below the stamp as shown below.
Note:
❏You can staple up to 20 sheets (90g/m
2
plain paper) at a time.
❏When stapling at the corner of the paper, if you insert the paper until it touches the back of the stapler, it may staple
over the printed sections and you may not be able to see text or pictures clearly. We recommend stapling a sample
rst to check the position is correct.
❏If a borderless image is printed on the paper, you cannot staple because the sensor cannot detect the paper. Use paper
with a border of about 2 mm or more.
c
Important:
❏Do not open the staple cover when operating the stapler. Otherwise, a malfunction occurs and you may not
be able to staple. If a malfunction occurs, turn o the printer. Make sure that the staple cover is closed, and
then turn on the printer.
❏When stapling continuously, place the next batch of papers at intervals of three seconds. Stapling without
leaving an interval may cause the internal temperature to rise.
Replacing the Staple Cartridge
When it is time to replace the staple cartridge, a message is displayed on the LCD screen. Follow the on-screen
instructions to replace the cartridge.
Using Optional Items
>
Manual Stapler
>
Replacing the Staple Cartridge
335
e following is the code for the cartridge.
Staple Cartridge : C12C934911
*
*Contains at least 1000 staples.
c
Important:
❏Do not remove the cartridge except to clear a staple jam or to replace it with a new one.
❏Do not open the part
A
shown below.
Problems with the Manual Stapler
Staples Jam
Check the error displayed on the control panel and follow the instructions to remove the jammed staples. e LCD
screen displays an animation that shows you how to remove jammed staples. Next, select OK to clear the error.
c
Important:
❏Do not remove the cartridge except to clear a staple jam or to replace it with a new one.
❏Do not open the part
A
shown below if not instructed to do so.
❏Do not remove the cartridge when staples remain in the cartridge. You need to replace it with a new cartridge as
a staple jam is likely to occur even if you reinstall it.
❏You need to test staple twice or so aer clearing a staple jam.
Using Optional Items
>
Manual Stapler
>
Problems with the Manual Stapler
336
Cannot Staple
Borderless images are printed.
If a borderless image is printed on the paper, you cannot staple because the sensor cannot detect the paper. Use
paper with a border of about 2 mm or more.
Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board
By installing optional Super G3/G3 Mulit Fax Boards and connecting each board to each line, you can increase the
number of lines that can be used for sending and receiving faxes. When fax lines have been added, you can send a
fax while receiving a fax, receive multiple faxes at the same time, or send them at the same time.
Expansion Fax Ports
AEXT. port Making Settings When You Connect a Phone Device. This is for standard
faxing.
BLINE1 port Connect the printer to the phone line. This is for standard faxing.
Using Optional Items
>
Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board
>
Expansion Fax Ports
337
CLINE3 port Connect the printer to the phone line. The method for connecting the port is
the same as for the LINE1 port. For details, see the related Information below.
DLINE2 port
Related Information
&“Compatible Telephone Lines” on page 481
&“Connecting the Printer to a Phone Line” on page 481
Fax Settings Menu (When Optional Fax Boards Installed)
When you install the Optional Fax Boards, the following menus are added. Aer adding a fax line, make settings
for the added menus according to how the lines will be used.
Note that you cannot connect an external telephone to the added line.
Basic Settings (When Optional Fax Boards Installed)
You can nd the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings
Note:
On the Web Cong screen, you can nd the menu below.
Fax tab > Basic Settings
Expansion Line Settings:
G3-2:
❏Fax Speed
❏ECM
❏Dial Tone Detection
❏Dial Mode
❏Line Type
❏Your P h one Number
❏Rings to Answer
G3-3:
❏Fax Speed
❏ECM
❏Dial Tone Detection
❏Dial Mode
❏Line Type
❏Your P h one Number
❏Rings to Answer
Using Optional Items
>
Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board
>
Fax Settings Menu (When Optional Fax Boards Installed)
338
e functions for each item are the same as for standard faxing. See "Related Information" below for
details on each item.
Transmission Setting By Line:
G3-1:
Select an option for standard line G3-1 according to how it will be used (sending only,
receiving only, or sending and receiving). When any optional fax board is not installed
(standard faxing only), this corresponds to Sending and Receiving.
G3-2:
Select an option for extension line G3-2 according to how it will be used (sending only,
receiving only, or sending and receiving).
G3-3:
Select an option for extension line G3-3 according to how it will be used (sending only,
receiving only, or sending and receiving).
Related Information
&“Basic Settings” on page 384
Receive Settings
Save/Forward Settings
Conditional Save/Forward:
You ca n nd the menu on the printer's control panel below: Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive
Settings > Save/Forward Settings > Conditional Save/Forward.
Note:
On the Web Cong screen, you can nd the menu below.
Fax tab > Save/Forward Settings > Conditional Save/Forward
You can set saving and/or forwarding destinations to the Inbox, condential boxes, an external memory device,
email addresses, shared folders, and another fax machine.
To switch between enabling or disabling the conditions, tap anywhere on the set item except for .
Condition(s)
Select conditions and then make settings.
Received Line Match:
When the line port matches, the received fax is saved and forwarded.
You can also select the following conditions (the same as for standard faxing). See "Related Information" below for
more details.
Using Optional Items
>
Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board
>
Fax Settings Menu (When Optional Fax Boards Installed)
339
❏Sender Fax Number match
❏Subaddress(SUB) perfect match
❏Password(SID) perfect match
❏Receiving Time
Related Information
&“Conditional Save/Forward:” on page 390
Registering a Recipient to the Contacts List (When Optional Fax
Boards Installed)
When registering a recipient to the contacts list, you can also add the line setting.
1. Access Web Cong, click the Scan/Copy tab or the Fax fab, and then click Contacts.
2. Select the number that you want to register, and then click Edit.
3. Enter the Name and Index Word.
4. Select Fax as the Type option.
Note:
You cannot change the Type option aer registration is complete. If you want to change the type, delete the destination
and then register again.
5. Select a line in Select Line, and then click Apply.
Note that Select Line is set to G3-Auto by default.
You can also add the recipient to the contacts list.
Related Information
&“Making Contacts Available” on page 467
Sending Faxes Using the Printer with Optional Fax Boards
You can send faxes by specifying a line and entering fax numbers from the printer’s control panel.
Note:
e basic method for sending faxes is the same as for standard faxing.
“Sending Faxes Using the Printer” on page 131
1. Place the originals.
“Placing Originals” on page 41
2. Select Fax on the home screen on the printer's control panel.
Using Optional Items
>
Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board
>
Sending Faxes Using the Printer with Optional Fax Boards
340
3. Select the recipients to send the fax to on the Recipient tab.
“Selecting Recipients” on page 132
To enter fax numbers manually, select Keypad, and then select Select Line. Select Sending and Receiving or
Sending Only in Transmission Setting By Line. You cannot send faxes when you select a line that is set to
receive faxes only. Note that Select Line is set to G3-Auto by default. Next, enter numbers using the numerical
keypad on the LCD screen, and then tap OK to complete.
Note:
When Direct Dialing Restrictions in Security Settings is enabled, you can only select fax recipients from the contacts
list or the sent fax history. You cannot manually enter a fax number.
4. Select the Fax Settings tab, and then make settings such as the resolution and the sending method as
necessary.
5. Tap
x
to start sending the fax.
Related Information
&“Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs” on page 156
&“Registering a Recipient to the Contacts List (When Optional Fax Boards Installed)” on page 340
Sending Faxes From a Computer Using an Optional Fax Board
Sending Documents Created in an Application Using an Optional Fax Board
(Windows)
By selecting a printer fax from the Print menu of an application like Microso Word or Excel, you can directly
transmit data such as documents, drawings, and tables you have created, with a cover sheet..
Note:
❏e following explanation uses Microso Word as an example.
❏See the following for information on how to send a fax.
“Sending Documents Created Using an Application (Windows)” on page 158
❏e actual operation may dier depending on the application you use. For details, see the application’s help.
1. Using an application, create a document to transmit by fax.
2. Click Print from the File menu.
e application’s Print window appears.
3. Select XXXXX (FAX) (where XXXXX is your printer name) in Printer, and then check the settings for fax
sending.
4. Click Printer Properties or Properties if you want to specify settings such as the paper size and image quality.
For details, see the PC-FAX driver help.
5. Click Print.
Recipient Settings screen of FAX Utility is displayed.
Using Optional Items
>
Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board
>
Sending Faxes From a Computer Using an Optional Fax
…
341
6. Specify a recipient.
See "Related Information" below for more details.
“Sending Documents Created Using an Application (Windows)” on page 158
e recipient is added to the Recipient List displayed in the upper part of the window.
7. Click the Sending options tab, and select an option in Transmission line.
Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Transmission Setting By Line, and then
select a line that is set to Sending and Receiving or Sending Only. You cannot send faxes when you select the
line that is set to receive faxes only.
8. Click Next and make the necessary settings.
9. Check the transmission content and click Send.
Make sure the name and fax number of the recipient are correct before transmitting.
Sending Documents Created in an Application Using an Optional Fax Board
(Mac OS)
By selecting a fax-capable printer from the Print menu of a commercially available application, you can send data
such as documents, drawings, and tables, you have created. An available line is automatically selected and sent.
e basics of sending faxes is the same as standard fax.
Related Information
&“Sending a Fax from a Computer” on page 158
Checking the Status of the Lines (When Optional Fax Boards
Installed)
You can check the status of each fax line such as whether it is ready or in use.
To display this menu, press the button on the printer’s control panel, and then select Printer Status > Options.
Related Information
&“Job/Status Screen Conguration” on page 31
Solving Problems
See "Related Information" below for more details.
Related Information
&“Cannot Send or Receive Faxes” on page 237
&“e Quality of the Sent Fax is Poor” on page 285
&“Received Fax Quality is Poor” on page 287
Using Optional Items
>
Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board
>
Solving Problems
342
&“Cannot Operate the Printer as Expected” on page 259
Specications for Optional Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board
Possible number of expansions 2 (3 in total with standard)
Others are the same as for standard faxing. See the related Information below.
Related Information
&“Fax Specications (Fax-capable Printers Only)” on page 406
10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet
Function List when Using an Additional Network
Functions Standard Additional Related information
Printing Printing from a
computer
✓✓
Scanning Scanning from a
computer
✓✓
Scan to Email ✓
*3
✓
*3
“Conguring a Mail Server” on page 447
“Selecting the Network Transmission Route
(When Using an Additional Network)” on
page 349
Scan to Folder ✓
*3
✓
*3
“Setting a Shared Network Folder” on page 451
“Selecting the Network Transmission Route
(When Using an Additional Network)” on
page 349
Scan to
Document
Capture Pro
✓
*3
✓
*3
“Selecting the Network Transmission Route
(When Using an Additional Network)” on
page 349
Scan to Cloud ✓-“Scanning Originals to the Cloud” on page 119
Using Optional Items
>
10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet
>
Function List when Using an Additional Network
343
Functions Standard Additional Related information
Faxing Sending and
receiving faxes on
a computer
✓-
Fax to Email ✓
*3
✓
*3
“Conguring a Mail Server” on page 447
“Selecting the Network Transmission Route
(When Using an Additional Network)” on
page 349
Fax to Folder ✓
*3
✓
*3
“Setting a Shared Network Folder” on page 451
“Selecting the Network Transmission Route
(When Using an Additional Network)” on
page 349
Sharing data on an external memory
device
✓✓“Sharing Data on a Memory Device” on page 46
Epson Connect ✓-“Printing Using a Cloud Service” on page 95
EPSON Software Updater ✓-“Application for Updating Software and
Firmware (EPSON Software Updater)” on
page 374
Updating rmware ✓-“Application for Updating Software and
Firmware (EPSON Software Updater)” on
page 374
Network settings Setting an IP
address
✓
*1
✓
*1
“Assigning the IP Address (When Using an
Additional Network)” on page 347
Setting a proxy
server
✓-“Setting the Proxy Server (When Using an
Additional Network)” on page 348
Setting from Web Cong ✓
*1
✓
*1
“Application for Conguring Printer Operations
(Web Cong)” on page 371
Conguring the LDAP server ✓
*3
✓
*3
“Conguring the LDAP Server” on page 475
“Selecting a Network that has an LDAP Server
(When Using an Additional Network)” on
page 350
Email notication ✓
*2
✓
*2
“Conguring a Mail Server” on page 447
“Conguring Email Notication (When Using an
Additional Network)” on page 350
Conguring the administrator
password
✓
*1
✓
*1
“Conguring the Administrator Password from
the Control Panel” on page 502
“Conguring the Administrator Password from a
Computer” on page 502
“Conguring the Administrator Password for the
Additional Network” on page 347
Advanced
security settings
IPsec/IP Filtering ✓
*1
✓
*1
“Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP
Filtering” on page 534
IEEE802.1X ✓
*1
✓
*1
“Connecting the Printer to an IEEE802.1X
Network” on page 545
Using Optional Items
>
10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet
>
Function List when Using an Additional Network
344
Functions Standard Additional Related information
Epson Open Platform ✓-“Using Epson Open Platform” on page 556
✓ = Available.
- = Not available.
*1 : You need to make settings for each network.
*2 : You can use the standard or the additional network to send to recipients for each destination.
*3 : Available only on either the standard or the additional network.
Installing an Ethernet Board
!
Caution:
Make sure you turn o the power, unplug the power cord, and check that all wiring has been disconnected. e cord
may be damaged, resulting in electric shock or re.
c
Important:
Electrostatic discharge can damage printer parts. Make sure you discharge static electricity from your body by
touching grounding yourself before installing the ethernet board.
1. Turn o the printer by pressing the
P
button.
2. Disconnect all cables such as the power cord and USB cable.
3. Loosen the two screws and then remove the cover.
Using Optional Items
>
10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet
>
Installing an Ethernet Board
345
4. Install the ethernet board straight into the additional interface slot for the ethernet board.
Insert the ethernet board rmly into the slot.
c
Important:
Do not remove the cover of the ethernet board.
Do not touch the terminals of the ethernet board.
5. Secure the ethernet board with the two screws.
6. Connect the removed power cord and USB cable.
7. Press the button, select the Job/Status > Options, and then conrm if the ethernet board is installed
correctly.
8. Select Settings > General Settings > System Administration > Firmware Update > Update to update the
rmware.
Settings when Using an Additional Network
Administrator Password Setting for Additional Network
When you set an administrator password for the additional network, you can prevent users from changing
additional network settings. You can set and change the administrator password for the additional network using
Web Cong from a computer on the additional network. e administrator password for the additional network
and for the printer are dierent.
e initial password for the additional network is the last eight digits of the MAC address. To check this, select
Wired LAN Status for the additional network on the printer's control panel to display the details. You can also
conrm the MAC address on the label stuck to the Ethernet board.
We recommend that you change the initial password as soon as possible to prevent unauthorized access. If you
reset the additional network to the default settings, the initial password will be restored.
Using Optional Items
>
10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet
>
Settings when Using an Additional Network
346
Related Information
&“Menu Options for Network Settings (When Using an Additional Network)” on page 352
Conguring the Administrator Password for the Additional Network
You can set the administrator password using Web Cong from a computer on the additional network.
1. Enter the printer's IP address for the additional network into a browser to access Web Cong.
2. Select the Product Security tab > Change Administrator Password.
3. Enter a password to New Password and Conrm New Password. Enter the user name, if necessary.
If you want to change the password to new one, enter a current password.
4. Select OK.
Note:
❏To set or change the locked menu items, click Administrator Login, and then enter the administrator password.
❏To delete the administrator password, click Product Security tab > Delete Administrator Password, and then enter
the administrator password.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Connecting to the Network from the Control Panel (When Using an Additional
Network)
Connect the printer to the network by using the printer's control panel.
Assigning the IP Address (When Using an Additional Network)
Set up the basic items such as Host Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway.
Make settings for the standard and the additional network.
is section explains the procedure for setting a static IP address.
1. Turn on the printer.
2. Select Settings on the home screen on the printer's control panel.
3. Select General Settings > Network Settings.
4. Select Standard or Additional for the network that you want to set up.
5. Select Advanced > TCP/IP.
Note:
When you select Advanced, you need to enter the administrator password for the additional network.
Using Optional Items
>
10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet
>
Settings when Using an Additional Network
347
6. Select Manual for Obtain IP Address.
When you set the IP address automatically by using the DHCP function of router, select Auto. In that case, the
IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway on step 7 to 8 are also set automatically, so go to step 9.
7. Enter the IP address.
Focus moves to the forward segment or the back segment separated by a period if you select
l
and
r
.
Conrm the value reected on the previous screen.
8. Set up the Subnet Mask and Default Gateway.
Conrm the value reected on the previous screen.
c
Important:
If the combination of the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway is incorrect, Start Setup is inactive
and cannot proceed with the settings. Conrm that there is no error in the entry.
9. Enter the IP address for the primary DNS server.
Conrm the value reected on the previous screen.
Note:
When you select Auto for the IP address assignment settings, you can select the DNS server settings from Manual or
Auto. If you cannot obtain the DNS server address automatically, select Manual and enter the DNS server address.
en, enter the secondary DNS server address directly. If you select Auto, go to step 11.
10. Enter the IP address for the secondary DNS server.
Conrm the value reected on the previous screen.
11. Tap Start Setup.
Setting the Proxy Server (When Using an Additional Network)
Set up the proxy server if both of the following are true.
❏e proxy server is built for Internet connection.
❏When using a function in which a printer directly connects to the Internet, such as Epson Connect service or
another company's cloud services.
e proxy server is only available on the standard network.
1. Select Settings on the home screen.
When making settings aer IP address setting, the Advanced screen is displayed. Go to step 3.
2. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Standard > Advanced.
3. Select Proxy Server.
4. Select Use for Proxy Server Settings.
5. Enter the address for the proxy server by IPv4 or FQDN format.
Conrm the value reected on the previous screen.
Using Optional Items
>
10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet
>
Settings when Using an Additional Network
348
6. Enter the port number for the proxy server.
Conrm the value reected on the previous screen.
7. Tap Start Setup.
Connecting to Ethernet (When Using an Additional Network)
Connecting to Ethernet on the Standard Network
Connect the printer to the standard network by using an Ethernet cable, and then check the connection.
1. Connect the printer and hub (LAN switch) by Ethernet cable.
2. Select Settings on the home screen.
3. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Standard > Connection Check.
e connection diagnosis result is displayed. Conrm the connection is correct.
4. Tap OK to nish.
When you tap Print Check Report, you can print the diagnosis result. Follow the on-screen instructions to
print it.
Connecting to Ethernet on an Additional Network
Connect the printer to the additional network by using an Ethernet cable, and then check the connection.
1. Connect the printer and hub (LAN switch) by Ethernet cable.
2. Select Job/Status on the home screen.
3. Select the Printer Status tab, and then select the Options tab.
e Ethernet connection status is displayed. Conrm the connection is correct.
Selecting the Network Transmission Route (When Using an Additional
Network)
e following scan and fax functions are available from the printer's control panel on either the standard or
additional network.
❏Scan to Email
❏Scan to Folder
❏Scan to Document Capture Pro
❏Fax to Email
❏Fax to Folder
Follow the steps below to select the network to use these scan and fax functions.
Using Optional Items
>
10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet
>
Settings when Using an Additional Network
349
1. Select Settings on the home screen.
2. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Network Transmission Route.
3. Select Standard or Additional for the network to use the scan and fax functions.
Selecting a Network that has an LDAP Server (When Using an Additional
Network)
You can use the LDAP server on either the standard or additional network.
Follow the steps below to select the network that has the LDAP server you want to use.
1. Select Settings on the home screen.
2. Select General Settings > Network Settings > LDAP Server.
3. Select Standard or Additional for the network that has the LDAP server.
Receiving Email Notications When Events Occur (When Using an Additional
Network)
About Email Notications (When Using an Additional Network)
is is the notication function that, when events such as printing stop and printer error occur, send the email to
the specied address.
You can register up to ve destinations and set the notication settings for each destination.
To use this function, you need to set up the mail server before setting up notications. Set up the email server on
the network (standard or additional) to which you want to send the email.
Related Information
&“Conguring a Mail Server” on page 447
Conguring Email Notication (When Using an Additional Network)
Congure email notication by using Web Cong from a computer on the standard network.
1. Enter the printer's IP address for the standard network into a browser to access Web Cong.
2. Select the Device Management tab > Email Notication.
3. Set the subject of email notication.
Select the contents displayed on the subject from the two pull-down menus.
❏e selected contents are displayed next to Subject.
❏e same contents cannot be set on le and right.
❏When the number of characters in Location exceeds 32 bytes, characters exceeding 32 bytes are omitted.
Using Optional Items
>
10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet
>
Settings when Using an Additional Network
350
4. Enter the email address for sending the notication email.
Use A-Z a-z 0-9 ! # $ % & ' * + - . /= ? ^ _ { | } ~ @, and enter between 1 and 255 characters.
5. Select Standard or Additional for the network used to send to recipients.
6. Select the language for the email notications.
7. Select the check box on the event for which you want to receive a notication.
e number of Notication Settings is linked to the destination number of Email Address Settings.
Example :
If you want a notication sent to the email address set for number 1 in Email Address Settings when the
printer is out of paper, select the check box column 1 in line Paper out.
8. Click OK.
Conrm that an email notication will be sent by causing an event.
Example : Print by specifying the Paper Source where paper is not set.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
&“Conguring a Mail Server” on page 447
&“Items for Email Notication” on page 516
Solving Problems when Using an Additional Network
Cannot Print or Scan from a Computer
The standard or additional network settings are incorrect.
You need to set up the standard network and the additional network. Check the settings for both networks.
Related Information
&“Connecting to the Network from the Control Panel (When Using an Additional Network)” on page 347
Scan or Fax Functions from the Control Panel Do Not Work Correctly (Except
for Scan to Cloud)
The network to use the scan or fax functions from the control panel is not selected correctly.
e scan or fax functions from the control panel are available on either the standard or additional network. Make
sure that the network to use the scan and fax functions is selected correctly.
Related Information
&“Selecting the Network Transmission Route (When Using an Additional Network)” on page 349
Using Optional Items
>
10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet
>
Solving Problems when Using an Additional Network
351
Cannot Use the LDAP Server
The network with the LDAP server is not selected correctly.
e LDAP server on either the standard or additional network is available. Make sure that the network that has the
LDAP server you want to use is selected correctly.
Related Information
&“Selecting a Network that has an LDAP Server (When Using an Additional Network)” on page 350
Menu Options for Network Settings (When Using an Additional
Network)
is section explains the Network Settings menu when using the additional network.
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > General Settings > Network Settings
Standard:
Set up the standard network. See Related Information below.
Related Information
&“Network Settings” on page 381
Additional:
Set up the additional network.
Network Status:
Displays or prints the current network settings.
❏Wired LAN Status
❏Print Status Sheet
Advanced:
Make the following detailed settings.
❏TCP/IP
❏IPv6 Address
❏Link Speed & Duplex
❏Redirect HTTP to HTTPS
❏Disable IPsec/IP Filtering
❏Disable IEEE802.1X
You need to enter the administrator password for the additional network.
Using Optional Items
>
10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet
>
Menu Options for Network Settings (When Using an Ad
…
352
Restore Default Settings:
Reset the settings for the additional network to their defaults.
You need to enter the administrator password for the additional network.
Network Transmission Route:
Select the network to use the scan and fax functions from the control panel (Scan to Email, Scan to Folder, Scan to
Document Capture Pro, Fax to Email, Fax to Folder).
LDAP Server:
Select the network that has the LDAP server you want to use.
Using Optional Items
>
10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet
>
Menu Options for Network Settings (When Using an Ad
…
353
Product Information
Paper Information.................................................355
Consumable Products Information.....................................362
Soware Information.............................................. 363
Settings Menu List.................................................374
Product Specications..............................................404
Font Specications................................................ 417
Regulatory Information.............................................431
Paper Information
Available Paper and Capacities
Genuine Epson Paper
Epson recommends using genuine Epson paper to ensure high-quality printouts.
Note:
❏Genuine Epson paper is not available when printing with the Epson universal printer driver.
❏e availability of paper varies by location. For the latest information on paper available in your area, contact Epson
support.
❏See the following for information on available paper types for 2-sided printing.
“Paper for 2-Sided Printing” on page 360
❏When printing on genuine Epson paper at a user dened size, only Standard or Normal print quality settings are
available. Although some printer drivers allow you to select a better print quality, the printouts are printed using
Standard or Normal.
Paper suitable for printing documents
Media Name Size Loading Capacity (Sheets)
Paper
Cassette 1
Paper
Cassette 2 to
4
Paper Tray
Epson Business Paper A4 250 500 150
Epson Bright White Paper A3 200 400 90
Epson Bright White Ink Jet Paper A4 200 400 90
Paper suitable for printing documents and photos
Media Name Size Loading Capacity (Sheets)
Paper
Cassette 1
Paper
Cassette 2 to
4
Paper Tray
Epson Photo Quality Ink Jet Paper A3+, A3, A4 - - 130
Epson Matte Paper-Heavyweight A3+, A3, A4 - - 35
Product Information
>
Paper Information
>
Available Paper and Capacities
355
Paper suitable for printing photos
Media Name Size Loading Capacity (Sheets)
Paper
Cassette 1
Paper
Cassette 2 to
4
Paper Tray
Epson Ultra Glossy Photo Paper A4, 13x18 cm (5x7in.), 10x15
cm(4x6 in.)
--35
Epson Premium Glossy Photo
Paper
A3+, A3, A4, 13x18 cm
(5x7in.), 10x15 cm (4x6 in.)
--35
Epson Premium Semigloss Photo
Paper
A3+, A3, A4, 10x15 cm(4x6
in.)
--35
Epson Photo Paper Glossy A3+, A3, A4, 13x18 cm
(5x7in.), 10x15 cm(4x6 in.)
--35
Commercially Available Paper
Note:
❏8.5×13 in, 8K (270×390 mm), 16K (195×270 mm) and the half letter sizes are not available when printing with the
PostScript printer driver.
❏See the following for information on available paper types for 2-sided printing.
“Paper for 2-Sided Printing” on page 360
Product Information
>
Paper Information
>
Available Paper and Capacities
356
Plain papers
Media Name Size Loading Capacity (Sheets)
Paper Cassette
1
Paper Cassette
2 to 4
Paper Tray
Plain paper, Copy paper
Preprinted paper
*1
Letterhead
Color paper
Recycled paper
High quality plain paper
A3+ – – 120
A3, B4, A4, Letter,
Executive
*2
, B5, 16K
(195×270 mm), 8K
(270×390 mm), A5, US B
(11×17 in. )
Up to the line
indicated by the
triangle symbol
on the edge
guide.
Up to the line
indicated by the
triangle symbol
on the edge
guide.
150
Legal, Indian-Legal,
8.5×13 in.
Up to the line
indicated by the
triangle symbol
on the edge
guide.
Up to the line
indicated by the
triangle symbol
on the edge
guide.
120
A6, B6, Half Letter
*2
Up to the line
indicated by the
triangle symbol
on the edge
guide.
– 150
User Dened
*2
(mm)
100 to 297×148 to 431.8
Up to the line
indicated by the
triangle symbol
on the edge
guide.
–50
User Dened
*2
(mm)
148 to 297×210 to 431.8
Up to the line
indicated by the
triangle symbol
on the edge
guide.
Up to the line
indicated by the
triangle symbol
on the edge
guide.
50
User Dened
*2
(mm)
55 to 329×127 to 1200
––
50 (1)
*3
*1 Paper on which various forms are pre-printed such as slips or securities.
*2 Only printing from computer is available.
*3 The numbers in parenthesis () indicate the loading capacity for lengths of 431.9 mm or more.
Product Information
>
Paper Information
>
Available Paper and Capacities
357
Thick papers
Media Name Size Loading Capacity (Sheets)
Paper Cassette 1 Paper Cassette 2 to
4
Paper Tray
Thick paper
(91 to 150 g/m)
A3+––70
A3
B4
Legal
Indian-Legal
8K (270×390 mm)
8.5×13 in
US B (11×17 in.)
150 250 70
Letter
A4
Executive
*1
B5
A5
16K (195×270 mm)
300 70
B6
A6
Half letter
*1
150 – 70
User Dened
*1
(mm)
100 to 297×148 to
431.8
150 – 35
User Dened
*1
(mm)
148 to 297×210 to
431.8
150 250 35
User Dened
*1
(mm)
55 to 329×127 to
1200
––35 (1)
*2
Product Information
>
Paper Information
>
Available Paper and Capacities
358
Media Name Size Loading Capacity (Sheets)
Paper Cassette 1 Paper Cassette 2 to
4
Paper Tray
Thick paper
(151 to 200 g/m)
A3+––50
A3
B4
Legal
Indian-Legal
8K (270×390 mm)
8.5×13 in
US B (11×17 in.)
120 200 50
Letter
A4
Executive
*1
B5
A5
16K (195×270 mm)
250 50
B6
A6
Half letter
*1
120 – 50
User Dened
*1
(mm)
100 to 297×148 to
431.8
120 – 25
User Dened
*1
(mm)
148 to 297×210 to
431.8
120 200 25
User Dened
*1
(mm)
55 to 329×127 to
1200
––25 (1)
*2
Product Information
>
Paper Information
>
Available Paper and Capacities
359
Media Name Size Loading Capacity (Sheets)
Paper Cassette 1 Paper Cassette 2 to
4
Paper Tray
Thick paper
(201 to 256 g/m)
A3+
A3
B4
Legal
Letter
8.5×13 in
A4
Executive
*1
B5
A5
Half letter
*1
B6
A6
16K (195×270 mm)
8K (270×390 mm)
Indian-Legal
US B (11×17 in.)
––35
User Dened
*1
(mm)
55 to 329×127 to
1200
––20 (1)
*2
*1 Only printing from computer is available.
*2 The numbers in parenthesis () indicate the loading capacity for lengths of 431.9 mm or more.
Envelope
Media Name Size Loading Capacity (Envelopes)
Paper Cassette
1
Paper Cassette
2 to 4
Paper Tray
Envelope Envelope #10, Envelope
DL, Envelope C6
––15
Envelope C4 – – 1
Paper for 2-Sided Printing
Genuine Epson Paper
❏Epson Business Paper
Product Information
>
Paper Information
>
Available Paper and Capacities
360
❏Epson Bright White Paper
❏Epson Bright White Ink Jet Paper
Related Information
&“Available Paper and Capacities” on page 355
Commercially Available Paper
❏Plain paper, Copy paper, Preprinted paper, Letterhead, Color paper, Recycled paper, High quality plain paper
*1
❏ick paper (91 to 150 g/m²)
*1
❏ick paper (151 to 200 g/m²)
*2
❏ick paper (201 to 256 g/m²)
*2
*1 A3+, half letter, A6, B6 size paper is not supported for automatic 2-sided printing.
For automatic 2-sided printing with User Dened paper sizes, you can use 148 to 297×210 to 431.8 mm paper sizes.
*2 Manual 2-sided printing only.
*3 The numbers in parenthesis () indicate the loading capacity for lengths of 431.9 mm or more.
Related Information
&“Available Paper and Capacities” on page 355
Unavailable Paper Types
Do not use the following papers. Using these types of paper causes paper jams and smears on the printout.
❏Papers that are wavy
❏Papers that are torn or cut
❏Papers that are folded
❏Papers that are damp
❏Papers that are too thick or too thin
❏Papers that have stickers
Do not use the following envelopes. Using these types of envelope causes paper jams and smears on the printout.
❏Envelopes that are curled or folded
❏Envelopes with adhesive surfaces on the aps or window envelopes
❏Envelopes that are too thin
ey may curl during printing.
Product Information
>
Paper Information
>
Unavailable Paper Types
361
Consumable Products Information
Ink Supply Unit Codes
e following are the codes for genuine Epson ink supply units.
Note:
❏Ink supply unit codes may vary by location. For the correct codes in your area, contact Epson support.
❏Although the ink supply units may contain recycled materials, this does not aect printer function or performance.
❏Specications and appearance of the ink supply unit are subject to change without prior notice for improvement.
Black Cyan Magenta Yellow
T05B1
T05A1
T05B2
T05A2
T05B3
T05A3
T05B4
T05A4
For users in Europe, visit the following website for information on Epson's ink supply unit yields.
http://www.epson.eu/pageyield
Epson recommends the use of genuine Epson ink supply units. Epson cannot guarantee the quality or reliability of
non-genuine ink. e use of non-genuine ink may cause damage that is not covered by Epson’s warranties, and
under certain circumstances, may cause erratic printer behavior. Information about non-genuine ink levels may
not be displayed.
Related Information
&“Technical Support Web Site” on page 559
Maintenance Box Code
Epson recommends the use of a genuine Epson maintenance box.
Maintenance box code: T6714
c
Important:
Once a maintenance box has been installed in a printer it cannot be used with other printers.
Maintenance Rollers Codes
Epson recommends the use of genuine Epson maintenance rollers.
e following are the codes.
Maintenance rollers of paper cassette 1: S210048
Maintenance rollers of paper cassette 2 to 4: S210049
Product Information
>
Consumable Products Information
>
Maintenance Rollers Codes
362
Software Information
is section introduces the network services and soware products available for your printer from the Epson
website or the supplied soware disc.
Software for Printing
Application for Printing from a Computer (Windows Printer Driver)
e printer driver controls the printer according to the commands from an application. Making settings on the
printer driver provides the best printing results. You can also check the status of the printer or keep it in top
operating condition using the printer driver utility.
Note:
You can change the language of the printer driver. Select the language you want to use from the Language setting on the
Maintenance tab.
Accessing the printer driver from applications
To make settings that apply only to the application you are using, access from that application.
Select Print or Print Setup from the File menu. Select your printer, and then click Preferences or Properties.
Note:
Operations dier depending on the application. See the application's help for details.
Accessing the printer driver from the control panel
To make settings that apply to all of the applications, access from the control panel.
❏Windows 10/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server 2016
Click on the start button, and then select Windows System > Control Panel > View devices and printers in
Hardware and Sound. Right-click on your printer, or press and hold it and then select Printing preferences
❏Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012
Select Desktop > Settings > Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound. Right-click
on your printer, or press and hold it and then select Printing preferences
❏Windows 7/Windows Server 2008 R2
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound. Right-
click on your printer and select Printing preferences.
❏Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > Printers in Hardware and Sound. Right-click on your printer
and select Printing preferences.
❏Windows XP/Windows Server 2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Printers and Faxes. Right-
click on your printer and select Printing preferences.
Accessing the printer driver from the printer icon on the task bar
e printer icon on the desktop task bar is a shortcut icon allowing you to quickly access the printer driver.
Product Information
>
Software Information
>
Software for Printing
363
If you click the printer icon and select Printer Settings, you can access the same printer settings window as the one
displayed from the control panel. If you double-click this icon, you can check the status of the printer.
Note:
If the printer icon is not displayed on the task bar, access the printer driver window, click Monitoring Preferences on the
Maintenance tab, and then select Register the shortcut icon to the taskbar.
Starting the utility
Access the printer driver window. Click the Maintenance tab.
Related Information
&“Menu Options for the Printer Driver” on page 50
Application for Printing from a Computer (Mac OS Printer Driver)
e printer driver controls the printer according to the commands from an application. Making settings on the
printer driver provides the best printing results. You can also check the status of the printer or keep it in top
operating condition using the printer driver utility.
Accessing the printer driver from applications
Click Page Setup or Print on the File menu of your application. If necessary, click Show Details (or
d
) to expand
the print window.
Note:
Depending on the application being used, Page Setup may not be displayed in the File menu, and the operations for
displaying the print screen may dier.See the application's help for details.
Starting the utility
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and then
select the printer. Click Options & Supplies > Utility > Open Printer Utility.
Related Information
&“Menu Options for the Printer Driver” on page 77
Product Information
>
Software Information
>
Software for Printing
364
Guide to Mac OS Printer Driver
Epson Printer Utility
You can run a maintenance feature such as nozzle check and print head cleaning, and by starting EPSON Status
Monitor, you can check printer status and error information.
Application that can print PostScript Fonts (Windows PostScript Printer
Driver)
e PostScript printer driver allows the printer to receive and interpret print instructions in the page description
language sent from the computer and print properly. is is suitable for printing from PostScript compliant
applications used for DTP.
Accessing the printer driver from applications
To make settings that apply only to the application you are using, access from that application.
Select Print or Print Setup from the File menu. Select your printer, and then click Preferences or Properties.
Note:
Operations dier depending on the application. See the application's help for details.
Accessing the printer driver from the control panel
To make settings that apply to all of the applications, access from the control panel.
❏Windows 10/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server 2016
Click on the start button, and then select Windows System > Control Panel > View devices and printers in
Hardware and Sound. Right-click on your printer, or press and hold it and then select Printing preferences
❏Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012
Select Desktop > Settings > Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound. Right-click
on your printer, or press and hold it and then select Printing preferences
❏Windows 7/Windows Server 2008 R2
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound. Right-
click on your printer and select Printing preferences.
Product Information
>
Software Information
>
Software for Printing
365
❏Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > Printers in Hardware and Sound. Right-click on your printer
and select Printing preferences.
❏Windows XP/Windows Server 2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Printers and Faxes. Right-
click on your printer and select Printing preferences.
Accessing the printer driver from the printer icon on the task bar
e printer icon on the desktop task bar is a shortcut icon allowing you to quickly access the printer driver.
If you click the printer icon and select Printer Settings, you can access the same printer settings window as the one
displayed from the control panel. If you double-click this icon, you can check the status of the printer.
Related Information
&“Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)” on page 71
Application that can print PostScript Fonts (Mac OS PostScript Printer Driver)
e PostScript printer driver allows the printer to receive and interpret print instructions in the page description
language sent from the computer and print properly. is is suitable for printing from PostScript compliant
applications used for DTP.
Accessing the printer driver from applications
Click Page Setup or Print on the File menu of your application. If necessary, click Show Details (or
d
) to expand
the print window.
Note:
Depending on the application being used, Page Setup may not be displayed in the File menu, and the operations for
displaying the print screen may dier.See the application's help for details.
Starting the utility
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and then
select the printer. Click Options & Supplies > Utility > Open Printer Utility.
Related Information
&“Printing Using a PostScript Printer Driver - Mac OS X” on page 83
Application that can print PCL Language (PCL Printer Driver)
e PCL Printer Driver allows the printer to receive and interpret print instructions in the page description
language sent from the computer and print properly. is is suitable for printing from general applications such as
Microso Oce.
Note:
Mac OS is not supported.
Connect the printer to the same network as the computer, and then follow the procedure below to install the
printer driver.
Product Information
>
Software Information
>
Software for Printing
366
1. Download the executable le of the driver from the Epson support website.
http://www.epson.eu/Support (Europe only)
http://support.epson.net/
2. Double-click the executable le.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions for the rest of the installation.
Note:
If you are using a Windows computer and you cannot download the driver from the website, install it from the soware
disc that came with the printer. Access "Driver\PCL Universal".
Application for Printing Web Pages (E-Web Print)
E-Web Print is an application that allows you to easily print web pages with various layouts. See the application's
help for details. You can access the help from the E-Web Print menu on the E-Web Print tool bar.
Note:
❏Windows Server operating systems are not supported.
❏Mac OS is not supported.
❏Check for supported browsers and the latest version from the download site.
Starting
When you install E-Web Print, it is displayed in your browser. Click Print or Clip.
Related Information
&“Installing the Applications Separately” on page 179
Application that Prints Using a Method that is not Standard on Windows
(EpsonNet Print)
EpsonNet Print is a soware to print on the TCP/IP network. is is installed from the installer together with the
printer driver. To perform network printing, create an EpsonNet Print port. ere are features and restrictions
listed below.
❏e printer’s status is displayed on the spooler screen.
❏If the printer’s IP address is changed by DHCP, the printer is still detected.
❏You can use a printer located on a dierent network segment.
❏You can print using one of the various protocols.
❏IPv6 address is not supported.
Application for Printing Easily from a Smart Device (Epson iPrint)
Epson iPrint is an application that allows you to print photos, documents, and web pages from a smart device such
as a smartphone or tablet. You can use local print, printing from a smart device that is connected to the same
Product Information
>
Software Information
>
Software for Printing
367
wireless network as your printer, or remote print, printing from a remote location over the Internet. To use remote
print, register your printer in the Epson Connect service.
Installing Epson iPrint
You can install Epson iPrint on your smart device from the following URL or QR code.
http://ipr.to/c
Application for Printing Easily from an Android Application (Epson Print
Enabler)
Epson Print Enabler is an application that allows you to wirelessly print your documents, emails, photos, and web
pages right from your Android phone or tablet (Android v4.4 or later). With a few taps, your Android device will
discover an Epson printer that is connected to the same wireless network.
Search for and install Epson Print Enabler from Google Play.
Software for Scanning
Application for Scanning Documents(Document Capture Pro)
Document Capture Pro
*
is an application that allows you to eciently scan originals such as documents.
e method of saving images is registered as a job in this application. By registering a series of operations in
advance as a job, you can perform all of the operations by simply selecting the job. Preset jobs are available that
allow you to save scanned images to a computer.
See the Document Capture Pro help for details on using the features.
Note:
❏You can perform jobs not only from the computer but also from the control panel of the printer that is connected over a
network.
❏Document Capture Pro does not support Windows Vista/Windows XP.
*e names are for Windows. For Mac OS, the name is Document Capture. For Windows Server, the name is
Document Capture Pro Server.
Product Information
>
Software Information
>
Software for Scanning
368
Starting on Windows
❏Windows 10/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server 2016
Click the start button, and then select Epson Soware > Document Capture Pro.
❏Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.
❏Windows 7/Windows Server 2008 R2
Click the start button, and then select All Programs > Epson Soware > Document Capture Pro.
Starting on Mac OS
Select Go > Applications > Epson Soware > Document Capture.
Application for Controlling the Scanner (Epson Scan 2)
Epson Scan 2 is a scanner driver that allows you to control the scanner. You can adjust the size, resolution,
brightness, contrast, and quality of the scanned image. You can also start this application from a TWAIN-
compliant scanning application. See the soware help for details on using the features.
Starting on Windows
Note:
For Windows Server operating systems, make sure the Desktop Experience feature is installed.
❏Windows 10/Windows Server 2016
Click the start button, and then select EPSON > Epson Scan 2.
❏Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.
❏Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server
2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
Click the start button, and then select All Programs or Programs > EPSON > Epson Scan 2.
Starting on Mac OS
Select Go > Applications > Epson Soware > Epson Scan 2.
Adding the Network Scanner
To use the network scanner, add the scanner by using the scanner driver "Epson Scan 2".
1. Start Epson Scan 2.
❏Windows 10/Windows Server 2016
Click the start button, and then select EPSON > Epson Scan 2.
❏Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.
❏Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server
2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
Click the start button, and then select All Programs or Programs > EPSON > Epson Scan 2.
Product Information
>
Software Information
>
Software for Scanning
369
❏Mac OS
Select Go > Applications > Epson Soware > Epson Scan 2.
2. On the Scanner Settings screen, click Add.
Note:
❏If Add is grayed out, click Enable Editing.
❏If the main screen of Epson Scan 2 is displayed, it has already been connected to the scanner. If you want to connect
to another network, select Scanner > Settings to open the Scanner Settings screen.
3. Add the network scanner. Enter the following items, and then click Add.
❏Model: Select the scanner you want to connect to.
❏Name: Enter the scanner name. You can enter up to 32 characters.
❏Search for Network: When the computer and the scanner are on the same network, the IP address is
displayed. If it is not displayed, click the button. If the IP address is still not displayed, click Enter
address, and then enter the IP address directly.
4. Select the scanner on the Scanner Settings screen, and then click OK.
Software for Faxing
Application for Conguring Fax Operations and Sending Faxes (FAX Utility)
FAX Utility is an application that allows you to congure various settings for sending faxes from a computer. You
can create or edit the contacts list to be used when sending a fax, congure to save received faxes in PDF format on
the computer, and so on. See the application's help for details.
Note:
❏Windows Server operating systems are not supported.
❏Before installing the FAX Utility, make sure you have installed the printer driver for this printer; this does not include the
PostScript printer driver and Epson universal printer driver.
❏Make sure you have installed the printer driver before installing FAX Utility. See "Starting on Windows" or "Starting on
Mac OS" below to check if the application has been installed.
Starting on Windows
❏Windows 10
Click the start button, and select Epson Soware > FAX Utility.
❏Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.
❏Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP
Click the start button, and select All Programs (or Programs) > Epson Soware > FAX Utility.
Starting on Mac OS
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and then
select the printer (FAX). Click Options & Supplies > Utility > Open Printer Utility.
Product Information
>
Software Information
>
Software for Faxing
370
Related Information
&“Sending a Fax from a Computer” on page 158
&“Receiving Faxes on a Computer” on page 162
Application for Sending Faxes (PC-FAX Driver)
PC-FAX driver is an application that allows you to send a document created on a separate application as a fax
directly from the computer. PC-FAX driver is installed when you install FAX Utility. See the application's help for
details.
Note:
❏Windows Server operating systems are not supported.
❏e operation diers depending on the application you used to create the document. See the application's help for details.
❏Check if the application has been installed. See "Accessing from Windows" or "Accessing from Mac OS" below.
Accessing from Windows
In the application, select Print or Print Setup from the File menu. Select your printer (FAX), and then click
Preferences or Properties.
Accessing from Mac OS
In the application, select Print from the File menu. Select your printer (FAX) as the Printer setting, and then select
Fax Settings or Recipient Settings from the pop-up menu.
Related Information
&“Sending a Fax from a Computer” on page 158
Software for Package Creation
Application for Creating Driver Packages (EpsonNet SetupManager)
EpsonNet SetupManager is a soware to create a package for a simple printer installation, such as installing the
printer driver, installing EPSON Status Monitor and creating a printer port. is soware allows the administrator
to create unique soware packages and distribute them among groups.
For more information, visit your regional Epson website.
http://www.epson.com
Software for Making Settings or Managing Devices
Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)
Web Cong is an application that runs in a web browser, such as Internet Explorer and Safari, on a computer or
smart device. You can conrm the printer status or change the network service and printer settings. To use the
Web Cong, connect the printer and the computer or device to the same network.
Product Information
>
Software Information
>
Software for Making Settings or Managing Devices
371
e following browsers are supported.
Microso Edge, Internet Explorer 8 or later, Firefox
*
, Chrome
*
, Safari
*
*Use the latest version.
Running Web Cong on a Web Browser
1. Check the printer's IP address.
Select the network icon on the printer's home screen, and then select the active connection method to conrm
the printer's IP address.
Note:
You can also check the IP address by printing the network connection report.
2. Launch a Web browser from a computer or smart device, and then enter the printer's IP address.
Format:
IPv4: http://the printer's IP address/
IPv6: http://[the printer's IP address]/
Examples:
IPv4: http://192.168.100.201/
IPv6: http://[2001:db8::1000:1]/
Note:
Using the smart device, you can also run Web Cong from the maintenance screen of Epson iPrint.
Since the printer uses a self-signed certicate when accessing HTTPS, a warning is displayed on the browser
when you start Web Cong; this does not indicate a problem and can be safely ignored.
Related Information
&“Application for Printing Easily from a Smart Device (Epson iPrint)” on page 367
&“Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 309
Running Web Cong on Windows
When connecting a computer to the printer using WSD, follow the steps below to run Web Cong.
1. Open the printer list on the computer.
❏Windows 10
Click on the start button, and then select Windows System > Control Panel > View devices and printers
in Hardware and Sound.
❏Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Select Desktop > Settings > Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound (or
Hardware).
❏Windows 7
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound.
Product Information
>
Software Information
>
Software for Making Settings or Managing Devices
372
❏Windows Vista
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > Printers in Hardware and Sound.
2. Right-click on your printer and select Properties.
3. Select the Web Ser vice tab and click the URL.
Since the printer uses a self-signed certicate when accessing HTTPS, a warning is displayed on the browser
when you start Web Cong; this does not indicate a problem and can be safely ignored.
Running Web Cong on Mac OS
1. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and
then select the printer.
2. Click Options & Supplies> Show Printer Webpage.
Since the printer uses a self-signed certicate when accessing HTTPS, a warning is displayed on the browser
when you start Web Cong; this does not indicate a problem and can be safely ignored.
Application for Setting up the Device on a Network (EpsonNet Cong)
EpsonNet Cong is an application that allows you to set the network interface addresses and protocols. See the
operations guide for EpsonNet Cong or the application's help for more details.
Starting on Windows
❏Windows 10/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server 2016
Click the start button, and then select EpsonNet > EpsonNet Cong.
❏Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.
❏Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server
2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
Click the start button, and select All Programs or Programs > EpsonNet > EpsonNet Cong SE > EpsonNet
Cong.
Starting on Mac OS
Go > Applications > Epson Soware > EpsonNet > EpsonNet Cong SE > EpsonNet Cong.
Related Information
&“Installing the Applications Separately” on page 179
Software for Managing Devices on the Network (Epson Device Admin)
Epson Device Admin is a multifunctional application soware that manages the device on the network.
e following functions are available.
❏Monitor or manage up to 2,000 printers or scanners over the segment
Product Information
>
Software Information
>
Software for Making Settings or Managing Devices
373
❏Make a detailed report, such as for the consumable or product status
❏Update the rmware of the product
❏Introduce the device to the network
❏Apply the unied settings to multiple devices.
You can download Epson Device Admin from Epson support website. For more information, see the
documentation or help of Epson Device Admin.
Software for Updating
Application for Updating Software and Firmware (EPSON Software Updater)
EPSON Soware Updater is an application that installs new soware, and updates rmware and manuals over the
Internet.
Note:
Windows Server operating systems are not supported.
Starting on Windows
❏Windows 10
Click the start button, and then select Epson Soware > EPSON Soware Updater.
❏Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.
❏Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP
Click the start button, and then select All Programs (or Programs) > Epson Soware > EPSON Soware
Updater.
Note:
You can also start EPSON Soware Updater by clicking the printer icon on the task bar on the desktop, and then selecting
Soware Update.
Starting on Mac OS
Select Go > Applications > Epson Soware > EPSON Soware Updater.
Related Information
&“Installing the Applications Separately” on page 179
Settings Menu List
Select Settings on the home screen of the printer to make various settings.
General Settings
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
374
Settings > General Settings
Basic Settings
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings
You cannot change settings that have been locked by your administrator.
LCD Brightness:
Adjust the brightness of the LCD screen.
Sounds:
Adjust the volume.
❏Mute
Select On to mute all sound.
❏Normal Mode
Select the volume such as Button Press.
❏Quiet Mode
Select the volume such as Button Press in Quiet Mode.
Sleep Timer:
Adjust the time period to enter a sleep mode (energy saving mode) when the printer has not
performed any operations. e LCD screen turns black when the setting time passes.
Wake from Sleep:
Wake with LCD Screen Touch:
Select On to return from sleep mode (energy saving mode) by tapping the touch panel. When
this is o, you need to press a button on the control panel to wake the printer. Turning this
feature o prevents any unintentional operations caused due to foreign objects touching the
screen. You can also set a time period during this feature is on.
Power O Timer:
Your product may have this feature or the Power O Settings feature depending on the location of
purchase.
Select this setting to turn the printer o automatically when it is not used for a specied period of
time. You can adjust the time before power management is applied. Any increase will aect the
product’s energy eciency. Please consider the environment before making any change.
Power O Settings:
Your product may have this feature or the Power O Timer feature depending on the location of
purchase.
❏Power O If Inactive
Select this setting to turn the printer o automatically if it is not used for a specied period of
time. Any increase will aect the product’s energy eciency. Please consider the environment
before making any change.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
375
❏Power O If Disconnected
Select this setting to turn the printer o aer 30 minutes when all ports including the LINE port
are disconnected. is feature may not be available depending on your region.
is setting is disabled when optional ethernet board or fax board is installed.
Date/Time Settings:
❏Date/Time
Enter the current date and time.
❏Daylight Saving Time
Select the summer time setting that applies to your area.
❏Time Dierence
Enter the time dierence between your local time and UTC (Coordinated Universal Time).
Country/Region:
Select the country or region in which you are using your printer. If you change the country or region,
your fax settings return to their defaults and you must select them again.
Language:
Select the language used on the LCD screen.
Start-up Screen:
Specify the initial menu displayed on the LCD screen when the printer turns on and Operation Time
Out is enable.
Edit Home:
Change the layout of the icons on the LCD screen. You can also add, remove, and move icons.
Wall Paper:
Change the background color of the LCD screen.
Operation Time Out:
Select On to return to the initial screen when no operations have been performed for the specied
time. When user restrictions have been applied and no operations are performed for the specied
time, you are logged out and returned to the initial screen.
Keyboard
Change the layout of the keyboard on the LCD screen.
Default Screen(Job/Status):
Select the default information you want to display when you press the button.
Related Information
&“Saving Power” on page 179
&“Entering Characters” on page 32
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
376
Printer Settings
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings
You cannot change settings that have been locked by your administrator.
Paper Source Settings:
Paper Setting:
Select the paper source to specify the paper size and paper type you loaded. When Paper Size
Auto Detect is enabled, the printer detects the paper size you loaded.
Paper Tray Priority:
Select On to give printing priority to paper loaded in the paper tray.
A4/Letter Auto Switching:
Select On to feed paper from the paper source set as A4 size when there is no paper source set
as Letter, or feed from the paper source set as Letter size when there is no paper source set as
A4.
Auto Select Settings:
When paper runs out, paper is automatically fed from a paper source that has the same
settings as the paper settings for the print jobs. You can set automatic selection for every paper
source for each function in copy, fax, or other. You cannot set everything to o.
is setting is disabled when you select a specic paper source in the paper settings for the
print jobs. Depending on the paper type setting on the Main tab of the printer driver, paper
may not be fed automatically.
Error Notice:
Select On to display an error message when the selected paper size or type does not match the
loaded paper.
Paper Setup Auto Display:
Select On to display the Paper Setting screen when loading paper in the paper cassette. If you
disable this feature, you cannot print from an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch using AirPrint.
User-Dened Paper Size List:
You ca n c h a nge the user dened size setting. is is useful when you print frequently on
irregularly sized paper.
Printing Language:
Select the printing language for the USB interface or the network interface.
Universal Print Settings:
ese print settings are applied when you print by an external device without using the printer driver.
Top Oset:
Adjust the top margin of the paper.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
377
Left Oset:
Adjust the le margin of the paper.
Top Oset in Back:
Adjust the top margin for the back of the page when performing 2-sided printing.
Left Oset in Back:
Adjust the le margin for the back margin of the page when performing 2-sided printing.
Check Paper Width:
Select On to check the paper width before printing. is prevents printing beyond the edges of
the paper when the paper size setting is incorrect, but this may lower the print speed.
Skip Blank Page:
Skips blank pages in the print data automatically.
Color Correction:
Make settings such as brightness and contrast, and perform color correction when printing
from an external device. When this feature is On, the printer color correction settings take
precedence over the settings of the standard printer driver.
❏Brightness
❏Contrast
❏Saturation
❏Red Balance
❏Green Balance
❏Blue Balance
PDL Print Conguration:
Select the PDL Print Conguration options you want to use for PCL or PostScript printing.
Common Settings:
❏Paper Size
Select the default paper size for PCL or PostScript printing.
❏Paper Type
Select the default paper type for PCL or PostScript printing.
❏Orientation
Select the default orientation for PCL or PostScript printing.
❏Quality
Select the print quality for PCL or PostScript printing.
❏Ink Save Mode
Select On to save ink by reducing the print density.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
378
❏Print Order
Last Page on Top
Starts printing from the rst page of a le.
First Page on Top
Starts printing from the last page of a le.
❏Number of Copies
Set the number of copies to print.
❏Binding Margin
Select the binding position.
❏Auto Paper Ejection
Select On to eject paper automatically when printing is stopped during a print job.
❏2-Sided Printing
Select On to perform 2-sided printing.
PCL Menu:
❏Font Source
Resident
Select to use a font preinstalled on the printer.
Download
Select to use a font you have downloaded.
❏Font Number
Select the default font number for the default font source. e available number varies
depending on the settings you made.
❏Pitch
Set the default font pitch if the font is scalable and of xed-pitch. You can select from 0.44 to
99.99 cpi (characters per inch), in 0.01 increments.
is item may not appear depending on the font source or font number settings.
❏Height
Set the default font height if the font is scalable and proportional. You can select from 4.00
to 999.75 points, in 0.25 increments.
is item may not appear depending on the font source or font number settings.
❏Symbol Set
Select the default symbol set. If the font that you selected in the font source and the font
number setting is not available in the new symbol set setting, the font source and the font
number settings are automatically replaced with the default value, IBM-US.
❏Form
Set the number of lines for the selected paper size and orientation. is also causes a line
spacing (VMI) change, and the new VMI value is stored in the printer. is means that later
changes in the page size or orientation settings cause changes in the Form value based on
the stored VMI.
❏CR Function
Select the line feed command when printing with a driver from a specic operating system.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
379
❏LF Function
Select the line feed command when printing with a driver from a specic operating system.
❏Paper Source Assign
Set the assignment for the paper source select command. When 4 is selected, the commands
are set as compatible with the HP LaserJet 4. When 4K is selected, the commands are set as
compatible with the HP LaserJet 4000, 5000, and 8000. When 5S is selected, the commands
are set as compatible with the HP LaserJet 5S.
PS Menu:
❏Error Sheet
Select On to print a sheet showing the status when an error occurs during PostScript or
PDF printing.
❏Coloration
Select the color mode for PostScript printing.
❏Binary
Select On when printing data that contains binary images. e application may send the
binary data even if the printer driver setting is set to ASCII, but you can print the data when
this feature is enabled.
❏PDF Page Size
Select the paper size when printing a PDF le. If Auto is selected, the paper size is
determined based on the size of the rst page.
Auto Error Solver:
Select an action to perform when a 2-sided printing error or a memory full error occurs.
❏On
Displays a warning and prints in single-sided mode when a 2-sided printing error occurs, or prints
only what the printer could process when a memory full error occurs.
❏O
Displays an error message and cancels printing.
Memory Device Interface:
❏Memory Device:
Select Enable to allow the printer to access an inserted memory device. If Disable is selected, you
cannot save data to the memory device with the printer. is prevents condential documents
from being removed illegally.
❏File Sharing:
Select whether to give write access to the memory device from a USB-connected computer or a
network-connected computer.
Thick Paper:
Select On to prevent ink from smearing on your printouts, however, this may lower the print speed.
Quiet Mode:
Select On to reduce noise during printing, however, this may lower the print speed. Depending on
the paper type and print quality settings you selected, there may be no dierence in the printer's noise
level.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
380
Ink Drying Time:
Select the ink drying time you want to use when performing 2-sided printing. e printer prints the
other side aer printing one side. If your printout is smeared, increase the time setting.
Bidirectional:
Select On to change the print direction; Prints while the print head moves to the le and to the right.
If vertical or horizontal ruled lines on your printout look blurred or misaligned, disabling this feature
may solve the problem; however, doing so may reduce print speed.
Output Tray Auto Extension:
Select On to automatically extend the output paper support when printing on paper larger than A4
size.
PC Connection via USB:
Select Enable to allow a computer to access the printer when connected by USB. When Disable is
selected, printing and scanning that is not sent over a network connection is restricted.
USB I/F Timeout Setting:
Specify the length of time in seconds that must elapse before ending USB communication with a
computer aer the printer receives a print job from a PostScript printer driver or PCL printer driver.
If the job ending is not clearly dened from a PostScript printer driver or PCL printer driver, it can
cause endless USB communication. When this occurs, the printer ends communication aer the
specied time has elapsed. Enter 0 (zero) if you do not want to end communication.
Related Information
&“Loading Paper” on page 37
&“Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48
&“Printing JPEG Files from a Memory Device” on page 92
&“Printing TIFF Files from a Memory Device” on page 93
Network Settings
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > General Settings > Network Settings
Wi-Fi Setup:
Set up or change wireless network settings. Choose the connection method from following and then
follow the instructions on the control panel.
Router:
❏Wi-Fi Setup Wizard
❏Push Button Setup(WPS)
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
381
❏Others
❏PIN Code Setup(WPS)
❏Wi-Fi Auto Connect
❏Disable Wi-Fi
You may be able to resolve network problems by disabling the Wi-Fi settings or making
the Wi-Fi settings again. Tap > Router > Change Settings > Others >
Disable Wi-Fi > Start Setup.
Wi-Fi Direct:
❏iOS
❏Android
❏Other OS Devices
❏Change
❏Change Network Name
❏Change Password
❏Disable Wi-Fi Direct
❏Restore Default Settings
Wired LAN Setup:
Set up or change a network connection that uses a LAN cable and router. When this is being used,
Wi-Fi connections are disabled.
Network Status:
Displays or prints the current network settings.
❏Wired LAN/Wi-Fi Status
❏Wi-Fi Direct Status
❏Email Server Status
❏Print Status Sheet
Connection Check:
Checks the current network connection and prints a report. If there are any problems with the
connection, see the report to solve the problem.
Advanced:
Make the following detailed settings.
❏Device Name
❏TCP/IP
❏Proxy Server
❏Email Server
❏IPv6 Address
❏MS Network Sharing
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
382
❏Link Speed & Duplex
❏Redirect HTTP to HTTPS
❏Disable IPsec/IP Filtering
❏Disable IEEE802.1X
❏iBeacon Transmission
Related Information
&“Making Wi-Fi Settings by Entering the SSID and Password” on page 295
&“Making Wi-Fi Settings by Push Button Setup (WPS)” on page 296
&“Making Wi-Fi Settings by PIN Code Setup (WPS)” on page 297
&“Printing a Network Status Sheet” on page 315
&“Checking the Network Connection Status from the Control Panel” on page 308
Web Service Settings
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > General Settings > Web Service Settings
You cannot change settings that have been locked by your administrator.
Epson Connect Services:
Displays whether the printer is registered and connected to Epson Connect.
You can register to the service by selecting Register and follow the instructions.
When you have registered, you can change the following settings.
❏Suspend/Resume
❏Unregister
For details, see the following web site.
https://www.epsonconnect.com/
http://www.epsonconnect.eu (Europe only)
Fax Settings (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
Selecting Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings from the printer's control panel displays this
menu.
Note:
❏You can also access Fax Settings from Web Cong. Click the Fax tab on the Web Cong screen.
❏When you use Web Cong to display the Fax Settings menu, there may be slight dierences in the user interface and in
location compared to the printer's control panel.
Related Information
&“Quick Operation Button” on page 384
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
383
&“Basic Settings” on page 384
&“Send Settings” on page 387
&“Receive Settings” on page 388
&“Report Settings” on page 395
&“Security Settings” on page 396
&“Check Fax Connection” on page 397
&“Fax Setting Wizard” on page 397
Quick Operation Button
You can nd the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Quick Operation Button
Note:
❏If a password entry screen is displayed, enter the administrator password.
❏You cannot display this menu on the Web Cong screen.
Quick Operation Button 1, Quick Operation Button 2, Quick Operation Button 3:
Registers up to three shortcuts allowing you to quickly access the menu you use oen when sending
faxes. e shortcuts are displayed on the following menu.
Fax > Fax Settings tab.
Basic Settings
You ca n nd the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings
Note:
❏On the Web Cong screen, you can nd the menu below.
Fax tab > Basic Settings
❏If a password entry screen is displayed, enter the password.
Fax Speed:
Select the fax transmission speed. We recommend selecting Slow(9,600bps) when a communication
error occurs frequently, when sending/receiving a fax to/from abroad, or when you are using an IP
(VoIP) phone service.
ECM:
Automatically corrects errors in the fax transmission (Error Correction Mode), mostly caused by
telephone line noise. If this is disabled, you cannot send or receive documents in color.
Dial Tone Detection:
Detects a dial tone before starting to dial. If the printer is connected to a PBX (Private Branch
Exchange) or digital phone line, the printer may fail to start dialing. In this situation, change the Line
Type setting to PBX. If this does not work, disable this feature. However, disabling this feature may
drop the rst digit of a fax number and send the fax to the wrong number.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
384
Dial Mode:
Select the type of phone system to which you have connected the printer. When set to Pulse, you can
temporarily switch the dialing mode from pulse to tone by pressing ("T" is entered) while entering
numbers on the fax top screen. is setting may not be displayed depending on your region or
country.
Line Type:
Select the line type to which you have connected the printer.
When using the printer in an environment that uses extensions and requires an external access code,
such as 0 and 9, to get an outside line, select PBX. For an environment that uses a DSL modem or
terminal adapter, setting to PBX is also recommended.
Access Code
Select Use, and then register an external access code such as 0 or 9. en, when sending a fax
to an outside fax number, enter # (hash) instead of the real code. # (hash) must also be used in
Contacts as an external access code. If an external access code such as 0 or 9 is set in a contact,
you cannot send faxes to the contact. In this case, set Access Code to Do Not Use, otherwise
you must change the code in Contacts to #.
Header:
Enter your sender name and fax number. ese appear as a header on outgoing faxes.
❏Your Phone Number: You can enter up to 20 characters using 0-9 + or space. For Web Cong, you
can enter up to 30 characters.
❏Fax Header: You can register up to 21 sender names as necessary. You can enter up to 40 characters
for each sender name. For Web Cong, enter the header in Unicode (UTF-8).
Receive Mode:
Select the receive mode. For details, see the related Information below.
DRD:
If you have subscribed to a distinctive ring service from your telephone company, select the ring
pattern to be used for incoming faxes. e distinctive ring service, oered by many telephone
companies (the service name diers by company), allows you to have several phone numbers on one
phone line. Each number is assigned dierent ring pattern. You can use one number for voice calls
and another for fax calls. Depending on the region, this option may be On or O.
Rings to Answer:
Select the number of rings that must occur before the printer automatically receives a fax.
Remote Receive:
Remote Receive
When you answer an incoming fax call on a phone connected to the printer, you can start
receiving the fax by entering the code using the phone.
Start Code
Set the start code of Remote Receive. Enter two characters using 0-9, *, #.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
385
Rejection Fax:
Rejection Fax
Select options to reject receiving junk faxes.
❏Rejection Number List: If the other party's phone number is in the rejection number list, set
whether to reject the incoming faxes.
❏Fax Header Blank: If the other party's phone number is blocked, set whether to reject
receiving the faxes.
❏Unregistered Contacts: If the other party's phone number is not in the contacts, set whether
to reject receiving the faxes.
Edit Blocked Number list
You can register up to 30 fax numbers to reject the faxes and calls. Enter up to 20 characters
using 0-9, *, #, or space.
Receiving Paper Size:
Select the maximum paper size for faxes that the printer can receive.
Save/Forward File Format:
File Format:
Select the format that you want to use for saving or forwarding faxes from PDF or TIFF.
PDF Settings:
Selecting PDF in Save/Forward File Format enables the settings.
Document Open Password:
Inbox Password Settings:
Enables to set a password to open saved or forwarded faxes.
Password:
Set a document open password.
Permissions Password:
Inbox Password Settings
Enables to set a password for printing or editing in a PDF le.
Password
Set a permission password in Password.
Printing: Allows printing the PDF le.
Editing: Allows editing the PDF le.
Related Information
&“Enabling Sending Faxes from a Computer” on page 495
&“Making the Printer Ready to Send and Receive Faxes” on page 484
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
386
&“Making Settings for a PBX Phone System” on page 486
&“Receiving Incoming Faxes” on page 140
&“Making Settings for Blocking Junk Faxes” on page 495
Send Settings
You can nd the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Send Settings
Note:
❏On the Web Cong screen, you can nd the menu below.
Fax tab > Send Settings
❏If a password entry screen is displayed, enter the password.
Auto Rotation:
An A4 size original placed in the ADF or on the scanner glass with its long edge facing to the le is
sent as an A3 size fax. Enable this to rotate the scanned image to send it at A4 size.
Quick memory send:
e quick memory send feature starts sending the fax when the printer nishes scanning the rst
page. If you do not enable this feature, the printer starts sending aer saving all of the scanned images
to memory. By using this feature, you can reduce the overall operation time as scanning and sending
are performed in parallel.
Batch Send:
When there are multiple faxes waiting to be sent to the same recipient, this groups them together to
send them at once. Up to ve documents (up to 200 pages in total) can be sent at one time. is helps
you save on transmission costs by reducing the number of connection times.
Save Failure Data:
Saves documents that failed to be sent in the printer's memory. You can resend the documents from
the Job/Status.
Set Storage Period:
Storage Period
Set a period of days within which the printer will store the document that failed to print.
Wait Time for Next Original:
Set the time to wait for the next original. e printer starts sending the fax aer the time has passed.
Fax Preview Display Time:
You can preview the scanned document for a set time before sending it. e printer stars sending the
fax aer the time has passed.
Allow Backup:
Selecting Allowed allows you to backup faxes sent with Fax > Fax Settings > Backup.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
387
PC to FAX Function:
is item is displayed on the Web Cong screen only. Enables sending faxes using a client computer.
Receive Settings
Related Information
&“Save/Forward Settings” on page 388
&“Print Settings” on page 393
Save/Forward Settings
Unconditional Save/Forward:
You can nd the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings >
Unconditional Save/Forward
Note:
On the Web Cong screen, you can nd the menu below.
Fax tab > Save/Forward Settings > Unconditional Save/Forward
You can set saving and forwarding destinations to the Inbox, a computer, an external memory device,
email addresses, shared folders, and other fax machines. You can use these features at the same time.
If you set all items to O on the printer's control panel, the printer is set to print received faxes.
Related Information
&“Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes” on page 488
&“Making Forwarding Settings to Receive Faxes” on page 489
Save to Inbox:
Saves received faxes to the printer's Inbox. Up to 200 documents can be saved. Note that saving
200 documents may not be possible depending on the usage conditions such as the le size of
saved documents, and using of multiple fax saving features at a time.
ough the received faxes are not automatically printed, you can view them on the printer's
screen and print only the ones you need. However, if you select Yes a n d Pr int in another item,
such as Save to Computer in Unconditional Save/Forward, the received faxes are printed
automatically.
Save to Computer:
Saves received faxes as PDF or TIFF les on a computer connected to the printer. You can set
this to Yes by using only the FAX Utility. Install FAX Utility on the computer in advance. Aer
setting this to Yes , you can change this to Yes a n d Prin t.
Save to Memory Device:
Saves received faxes as PDF or TIFF les to an external memory device connected to the
printer. Selecting Yes a nd Print prints received faxes while saving them to the memory device.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
388
Received documents are saved in the printer's memory temporarily before the documents are
saved in the memory device connected to the printer. Because a memory full error disables
sending and receiving faxes, keep the memory device connected to the printer.
Forward:
Forwards received faxes to another fax machine, or forwards them as PDF or TIFF les to a
shared folder on a network or to an email address. Forwarded faxes are deleted from the
printer. Selecting Yes a nd Print prints received faxes while forwarding them. First add the
forwarding destinations to the contacts list. To forward to an email address, congure the
email server settings.
❏Destination: You can select forwarding destinations from the contacts list you added in
advance.
If you have selected a shared folder on a network or an email address as the forwarding
destination, we recommend that you test if you can send a scanned image to the destination
in the scan mode. Select Scan > Email, or Scan > Network Folder/FTP from the home
screen, select the destination, and then start scanning.
❏Options When Forwarding Failed: You can select whether to print the failed fax or save it to
the Inbox.
When the Inbox is full, receiving faxes is disabled. You should delete the documents from
the inbox once they have been checked. e number of documents that have failed to be
forwarded is displayed on the on the home screen, in addition to other unprocessed
jobs.
Email Notications:
Sends an email notication when the process you select below is complete. You can use the
features below at the same time.
Recipient
Set the destination of the process completion notication.
Notify on Receive
Sends a notication when receiving a fax is complete.
Notify on Print
Sends a notication when printing a fax is complete.
Notify on Save
Sends a notication when saving a fax to a memory device is complete.
Notify on Forward
Sends a notication when forwarding a fax is complete.
Related Information
&“Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes” on page 488
&“Making Forwarding Settings to Receive Faxes” on page 489
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
389
Conditional Save/Forward:
You ca n nd the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings >
Conditional Save/Forward
Note:
On the Web Cong screen, you can nd the menu below.
Fax tab > Save/Forward Settings > Conditional Save/Forward
You can set saving and/or forwarding destinations to the Inbox, condential boxes, an external
memory device, email addresses, shared folders, and another fax machine.
To switch between enabling or disabling the conditions, tap anywhere on the set item except for .
Related Information
&“Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes with Specic Conditions” on page 491
&“Making Forwarding Settings to Receive Faxes with Specied Conditions” on page 493
Name:
Enter name of the condition.
Condition(s):
Select the conditions and make the settings.
Sender Fax Number match
When the sender fax number matches, the received fax is saved and forwarded.
Subaddress(SUB) perfect match
When the subaddress (SUB) matches perfectly, the received fax is saved and forwarded.
Password(SID) perfect match
When the password (SID) matches perfectly, the received fax is saved and forwarded.
Receiving Time
Saves and forwards a fax received during the specied period of time.
Save/Forward Destination:
Select the destination to save and forward received documents that match the conditions. You
can use the features below at the same time.
Save to Fax Box:
Saves received faxes in the printer's Inbox or condential box.
You can save up to 200 documents in total. Note that saving 200 documents may not be
possible depending on the usage conditions such as the le size of saved documents,
and using of multiple fax saving features at a time.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
390
Save to Memory Device:
Saves received faxes as PDF or TIFF les to an external memory device connected to the
printer.
Received documents are saved in the printer's memory temporarily before the
documents are saved in the memory device connected to the printer. Because a memory
full error disables sending and receiving faxes, keep the memory device connected to
the printer.
Forward:
Forwards received faxes to another fax machine, or forwards them as PDF or TIFF les
to a shared folder on a network or to an email address. Forwarded faxes are deleted
from the printer. First add the forwarding destination to the contacts list. To forward to
an email address, you also need to congure the email server settings.
❏Destination: You can select a forwarding destination from the contacts list you added
in advance.
If you have selected a shared folder on a network or an email address as the
forwarding destination, we recommend that you test if you can send a scanned image
to the destination in the scan mode. Select Scan > Email, or Scan > Network
Folder/FTP from the home screen, select the destination, and then start scanning.
❏Options When Forwarding Failed: You can select whether to print the failed fax or
save it to the Inbox.
Print:
Prints received faxes.
Email Notications:
Sends an email notication when the process you select below is complete. You can use the
features below at the same time.
Recipient
Set the destination of the process completion notication.
Notify on Receive
Sends a notication when receiving a fax is complete.
Notify on Print
Sends a notication when printing a fax is complete.
Notify on Save
Sends a notication when saving a fax to a memory device is complete.
Notify on Forward
Sends a notication when forwarding a fax is complete.
Save/Forward File Format:
You can set the le format when saving or forwarding received faxes.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
391
PDF Settings:
Selecting PDF in Save/Forward File Format enables the settings.
Document Open Password:
Inbox Password Settings:
Enables to set a password to open saved or forwarded faxes.
Password:
Set a document open password.
Permissions Password:
Inbox Password Settings
Enables to set a password for printing or editing in a PDF le.
Password
Set a permission password in Password.
Printing: Allows printing the PDF le.
Editing: Allows editing the PDF le.
Transmission Report:
Prints a transmission report automatically aer you save or forward a received fax.
Selecting Print on Error prints a report only when you save or forward a received fax and an
error occurs.
Related Information
&“Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes with Specic Conditions” on page 491
&“Making Forwarding Settings to Receive Faxes with Specied Conditions” on page 493
Common Settings:
You can nd the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings > Common
Settings
Note:
On the Web Cong screen, you can nd the menu below.
❏Fax tab > Fax Box > Inbox
❏Fax tab > Save/Forward Settings > Common Settings
Inbox settings:
Options when memory is full:
You can select the operation to print the received fax or refuse to receive it when the
Inbox memory is full.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
392
Inbox Password Settings:
Password protects the Inbox to restrict users from viewing received faxes. Select Change
to change the password, and select Reset to cancel password protection. When changing
or resetting the password, you need the current password.
You ca n n ot s et a password when Options when memory is full has been set to Receive
and print faxes.
Email Subject to Forward:
You can specify a subject for the email when forwarding to an email address.
Box Document Delete Settings:
Box Document Delete Settings:
Selecting On automatically deletes received fax documents in the inbox aer a certain
period of time.
Period Until Deletion:
Set a period of days aer which the printer will delete the document saved in the inbox.
Faxes To Be Deleted:
Select the documents that you want to delete from Read, Unread and All.
(Menu):
You can nd the menu on the printer's control panel below:
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings
Note:
You cannot print the list from the Web Cong screen.
Print Conditional Save/Forward list:
Prints the Conditional Save/Forward list.
Print Settings
You can nd the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Print Settings
Note:
❏On the Web Cong screen, you can nd the menu below.
Fax tab > Print Settings
❏If a password entry screen is displayed, enter the password.
Auto Reduction:
Prints received faxes with large-size documents reduced to t on the paper in the paper source.
Reducing may not always be possible depending on the received data. If this is turned o, large
documents are printed at their original size on multiple sheets, or a blank second page may be
ejected.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
393
Split Page Settings:
Prints received faxes with the page split when the size of the received documents is larger than the
size of the paper loaded in the printer.
Acting Print:
Make print settings when the document size of the received fax is larger than the size of the paper
loaded in the printer.
Selecting On(Split to pages) splits the document longitudinally to print the received document.
Selecting On (Reduce to Fit) reduces to a 50 % minimum to print.
Auto Rotation:
Rotates faxes received as landscape-oriented A4 (Letter, B5, or A5) size documents so that they are
printed on A4 (Letter, B5, or A5) size paper. is setting is applied when the paper size setting for at
least one paper source used for printing faxes is set to A4 (B5, A5, or Letter).
By selecting O, faxes received as landscape-oriented A4 (Letter, B5, or A5) size, which are the same
width as A3 (Tabloid, B4, or A4) portrait documents, are assumed to be A3 (Tabloid, B4, or A4) size
faxes and printed as such.
Check the paper source settings for printing faxes and paper size for the paper sources in the
following menus in Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Paper Source Settings.
❏Auto Select Settings
❏Paper Setting > Paper Size
Add Reception Information:
Prints reception information on the received fax, even if the sender does not set the header
information. e reception information includes the received date and time, sender's ID, reception
ID (such as " #001"), and page number (such as "P1"). By collating the reception ID printed on the
received fax, you can check the transmission log in the fax report and the fax job history. When Split
Page Settings is enabled, the split page number is also included.
2-Sided:
Prints multiple pages of received faxes on both sides of the paper.
Print Start Timing:
Select options to start printing the faxes to receive.
❏All Pages Received: Printing starts aer receiving all of the pages. To start printing from the rst
page or last page depends on the setting of Collation Stack feature. See the explanation for
Collation Stack.
❏First Page Received: Starts printing when the rst page is received, and then prints in order as the
pages are received. If the printer cannot start printing, such as when it is printing other jobs, the
printer starts printing received pages as a batch when it is available.
Collation Stack:
Since the rst page is printed last (output to the top), the printed documents are stacked in the correct
page order. When the printer is running low on memory, this feature may not be available.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
394
Print Suspend Time:
Print Suspend Time
During the specied time period, the printer saves documents received in the printer's
memory without printing them. is feature can be used for noise prevention at night or to
prevent condential documents from being disclosed while you are away. Before using this
feature, make sure there is enough free memory. Even before the restarting time, you can check
and print the received documents individually from Job/Status on the home screen.
Time to Stop
Stops printing documents.
Time to Restart
Restarts printing documents automatically.
Quiet Mode:
Reduces the noise the printer makes when printing faxes, however, print speed may be reduced.
Report Settings
You can nd the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Report Settings
Note:
❏On the Web Cong screen, you can nd the menu below.
Fax tab > Report Settings
❏If a password entry screen is displayed, enter the password.
Forwarding Report:
Prints a report aer forwarding a received fax document. Select Print to print every time a document
is forwarded.
Backup Error Report:
Prints a report when a backup error occurs on forwarding the sent fax to Backup Destination. You
can set the destination in Fax > Fax Settings > Backup. Note that the backup feature is available
when:
❏Sending a fax in monochrome
❏Sending a fax using the Send Fax Later feature
❏Sending a fax using the Batch Send feature
❏Sending a fax using the Store Fax Data feature
Fax Log Auto Print:
Prints the fax log automatically. Select On(Every 100) to print a log every time 100 fax jobs are
completed. Select On(Time) to print the log at a specied time. However, if the number of fax jobs
exceeds 100, the log is printed before the specied time.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
395
Reception Report:
Prints a reception report aer you received a fax.
Print on Error prints a report only when an error occurs.
Attach Fax image to report:
Prints a Transmission Report with an image of the rst page of the sent document. Select On(Large
Image) to print the upper part of the page without reducing. Select On(Small Image) to print the
entire page reducing it to t onto the report.
Fax Log Layout:
Combine Send and Receive prints a Transmission Report and Reception Report on the same sheet
when you print Fax Log.
Selecting Separate Send and Receive prints a Transmission Report and Reception Report
separately when you print Fax Log.
Report Format:
Selects a format for fax reports in Fax > More tab > Fax Report other than Protocol Trace. Select
Detail to print with error codes.
Fax Log Output Method:
Select an output method for fax reports such as Save to Memory Device. When you select Forward,
select Destination from the contacts.
Security Settings
You can nd the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Security Settings
Note:
❏On the Web Cong screen, you can nd the menu below.
Fax tab > Security Settings
❏If a password entry screen is displayed, enter the password.
Direct Dialing Restrictions:
Selecting On disables manual entry of the recipient's fax numbers allowing the operator to select
recipients only from the contacts list or sent history.
Selecting Enter Twice requires the operator to enter the fax number again when the number was
manually entered.
Selecting O enables manual entry of the recipient's fax numbers.
Broadcasting Restrictions:
Selecting On allows only one fax number to be entered as the Recipient.
Conrm Address List:
Selecting On displays a recipient conrmation screen before starting the transmission.
You can select the recipients from All or Only for Broadcasting.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
396
Backup Data Auto Clear:
Selecting On automatically erases the backups when sending or receiving a document completes
successfully and the backups become unnecessary.
Selecting O, to prepare for an unexpected power o due to an electricity failure or an incorrect
operation, temporarily stores backup copies of sent and received documents in its memory.
Clear Backup Data:
Erases all backup copies temporarily stored in the printer's memory. Run this before you give the
printer to someone else or dispose of it.
is menu is not displayed on the Web Cong screen.
Check Fax Connection
You ca n nd the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Check Fax Connection
Note:
You cannot display this menu on the Web Cong screen.
Selecting Check Fax Connection checks that the printer is connected to the phone line and ready for fax
transmission. You can print the check result on A4 size plain paper.
Fax Setting Wizard
You ca n nd the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Setting Wizard
Note:
You cannot display this menu on the Web Cong screen.
Selecting Fax Setting Wizard makes basic fax settings. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Related Information
&“Basic Settings” on page 384
&“Making the Printer Ready to Send and Receive Faxes” on page 484
Scan Settings
Conrm Recipient
Check destination before scanning.
Document Capture Pro
Before scanning using the Computer menu on the control panel, set the operation mode on the
control panel to match the computer on which Document Capture Pro is installed.
❏Client Mode
Select this if Document Capture Pro is installed on Windows or Mac OS.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
397
❏Server Mode
Select this if Document Capture Pro is installed on a Windows Server. Next, enter the server
address.
Email Server
Set the email server settings for scanning Email.
❏Server Settings
Specify the authentication method for the printer to access the mail server.
“Mail Server Setting Items” on page 448
❏Connection Check
Check the connection to the mail server.
System Administration
By using this menu, you can maintain the product as a system administrator. It also allows you to restrict product
features for individual users to suite your work or oce style.
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > General Settings > System Administration
Contacts Manager:
You can make the following settings for contacts.
Register/Delete:
Register and/or delete contacts for the Fax, Scan to Email, and Scan to Network Folder/FTP
menus.
Frequent:
Register frequently used contacts to access them quickly. You can also change the order of the
list.
Print Contacts:
Print your contact list.
View Options:
Change the way the contact list is displayed.
Search Options:
Change the method for searching contacts.
Copy Color Sensitivity:
If Auto is selected when copying, set the standard for judging whether to copy in color or
monochrome.
Reset Page count:
Set the cumulative color print page count (page count) and monochrome cumulative print count
(page count) to Default.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
398
Clear Internal Memory Data:
is item is displayed on PCL or PostScript compatible printer.
Delete the printer's internal memory data, such as a downloaded font and macro for PCL printing or
a job of password printing.
HDD Erase Settings:
Make settings for processing data stored in the internal hard disc.
Jobs for printing, copying, and scanning are temporarily saved to the hard disc in order to handle the
data for authenticated printing and the large amount of copying, scanning, printing, etc. Make
settings to safely erase this data.
Auto Erase Memory Setting:
When enabled, the target data is erased sequentially when it becomes unnecessary, such as
when printing or scanning is completed. e target to be deleted is data written while this
function is enabled.
Because access to the hard disc is necessary, the time to enter power saving mode will be
delayed.
Erase All Memory:
Erases all data on the hard disc. You cannot perform other operations or turn o the device
during formatting.
❏High Speed:
Erases all data with a dedicated erase command.
❏Overwrite:
Erases all data with a dedicated erase command, and overwrites other data in all areas to
erase all data.
❏Triple Overwrite:
Erases all data with a dedicated erase command, and overwrites three times other data in all
areas to erase all data.
Security Settings:
You can make the following security settings.
Restrictions:
Permit to change the settings of the following items when panel lock is enabled.
❏Job Log Access
❏Access to Register/Delete Contacts
❏Fax Recent Access
❏Fax Transmission Log Access
❏Access to Fax Report
❏Access to Print Save History of Scan to Network Folder/FTP
❏Access to Recent of Scan to Email
❏Access to Show Sent History of Scan to Email
❏Access to Print Sent History of Scan to Email
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
399
❏Access to Language
❏Access to ick Paper
❏Access to Quiet Mode
❏Protection of Personal Data
Access Control:
Select On to restrict product features. is requires users to log into the product control panel
with their user name and password before they can use control panel features. In Accept
Unknown User Jobs, you can select whether or not to allow jobs that do not have the
necessary authentication information.
Admin Settings:
❏Admin Password
Set, change, and clear an administrator password.
❏Lock Setting
Select whether or not to lock the control panel using the password registered in Admin
Password.
Password Encryption:
Select On to encrypt your password. You can also connect a USB device to backup the
encryption key.
Audit Log:
Select On to record an audit log.
Program Verication on Start Up:
Select On to verify the printer's program when starting up.
Customer Research:
Select Approve to provide product usage information such as the number of prints to Seiko Epson
Corporation.
Restore Default Settings:
Reset the settings in the following menus to their defaults.
❏Network Settings
❏Copy Settings
❏Scan Settings
❏Fax Settings
❏Clear All Data and Settings
Firmware Update:
You can get rmware information such as your current version and information on available updates.
Update:
Check if the latest version of the rmware has been uploaded to the network server. If an
update is available, you can select whether or not to start updating.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
General Settings
400
Notication:
Select On to receive a notication if a rmware update is available.
Related Information
&“Updating the Printer's Firmware using the Control Panel” on page 185
Print Counter
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > Print Counter
Displays the total number of prints, B&W prints, and color prints including items such as the status sheet from the
time you purchased the printer. You can also check the number of pages printed from a memory device or other
functions.
Supply Status
Select the menu on the control panel as described below.
Settings > Supply Status
Displays the approximate level of the ink and service life of the maintenance box.
When is displayed, the ink is running low or the maintenance box is nearly full. When is displayed, you
need to replace the item as ink is expended or the maintenance box is full.
Related Information
&“It is Time to Replace Ink Supply Units” on page 267
Maintenance
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > Maintenance
Print Quality Adjustment:
Select this feature if there are any problems with your print outs. You can check for clogged nozzles
and clean the print head if necessary, and then adjust some parameters to improve print quality.
Print Head Nozzle Check:
Select this feature to check if the print head nozzles are clogged. e printer prints a nozzle check
pattern.
Print Head Cleaning:
Select this feature to clean clogged nozzles in the print head.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
Maintenance
401
Ruled Line Alignment:
Select this feature to align vertical lines.
Paper Guide Cleaning:
Select this feature if there are ink stains on the internal rollers. e printer feeds paper to clean the
internal rollers.
Remove Paper:
Select this feature if there are still some torn pieces of paper inside the printer even aer removing
jammed paper. e printer makes more space between the print head and the surface of the paper to
easily remove the torn pieces of paper.
Maintenance Roller Information:
❏Maintenance Roller Status
Displays the status of the maintenance rollers for the selected paper cassette.
❏Reset Maintenance Roller Counter
Aer replacing maintenance rollers, reset the counter for the paper cassette in which you replaced
the maintenance rollers.
Print Quality Adjustment per Paper:
Depending on the paper type, ink feathering is diers. Select this feature if there is banding in the
print outs or misalignment for a specic paper type.
Periodic Cleaning:
e printer automatically performs Print Head Nozzle Check and Print Head Cleaning based on
the specic period of time. Select On to maintain premium print quality. Under the following
conditions, perform Print Head Nozzle Check and Print Head Cleaning yourself.
❏Printout problems
❏When O is selected for Periodic Cleaning
❏When printing at high quality, such as photos
❏When the Print Head Cleaning message is displayed on the LCD screen
Related Information
&“Adjusting the Print Quality” on page 168
&“Checking and Cleaning the Print Head” on page 169
&“Aligning Ruled Lines” on page 171
&“Cleaning the Paper Path for Ink Smears” on page 172
Language
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > Language
Select the language used on the LCD screen.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
Language
402
Printer Status/Print
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > Printer Status/Print
Print Status Sheet:
Conguration Status Sheet:
Print information sheets showing the current printer status and settings.
Supply Status Sheet:
Print information sheets showing the status of consumables.
Usage History Sheet:
Print information sheets showing the usage history of the printer.
PS Font List:
Print a list of fonts that are available for a PostScript printer.
PCL Font List:
Print a list of fonts that are available for a PCL print.
Network:
Displays the current network settings. You can also print the status sheet.
Contacts Manager
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > Contacts Manager
Register/Delete:
Register and/or delete contacts for the Fax, Scan to Email, and Scan to Network Folder/FTP menus.
Frequent:
Register frequently used contacts to access them quickly. You can also change the order of the list.
Print Contacts:
Print your contact list.
View Options:
Change the way the contact list is displayed.
Search Options:
Change the method for searching contacts.
Product Information
>
Settings Menu List
>
Contacts Manager
403
User Settings
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > User Settings
You cannot change settings that have been locked by your administrator.
You can change the default settings of the following menus.
❏Scan to Network Folder/FTP
❏Scan to Email
❏Scan to Memory Device
❏Scan to Cloud
❏Copy Settings
❏Fax
Authentication Device Status
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > Authentication Device Status
Displays the status of the authentication device.
Epson Open Platform Information
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > Epson Open Platform Information
Displays the status of the Epson Open Platform.
Product Specications
Printer Specications
Print Head Nozzle Placement Black ink nozzles: 800
Color ink nozzles: 800 for each color
Weight of Paper
*
Plain Paper 64 to 90 g/m(17 to 24lb)
Thick Paper 91 to 256 g/m (25 to 68 lb)
Envelopes Envelope #10, DL, C6, C4: 75 to 100 g/m (20 to 27 lb)
Product Information
>
Product Specications
>
Printer Specications
404
* Even when the paper thickness is within this range, the paper may not feed in the printer or print result may adversely
aected depending on the paper property or quality.
Printable Area
Printable Area for Single Sheets
Print quality may decline in the shaded areas due to the printer's mechanism.
A 3.0 mm (0.12 in.)
B 3.0 mm (0.12 in.)
C 4.0 mm (0.16 in.)
D 5.0 mm (0.20 in.)
Printable Area for Envelopes
Print quality may decline in the shaded areas due to the printer's mechanism.
A 3.0 mm (0.12 in.)
B 3.0 mm (0.12 in.)
C 54.0 mm (2.13 in.)
D 49.0 mm (1.93 in.)
Scanner Specications
Scanner Type Flatbed
Photoelectric Device CIS
Eective Pixels 7020×10200 pixels (600 dpi)
Maximum Document Size 297×431.8 mm (11.7×17 in.)
A3
Scanning Resolution 600 dpi (main scan)
600 dpi (sub scan)
Output Resolution 50 to 9600 dpi in 1 dpi increments
Product Information
>
Product Specications
>
Scanner Specications
405
Color Depth Color
❏30 bits per pixel internal (10 bits per pixel per color internal)
❏24 bits per pixel external (8 bits per pixel per color external)
Grayscale
❏10 bits per pixel internal
❏8 bits per pixel external
Black and white
❏10 bits per pixel internal
❏1 bits per pixel external
Light Source LED
ADF Specications
ADF Type Auto duplex scanning
Available Paper Sizes A6 to A3 /11x17in (Maximum 297×431.8 mm)
Paper Type Plain Paper, High quality plain paper, Recycled paper
Weight of Paper 38 to 128 g/m (1-sided)
50 to 128 g/m (2-sided)
Loading Capacity 150 sheets or 16.5mm
Even when the original meets the specications for media that can be placed in the ADF, it may not feed from the
ADF or the scan quality may decline depending on the paper properties or quality.
Fax Specications (Fax-capable Printers Only)
Fax Type Walk-up black-and-white and color fax capability (ITU-T Super Group 3)
Supported Lines Standard analogue telephone lines, PBX (Private Branch Exchange) telephone
systems
Speed Up to 33.6 kbps
Resolution Monochrome
❏Standard: 8 pel/mm×3.85 line/mm (203 pel/in.×98 line/in.)
❏Fine: 8 pel/mm×7.7 line/mm (203 pel/in.×196 line/in.)
❏Super Fine: 8 pel/mm×15.4 line/mm (203 pel/in.×392 line/in.)
❏Ultra Fine: 16 pel/mm×15.4 line/mm (406 pel/in.×392 line/in.)
Color
200×200 dpi
Page Memory Up to 550 pages (when received ITU-T No.1 chart in monochrome draft mode)
Product Information
>
Product Specications
>
Fax Specications (Fax-capable Printers Only)
406
Redial
*
2 times (with 1 minute intervals)
Interface RJ-11 Phone Line, RJ-11 Telephone set connection
*The
specications may dier by country or region.
Note:
To check the fax rmware version, select the following on the printer's control panel, print the Fax Settings List, and then
check the version on the sheet.
Fax > (More)> Fax Report > Fax Settings List
Using Port for the Printer
e printer uses the following port. ese ports should be allowed to become available by the network
administrator as necessary.
Product Information
>
Product Specications
>
Using Port for the Printer
407
Sender
(Client)
Use Destination
(Server)
Protocol Port
Number
Printer File sending (When scan to network
folder is used from the printer)
FTP/FTPS server FTP/FTPS (TCP) 20
21
File server SMB (TCP) 445
NetBIOS (UDP) 137
138
NetBIOS (TCP) 139
WebDAV server Protocol HTTP(TCP) 80
Protocol HTTPS(TCP) 443
Email sending (When scan to mail is
used from the printer)
SMTP server SMTP (TCP) 25
SMTP SSL/TLS (TCP) 465
SMTP STARTTLS (TCP) 587
POP before SMTP connection (When
scan to mail is used from the printer)
POP server POP3 (TCP) 110
When Epson Connect is used Epson Connect
Server
HTTPS 443
XMPP 5222
When ERMS is used ERMS server Protocol HTTPS(TCP) 443
Protocol MQTT(TCP) 443
Collecting user information (Use the
contacts from the printer)
LDAP server LDAP (TCP) 389
LDAP SSL/TLS (TCP) 636
LDAP STARTTLS (TCP) 389
User authentication when sending
email (When activating Epson Open
Platform)
User authentication when collecting
user information (When using the
contacts from the printer)
User authentication when using the
scan to network folder (SMB) from the
printer
KDC server Kerberos 88
Control WSD Client computer WSD (TCP) 5357
Search the computer when push
scanning from Document Capture Pro
Client computer Network Push Scan
Discovery
2968
Product Information
>
Product Specications
>
Using Port for the Printer
408
Sender
(Client)
Use Destination
(Server)
Protocol Port
Number
Client
computer
File sending (When FTP printing is
used from the printer)
Printer FTP (TCP) 20
21
Discover the printer from an
application such as EpsonNet Cong,
printer driver, and scanner driver.
Printer ENPC (UDP) 3289
Collect and set up the MIB information
from an application such as EpsonNet
Cong, printer driver, and scanner
driver.
Printer SNMP (UDP) 161
Forwarding LPR data Printer LPR (TCP) 515
Forwarding RAW data Printer RAW (Port9100) (TCP) 9100
Forwarding AirPrint (IPP/IPPS printing)
data
Printer IPP/IPPS (TCP) 631
Searching WSD printer Printer WS-Discovery (UDP) 3702
Forwarding the scan data from
Document Capture Pro
Printer Network Scan (TCP) 1865
Collecting the job information when
push scanning from Document
Capture Pro
Printer Network Push Scan 2968
Web Cong Printer HTTP(TCP) 80
HTTPS(TCP) 443
Forwarding FaxOut Data Printer IPP FaxOut(TCP) 631
PC-FAX Printer HTTP(TCP) 80
Interface Specications
For Computer SuperSpeed USB
For External USB Devices Hi-Speed USB
Network Specications
Wi-Fi Specications
See the following table for Wi-Fi specications.
Countries or regions except for those listed
below
Table A
Product Information
>
Product Specications
>
Network Specications
409
Australia
New Zealand
China
Hong Kong
Taiwan
South Korea
Table B
Table A
Standards IEEE802.11b/g/n
*1
Frequency Range 2.4 GHz
Channels 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13
Coordination Modes Infrastructure, Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP)
*2*3
Security Protocols
*4
WEP (64/128bit), WPA2-PSK (AES)
*5
, WPA3-SAE (AES), WPA2/WPA3-Enterprise
*1 Only available for the HT20
*2 Not supported for IEEE 802.11b
*3 Infrastructure and Wi-Fi Direct modes or an Ethernet connection can be used simultaneously.
*4 Wi-Fi Direct supports WPA2-PSK (AES) only.
*5 Complies with WPA2 standards with support for WPA/WPA2 Personal.
Table B
Standards IEEE802.11a/b/g/n
*1
/ac
Frequency Ranges IEEE802.11b/g/n: 2.4 GHz, IEEE802.11a/n/ac: 5 GHz
Channels Wi-Fi 2.4 GHz 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12
*2
/13
*2
5 GHz W52 (36/40/44/48)
*3
,
W53 (52/56/60/64)
*4
,
W56 (100/104/108/112/116/120/124/128/132/136/140/144
*5
)
*6*7
,
W58 (149/153/157/161/165)
*8
Wi-Fi Direct 2.4 GHz 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12
*2
/13
*2
5 GHz W52 (36/40/44/48)
*3
W58 (149/153/157/161/165)
*8
Connection Modes Infrastructure, Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP)
*9*10
Security Protocols
*11
WEP (64/128bit), WPA2-PSK (AES)
*12
, WPA3-SAE (AES), WPA2/WPA3-Enterprise
*1 Only available for the HT20
*2 Not available in Taiwan
*3 Use of the product outdoors over these channels is prohibited in Australia, New Zealand, China, Hong Kong, and Taiwan.
Product Information
>
Product Specications
>
Network Specications
410
*4 Use of the product outdoors over these channels is prohibited in Australia, New Zealand, China, and Hong Kong.
*5 Only available in Korea
*6 Use of this frequency range is prohibited in China.
*7 Channels 120, 124, and 128 are not available in Australia and New Zealand.
*8 Use of this frequency range is prohibited in Hong Kong.
*9 Not supported for IEEE 802.11b
*10 Infrastructure and Wi-Fi Direct modes or an Ethernet connection can be used simultaneously.
*11 Wi-Fi Direct only supports WPA2-PSK (AES) .
*12 Complies with WPA2 standards with support for WPA/WPA2 Personal.
Ethernet Specications
Standards IEEE802.3i (10BASE-T)
*1
IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
IEEE802.3ab (1000BASE-T)
*1
IEEE802.3az (Energy Ecient Ethernet)
*2
Communication Mode Auto, 10 Mbps Full duplex, 10 Mbps Half duplex, 100 Mbps Full duplex, 100 Mbps
Half duplex
Connector RJ-45
*1 Use a category 5e or higher STP (Shielded twisted pair) cable to prevent risk of radio interference.
*2 The connected device should comply with IEEE802.3az standards.
Network Functions and IPv4/IPv6
Functions Supported Remarks
Network Printing EpsonNet Print (Windows) IPv4 ✓-
Standard TCP/IP (Windows) IPv4, IPv6 ✓-
WSD Printing (Windows) IPv4, IPv6 ✓Windows Vista or
later
BonjourPrinting (Mac OS) IPv4, IPv6 ✓-
IPPPrinting (Windows, Mac
OS)
IPv4, IPv6 ✓-
PictBridgePrinting (Wi-Fi) IPv4 - Digital camera
Epson Connect (Email Print,
Remote Print)
IPv4 ✓-
AirPrint (iOS, Mac OS) IPv4, IPv6 ✓iOS 5 or later, Mac
OS X v10.7 or later
Product Information
>
Product Specications
>
Network Specications
411
Functions Supported Remarks
Network Scanning Epson Scan 2 IPv4, IPv6 ✓-
Event Manager IPv4 - -
Epson Connect (Scan to
Cloud)
IPv4 ✓-
AirPrint (Scan) IPv4, IPv6 ✓OS X Mavericks or
later
Fax Send a fax IPv4 ✓-
Receive a fax IPv4 ✓-
AirPrint (Faxout) IPv4, IPv6 ✓OS X Mountain
Lion or later
Security Protocol
IEEE802.1X
*
IPsec/IP Filtering
SSL/TLS HTTPS Server/Client
IPPS
SMTPS (STARTTLS, SSL/TLS)
SNMPv3
* You need to use a device for connection that complies with IEEE802.1X.
PostScript Level 3 Compatibility
e PostScript used on this printer is compatible with PostScript Level 3.
Supported Third Party Services
AirPrint Print iOS 5 or later/Mac OS X v10.7.x or later
Scan OS X Mavericks or later
Fax OS X Mountain Lion or later
Memory Device Specications
Devices Maximum Capacities
USB Flash Drive 2 TB (formatted in FAT, FAT32, or exFAT.)
Product Information
>
Product Specications
>
Memory Device Specications
412
You cannot use the following devices:
❏A device that requires a dedicated driver
❏A device with security settings (password, encryption, and so on)
Epson cannot guarantee all operations of externally connected devices.
Supported Data Specications
File Format JPEGs (*.JPG) with the Exif Version 2.31 standard taken by digital cameras DCF
*1
version 1.0 or 2.0
*2
compliant
TIFF 6.0 compliant images as below
❏RGB full color images (not compressed)
❏Binary images (not compressed or CCITT encoded)
PDF Version 1.7 compliant data le
Image Size Horizontal: 80 to 10200 pixels
Vertical: 80 to 10200 pixels
File Size Less than 2 GB
Maximum Number of Files JPEG: 9990
*3
TIFF: 999
PDF: 999
*1 Design rule for Camera File system.
*2 Photo data stored on digital cameras with a built-in memory is not supported.
*3 Up to 999 les can be displayed at a time. (If the number of les exceeds 999, the les are displayed in groups.)
Note:
"×" is displayed on the LCD screen when the printer cannot recognize the image le. In this situation, if you select a multiple
image layout, blank sections will be printed.
Dimensions
Dimensions Storage
❏Width: 621 mm (24.4 in.)
❏Depth: 751 mm (29.6 in.)
❏Height: 711 mm (28.0in.)
Printing
❏Width: 621 mm (24.4 in.)
❏Depth: 941 mm (37.0 in.)
❏Height: 760 mm (29.9in.)
Weight
*
Approx. 75.6 kg (166.7 lb)
Product Information
>
Product Specications
>
Dimensions
413
*: Without the ink supply units and the power cord.
Electrical Specications
Rated Power Supply Voltage 100 to 240 V
Rated Frequency Range 50 to 60 Hz
Rated Current 2.2 to 1.0 A
Power Consumption (with USB
Connection)
Standalone copying: Approx. 50.0 W (ISO/IEC24712)
Ready mode: Approx. 24.0 W
Sleep mode: Approx. 1.2 W
Power o: Approx. 0.3 W
Note:
❏Check the label on the printer for its voltage.
❏For European users, see the following Website for details on power consumption.
http://www.epson.eu/energy-consumption
Environmental Specications
Operation Use the printer within the range shown in the following graph.
Temperature: 10 to 35°C (50 to 95°F)
Humidity: 20 to 80% RH (without condensation)
Storage Temperature: -20 to 40°C (-4 to 104°F)
*
Humidity: 5 to 85% RH (without condensation)
* You can store for one month at 40°C (104°F).
Environmental Specications for Ink Supply Units
Storage Temperature -30 to 40 °C (-22 to 104 °F)
*
Freezing Temperature -20 °C (-4 °F)
Ink thaws and is usable after approximately 5 hours at 25 °C (77 °F).
* You can store for one month at 40 °C (104 °F).
Product Information
>
Product Specications
>
Environmental Specications
414
Installation Location and Space
To ensure safe use, place the printer in a location that meets the following conditions.
❏A at, stable surface that can support the weight of the printer
❏Locations that do not block or cover the vents and openings in the printer
❏Locations where you can load paper and remove paper easily
❏Locations that meet the conditions in the "Environmental Specications" in this manual
c
Important:
Do not place the printer in the following locations; otherwise a malfunction may occur.
❏Subject to direct sunlight
❏Subject to rapid changes in temperature and humidity
❏Subject to re
❏Subject to volatile substances
❏Subject to shocks or vibrations
❏Near a television or a radio
❏Near excessive dirt or dust
❏Near water
❏Near air-conditioning or heating equipment
❏Near a humidier
Use a commercially available anti-static mat to prevent static generation in locations prone to generating static
electricity.
Product Information
>
Product Specications
>
Installation Location and Space
415
Secure enough place to install and operate the printer correctly.
A 1559mm
B 1324mm
C 772mm
D 383mm
E 100mm
F 529mm
Related Information
&“Safety Instructions” on page 15
System Requirements
❏Windows 10 (32-bit, 64-bit)/Windows 8.1 (32-bit, 64-bit)/Windows 8 (32-bit, 64-bit)/Windows 7 (32-bit, 64-
bit)/Windows Vista (32-bit, 64-bit)/Windows XP SP3 or later (32-bit)/Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
SP2 or later/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server 2016/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012/
Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2003 R2/Windows Server 2003 SP2 or later
Product Information
>
Product Specications
>
System Requirements
416
❏macOS Catalina/macOS Mojave/macOS High Sierra/macOS Sierra/OS X El Capitan/OS X Yosemite/OS X
Mavericks/OS X Mountain Lion/Mac OS X v10.7.x/Mac OS X v10.6.8
Note:
❏Mac OS may not support some applications and features.
❏e UNIX File System (UFS) for Mac OS is not supported.
Font Specications
e following fonts are available on the Internet.
❏Epson Barcode Font
Available Fonts for PostScript
Font Name Family HP Equivalent
Nimbus Mono Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Courier
Letter Gothic Medium, Bold, Italic Letter Gothic
Nimbus Mono PS Regular, Bold, Oblique, Bold Oblique CourierPS
Nimbus Roman No4 Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic CG Times
URW Classico Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic CG Omega
URW Coronet - Coronet
URW Clarendon Condensed - Clarendon Condensed
URW Classic Sans Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Univers
URW Classic Sans Condensed Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Univers Condensed
Antique Olive Medium, Bold, Italic Antique Olive
Garamond Antiqua, Halbfett, Kursiv, Kursiv Halbfett Garamond
Mauritius - Marigold
Algiers Medium, Extra Bold Albertus
NimbusSansNo2 Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Arial
Nimbus Roman No9 Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Times New Roman
Nimbus Sans Medium, Bold, Oblique, Bold Oblique Helvetica
Nimbus Sans Narrow Medium, Bold, Oblique, Bold Oblique Helvetica Narrow
Palladio Roman, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Palatino
URW Gothic Book, Demi, Book Oblique, Demi Oblique ITC Avant Garde
URW Bookman Light, Demi, Light Italic, Demi Italic ITC Bookman
URW Century Schoolbook Roman, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic New Century Schoolbook
Product Information
>
Font Specications
>
Available Fonts for PostScript
417
Font Name Family HP Equivalent
Nimbus Roman Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Times
URW Chancery Medium Italic - ITC Zapf Chancery Italic
Symbol - Symbol
URW Dingbats - Wingdings
Dingbats - ITC Zapf Dingbats
Standard Symbol - SymbolPS
Available Fonts for PCL (URW)
Scalable Font
Font Name Family HP Equivalent Symbol
Set for
PCL5
Nimbus Mono Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Courier 1
Letter Gothic Medium, Bold, Italic Letter Gothic 1
Nimbus Mono PS Regular, Bold, Oblique, Bold Oblique CourierPS 3
Nimbus Roman No4 Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic CG Times 2
URW Classico Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic CG Omega 3
URW Coronet - Coronet 3
URW Clarendon Condensed - Clarendon Condensed 3
URW Classic Sans Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Univers 2
URW Classic Sans
Condensed
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Univers Condensed 3
Antique Olive Medium, Bold, Italic Antique Olive 3
Garamond Antiqua, Halbfett, Kursiv, Kursiv Halbfett Garamond 3
Mauritius - Marigold 3
Algiers Medium, Extra Bold Albertus 3
NimbusSansNo2 Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Arial 3
Nimbus Roman No9 Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Times New 3
Nimbus Sans Medium, Bold, Oblique, Bold Oblique Helvetica 3
Nimbus Sans Narrow Medium, Bold, Oblique, Bold Oblique Helvetica Narrow 3
Palladio Roman, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Palatino 3
URW Gothic Book, Demi, Book Oblique, Demi Oblique ITC Avant Garde Gothic 3
Product Information
>
Font Specications
>
Available Fonts for PCL (URW)
418
Font Name Family HP Equivalent Symbol
Set for
PCL5
URW Bookman Light, Demi, Light Italic, Demi Italic ITC Bookman 3
URW Century Schoolbook Roman, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic New Century Schoolbook 3
Nimbus Roman Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Times 3
URW Chancery Medium
Italic
-ITC Zapf Chancery Medium
Italic
3
Symbol - Symbol 4
URW Dingbats - Wingdings 5
Dingbats - ITC Zapf Dingbats 6
Standard Symbol - SymbolPS 4
URW David Medium, Bold HP David 7
URW Narkis Medium, Bold HP Narkis 7
URW Miryam Medium, Bold, Italic HP Miryam 7
URW Kou Medium, Bold Kou 8
URW Naskh Medium, Bold Naskh 8
URW Ryadh Medium, Bold Ryadh 8
Bitmap Font
Font Name Symbol
Set
Line Printer 9
OCR/Barcode Bitmap Font (for PCL5 only)
Font Name Family Symbol
Set
OCR A - 10
OCR B - 11
Code39 9.37cpi, 4.68cpi 12
EAN/UPC Medium, Bold 13
Note:
Depending on the print density, or on the quality or color of the paper, OCR A, OCR B, Code39, and EAN/UPC fonts may
not be readable. Print a sample and make sure the fonts can be read before printing large quantities.
Product Information
>
Font Specications
>
Available Fonts for PCL (URW)
419
List of Symbol Sets
Your printer can access a variety of symbol sets. Many of these symbol sets dier only in the international
characters specic to each language.
When you are considering which font to use, you should also consider which symbol set to combine with the font.
Note:
Since most soware handles fonts and symbols automatically, you will probably never need to adjust the printer's settings.
However, if you are writing your own printer control programs, or if you are using older soware that cannot control fonts,
refer to the following sections for symbol set details.
List of Symbol Sets for PCL 5
Symbol Set
Name
Attribute Font Classication
12345678910111213
Norweg1 0D ✓✓✓----------
Roman
Extension
0E --------✓----
Italian 0I ✓✓✓----------
ECM94-1 0N ✓✓✓-----✓----
Swedis2 0S ✓✓✓----------
ANSI ASCII 0U ✓✓✓---✓✓-----
UK 1E ✓✓✓----------
French2 1F ✓✓✓----------
German 1G ✓✓✓----------
Legal 1U ✓✓✓-----✓----
8859-2 ISO 2N ✓✓✓-----✓----
Spanish 2S ✓✓✓----------
ISO 8859/4
Latin 4
4N ✓✓✓----------
Roman-9 4U ✓✓✓----------
PsMath 5M ✓✓✓---✓✓-----
8859-9 ISO 5N ✓✓✓-----✓----
WiTurkish 5T ✓✓✓----------
MsPublishin 6J ✓✓✓----------
VeMath 6M ✓✓✓----------
8859-10ISO 6N ✓✓✓-----✓----
DeskTop 7J ✓✓✓----------
Product Information
>
Font Specications
>
List of Symbol Sets
420
Symbol Set
Name
Attribute Font Classication
12345678910111213
Math-8 8M ✓✓✓---✓✓-----
Roman-8 8U ✓✓✓-----✓----
WiE.Europe 9E ✓✓✓----------
Pc1004 9J ✓✓✓----------
8859-15ISO 9N ✓✓✓-----✓----
PcTk437 9T ✓✓✓----------
Windows 9U ✓✓✓----------
PsText 10J ✓✓✓----------
IBM-US 10U ✓✓✓-----✓----
IBM-DN 11U ✓✓✓-----✓----
McText 12J ✓✓✓----------
PcMultiling 12U ✓✓✓-----✓----
VeInternati 13J ✓✓✓----------
PcEur858 13U ✓✓✓----------
VeUS 14J ✓✓✓----------
PiFont 15U ✓✓✓----------
PcE.Europe 17U ✓✓✓----------
Unicode 3.0 18N ✓✓✓---✓✓-----
WiBALT 19L ✓✓✓----------
WiAnsi 19U ✓✓✓----------
PcBlt775 26U ✓✓✓----------
Pc866Cyr 3R ✓✓-----------
Greek8 8G ✓✓-----------
WinGrk 9G ✓✓-----------
WinCyr 9R ✓✓-----------
Pc851Grk 10G ✓✓-----------
ISOCyr 10N ✓✓------✓----
Pc8Grk 12G ✓✓-----------
ISOGrk 12N ✓✓-----------
Pc866Ukr 14R ✓✓-----------
Product Information
>
Font Specications
>
List of Symbol Sets
421
Symbol Set
Name
Attribute Font Classication
12345678910111213
Hebrew7 0H ✓-----✓------
8859-8 ISO 7H ✓-----✓------
Hebrew8 8H ✓-----✓------
Pc862Heb 15H ✓-----✓------
PC-862,
Hebrew
15Q ✓-----✓------
Arabic8 8V -------✓-----
HPWARA 9V -------✓-----
Pc864Ara 10V - - - - - - - ✓-----
Symbol 19M - - - ✓---------
Wingdings 579L - - - - ✓--------
ZapfDigbats 14L - - - - - ✓-------
OCR A 0O ---------✓---
OCR B 1O ---------- ✓--
OCR B
Extension
3Q ---------- ✓--
Code3-9 0Y ---------- - ✓-
EAN/UPC 8Y ---------- - - ✓
Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)
Epson BarCode Fonts let you easily create and print many types of bar codes.
Normally, bar code creation is a laborious process requiring you to specify various command codes, such as Start
bar, Stop bar and OCR-B, in addition to the bar code characters themselves. However, Epson BarCode Fonts are
designed to add such codes automatically, allowing you to easily print bar codes that conform to a variety of bar
code standards.
Printing with Epson BarCode Fonts
Follow the steps below to create and print bar codes using Epson BarCode Fonts. e application featured in these
instructions is Microso WordPad in Windows 10. e actual procedure may dier slightly when printing from
other applications.
Product Information
>
Font Specications
>
Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)
422
1. Open a document in your application and enter the characters you want to convert into a bar code.
2. Select the characters, then select the Epson BarCode font you want to use, and the font size.
Note:
You cannot use font sizes larger than 96 points when printing bar codes.
Product Information
>
Font Specications
>
Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)
423
3. e characters you selected appear as bar code characters similar to those shown below.
4. Select Print from the File menu, select your Epson printer, click Preferences, and then make the printer driver
settings.
5. Click Print to print the bar code.
Note:
If there is an error in the bar code character string, such as inappropriate data, the bar code will be printed as it appears
on the screen, but it cannot be read by a bar code reader.
Notes on inputting and formatting bar codes
Please note the following when inputting and formatting bar code characters:
❏Do not apply shading or special character formatting, such as bold, italic, or underline.
❏Print bar codes in black and white only.
❏When rotating characters, only specify rotation angles of 90˚, 180˚, and 270˚.
❏Turn o all automatic character and word spacing settings in your application.
❏Do not use features in your application that enlarge or reduce the size of characters in only the vertical or
horizontal direction.
❏Turn o your application’s auto-correct features for spelling, grammar, spacing, etc.
❏To more easily distinguish bar codes from other text in your document, set your application to show text
symbols, such as paragraph marks, tabs, etc.
❏Because special characters such as Start bar and Stop bar are added when an Epson BarCode Font is selected,
the resulting bar code may have more characters than were originally input.
❏For best results, use only the font sizes recommended in “Epson BarCode Font Specications” for the Epson
BarCode Font you are using. Bar codes in other sizes may not be readable with all bar code readers.
❏Select Grayscale in the Print Settings and Standard or High in the Quality.
Note:
Depending on the print density, or on the quality or color of the paper, bar codes may not be readable with all bar code
readers. Print a sample and make sure the bar code can be read before printing large quantities.
Product Information
>
Font Specications
>
Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)
424
Epson BarCode Fonts specications
is section contains details on the character input specications for each Epson BarCode Font.
EPSON EAN-8
❏EAN-8 is an eight-digit abbreviated version of the EAN bar code standard.
❏Because the check digit is added automatically, only 7 characters can be input.
Character type Numbers (0 to 9)
Number of characters 7 characters
Font size 52 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 52 pt and 65 pt (standard).
e following codes are inserted automatically and need not be input by hand:
❏Le/Right margin
❏Le/Right guard bar
❏Center bar
❏Check digit
❏OCR-B
Print sample
EPSON EAN-8
EPSON EAN-13
❏EAN-13is the standard 13-digit EAN bar code.
❏Because the check digit is added automatically, only 12 characters can be input.
Character type Numbers (0 to 9)
Number of characters 12 characters
Font size 60 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 60 pt and 75 pt (standard).
e following codes are inserted automatically and need not be input by hand:
❏Le/Right margin
❏Le/Right guard bar
❏Center bar
Product Information
>
Font Specications
>
Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)
425
❏Check digit
❏OCR-B
Print sample
EPSON EAN-13
EPSON UPC-A
❏UPC-A is the standard bar code specied by the American Universal Product Code (UPC Symbol Specication
Manual).
❏Only regular UPC codes are supported. Supplementary codes are not supported.
Character type Numbers (0 to 9)
Number of characters 11 characters
Font size 60 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 60 pt and 75 pt (standard).
e following codes are inserted automatically and need not be input by hand:
❏Le/Right margin
❏Le/Right guard bar
❏Center bar
❏Check digit
❏OCR-B
Print sample
EPSON UPC-A
EPSON UPC-E
❏UPC-E is the UPC-A zero-suppression (deletes extra zeros) bar code specied by the American Universal
Product Code (UPC Symbol Specication Manual).
Character type Numbers (0 to 9)
Number of characters 6 characters
Product Information
>
Font Specications
>
Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)
426
Font size 60 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 60 pt and 75 pt (standard).
e following codes are inserted automatically and need not be input by hand:
❏Le/Right margin
❏Le/Right guard bar
❏Check digit
❏OCR-B
❏e numeral “0”
Print sample
EPSON UPC-E
EPSON Code39
❏Four Code39 fonts are available, allowing you to enable and disable the automatic insertion of check digits and
OCR-B.
❏e height of the bar code is automatically adjusted to 15% or more of its total length, in conformance to the
Code39 standard. For this reason, it is important to keep at least one space between the bar code and the
surrounding text to prevent overlapping.
❏Spaces in Code39 bar codes should be input as “_” underbars.
❏When printing two or more bar codes on one line, separate the bar codes with a tab, or select a font other than a
BarCode Font and input the space. If a space is input while a Code39 font is selected, the bar code will not be
correct.
Character type Alphanumeric characters (A to Z, 0 to 9) Symbols (- . space $ / + %)
Number of characters No limit
Font size When OCR-B is not used: 26 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 26 pt, 52 pt and 78 pt.
When OCR-B is used: 36 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 36 pt and 72 pt.
e following codes are inserted automatically and need not be input by hand:
❏Le/Right quiet zone
❏Check digit
❏Start/Stop character
Print sample
EPSON Code39 EPSON Code39 CD
Product Information
>
Font Specications
>
Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)
427
EPSON Code39 Num EPSON Code39 CD Num
EPSON Code128
❏Code128 fonts support code sets A, B, and C. When the code set of a line of characters is changed in the middle
of the line, a conversion code is automatically inserted.
❏e height of the bar code is automatically adjusted to 15% or more of its total length, in conformance to the
Code128 standard. For this reason, it is important to keep at least one space between the bar code and the
surrounding text to prevent overlapping.
❏Some applications automatically delete the spaces at the end of lines or change multiple spaces into tabs. Bar
codes containing spaces may not be correctly printed from applications that automatically delete spaces from
the ends of lines or change multiple spaces into tabs.
❏When printing two or more bar codes on one line, separate the bar codes with a tab, or select a font other than a
BarCode Font and input the space. If a space is input while a Code128 font is selected, the bar code will not be
correct.
Character type All ASCII characters (95 in total)
Number of characters No limit
Font size 26 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 26 pt, 52 pt and 78 pt.
e following codes are inserted automatically and need not be input by hand:
❏Le/Right quiet zone
❏Start/Stop character
❏Check digit
❏Change code set character
Print sample
EPSON Code128
EPSON ITF
❏e EPSON ITF fonts conform to the USSInterleaved 2-of-5 standard (American).
❏Four EPSON ITF fonts are available, allowing you to enable and disable the automatic insertion of check digits
and OCR-B.
❏e height of the bar code is automatically adjusted to 15% or more of its total length, in conformance to the
Interleaved 2-of-5 standard. For this reason, it is important to keep at least one space between the bar code and
the surrounding text to prevent overlapping.
Product Information
>
Font Specications
>
Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)
428
❏Interleaved 2-of-5 treats every two characters as one set. When there are an odd number of characters, EPSON
ITF fonts automatically add a zero to the beginning of the character string.
Character type Numbers (0 to 9)
Number of characters No limit
Font size When OCR-B is not used: 26 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 26 pt, 52 pt and 78 pt.
When OCR-B is used: 36 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 36 pt and 72 pt.
e following codes are inserted automatically and need not be input by hand:
❏Le/Right quiet zone
❏Start/Stop character
❏Check digit
❏e numeral “0” (added to the beginning of character strings as needed)
Print sample
EPSON ITF EPSON ITF CD
EPSON ITF Num EPSON ITF CD Num
EPSON Codabar
❏Four EPSON Codabar are available, allowing you to enable and disable the automatic insertion of check digits
and OCR-B.
❏e height of the bar code is automatically adjusted to 15% or more of its total length, in conformance to the
Codabar standard. For this reason, it is important to keep at least one space between the bar code and the
surrounding text to prevent overlapping.
❏When either a Start or a Stop character is input, Codabar fonts automatically insert the complementary
character.
❏If neither a Start nor a Stop character is input, these characters are automatically input as the letter “A”.
Character type Numbers (0 to 9)
Symbols (- $ : / . +)
Number of characters No limit
Font size When OCR-B is not used: 26 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 26 pt, 52 pt and 78 pt.
When OCR-B is used: 36 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 36 pt and 72 pt.
e following codes are inserted automatically and need not be input by hand:
❏Le/Right quiet zone
Product Information
>
Font Specications
>
Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)
429
❏Start/Stop character (when not input)
❏Check digit
Print sample
EPSON Codabar EPSON Codabar CD
EPSON Codabar Num EPSON Codabar CD Num
EPSON EAN128
❏GS1-128(EAN128) fonts support code sets A, B, and C. When the code set of a line of characters is changed in
the middle of the line, a conversion code is automatically inserted.
❏e following 4 kinds of the properties are supported as the Application Identier (AI).
01: Global traded item number
10: Batch / Lot number
17: Expiry date
30: Quantity
❏e height of the bar code is automatically adjusted to 15% or more of its total length, in conformance to the
Code128 standard. For this reason, it is important to keep at least one space between the bar code and the
surrounding text to prevent overlapping.
❏Some applications automatically delete the spaces at the end of lines or change multiple spaces into tabs. Bar
codes containing spaces may not be correctly printed from applications that automatically delete spaces from
the ends of lines or change multiple spaces into tabs.
❏When printing two or more bar codes on one line, separate the bar codes with a tab, or select a font other than a
BarCode Font and input the space. If a space is input while a GS1-128(EAN128) font is selected, the bar code
will not be correct.
Character type Alphanumeric characters (A to Z, 0 to 9)
Parenthesis are only for identication of the Application Identier (AI)
Only the capital letters are supported by the small letter key input.
Number of characters It changes with the Application Identier (AI).
01: 4 characters "(01)" and 13 numbers
17: 4 characters "(17)" and 6 numbers
10: 4 characters "(10)" and maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters
30: 4 characters "(30)" and maximum of 8 numbers
Font size 36 pt or more
Recommended sizes are 36 pt, 72 pt
e following codes are inserted automatically and need not be input by hand:
Product Information
>
Font Specications
>
Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)
430
❏Le/Right quiet zone
❏Start/Stop character
❏FNC1 character
It inserts for discernment from Code128 and for a pause of the variable length application identier.
❏Check digit
❏Change code set character
Print sample
EPSON EAN128
Regulatory Information
Standards and Approvals
Standards and Approvals for U.S. Model
Safety UL60950-1
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.60950-1
EMC FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class B
CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3 (B)
is equipment contains the following wireless module.
Manufacturer: Seiko Epson Corporation
Type: J26H005
is product conforms to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of the IC Rules. Epson cannot accept
responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended
modication of the product. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject
to licensing.
is equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and
meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio
frequency (RF) Exposure rules. is equipment should be installed and operated so that the radiator is kept at least
7.9 inches (20 cm) or more away from a person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Product Information
>
Regulatory Information
>
Standards and Approvals
431
Standards and Approvals for European Model
For European users
Hereby, Seiko Epson Corporation declares that the following radio equipment model is in compliance with
Directive 2014/53/EU. e full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following website.
http://www.epson.eu/conformity
C731A
For use only in Ireland, UK, Austria, Germany, Liechtenstein, Switzerland, France, Belgium, Luxemburg,
Netherlands, Italy, Portugal, Spain, Denmark, Finland, Norway, Sweden, Iceland, Croatia, Cyprus, Greece,
Slovenia, Malta, Bulgaria, Czech, Estonia, Hungary, Latvia, Lithuania, Poland, Romania, and Slovakia.
Epson cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-
recommended modication of the products.
Frequency Maximum Radio-Frequency Power Transmitted
2400-2483.5 MHz 20 dBm (EIRP)
Standards and Approvals for Australian Model
EMC AS/NZS CISPR32 Class B
Epson hereby declares that the following equipment Models are in compliance with the essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of AS/NZS4268:
C731A
Epson cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-
recommended modication of the products.
Standards and Approvals for New Zealand Model
General Warning
e grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the
item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product
by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work
correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a dierent make or model, nor does it
imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services.
Telepermitted equipment only may be connected to the EXT telephone port. is port is not specically designed
for 3-wire-connected equipment. 3-wire-connected equipment might not respond to incoming ringing when
attached to this port.
Important Notice
Under power failure conditions, this telephone may not operate. Please ensure that a separate telephone, not
dependent on local power, is available for emergency use.
Product Information
>
Regulatory Information
>
Standards and Approvals
432
is equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it
is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should diculties arise in such circumstances.
is equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom '111' Emergency Service.
German Blue Angel
See the following website to check whether or not this printer meets the standards for the German Blue Angel.
http://www.epson.de/blauerengel
Restrictions on Copying
Observe the following restrictions to ensure the responsible and legal use of the printer.
Copying of the following items is prohibited by law:
❏Bank bills, coins, government-issued marketable securities, government bond securities, and municipal
securities
❏Unused postage stamps, pre-stamped postcards, and other ocial postal items bearing valid postage
❏Government-issued revenue stamps, and securities issued according to legal procedure
Exercise caution when copying the following items:
❏Private marketable securities (stock certicates, negotiable notes, checks, etc.), monthly passes, concession
tickets, etc.
❏Passports, driver’s licenses, warrants of tness, road passes, food stamps, tickets, etc.
Note:
Copying these items may also be prohibited by law.
Responsible use of copyrighted materials:
Printers can be misused by improperly copying copyrighted materials. Unless acting on the advice of a
knowledgeable attorney, be responsible and respectful by obtaining the permission of the copyright holder before
copying published material.
Product Information
>
Regulatory Information
>
Restrictions on Copying
433
Administrator Information
Connecting the Printer to the Network..................................435
Settings to Use the Printer...........................................439
Managing the Printer...............................................500
Advanced Security Settings..........................................517
Connecting the Printer to the Network
You can connect the printer to the network in several ways.
❏Connect by using advanced settings on the control panel.
❏Connect by using the installer on the website or on the soware disc.
is section explains the procedure to connect the printer to the network using the printer's control panel.
Before Making Network Connection
To connect to the network, check the connection method and setting information for connection in advance.
Gathering Information on the Connection Setting
Prepare the necessary setting information to connect. Check the following information in advance.
Divisions Items Note
Device connection
method
❏Ethernet
❏Wi-Fi
Decide how to connect the printer to the network.
For Wired LAN, connects to the LAN switch.
For Wi-Fi, connects to the network (SSID) of the access point.
LAN connection
information
❏IP address
❏Subnet mask
❏Default gateway
Decide the IP address to assign to the printer.
When you assign the IP address statically, all values are required.
When you assign the IP address dynamically using the DHCP function,
this information is not required because it is set automatically.
Wi-Fi connection
information
❏SSID
❏Password
These are the SSID (network name) and the password of the access
point that the printer connects to.
If MAC address ltering has been set, register the MAC address of the
printer in advance to register the printer.
See the following for the supported standards.
“Wi-Fi Specications” on page 409
DNS server information ❏IP address for
primary DNS
❏IP address for
secondary DNS
These are required when specifying DNS servers. The secondary DNS
is set when the system has a redundant conguration and there is a
secondary DNS server.
If you are in a small organization and do not set the DNS server, set
the IP address of the router.
Proxy server
information
❏Proxy server name Set this when your network environment uses the proxy server to
access the internet from the intranet, and you use the function that
the printer directly accesses to the internet.
For the following functions, the printer directly connects to the
internet .
❏Epson Connect Services
❏Cloud services of other companies
❏Firmware updating
Administrator Information
>
Connecting the Printer to the Network
>
Before Making Network Connection
435
Divisions Items Note
Port number
information
❏Port number to
release
Check the port number used by the printer and computer, then
release the port that is blocked by a rewall, if necessary.
See the following for the port number used by the printer.
“Using Port for the Printer” on page 407
IP Address Assignment
ese are the following types of IP address assignment.
Static IP address:
Assign the predetermined IP address to the printer (host) manually.
e information to connect to the network (subnet mask, default gateway, DNS server and so on) need to be set
manually.
e IP address does not change even when the device is turned o, so this is useful when you want to manage
devices with an environment where you cannot change the IP address or you want to manage devices using the IP
address. We recommend settings to the printer, server, etc. that many computers access. Also, when using security
features such as IPsec / IP ltering, assign a xed IP address so that the IP address does not change.
Automatic assignment by using DHCP function (dynamic IP address):
Assign the IP address automatically to the printer (host) by using the DHCP function of the DHCP server or
router.
e information to connect to the network (subnet mask, default gateway, DNS server and so on) is set
automatically, so you can easily connect the device to the network.
If the device or the router is turned o, or depending on the DHCP server settings, IP address may change when
re-connecting.
We recommend managing devices other than the IP address and communicating with protocols that can follow
the IP address.
Note:
When you use the IP address reservation function of the DHCP, you can assign the same IP address to the devices at any
time.
DNS Server and Proxy Server
e DNS server has a host name, domain name of the email address, etc. in association with the IP address
information.
Communication is impossible if the other party is described by host name, domain name, etc. when the computer
or the printer performs IP communication.
Queries the DNS server for that information and gets the IP address of the other party. is process is called name
resolution.
erefore, the devices such as computers and printers can communicate using the IP address.
Name resolution is necessary for the printer to communicate using the email function or Internet connection
function.
When you use those functions, make the DNS server settings.
Administrator Information
>
Connecting the Printer to the Network
>
Before Making Network Connection
436
When you assign the printer's IP address by using the DHCP function of the DHCP server or router, it is
automatically set.
e proxy server is placed at the gateway between the network and the Internet, and it communicates to the
computer, printer, and Internet (opposite server) on behalf of each of them. e opposite server communicates
only to the proxy server. erefore, printer information such as the IP address and port number cannot be read
and increased security is expected.
When you connect to the Internet via a proxy server, congure the proxy server on the printer.
Connecting to the Network from the Control Panel
Connect the printer to the network by using the printer's control panel.
Assigning the IP Address
Set up the basic items such as Host Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway.
is section explains the procedure for setting a static IP address.
1. Turn on the printer.
2. Select Settings on the home screen on the printer's control panel.
3. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced > TCP/IP.
4. Select Manual for Obtain IP Address.
When you set the IP address automatically by using the DHCP function of router, select Auto. In that case, the
IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway on step 5 to 6 are also set automatically, so go to step 7.
5. Enter the IP address.
Focus moves to the forward segment or the back segment separated by a period if you select
l
and
r
.
Conrm the value reected on the previous screen.
6. Set up the Subnet Mask and Default Gateway.
Conrm the value reected on the previous screen.
c
Important:
If the combination of the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway is incorrect, Start Setup is inactive
and cannot proceed with the settings. Conrm that there is no error in the entry.
7. Enter the IP address for the primary DNS server.
Conrm the value reected on the previous screen.
Note:
When you select Auto for the IP address assignment settings, you can select the DNS server settings from Manual or
Auto. If you cannot obtain the DNS server address automatically, select Manual and enter the DNS server address.
en, enter the secondary DNS server address directly. If you select Auto, go to step 9.
Administrator Information
>
Connecting the Printer to the Network
>
Connecting to the Network from the
…
437
8. Enter the IP address for the secondary DNS server.
Conrm the value reected on the previous screen.
9. Tap Start Setup.
Setting the Proxy Server
Set up the proxy server if both of the following are true.
❏e proxy server is built for Internet connection.
❏When using a function in which a printer directly connects to the Internet, such as Epson Connect service or
another company's cloud services.
1. Select Settings on the home screen.
When making settings aer IP address setting, the Advanced screen is displayed. Go to step 3.
2. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced.
3. Select Proxy Server.
4. Select Use for Proxy Server Settings.
5. Enter the address for the proxy server by IPv4 or FQDN format.
Conrm the value reected on the previous screen.
6. Enter the port number for the proxy server.
Conrm the value reected on the previous screen.
7. Tap Start Setup.
Connecting to LAN
Connect the printer to the network by Ethernet or Wi-Fi.
Connecting to Ethernet
Connect the printer to the network by using the Ethernet cable, and check the connection.
1. Connect the printer and hub (LAN switch) by Ethernet cable.
2. Select Settings on the home screen.
3. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Connection Check.
e connection diagnosis result is displayed. Conrm the connection is correct.
4. Tap OK to nish.
When you tap Print Check Report, you can print the diagnosis result. Follow the on-screen instructions to
print it.
Administrator Information
>
Connecting the Printer to the Network
>
Connecting to the Network from the
…
438
Related Information
&“Changing the Network Connection from Wi-Fi to Ethernet” on page 293
Connecting to the Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi)
You can connect the printer to the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) in several ways. Choose the connection method that
matches the environment and conditions that you are using.
If you know the information for the wireless router such as SSID and password, you can make settings manually.
If the wireless router supports WPS, you can make settings by using push button setup.
Aer connecting the printer to the network, connect to the printer from the device that you want to use (computer,
smart device, tablet, and so on.)
Related Information
&“Making Wi-Fi Settings by Entering the SSID and Password” on page 295
&“Making Wi-Fi Settings by Push Button Setup (WPS)” on page 296
&“Making Wi-Fi Settings by PIN Code Setup (WPS)” on page 297
Settings to Use the Printer
Using the Print Functions
Enable to use the print function through the network.
To use the printer on the network, you need to set the port for network connection on the computer as well as the
printer’s network connection.
Printer Connection Types
e following two methods are available for the printer's network connection.
❏Peer to peer connection (direct printing)
❏Server / client connection (printer sharing using the Windows server)
Peer to Peer Connection Settings
is is the connection to connect the printer on the network and the computer directly. Only a network-capable
model can be connected.
Connection method:
Connect the printer to the network directly via hub or access point.
Printer driver:
Install the printer driver on each client computer.
When using EpsonNet SetupManager, you can provide the driver's package that includes the printer settings.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Using the Print Functions
439
Features:
❏e print job starts immediately because the print job is sent to the printer directly.
❏You can print as long as the printer runs.
Server / Client Connection Settings
is is the connection that the server computer shares with the printer. To prohibit the connection without going
through the server computer, you can enhance the security.
When using USB, the printer without the network function can be also shared.
Connection method:
Connect the printer to the network via LAN switch or access point.
You can also connect the printer to the server directly by USB cable.
Printer driver:
Install the printer driver on the Windows server depending on the OS of the client computers.
By accessing the Windows server and linking the printer, the printer driver is installed on the client computer and
can be used.
Features:
❏Manage the printer and the printer driver in batch.
❏Depending on the server spec, it may take time to start the print job because all print jobs go through the print
server.
❏You cannot print when the Windows server is turned o.
Print Settings for Peer to Peer Connection
For peer to peer connection (direct printing), a printer and a client computer have a one-to-one relationship.
e printer driver must be installed on each client computer.
Print Settings for Server / Client Connection
Enable to print from the printer that is connected as the server / client connection.
For the server / client connection, set up the print server rst, and then share the printer on the network.
When using the USB cable to connect to the server, also set the print server rst, and then share the printer on the
network.
Setting Up the Network Ports
Create the print queue for network printing on the print server by using standard TCP/IP, and then set the network
port.
is example is when using Windows 2012 R2.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Using the Print Functions
440
1. Open the devices and printers screen.
Desktop > Settings > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound or Hardware > Devices and Printers.
2. Add a printer.
Click Add printer, and then select e printer that I want isn't listed.
3. Add a local printer.
Select Add a local printer or network printer with manual settings, and then click Next.
4. Select Create a new port, select Standard TCP/IP Port as the Port Type, and then click Next.
5. Enter the printer's IP address or printer name in Host Name or IP Address or Printer Name or IP Address,
and then click Next.
Example:
❏Printer name : EPSONA1A2B3C
❏IP address : 192.0.2.111
Do not change Port name.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Using the Print Functions
441
Click Continue when the User Account Control screen is displayed.
Note:
If you specify the printer name on the network where the name resolution is available, the IP address is tracked even if
printer's IP address has been changed by DHCP. You can conrm the printer name from the network status screen on
the printer's control panel or network status sheet.
6. Set the printer driver.
❏If the printer driver is already installed:
Select Manufacturer and Printers. Click Next.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions.
When using the printer under the server / client connection (printer sharing using the Windows server), make the
sharing settings hereaer.
Checking the Port Conguration - Windows
Check if the correct port is set for the print queue.
1. Open the devices and printers screen.
Desktop > Settings > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound or Hardware > Devices and Printers.
2. Open the printer properties screen.
Right-click the printer icon, and then click Printer properties.
3. Click the Ports tab, select Standard TCP/IP Port, and then click Congure Port.
4. Check the port conguration.
❏For RAW
Check that Raw is selected in Protocol, and then click OK.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Using the Print Functions
442
❏For LPR
Check that LPR is selected in Protocol. Enter "PASSTHRU" in Queue name from LPR Settings. Select LPR
Byte Counting Enabled, and then click OK.
Sharing the Printer (Windows only)
When using the printer under the server / client connection (printer sharing using the Windows server), set up the
printer sharing from the print server.
1. Select Control Panel > View devices and printers on the print server.
2. Right-click the printer icon (print queue) that you want to share with, and then select Printer Properties >
Sharing tab.
3. Select Share this printer and then enter to Share name.
For Windows Server 2012, click Change Sharing Options and then congure the settings.
Installing Additional Drivers (Windows only)
If the Windows versions for a server and clients are dierent, it is recommended to install additional drivers to the
print server.
1. Select Control Panel > View devices and printers on the print server.
2. Right-click the printer icon that you want to share with the clients, and then click Printer Properties >
Sharing tab.
3. Click Additional Drivers.
For Windows Server 2012, click Change Sharing Options and then congure the settings.
4. Select versions of Windows for clients, and then click OK.
5. Select the information le for the printer driver (*.inf) and then install the driver.
Using the Shared Printer – Windows
e administrator needs to inform the clients of the computer name assigned to the print server and how to add it
to their computers. If the additional driver(s) have not been congured yet, inform the clients how to use Devices
and Printers to add the shared printer.
If additional driver(s) have already been congured on the print server, follow these steps:
1. Select the name assigned to the print server in Windows Explorer.
2. Double-click the printer that you want to use.
Basic Settings for Printing
Set the print settings, such as paper size or printing error.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Using the Print Functions
443
Setting the Paper Source
Set the size and type of paper to be loaded in each paper source.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Print tab > Paper Source Settings.
2. Set each item.
e displayed items may vary by the situation.
❏Paper source name
Display the target paper source name, such as Rear Paper Feed, Cassette 1.
❏Paper Size
Select the paper size you want to set from the pull-down menu.
❏Unit
Select the unit of the user-dened size. You can select it when User dened is selected on Paper Size.
❏Width
Set the horizontal length of the user-dened size.
e range you can enter here depends on the paper source, which is indicated on the side of Width.
When you select mm in Unit, you can enter up to one decimal place.
When you select inch in Unit, you can enter up to two decimal places.
❏Height
Set the vertical length of the user-dened size.
e range you can enter here depends on the paper source, which is indicated on the side of Height.
When you select mm in Unit, you can enter up to one decimal place.
When you select inch in Unit, you can enter up to two decimal places.
❏Paper Type
Select the paper type you want to set from the pull-down menu.
3. Check the settings, and then click OK.
Setting the Interface
Set the timeout of the print jobs or printing language assigned to each interface.
is item is displayed on the PCL or PostScript compatible printer.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Print tab > Interface Settings.
2. Set each item.
❏Timeout Settings
Set the timeout of the print jobs sent directly via USB.
You can set between 5 and 300 seconds by the second.
When you do not want to timeout, enter 0.
❏Printing Language
Select the printing language for each USB interface and network interface.
When you select Auto, the printing language is automatically detected by the print jobs being sent.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Using the Print Functions
444
3. Check the settings, and then click OK.
Setting Errors
Set the displaying error for the device.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Print tab > Error Settings.
2. Set each item.
❏Paper Size Notice
Set whether to display an error on the control panel when the paper size of the specied paper source is
dierent from the paper size of the print data.
❏Paper Type Notice
Set whether to display an error on the control panel when the paper type of the specied paper source is
dierent from the paper type of the print data.
❏Auto Error Solver
Set whether to automatically cancel the error if there is no operation on the control panel for 5 seconds
aer displaying the error.
3. Check the settings, and then click OK.
Setting Universal Print
Set when you print from external devices without using the printer driver.
Some items are not displayed depending on the printing language of your printer.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Print tab > Universal Print Settings.
2. Set each item.
3. Check the settings, and then click OK.
Basic
Items Explanation
Top Oset(-30.0-30.0mm) Sets the vertical position of the paper on which printing starts.
Left Oset(-30.0-30.0mm) Sets the horizontal position of the paper on which printing starts.
Top Oset in Back(-30.0-30.0mm) Sets the vertical position of the paper on which the printing of the back side of
the paper starts in duplex printing.
Left Oset in Back(-30.0-30.0mm) Sets the horizontal position of the paper on which the printing of the back side of
the paper starts in duplex printing.
Check Paper Width Set whether to check paper width when printing.
Skip Blank Page If there is a blank page in the print data, set not to print a blank page.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Using the Print Functions
445
PDL Print Conguration
You can specify settings for PCL or PostScript printing.
is item is displayed on a PCL or PostScript compatible printer.
Common Settings
Items Explanation
Paper Size Select the paper size on which you want to print.
Paper Type Select the type of paper on which you print.
Orientation Select the orientation you want to use to print.
Quality Select the print quality you want to use for printing.
Ink Save Mode Set whether to print with reduced ink consumption.
Print Order Select to print from the top or the last page.
Number of Copies(1-999) Set the number of copies you want to print.
Binding Margin Select the binding position.
Auto Paper Ejection Select whether to eject paper automatically when timeout is occurred during
receiving a print job.
2-Sided Printing Set whether printing 2-sided.
PCL Menu
Items Explanation
Font Source Select whether to use the font installed on the printer or download it.
Font Number Specify the font number you want to use.
Pitch(0.44-99.99cpi) If the font to use is scalable and xed-pitch font, specify the font size in pitch.
Height(4.00-999.75pt) If the font to use is scalable and proportional font, specify the font size in points.
Symbol Set Select the symbol set of the font you want to use.
Form(5-128lines) Specify the number of lines per page.
CR Function Select the operation for the CR code (return).
LF Function Select the operation for the LF code (new line), FF code (new page).
Paper Source Assign Specify paper feeder assignment for PCL paper feed command.
PS Menu
Items Explanation
Error Sheet Set whether to print an error sheet when PS3 printing error occurs.
Coloration Set as color printing or monochrome printing.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Using the Print Functions
446
Items Explanation
Binary Set whether to accept the binary data or not.
PDF Page Size Set the paper size for PDF printing.
Setting Up AirPrint
Set when using AirPrint printing and scanning.
Access Web Cong and select the Network tab > AirPrint Setup.
Items Explanation
Bonjour Service Name Enter the Bonjour service name between 1 and 41 characters in ASCII (0x20-0x7E).
Bonjour Location Enter location information such as the printer's placement within 127 bytes or less
in Unicode (UTF-8).
Geolocation
Latitude and Longitude (WGS84)
Enter the printer's location information. This entry is optional.
Enter values by using WGS-84 datum, which separates latitude and longitude with
a comma.
You can enter -90 to +90 for the latitude value, and -180 to +180 for the longitude
value. You can enter less than a decimal to the sixth place, and you can omit "+".
Top Priority Protocol Select top priority protocol from IPP and Port9100.
Wide-Area Bonjour Set whether or not to use Wide-Area Bonjour. If you use it, the printers must be
registered on the DNS server to be able to search the printer over the segment.
iBeacon Transmission Select whether to enable or disable the iBeacon transmission function. When
enabled, you can search for the printer from iBeacon-enabled devices.
Require PIN Code when using IPP
printing
Select whether or not to require a PIN code when using IPP printing. If you select
Yes , IPP print jobs without PIN codes are not saved in the printer.
Enable AirPrint IPP, Bonjour, AirPrint (Scan service) are enabled, and IPP is established only with
secure communication.
Conguring a Mail Server
Set the mail server from Web Cong.
When the printer can send the email by setting the mail server, the following are possible.
❏Transfers the scan results or fax by using email
❏Receives the email notication from the printer
Check below before setting up.
❏e printer is connected to the network that can access the mail server.
❏Email setting information of the computer that uses the same mail server as the printer.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Conguring a Mail Server
447
Note:
❏When you use the mail server on the Internet, conrm the setting information from the provider or website.
❏You can also set the mail server from the printer’s control panel. Access as below.
Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced > Email Server > Server Settings
1. Access Web Cong and select the Network tab > Email Server > Basic.
2. Enter a value for each item.
3. Select OK.
e settings you have selected are displayed.
When the setup completes, perform the connection check.
Related Information
&“Running Web Cong on a Web Browser” on page 372
Mail Server Setting Items
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Conguring a Mail Server
448
Items Settings and Explanation
Authentication Method Specify the authentication method for the printer to access the mail server.
O Set when the mail server does not need authentication.
SMTP AUTH Authenticates on the SMTP server (outgoing mail server)
when sending the email. The mail server needs to support
SMTP authentication.
POP before SMTP Authenticates on the POP3 server (receiving mail server)
before sending the email. When you select this item, set the
POP3 server.
Authenticated Account If you select SMTP AUTH or POP before SMTP as the Authentication Method, enter the
authenticated account name between 0 and 255 characters in ASCII (0x20-0x7E).
When you select SMTP AUTH, enter the SMTP server account. When you select POP before
SMTP, enter the POP3 server account.
Authenticated Password If you select SMTP AUTH or POP before SMTP as the Authentication Method, enter the
authenticated password between 0 and 20 characters in ASCII (0x20-0x7E).
When you select SMTP AUTH, enter the authenticated account for the SMTP server. When
you select POP before SMTP, enter the authenticated account for the POP3 server.
Sender's Email Address Enter the sender's email address such as the email address of the system administrator. This
is used when authenticating, so enter a valid email address that is registered to the mail
server.
Enter between 0 and 255 characters in ASCII (0x20-0x7E) except for : ( ) < > [ ] ; ¥. A period "."
cannot be the rst character.
SMTP Server Address Enter between 0 and 255 characters using A-Z a-z 0-9 . - . You can use IPv4 or FQDN format.
SMTP Server Port Number Enter a number between 1 and 65535.
Secure Connection Select the encryption method of the communication to the mail server.
None If you select POP before SMTP in Authentication Method,
the connection is not encrypted.
SSL/TLS This is available when Authentication Method is set to O
or SMTP AUTH. Communication is encrypted from the start.
STARTTLS This is available when Authentication Method is set to O
or SMTP AUTH. Communication is not encrypted from the
start, but depending on the network environment, whether
the communication is encrypted or not is changed.
Certicate Validation The certicate is validated when this is enabled. We recommend this is set to Enable. To set
up, you need to import the CA Certicate to the printer.
POP3 Server Address If you select POP before SMTP as the Authentication Method, enter the POP3 server
address between 0 and 255 characters using A-Z a-z 0-9 . - . You can use IPv4 or FQDN
format.
POP3 Server Port Number If you select POP before SMTP as the Authentication Method, enter a number between 1
and 65535.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Conguring a Mail Server
449
Checking a Mail Server Connection
You can check the connection to the mail server by performing the connection check.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Network tab > Email Server > Connection Test.
2. Select Start.
e connection test to the mail server is started. Aer the test, the check report is displayed.
Note:
You can also check the connection to the mail server from the printer’s control panel. Access as below.
Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced > Email Server > Connection Check
Mail Server Connection Test References
Messages Cause
Connection test was successful. This message appears when the connection with the server is successful.
SMTP server communication error.
Check the following. - Network
Settings
This message appears when
❏The printer is not connected to a network
❏SMTP server is down
❏Network connection is disconnected while communicating
❏Received incomplete data
POP3 server communication error.
Check the following. - Network
Settings
This message appears when
❏The printer is not connected to a network
❏POP3 server is down
❏Network connection is disconnected while communicating
❏Received incomplete data
An error occurred while connecting to
SMTP server. Check the followings. -
SMTP Server Address - DNS Server
This message appears when
❏Connecting to a DNS server failed
❏Name resolution for an SMTP server failed
An error occurred while connecting to
POP3 server. Check the followings. -
POP3 Server Address - DNS Server
This message appears when
❏Connecting to a DNS server failed
❏Name resolution for an POP3 server failed
SMTP server authentication error.
Check the followings. - Authentication
Method - Authenticated Account -
Authenticated Password
This message appears when SMTP server authentication failed.
POP3 server authentication error.
Check the followings. - Authentication
Method - Authenticated Account -
Authenticated Password
This message appears when POP3 server authentication failed.
Unsupported communication method.
Check the followings. - SMTP Server
Address - SMTP Server Port Number
This message appears when you try to communicate with unsupported protocols.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Conguring a Mail Server
450
Messages Cause
Connection to SMTP server failed.
Change Secure Connection to None.
This message appears when an SMTP mismatch occurs between a server and a
client, or when the server does not support SMTP secure connection (SSL
connection).
Connection to SMTP server failed.
Change Secure Connection to SSL/TLS.
This message appears when an SMTP mismatch occurs between a server and a
client, or when the server requests to use an SSL/TLS connection for an SMTP
secure connection.
Connection to SMTP server failed.
Change Secure Connection to
STARTTLS.
This message appears when an SMTP mismatch occurs between a server and a
client, or when the server requests to use an STARTTLS connection for an SMTP
secure connection.
The connection is untrusted. Check the
following. - Date and Time
This message appears when the printer’s date and time setting is incorrect or the
certicate has expired.
The connection is untrusted. Check the
following. - CA Certicate
This message appears when the printer does not have a root certicate
corresponding to the server or a CA Certicate has not been imported.
The connection is not secured. This message appears when the obtained certicate is damaged.
SMTP server authentication failed.
Change Authentication Method to
SMTP-AUTH.
This message appears when an authentication method mismatch occurs between
a server and a client. The server supports SMTP AUTH.
SMTP server authentication failed.
Change Authentication Method to
POP before SMTP.
This message appears when an authentication method mismatch occurs between
a server and a client. The server does not support SMTP AUTH.
Sender's Email Address is incorrect.
Change to the email address for your
email service.
This message appears when the specied sender’s Email address is wrong.
Cannot access the printer until
processing is complete.
This message appears when the printer is busy.
Setting a Shared Network Folder
Set a shared network folder to save the scanned image and the results of faxing.
When saving a le to the folder, the printer logs on as the user of the computer on which the folder was created.
Also, make sure you setup MS Network when creating the shared network folder.
Creating the Shared Folder
Before Creating the Shared Folder
Before creating the shared folder, check the following.
❏e printer is connected to the network where it can access the computer where the shared folder will be
created.
❏A multi-byte character is not included in the name of the computer where the shared folder will be created.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Setting a Shared Network Folder
451
c
Important:
When a multi-byte character is included in the computer name, saving the le to the shared folder may fail.
In that case, change to the computer that does not include the Multi-byte character in the name or change the
computer name.
When changing the computer name, make sure to conrm with the administrator in advance because it may aect
some settings, such as computer management, resource access, etc.
Checking the Network Prole
On the computer where the shared folder will be created, check whether folder sharing is available.
1. Log in to the computer where the shared folder will be created by the administrator authority user account.
2. Select Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center.
3. Click Advanced sharing settings, and then click for the prole with (current prole) in the displayed
network proles.
4. Check whether Turn on le and printer sharing is selected on File and Printer Sharing.
If already selected, click Cancel and close the window.
When you change the settings, click Save Changes and close the window.
Related Information
&“Location Where the Shared Folder is Created and an Example of the Security” on page 452
Location Where the Shared Folder is Created and an Example of the Security
Depending on the location where the shared folder is created, security and convenience vary.
To operate the shared folder from the printers or other computers, the following reading and changing permissions
for the folder are required.
❏Sharing tab > Advanced Sharing > Permissions
It controls the network access permission of the shared folder.
❏Access permission of Security tab
It controls permission of the network access and local access of the shared folder.
When you set Everyone to the shared folder that is created on the desktop, as an example of creating a shared
folder, all users who can access the computer will be permitted access.
However, the user who does not have authority cannot access them because the desktop (folder) is under the
control of the user folder, and then the security settings of the user folder are handed down to it. e user who is
permitted access on the Security tab (user logged in and administrator in this case) can operate the folder.
See below to create the proper location.
is example is when creating the "scan_folder" folder.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Setting a Shared Network Folder
452
Related Information
&“Example of Conguration for File Servers” on page 453
&“Example of Conguration for a Personal Computer” on page 458
Example of Conguration for File Servers
is explanation is an example for creating the shared folder on the root of the drive on the shared computer, such
as the le server under the following condition.
Access controllable users, such as someone who has the same domain of a computer to create a shared folder, can
access the shared folder.
Set this conguration when you permit any user to read and write to the shared folder on the computer, such as the
le server and the shared computer.
❏Place for creating shared folder: Root of drive
❏Folder path: C:\scan_folder
❏Access permission via network (Share Permissions): Everyone
❏Access permission on le system (Security): Authenticated Users
1. Log in to the computer where the shared folder will be created by the administrator authority user account.
2. Start explorer.
3. Create the folder on the root of drive, and then name it "scan_folder".
For the folder name, enter between 1 and 12 alphanumeric characters. If the character limit of the folder name
is exceeded, you may not be able to access it normally by the varied environment.
4. Right click the folder, and then select Properties.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Setting a Shared Network Folder
453
8. Click OK.
9. Select Security tab, and then select Authenticated Users on the Group or user names.
"Authenticated Users" is the special group that includes all users who can log in to the domain or computer.
is group is displayed only when the folder is created just below the root folder.
If it is not displayed, you can add it by clicking Edit. For more details, see Related Information.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Setting a Shared Network Folder
456
10. Check that Allow on Modify is selected in Permissions for Authenticated Users.
If it is not selected, select Authenticated Users, click Edit, select Allow on Modify in Permissions for
Authenticated Users, and then click OK.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Setting a Shared Network Folder
457
11. Select Sharing tab.
e network path of the shared folder is displayed. is is used when registering to the contacts of the printer.
Please write it down.
12. Click OK or Close to close the screen.
Check whether the le can be written or read on the shared folder from the computers of the same domain.
Related Information
&“Registering a Destination to Contacts using Web Cong” on page 468
&“Adding Group or User Which Permits Access” on page 463
Example of Conguration for a Personal Computer
is explanation is an example for creating the shared folder on the desktop of the user currently logging in to the
computer.
e user who logs in to the computer and who has administrator authority can access the desktop folder and the
document folder that are under the User folder.
Set this conguration when you DO NOT permit reading and writing to another user to the shared folder on a
personal computer.
❏Place for creating shared folder: Desktop
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Setting a Shared Network Folder
458
❏Folder path: C:\Users\xxxx\Desktop\scan_folder
❏Access permission via network (Share Permissions): Everyone
❏Access permission on le system (Security): do not add, or add User/Group names to permit access
1. Log in to the computer where the shared folder will be created by the administrator authority user account.
2. Start explorer.
3. Create the folder on the desktop, and then name it "scan_folder".
For the folder name, enter between 1 and 12 alphanumeric characters. If the character limit of the folder name
is exceeded, you may not be able to access it normally by the varied environment.
4. Right click the folder, and then select Properties.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Setting a Shared Network Folder
459
8. Click OK.
9. Select Security tab.
10. Check the group or the user in the Group or user names.
e group or the user that is displayed here can access the shared folder.
In this case, the user who logs in to this computer and the Administrator can access the shared folder.
Add access permission, if necessary. You can add it by clicking Edit. For more details, see Related Information.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Setting a Shared Network Folder
462
11. Select Sharing tab.
e network path of the shared folder is displayed. is is used when registering to the printer's contact. Please
write it down.
12. Click OK or Close to close the screen.
Check whether the le can be written or read on the shared folder from the computers of users or groups with
access permission.
Related Information
&“Registering a Destination to Contacts using Web Cong” on page 468
&“Adding Group or User Which Permits Access” on page 463
Adding Group or User Which Permits Access
You can add the group or user which permits access.
1. Right click the folder and select Properties.
2. Select Security tab.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Setting a Shared Network Folder
463
4. Click Add under the Group or user names.
5. Enter the group or user name that you want to permit access, and then click Check Names.
An underline is added to the name.
Note:
If you do not know the full name of the group or user, enter part of the name, and then click Check Names. e group
names or user names that match part of the name are listed, and then you can select the full name from the list.
If just one name matches, the full name with underlining is displayed in Enter the object name to select.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Setting a Shared Network Folder
465
6. Click OK.
7. On the Permission screen, select the user name that is entered in Group or user names , select the access
permission on Modify, and then click OK.
8. Click OK or Close to close the screen.
Check whether the le can be written or read on the shared folder from the computers of users or groups with
access permission.
Using Microsoft Network Sharing
When enabling it, the following are possible.
❏Shares the USB storage over the network that is connected to the printer.
❏Forwards the scan result or receiving fax to the shared folder on the computer.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Network tab > MS Network.
2. Select Use Microso network sharing.
3. Set each item.
4. Click Next.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Setting a Shared Network Folder
466
5. Conrm the settings, and then click OK.
6. Enter the following on the computer's explorer, and then press the Enter key.
Check whether there is a network folder and that you can access it.
\\Printer's IP address
Example : \\192.0.2.111
Related Information
&“Running Web Cong on a Web Browser” on page 372
MS Network Setting items
Items Explanation
Use Microsoft network sharing Select when enabling MS Network sharing.
SMB1.0
SMB2/SMB3
Enable the protocol you want to use. You can only enable SMB1.0 or SMB2/SMB3.
File Sharing Select whether to enable le sharing or not.
Enable it for the following situations.
❏Shares the USB storage over the network that is connected to the printer.
❏Forwards the scan result or receiving fax to the shared folder on the computer.
User Authentication Select whether to perform user authentication or not when accessing USB storage
on the network that is connected to the printer.
User Name Set the user name for user authentication. Enter between 1 and 127 characters in
ASCII except "/\[]:;|=,+*?<>@%. However, you cannot enter a single period or a
combination of the period "." and a space alone.
Password Set the password for user authentication. Enter between 1 and 64 characters in
ASCII. However, you cannot just set 10 asterisks "*".
Encrypted Communication Set whether to enable encrypted communication or not. You can select it when
Enable is selected on User Authentication.
Host Name Display the MS Network host name of the printer. To change this, select the
Network tab > Basic, and then change the Device Name.
Workgroup Name Enter the work group name of MS Network. Enter between 0 and 15 characters in
ASCII.
Access Attribute Set the Access Attribute of le sharing.
Shared Name(USB Host) Display as the shared name when sharing the le.
Making Contacts Available
Registering destinations in the printer's contacts list allows you to easily enter the destination when scanning or
sending faxes.
You can also use the LDAP server (LDAP search) to enter the destination.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Contacts Available
467
Note:
❏You can switch between your printer's contacts list and the LDAP using the printer’s control panel.
❏You can register the following types of destinations in the contacts list. You can register up to 2,000 entries in total.
Fax Destination for fax
Email Destination for email
You need to congure the email server settings beforehand.
Network Folder (SMB) Destination for scan data and fax forwarding data
Network Folder/FTP
Contacts Conguration Comparison
ere are three tools for conguring the printer's contacts: Web Cong, Epson Device Admin, and the printer’s
control panel. e dierences between three tools are listed in the table below.
Features Web Cong Epson Device Admin Printer’s control panel
Registering a destination ✓✓✓
Editing a destination ✓✓✓
Adding a group ✓✓✓
Editing a group ✓✓✓
Deleting a destination or
groups
✓✓✓
Deleting all destinations ✓✓ –
Importing a le ✓✓ –
Exporting to a le ✓✓ –
Assigning destinations to
frequent use
✓✓✓
Sorting destinations
assigned to frequent use
––✓
Note:
You can also congure the fax destination using the FAX Utility.
Registering a Destination to Contacts using Web Cong
Note:
❏You can also register the contacts on the printer’s control panel.
❏See the following description if optional faxes are added to the printer.
“Registering a Recipient to the Contacts List (When Optional Fax Boards Installed)” on page 340
1. Access Web Cong and select the Scan/Copy or Fax tab > Contacts.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Contacts Available
468
2. Select the number that you want to register, and then click Edit.
3. Enter Name and Index Word.
4. Select the destination type as the Type option.
Note:
You cannot change the Type option aer registration is complete. If you want to change the type, delete the destination
and then register again.
5. Enter a value for each item, and then click Apply.
Related Information
&“Scanning Originals to a Network Folder” on page 109
Destination Setting Items
Items Settings and Explanation
Common Settings
Name Enter a name displayed in the contacts in 30 characters or less in Unicode (UTF-8).
If you do not specify this, leave it blank.
Index Word Enter words to search in 30 characters or less in Unicode (UTF-8). If you do not
specify this, leave it blank.
Type Select the type of the address that you want to register.
Assign to Frequent Use Select to set the registered address as a frequently used address.
When setting as a frequently used address, it is displayed on the top screen of fax
and scan, and you can specify the destination without displaying the contacts.
Fax
Fax Number Enter between 1 and 64 characters using 0-9 - * # and space.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Contacts Available
469
Items Settings and Explanation
Fax Speed Select a communication speed for a destination.
Subaddress (SUB/SEP) Set the sub address that is appended when fax is sent. Enter within 20 characters
or less using 0-9, *, # or spaces. If you do not specify this, leave it blank.
Password (SID/PWD) Set the password for the sub address. Enter within 20 characters or less using 0-9,
*, # or spaces. If you do not specify this, leave it blank.
Email
Email Address Enter between 1 and 255 characters using A-Z a-z 0-9 ! # $ % & ' * + - . / = ? ^ _ { | }
~ @.
Network Folder (SMB)
Save to \\“Folder path”
Enter the location where the target folder is located between 1 and 253 characters
in Unicode (UTF-8), omitting "\\".
User Name Enter a user name to access a network folder in 30 characters or less in Unicode
(UTF-8). However, avoid using control characters (0x00 to 0x1f, 0x7F).
Password Enter a password to access a network folder in 20 characters or less in Unicode
(UTF-8). However, avoid using control characters (0x00 to 0x1f, 0x7F).
FTP
Secure Connection Select FTP or FTPS according to the le transfer protocol the FTP server supports.
Select FTPS to allow the printer to communicate with security measures.
Save to Enter the server name between 1 and 253 characters in ASCII (0x20-0x7E),
omitting "ftp://" or "ftps://".
User Name Enter a user name to access an FTP server in 30 characters or less in Unicode
(UTF-8). However, avoid using control characters (0x00 to 0x1f, 0x7F). If the server
allows anonymous connections, enter a user name such as Anonymous and FTP. If
you do not specify this, leave it blank.
Password Enter a password to access to an FTP server within 20 characters or less in Unicode
(UTF-8). However, avoid using control characters (0x00 to 0x1f, 0x7F). If you do not
specify this, leave it blank.
Connection Mode Select the connection mode from the menu. If a rewall is set between the printer
and the FTP server, select Passive Mode.
Port Number Enter the FTP server port number between 1 and 65535.
Certicate Validation The FTP server's certicate is validated when this is enabled. This is available when
FTPS is selected for Secure Connection.
To set up, you need to import the CA Certicate to the printer.
Registering Destinations as a Group Using Web Cong
If the destination type is set to Fax or Email, you can register the destinations as a group.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Scan/Copy or Fax tab > Contacts.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Contacts Available
470
2. Select the number that you want to register, and then click Edit.
3. Select a group from Type.
4. Click Select for Contact(s) for Group.
e available destinations are displayed.
5. Select the destination that you want to register to the group, and then click Select.
6. Enter a Name and Index Word.
7. Select whether or not you assign the registered group to the frequently used group.
Note:
Destinations can be registered to multiple groups.
8. Click Apply.
Registering Frequently Used Contacts
When you register frequently used contacts, the contacts are displayed at the top of the screen where you specify
the address.
1. Select Settings on the home screen.
2. Select Contacts Manager, and then select Frequent.
3. Select the type of contact you want to register.
4. Select Edit.
Note:
To edit the order of the contacts, select Sort.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Contacts Available
471
5. Select frequently used contacts that you want to register, and then select OK.
Note:
❏To deselect a contact, tap it again.
❏You can search for addresses from the contacts list. Enter the search keyword into the box on the top of the screen.
6. Select Close.
Backing Up and Importing Contacts
Using Web Cong or other tools, you can back up and import contacts.
For Web Cong, you can back up contacts by exporting the printer settings that include contacts. e exported le
cannot be edited because it is exported as a binary le.
When importing the printer settings to the printer, contacts are overwritten.
For Epson Device Admin, only contacts can be exported from the device’s property screen. Also, if you do not
export the security-related items, you can edit the exported contacts and import them because this can be saved as
a SYLK le or CSV le.
Importing Contacts Using Web Cong
If you have a printer that allows you to backup contacts and is compatible with this printer, you can register
contacts easily by importing the backup le.
Note:
For instructions on how to back up the printer contacts, see the manual provided with the printer.
Follow the steps below to import the contacts to this printer.
1. Access Web Cong, select Device Management > Export and Import Setting Value > Import.
2. Select the backup le you created in File, enter the password, and then click Next.
3. Select the Contacts checkbox, and then click Next.
Backing up Contacts Using Web Cong
Contacts data may be lost due to a printer malfunction. We recommend that you make a backup of the data
whenever you update the data. Epson shall not be responsible for the loss of any data, for backing up or recovering
data and/or settings even during a warranty period.
Using Web Cong, you can back up the contact data stored in the printer to the computer.
1. Access Web Cong, and then select the Device Management tab > Export and Import Setting Value >
Export.
2. Select one of the Contacts checkboxes.
For example, if you select Contacts under the Scan/Copy category, the same checkbox under the Fax category
is also selected.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Contacts Available
472
3. Enter a password to encrypt the exported le.
You need the password to import the le. Leave this blank if you do not want to encrypt the le.
4. Click Export.
Starting from Importing Contacts from Another Epson Printer
If you have a printer that allows you to backup contacts and is compatible with this printer, you can register
contacts easily by importing the backup le.
Note:
For instructions on how to back up the printer contact,s, see the manual provided with the printer.
Follow the steps below to import the contacts to this printer.
1. Access Web Cong, select Device Management > Export and Import Setting Value > Import.
2. Select the backup le you created in File, enter the password, and then click Next.
3. Select the Contacts checkbox, and then click Next.
Export and Bulk Registration of Contacts Using Tool
If you use Epson Device Admin, you can back up just the contacts and edit the exported les, then register them all
at once.
It is useful if you want to back up only the contacts or when you replace the printer and you want to transfer the
contacts from the old one to new one.
Exporting Contacts
Save the contacts information to the le.
You can edit les saved in SYLK format or csv format by using a spreadsheet application or text editor. You can
register all at once aer deleting or adding the information.
Information that includes security items such as password and personal information can be saved in binary format
with a password. You cannot edit the le. is can be used as the backup le of the information including the
security items.
1. Start Epson Device Admin.
2. Select Devices on the side bar task menu.
3. Select the device you want to congure from the device list.
4. Click Device Conguration on the Home tab on the ribbon menu.
When the administrator password has been set, enter the password and click OK.
5. Click Common > Contacts.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Contacts Available
473
6. Select the export format from Export > Export items.
❏All Items
Export the encrypted binary le. Select when you want to include the security items such as password and
personal information. You cannot edit the le. If you select it, you have to set the password. Click
Conguration and set a password between 8 and 63 characters long in ASCII. is password is required
when importing the binary le.
❏Items except Security Information
Export the SYLK format or csv format les. Select when you want to edit the information of the exported
le.
7. Click Export.
8. Specify the place to save the le, select the le type, and then click Save.
e completion message is displayed.
9. Click OK.
Check that the le is saved to the specied place.
Importing Contacts
Import the contacts information from the le.
You ca n i mp ort the les saved in SYLK format or csv format or the backed-up binary le that includes the security
items.
1. Start Epson Device Admin.
2. Select Devices on the side bar task menu.
3. Select the device you want to congure from the device list.
4. Click Device Conguration on the Home tab on the ribbon menu.
When the administrator password has been set, enter the password and click OK.
5. Click Common > Contacts.
6. Click Browse on Import.
7. Select the le you want to import and then click Open.
When you select the binary le, in Password enter the password you set when exporting the le.
8. Click Import.
e conrmation screen is displayed.
9. Click OK.
e validation result is displayed.
❏Edit the information read
Click when you want to edit the information individually.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Contacts Available
474
❏Read more le
Click when you want to import multiple les.
10. Click Import, and then click OK on the import completion screen.
Return to the device's property screen.
11. Click Transmit.
12. Click OK on the conrmation message.
e settings are sent to the printer.
13. On the sending completion screen, click OK.
e printer's information is updated.
Open the contacts from Web Cong or printer's control panel, and then check that the contact is updated.
Cooperation between the LDAP Server and Users
When cooperating with the LDAP server, you can use the address information registered to the LDAP server as the
destination of an email or fax.
Conguring the LDAP Server
To use the LDAP server information, register it on the printer.
1. Access the Web Cong and select the Network tab > LDAP Server > Basic.
2. Enter a value for each item.
3. Select OK.
e settings you have selected are displayed.
LDAP Server Setting Items
Items Settings and Explanation
Use LDAP Server Select Use or Do Not Use.
LDAP Server Address Enter the address of the LDAP server. Enter between 1 and 255 characters of
either IPv4, IPv6, or FQDN format. For the FQDN format, you can use alphanumeric
characters in ASCII (0x20-0x7E) and "- " except for the beginning and end of the
address.
LDAP server Port Number Enter the LDAP server port number between 1 and 65535.
Secure Connection Specify the authentication method when the printer accesses the LDAP server.
Certicate Validation When this is enabled, the certicate of the LDAP sever is validated. We
recommend this is set to Enable.
To set up, the CA Certicate needs to be imported to the printer.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Contacts Available
475
Items Settings and Explanation
Search Timeout (sec) Set the length of time for searching before timeout occurs between 5 and 300.
Authentication Method Select one of the methods.
If you select Kerberos Authentication, select Kerberos Settings to make
settings for Kerberos.
To perform Kerberos Authentication, the following environment is required.
❏The printer and the DNS server can communicate.
❏The time of the printer, KDC server, and the server that is required for
authentication (LDAP server, SMTP server, File server) are synchronized.
❏When the service server is assigned as the IP address, the FQDN of the service
server is registered on the DNS server reverse lookup zone.
Kerberos Realm to be Used If you select Kerberos Authentication for Authentication Method, select the
Kerberos realm that you want to use.
Administrator DN / User Name Enter the user name for the LDAP server in 128 characters or less in Unicode
(UTF-8). You cannot use control characters, such as 0x00-0x1F and 0X7F. This
setting is not used when Anonymous Authentication is selected as the
Authentication Method. If you do not specify this, leave it blank.
Password Enter the password for the LDAP server authentication in 128 characters or less in
Unicode (UTF-8). You cannot use control characters, such as 0x00-0x1F and 0X7F.
This setting is not used when Anonymous Authentication is selected as the
Authentication Method. If you do not specify this, leave it blank.
Kerberos Settings
If you select Kerberos Authentication for Authentication Method of LDAP Server > Basic, make the following
Kerberos settings from the Network tab > Kerberos Settings. You can register up to 10 settings for the Kerberos
settings.
Items Settings and Explanation
Realm (Domain) Enter the realm of the Kerberos authentication in 255 characters or less in ASCII
(0x20-0x7E). If you do not register this, leave it blank.
KDC Address Enter the address of the Kerberos authentication server. Enter 255 characters or
less in either IPv4, IPv6 or FQDN format. If you do not register this, leave it blank.
Port Number (Kerberos) Enter the Kerberos server port number between 1 and 65535.
Conguring the LDAP Server Search Settings
When you set up the search settings, you can use the email address and fax number registered to the LDAP server.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Network tab > LDAP Server > Search Settings.
2. Enter a value for each item.
3. Click OK to display the setting result.
e settings you have selected are displayed.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Contacts Available
476
LDAP Server Search Setting Items
Items Settings and Explanation
Search Base (Distinguished Name) If you want to search an arbitrary domain, specify the domain name of the LDAP
server. Enter between 0 and 128 characters in Unicode (UTF-8). If you do not
search for arbitrary attribute, leave this blank.
Example for the local server directory: dc=server,dc=local
Number of search entries Specify the number of search entries between 5 and 500. The specied number of
the search entries is saved and displayed temporarily. Even if the number of the
search entries is over the specied number and an error message appears, the
search can be completed.
User name Attribute Specify the attribute name to display when searching for user names. Enter
between 1 and 255 characters in Unicode (UTF-8). The rst character should be a-z
or A-Z.
Example: cn, uid
User name Display Attribute Specify the attribute name to display as the user name. Enter between 0 and 255
characters in Unicode (UTF-8). The rst character should be a-z or A-Z.
Example: cn, sn
Fax Number Attribute Specify the attribute name to display when searching for fax numbers. Enter a
combination of between 1 and 255 characters using A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and -. The rst
character should be a-z or A-Z.
Example: facsimileTelephoneNumber
Email Address Attribute Specify the attribute name to display when searching for email addresses. Enter a
combination of between 1 and 255 characters using A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and -. The rst
character should be a-z or A-Z.
Example: mail
Arbitrary Attribute 1 - Arbitrary
Attribute 4
You can specify other arbitrary attributes to search for. Enter between 0 and 255
characters in Unicode (UTF-8). The rst character should be a-z or A-Z. If you do
not want to search for arbitrary attributes, leave this blank.
Example: o, ou
Checking the LDAP Server Connection
Performs the connection test to the LDAP server by using the parameter set on LDAP Server > Search Settings.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Network tab > LDAP Server > Connection Test.
2. Select Start.
e connection test is started. Aer the test, the check report is displayed.
LDAP Server Connection Test References
Messages Explanation
Connection test was successful. This message appears when the connection with the server is successful.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Contacts Available
477
Messages Explanation
Connection test failed.
Check the settings.
This message appears for the following reasons:
❏The LDAP server address or the port number is incorrect.
❏A timeout has occurred.
❏Do Not Use is selected as the Use LDAP Server.
❏If Kerberos Authentication is selected as the Authentication Method,
settings such as Realm (Domain), KDC Address and Port Number (Kerberos)
are incorrect.
Connection test failed.
Check the date and time on your
product or server.
This message appears when the connection fails because the time settings for the
printer and the LDAP server are mismatched.
Authentication failed.
Check the settings.
This message appears for the following reasons:
❏User Name and/or Password is incorrect.
❏If Kerberos Authentication is selected as the Authentication Method, the
time/date may not be congured.
Cannot access the printer until
processing is complete.
This message appears when the printer is busy.
Preparing to Scan
Scanning using the control panel
e scan to network folder function and the scan to mail function using the printer’s control panel, as well as the
transfer of scan results to mail, folders, etc. are performed by executing a job from the computer.
Settings of Servers and Folders
Name Settings Location Requirement
Scan to Network Folder
(SMB)
Create and set up sharing of
the save folder
A computer that has a save
folder location
The administrative user
account to the computer
that creates save folders.
Destination for Scan to
Network Folder (SMB)
Contacts of the device User name and password
to log on to the
computer that has the
save folder, and the
privilege to update the
save folder.
Scan to Network Folder
(FTP)
Setup for FTP server log on Contacts of the device Logon information for
the FTP server and the
privilege to update the
save folder.
Scan to Email Setup for email server Device Setup information for
email server
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Preparing to Scan
478
Name Settings Location Requirement
Scan to Cloud Printer registration to Epson
Connect
Device Internet connection
environment
Contact registration to Epson
Connect
Epson Connect service User and printer
registration to Epson
Connect service
Scan to Compuer (when
using Document Capture
Pro Server)
Server mode setup for
Document Capture Pro
Device IP address, host name, or
FQDN for the computer
that Document Capture
Pro Server is installed on
Related Information
&“Setting a Shared Network Folder” on page 451
&“Conguring a Mail Server” on page 447
Using Document Capture Pro Server
By using Document Capture Pro Server, you can manage the sorting method, saving format, and forwarding
destination of a scanning result executed from the printer's control panel. You can call and execute a job previously
registered on the server from the printer's control panel.
Install it on the server computer.
For more information on Document Capture Pro Server, contact your local Epson oce.
Setting Server Mode
To use Document Capture Pro Server, set up as follows.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Scan/Copy tab > Document Capture Pro.
2. Select Server Mode for Mode.
3. Enter the address of the server with Document Capture Pro Server installed on it for Server Address.
Enter between 2 and 255 characters in either IPv4, IPv6, host name or FQDN format. For FQDN format, you
can use alphanumeric characters in ASCII (0x20-0x7E) and "- " except for at the beginning and end of the
address.
4. Click OK.
e network is re-connected, and then the settings are enabled.
Scanning From a Computer
Install the soware and check that the network scan service is enabled to scan via a network from the computer.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Preparing to Scan
479
Software to be installed
❏Epson Scan 2
is is a scanner driver. If you use the device from a computer, install the driver on each client computer. If
Document Capture Pro/Document Capture is installed, you can perform the operations assigned to the buttons
of the device.
If EpsonNet SetupManager is used, the printer driver is also distributed as a package.
❏Document Capture Pro (Windows)/Document Capture (Mac OS)
It is installed on the client computer. e jobs registered on a network computer where Document Capture Pro/
Document Capture is installed can be called and run from the deivce's control panel.
You can scan over the network from a computer. Epson Scan 2 is required to scan.
Conrming that Network Scan is Enabled
You can set the network scan service when you scan from a client computer over the network. e default setting is
enabled.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Scan/Copy tab > Network Scan.
2. Make sure that Enable scanning of EPSON Scan is selected.
If it is selected, this task is completed. Close Web Cong.
If it is cleared, select it and go to next step.
3. Click Next.
4. Click OK.
e network is re-connected, and then the settings are enabled.
Related Information
&“Running Web Cong on a Web Browser” on page 372
Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
Before Using Fax Features
Check the following before you start using the fax features.
❏e printer and the phone line, and (if necessary) the phone machine are connected correctly
❏Fax basic settings (Fax Setting Wizard) is complete
❏Other necessary Fax Settings are complete
If your organization has a printer administrator, contact your administrator to check the status or conditions of the
connection and settings.
See "Related Information" below to make settings.
“Connecting the Printer to a Phone Line” on page 481
“Making the Printer Ready to Send and Receive Faxes” on page 484
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe
…
480
“Making Settings for the Printer's Fax Features According to Use” on page 486
“Fax Settings (Fax-Capable Printers Only)” on page 383
“Conguring a Mail Server” on page 447
“Setting a Shared Network Folder” on page 451
“Making Contacts Available” on page 467
See the following for information on adding optional faxes to the printer.
“Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board” on page 337
Related Information
&“Report Settings” on page 395
Connecting the Printer to a Phone Line
Compatible Telephone Lines
You can use the printer over standard analogue telephone lines (PSTN = Public Switched Telephone Network) and
PBX (Private Branch Exchange) telephone systems.
You may not be able to use the printer with the following phone lines or systems.
❏VoIP phone line such as DSL or ber-optic digital service
❏Digital phone line (ISDN)
❏Some PBX telephone systems
❏When adapters such as terminal adapters, VoIP adapters, splitters, or DSL router are connected between the
telephone wall jack and the printer
Connecting the Printer to a Phone Line
Connect the printer to a telephone wall jack using an RJ-11 (6P2C) phone cable. When connecting a telephone to
the printer, use a second RJ-11 (6P2C) phone cable.
Depending on the area, a phone cable may be included with the printer. If it is included, use that cable.
You may need to connect the phone cable to an adapter provided for your country or region.
Note:
Remove the cap from the EXT. port of the printer only when connecting your telephone to the printer. Do not remove the cap
if you are not connecting your telephone.
In areas where lightning strikes occur frequently, we recommend that you use a surge protector.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe
…
481
Connecting to a Standard Phone Line (PSTN) or PBX
Connect a phone cable from the telephone wall jack or PBX port to the LINE port on the back of the printer.
Connecting to DSL or ISDN
Connect a phone cable from the DSL modem or the ISDN terminal adapter to the LINE port on the back of the
printer. See the documentation provided with the modem or the adapter for more details.
Note:
If your DSL modem is not equipped with a built-in DSL lter, connect a separate DSL lter.
Connecting Your Phone Device to the Printer
When using the printer and your telephone on a single phone line, connect the telephone to the printer.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe
…
482
Note:
❏If your phone device has a fax function, disable the fax function before connecting. See the manuals that came with the
phone device for details. Depending on the model of the phone device, the fax function cannot be completely disabled, so
you may not be able to use it as an external phone.
❏If you connect an answering machine, make sure the printer's Rings to Answer setting is set higher than the number of
rings your answering machine is set to answer a call.
1. Remove the cap from the EXT. port on the back of the printer.
2. Connect the phone device and the EXT. port with a phone cable.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe
…
483
Note:
When sharing a single phone line, make sure you connect the phone device to the EXT. port of the printer. If you split
the line to connect the phone device and the printer separately, the phone and the printer do not work correctly.
3. Select Fax on the home screen.
4. Pick up the handset.
If a message to start sending or receiving faxes is displayed as shown on the following screen, the connection
has been established.
Related Information
&“Making the Printer Ready to Send and Receive Faxes” on page 484
&“Making Settings to Use an Answering Machine” on page 487
&“Making Settings to Receive Faxes Operating Only a Connected Phone” on page 487
&“Receive Mode:” on page 385
Making the Printer Ready to Send and Receive Faxes
Fax Setting Wizard congures the basic fax features to make the printer ready to send and receive faxes.
e Wizard is displayed automatically when the printer is turned on for the rst time. You can also display the
wizard manually from the printer's control panel. You need to run the wizard again in case the wizard is skipped
when the printer is rst turned on or when the connection environment has changed.
❏e items below are what you can set through the wizard.
❏Header (Your Phone Number and Fax Header)
❏Receive Mode (Auto or Manual)
❏Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) Setting
❏e items below are set automatically according to the connection environment.
❏Dial Mode (such as Tone or Pulse)
❏Other items in Basic Settings remain as they are.
Related Information
&“Basic Settings” on page 384
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe
…
484
Making the Printer Ready to Send and Receive Faxes Using Fax Setting Wizard
1. Select Settings on the home screen on the printer's control panel, and then select General Settings > Fax
Settings > Fax Setting Wizard.
2. Following the on-screen instructions, enter the sender name such as your company name, your fax number.
Note:
Your sender name and your fax number appear as the header for outgoing faxes.
3. Make the distinctive ring detection (DRD) setting.
❏If you have subscribed to a distinctive ring service from your telephone company:
Go to the next screen and select the ring pattern to be used for incoming faxes.
When you tap any item except All, Receive Mode is set to Auto and you continue to the next screen where
you can check the settings you made.
❏If you have not subscribed to a distinctive ring service from your telephone company, or you do not need to
set this option:
Skip this setting and go to the screen where you can check the settings you made.
Note:
❏Distinctive ring services, oered by many telephone companies (the service name diers by company), allows you to
have several phone numbers on one phone line. Each number is assigned a dierent ring pattern. You can use one
number for voice calls and another for fax calls. Select the ring pattern assigned to fax calls in DRD.
❏Depending on the region, On and O are displayed as the DRD options. Select On to use the distinctive ring feature.
4. Make the Receive Mode setting.
❏If you do not need to connect a phone device to the printer:
Select No.
Receive Mode is set to Auto.
❏If you need to connect a phone device to the printer:
Select Yes, and then select whether or not to receive faxes automatically.
5. Check the settings you made on the screen displayed, and then proceed to the next screen.
To correct or change settings, tap .
6. Check the fax connection by selecting Start Checking, and then select Print to print a report that shows the
connection status.
Note:
❏If there are any errors reported, follow the instructions on the report to solve them.
❏If the Select Line Type screen is displayed, select the line type.
- When you are connecting the printer to a PBX phone system or terminal adapter, select PBX.
- When you are connecting the printer to a standard phone line, select PSTN, and then select Do Not Detect on the
Conrmation screen displayed. However, setting this to Do Not Detect may cause the printer to skip the rst digit of
a fax number when dialing and send the fax to the wrong number.
Related Information
&“Connecting the Printer to a Phone Line” on page 481
&“Making Settings to Use an Answering Machine” on page 487
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe
…
485
&“Receive Mode:” on page 385
&“Making Settings to Receive Faxes Operating Only a Connected Phone” on page 487
&“Basic Settings” on page 384
Making Settings for the Printer's Fax Features According to Use
You can congure the printer's fax features individually using the printer's control panel according to use. e
settings made using Fax Setting Wizard can also be changed. For more details, see the descriptions of the Fax
Settings menu.
Note:
❏Using Web Cong, you can congure the printer's fax features.
❏When you use Web Cong to display the Fax Settings menu, there may be slight dierences in the user interface and in
location compared to the printer's control panel.
Related Information
&“Fax Settings (Fax-Capable Printers Only)” on page 383
&“Receiving Incoming Faxes” on page 140
&“Making Settings for a PBX Phone System” on page 486
&“Making Settings When You Connect a Phone Device” on page 487
&“Making Settings to Save and Forward Received Faxes” on page 488
&“Making Settings to Save and Forward Received Faxes with Specic Conditions” on page 491
&“Making Settings for Blocking Junk Faxes” on page 495
&“Making Settings to Send and Receive Faxes on a Computer” on page 495
Making Settings for a PBX Phone System
Make the following settings when using the printer in oces that use extensions and require external access codes,
such as 0 and 9, to get an outside line.
1. Select Settings on the home screen.
2. Select General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings.
3. Select Line Type, and then select PBX.
4. When sending a fax to an outside fax number using # (hash) instead of the actual external access code, select
the Access Code box, and then select Use.
e # entered instead of the actual access code, is replaced with the stored access code when dialing. Using #
helps avoid connection problems when connecting to an outside line.
Note:
You cannot send faxes to recipients in Contacts in which an external access code such as 0 or 9 is set.
If you have registered recipients in Contacts using an external access code such as 0 or 9, set the Access Code to Do Not
Use. Otherwise, you must change the code to # in Contacts.
5. Tap the Access Code input box, enter the external access code used for your phone system, and then tap OK.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe
…
486
6. Select OK to apply the settings.
e access code is stored in the printer.
Making Settings When You Connect a Phone Device
Making Settings to Use an Answering Machine
You need settings to use an answering machine.
1. Select Settings on the home screen on the printer's control panel..
2. Select General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings.
3. Set Receive Mode to Auto.
4. Set the Rings to Answer setting of the printer to a higher number than the number of rings for the answering
machine.
If Rings to Answer is set lower than the number of rings for the answering machine, the answering machine
cannot receive voice calls to record voice messages. See the manuals that came with the answering machine for
its settings.
e printer's Rings to Answer setting may not be displayed, depending on the region.
Related Information
&“Basic Settings” on page 384
Making Settings to Receive Faxes Operating Only a Connected Phone
You can start receiving incoming faxes by only picking up the handset and operating the phone, without operating
the printer at all.
e Remote Receive feature is available for telephones that support tone dialing.
1. Select Settings on the home screen on the printer's control panel.
2. Select General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Remote Receive.
3. Tap Remote Receive to set this to On.
4. Select Start Code, enter a two digit code (you can enter 0 to 9, *, and #), and then tap OK.
5. Select OK to apply the settings.
Related Information
&“Basic Settings” on page 384
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe
…
487
Making Settings to Save and Forward Received Faxes
e printer is set to print received faxes by default. Besides printing, you can set the printer to save and/or forward
received faxes.
Note:
As well as using the printer's control panel, you can also make settings using Web Cong.
Related Information
&“Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes” on page 488
&“Making Forwarding Settings to Receive Faxes” on page 489
&“Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes with Specic Conditions” on page 491
&“Making Forwarding Settings to Receive Faxes with Specied Conditions” on page 493
Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes
You can make saving settings to receive faxes to the inbox and an external memory device regardless of the sender
or time. Saving a fax to the inbox allows you to conrm the contents of the received fax by viewing the fax on the
printer's LCD screen before the printer prints the fax.
To make settings to save received faxes to a computer using the PC-FAX feature, see “ Feature: PC-FAX Send/
Receive (Windows/Mac OS)” on page 129.
Note:
❏As well as using the printer's control panel, you can use Web Cong to make saving settings to receive faxes. Select the
Fax tab > Save/Forward Settings > Unconditional Save/Forward, and then make the saving destination settings in
Fax Output.
❏You can also print and/or forward the received faxes at the same time. Make the settings on the Fax Output screen
mentioned above.
1. Select Settings on the printer's control panel, and then select General Settings > Fax Settings.
2. Select Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings > Unconditional Save/Forward.
When a message is displayed, check the content, and then tap OK.
3. Make settings for the saving destinations, the inbox and/or an external memory device.
❏To save received faxes to the Inbox:
A
Select Save to Inbox to set this to On.
B
If a message is displayed, check the content, and then select OK.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe
…
488
❏To save received faxes to an external memory device:
A
Insert a memory device into the printer's external interface USB port.
B
Select Save to Memory Device.
C
Select Yes. To print the documents automatically while saving them in the memory device, select Yes
and Print instead.
D
Check the message that is displayed, and then tap Create.
A folder for saving received documents is created in the memory device.
E
Check the message, tap Close or wait until the message is cleared, and then tap Close.
F
When the next message is displayed, check it, and then tap OK.
c
Important:
Received documents are saved in the printer's memory temporarily before the documents are saved in the
memory device connected to the printer. Because a memory full error disables sending and receiving faxes, keep
the memory device connected to the printer.
Note:
You can set the printer to send emails to people you want to notify about the results of saving faxes, when saving is
complete. As necessary, select Email Notications, set the processes, and then set the destination to which you want to
send notications.
4. Select Close to complete the Unconditional Save/Forward Settings.
is completes making unconditional saving settings to receive faxes. You can set Common Settings as necessary.
For details, see the explanation for Common Settings in the Save/Forward Settings menu.
Related Information
&“Save/Forward Settings” on page 388
&“Viewing Received Faxes Saved in the Printer on the LCD Screen” on page 144
&“Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes with Specic Conditions” on page 491
Making Forwarding Settings to Receive Faxes
You can make forwarding settings to up to ve destinations, email addresses, shared folders, and/or another fax
machine regardless of the sender or time. If you make settings to forward received faxes, rst add the forwarding
destinations to the contacts list. To forward to an email address, you also need to congure the email server
settings beforehand.
“Conguring a Mail Server” on page 447
“Setting a Shared Network Folder” on page 451
“Making Contacts Available” on page 467
Color documents cannot be forwarded to another fax machine. ey are processed as documents that failed to be
forwarded.
Note:
❏As well as using the printer's control panel, you can use Web Cong to make forwarding settings to receive faxes. Select
the Fax tab > Save/Forward Settings > Unconditional Save/Forward, and then make the forwarding destination
settings in Fax Output.
❏You can also print and/or save received faxes at the same time. Make the settings on the Fax Output screen mentioned
above.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe
…
489
1. Select Settings on the printer's control panel, then select General Settings > Fax Settings.
2. Select Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings > Unconditional Save/Forward.
When a message is displayed, check the content, and then tap OK.
3. Make settings for up to ve forwarding destinations.
A
Select Forward.
B
Select Yes. To print the documents automatically while forwarding them, select Yes and Pr in t instead.
C
Destination > Add Entry, and then select forwarding destinations from the contacts list. You can specify up
to ve forwarding destinations.
D
Tap Close to nish selecting forwarding destinations, and then tap Close.
E
In Options When Forwarding Failed, select whether to print received documents or save them in the
printer's Inbox when forwarding fails.
F
Tap OK.
c
Important:
When the Inbox is full, receiving faxes is disabled. You should delete the documents from the inbox once they
have been checked. e number of documents that have failed to be forwarded is displayed on the on the
home screen, in addition to other unprocessed jobs.
Note:
You can set the printer to send emails to people you want to notify about the results of forwarding faxes when the
forwarding process is complete. As necessary, select Email Notications, set the processes, and then select the
destination to which you want to send notications from the contacts list.
4. Select Close to complete the Unconditional Save/Forward Settings.
Note:
❏is completes making unconditional forwarding settings to receive faxes. You can set Common Settings as necessary.
For details, see the explanation for Common Settings in the Save/Forward Settings menu.
❏If you have selected a shared folder on a network or an email address as the forwarding destination, we recommend that
you test if you can send a scanned image to the destination in the scan mode. Select Scan > Email, or Scan > Network
Folder/FTP from the home screen, select the destination, and then start scanning.
Related Information
&“Save/Forward Settings” on page 388
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe
…
490
Making Settings to Save and Forward Received Faxes with Specic Conditions
You can save and/or forward received faxes under set conditions.
Note:
❏e printer is set to print received faxes by default.
❏You can also receive and save faxes without any conditions.
“Making Settings to Save and Forward Received Faxes” on page 488
Related Information
&“Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes with Specic Conditions” on page 491
&“Making Forwarding Settings to Receive Faxes with Specied Conditions” on page 493
Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes with Specic Conditions
You can make settings to save received faxes to the inbox and an external memory device from a specied sender
or at a specied time. Saving a fax in a condential box or the inbox allows you to conrm the contents of the
received fax by viewing the fax on the printer's LCD screen before the printer prints the fax.
Before you use the feature to save received faxes at a specied time, make sure the printer's Date/Time and Time
Dierence settings are correct. Access the menu from Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Date/Time
Settings.
Note:
❏As well as using the printer's control panel, you can use Web Cong to make saving settings to receive faxes. Select the
Fax tab > Save/Forward Settings > Conditional Save/Forward, select the number of the condential box, and then
select Edit and make the saving destination settings.
❏You can also print and/or forward received faxes at the same time. Make the settings on the Edit screen mentioned above.
1. Select Settings on the printer's control panel, and then select General Settings > Fax Settings.
2. Select Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings > Conditional Save/Forward, and then tap on an
unregistered box under Conditional Save/Forward.
3. Select the Name box and enter the name you want to register.
4. Select the Condition(s) box to make a condition setting.
❏Sender Fax Number match: If the incoming fax number matches the conditions you selected in this item,
the printer saves and forwards the received faxes.
Select the Sender Fax Number match condition and enter the fax number (max. 20 digits) by selecting the
Fax Number box.
❏Subaddress(SUB) perfect match: If the subaddress (SUB) is a perfect match, the printer saves and forwards
the received faxes.
Enable the Subaddress(SUB) perfect match setting and enter the password by selecting the
Subaddress(SUB) box.
❏Password(SID) perfect match: If the password (SID) is perfectly matched, the printer saves and forwards
the received faxes.
Enable the Password(SID) perfect match setting and input the password by selecting the Password(SID)
box.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe
…
491
❏Receiving Time: e printer saves and forwards received faxes during the specied time period.
Enable the Receiving Time setting and then set the time in Start Time and End Time.
5. Select Save/Forward Destination and then make settings for the target destination, box, and/or an external
memory device.
❏To save the received faxes to the Inbox or a condential box:
A
Select Save to Fax Box.
B
Tap Save to Fax Box to set this to On.
C
Select the box in which to save the document.
❏To save received faxes to an external memory device:
A
Insert a memory device into the printer's external interface USB port.
B
Select Save to Memory Device.
C
Tap Save to Memory Device to set this to On.
D
Check the message that is displayed, and then tap Create.
A folder for saving received documents is created in the memory device.
c
Important:
Received documents are saved in the printer's memory temporarily before the documents are saved in the
memory device connected to the printer. Because a memory full error disables sending and receiving faxes, keep
the memory device connected to the printer.
Note:
To print received faxes at the same time, tap Print to set this to On.
6. Select Close to complete the Save/Forward Destination Settings.
Note:
You can set the printer to send emails to people you want to notify about the results of saving faxes, when saving is
complete. As necessary, select Email Notications, set the processes, and then select the destination to which you want
to send notications from the contacts list.
7. Select OK until you return to the Save/Forward Settings screen to complete Conditional Save/Forward.
8. Select the registered box for which you made a condition setting, and then select Enable.
is completes making conditional saving settings to receive faxes. You can set Common Settings as necessary.
For details, see the explanation for Common Settings in the Save/Forward Settings menu.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe
…
492
Related Information
&“Save/Forward Settings” on page 388
&“Viewing Received Faxes Saved in the Printer on the LCD Screen” on page 144
Making Forwarding Settings to Receive Faxes with Specied Conditions
You can make forwarding settings to a destination, an email address, shared folders or another fax machine from a
specied sender or at a specied time. If you make settings to forward received faxes, rst add the forwarding
destination to the contacts list. To forward to an email address, you also need to congure the email server settings
beforehand.
“Conguring a Mail Server” on page 447
“Setting a Shared Network Folder” on page 451
“Making Contacts Available” on page 467
Before you use the feature to forward received faxes at a specied time, make sure the printer's Date/Time and
Time Dierence settings are correct. Access the menu from Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Date/
Time Settings.
Color documents cannot be forwarded to another fax machine. ey are processed as documents that failed to be
forwarded.
Note:
❏As well as using the printer's control panel, you can use Web Cong to make forwarding settings to receive faxes. Select
the Fax tab > Save/Forward Settings > Conditional Save/Forward, select the number of the condential box, and then
select Edit and make the forwarding destination settings.
❏You can also print and/or save received faxes at the same time. Make the settings on the Edit screen mentioned above.
1. Select Settings on the printer's control panel, and then select General Settings > Fax Settings.
2. Select Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings > Conditional Save/Forward, and then tap on an
unregistered box under Conditional Save/Forward.
3. Select the Name box and enter the name you want to register.
4. Select the Condition(s) box to make a condition setting.
❏Sender Fax Number match: If the incoming fax number matches the conditions you selected in this item,
the printer saves and forwards the received faxes.
Select the Sender Fax Number match condition and enter the fax number (max. 20 digits) by selecting the
Fax Number box.
❏Subaddress(SUB) perfect match: If the subaddress (SUB) is a perfect match, the printer saves and forwards
the received faxes.
Enable the Subaddress(SUB) perfect match setting and enter the password by selecting the
Subaddress(SUB) box.
❏Password(SID) perfect match: If the password (SID) is perfectly matched, the printer saves and forwards
the received faxes.
Enable the Password(SID) perfect match setting and input the password by selecting the Password(SID)
box.
❏Receiving Time: e printer saves and forwards received faxes during the specied time period.
Enable the Receiving Time setting and then set the time in Start Time and End Time.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe
…
493
5. Select Save/Forward Destination, and then make settings for a forwarding destination.
A
Select Forward.
B
Select Yes. To print the documents automatically while forwarding them, select Yes and Pr in t instead.
C
Select Destination > Add Entry, and then select forwarding destinations from the contacts list. You can
specify a forwarding destination.
D
When you have nished selecting forwarding destinations, tap Close.
E
Check that the forwarding destination you selected is correct, and then select Close.
F
In Options When Forwarding Failed, select whether to print received documents or save them in the
printer's Inbox when forwarding fails.
c
Important:
When the Inbox or a condential box is full, receiving faxes is disabled. You should delete the documents from
the inbox once they have been checked. e number of documents that have failed to be forwarded is displayed
on the on the home screen, in addition to other unprocessed jobs.
6. Select Close to complete the Save/Forward Destination Settings.
Note:
You can set the printer to send emails to people you want to notify about the results of forwarding faxes when the
forwarding process is complete. As necessary, select Email Notications, set the processes, and then select the
destination to which you want to send notications from the contacts list.
7. Select OK until you return to the Save/Forward Settings screen to complete Conditional Save/Forward.
8. Select the registered box for which you made a condition setting, and then select Enable.
is is completes making conditional saving settings to receive faxes. You can set Common Settings as necessary.
For details, see the explanation for Common Settings in the Save/Forward Settings menu.
Note:
❏is completes making conditional forwarding settings to receive faxes. You can set Common Settings as necessary. For
details, see the explanation for Common Settings in the Save/Forward Settings menu.
❏If you have selected a shared folder on a network or an email address as the forwarding destination, we recommend that
you test if you can send a scanned image to the destination in the scan mode. Select Scan > Email, or Scan > Network
Folder/FTP from the home screen, select the destination, and then start scanning.
Related Information
&“Save/Forward Settings” on page 388
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe
…
494
Making Settings for Blocking Junk Faxes
You can block junk faxes.
1. Select Settings on the home screen on the printer's control panel.
2. Select General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Rejection Fax.
3. Set the condition to block junk faxes.
Select Rejection Fax, and then enable the following options.
❏Rejection Number List: Rejects faxes that are in the Rejection Number List.
❏Fax Header Blank: Rejects faxes that have blank header information.
❏Unregistered Contacts: Rejects faxes that have not been added to the contact list.
4. Tap to return to the Rejection Fax screen.
5. If you are using the Rejection Number List, select Edit Blocked Number list, and then edit the list.
Making Settings to Send and Receive Faxes on a Computer
To send and receive faxes on a client computer, FAX Utility must be installed on the computer connected by
network or USB cable.
Enabling Sending Faxes from a Computer
Set up the following using Web Cong.
1. Access Web Cong, click the Fax tab, and then click Send Settings > Basic.
2. Select Use for the PC to FAX Function.
e default setting value of the PC to FAX Function is Use. To disable sending faxes from any
computer, select Do Not Use.
3. Click OK.
Making Save to Computer Setting to Receive Faxes
You can receive faxes on a computer by using the FAX Utility. Install FAX Utility on the client
computer and make the setting. For details, see Basic Operations in the FAX Utility help (displayed
on the main window).
e setting item below on the printer's control panel is set to Yes, and the faxes received can be saved
on the computer.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings >
Unconditional Save/Forward > Save to Computer
Making Save to Computer Setting to Also Print on the Printer to Receive Faxes
You can make the setting to print received faxes on the printer as well as save them on a computer.
1. Select Settings on the home screen on the printer's control panel.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe
…
495
2. Select General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings.
3. Select Save/Forward Settings > Unconditional Save/Forward > Save to Computer > Yes and
Print.
Making Save to Computer Setting not to Receive Faxes
To set the printer not to save received faxes on the computer, change the settings on the printer.
Note:
You can also change the settings using the FAX Utility. However, if there are any faxes that have been unsaved
to the computer, the feature does not work.
1. Select Settings on the home screen on the printer's control panel.
2. Select General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings.
3. Select Save/Forward Settings > Unconditional Save/Forward > Save to Computer > No.
Making Basic Operation Settings for the Printer
Setting the Control Panel
Setup for the printer's control panel. You can set up as follows.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Device Management tab > Control Panel.
2. Set up the following items as necessary.
❏Language
Select the displayed language on the control panel.
❏Panel Lock
If you select ON, you cannot select items that require the administrator's authority. To select them, log in to
the printer as the administrator. If the administrator password is not set, the panel lock is disabled.
❏Operation Timeout
If you select ON, when you log in as the access control user or administrator, you are automatically logged
out and go to the initial screen if there is no activity for a certain period of time.
You can set between 10 seconds and 240 minutes by the second.
Note:
You can also set up from the printer’s control panel.
❏Language : Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Language
❏Panel Lock : Settings > General Settings > System Administration > Security Settings > Admin Settings > Lock
Setting
❏Operation Time Out : Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Operation Time Out (You can specify On or
O.)
3. Click OK.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Basic Operation Settings for the Printer
496
Power Saving Settings During Inactivity
You can set up the time to shi to the power saving mode or to turn the power o when the printer’s control panel
is not operated for a certain period of time. Set the time depending on your usage environment.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Device Management tab > Power Saving.
2. Enter the time for the Sleep Timer to switch to power saving mode when inactivity occurs.
Note:
You can also set up from the printer’s control panel.
Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Sleep Timer
3. Select the turning o time for the Power O Timer or Power O If Inactive depending on the location of
purchase. If you use the fax function, set to None or O depending on the location of purchase.
Note:
You can also set up from the printer’s control panel.
Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Power O Timer or Power O Settings
4. Click OK.
Setting the Sound
Make the sound settings when operating the control panel, printing, faxing and so on.
Note:
You can also set up from the printer’s control panel.
Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Sounds
1. Access Web Cong and select the Device Management tab > Sound.
2. Set up the following items as necessary.
❏Normal Mode
Set the sound when the printer is set to Normal Mode.
❏Quiet Mode
Set the sound when the printer is set to Quiet Mode.
is is enabled when the one of the following items is enabled.
❏Printer's control panel:
Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Quiet Mode
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Print Settings > Quiet Mode
❏Web Cong :
Fax tab > Print Settings > Quiet Mode
3. Click OK.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Basic Operation Settings for the Printer
497
Synchronizing the Date and Time with Time Server
When synchronizing with the time server (NTP server), you can synchronize the time of the printer and the
computer on the network. e time server may be operated within the organization or published on the Internet.
When using the CA certicate or Kerberos authentication, time-related trouble can be prevented by synchronizing
with the time server.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Device Management tab > Date and Time > Time Server.
2. Select Use for Use Time Server.
3. Enter the time server address for Time Server Address.
You can use IPv4, IPv6 or FQDN format. Enter 252 characters or less. If you do not specify this, leave it blank.
4. Enter Update Interval (min).
You can set up to 10,800 minutes by the minute.
5. Click OK.
Note:
You can conrm the connection status with the time server on Time Server Status.
Setting the Default Value for Scanning,Copying and Sending Faxes. (User
Default Settings)
You can set the default value for the functions.
You can set the following functions.
❏Scan to Network Folder/FTP
❏Scan to Email
❏Scan to Memory Device
❏Scan to Cloud
❏Copy
❏Fax
1. Access Web Cong and select the functions for which you want to set the default value for the Scan/Copy tab
> User Default Settings.
Select the Fax tab > User Default Settings to set the default value for fax.
2. Set each item.
3. Click OK.
If the combination of the value is invalid, it is automatically modied, and then a valid value is set.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Making Basic Operation Settings for the Printer
498
Problems when Making Settings
Hints to Solving Problems
❏Checking the error message
When trouble has occurred, rst check whether there are any messages on the printer's control panel or driver
screen. If you have the notication email set when the events occur, you can promptly learn the status.
❏Network connection report
Diagnose the network and the printer status, and then print the result.
You can nd the diagnosed error from the printer side.
❏Checking the communication status
Check the communication status of server computer or client computer by using the command such as ping
and ipcong.
❏Connection test
For checking the connection between the printer to the mail server, perform the connection test from the
printer. Also, check the connection from the client computer to the server to check the communication status.
❏Initializing the settings
If the settings and communication status show no problem, the problems may be solved by disabling or
initializing the network settings of the printer, and then setting up again.
Cannot Access Web Cong
The IP address is not assigned to the printer.
A valid IP address may not be assigned to the printer. Congure the IP address using the printer’s
control panel. You can conrm the current setting information with a network status sheet or from
the printer’s control panel.
Web browser does not support the Encryption Strength for SSL/TLS.
SSL/TLS has the Encryption Strength. You can open Web Cong by using a web browser that
supports bulk encryptions as indicated below. Check you are using the a supported browser.
❏80bit: AES256/AES128/3DES
❏112bit: AES256/AES128/3DES
❏128bit: AES256/AES128
❏192bit: AES256
❏256bit: AES256
CA-signed Certicate is expired.
If there is a problem with the expiration date of the certicate, "e certicate has expired" is
displayed when connecting to Web Cong with SSL/TLS communication (https). If the message
appears before its expiration date, make sure that the printer's date is congured correctly.
Administrator Information
>
Settings to Use the Printer
>
Problems when Making Settings
499
The common name of the certicate and the printer do not match.
If the common name of the certicate and the printer do not match, the message "e name of the
security certicate does not match···" is displayed when accessing Web Cong using SSL/TLS
communication (https). is happens because the following IP addresses do not match.
❏e printer's IP address entered to common name for creating a Self-signed Certicate or CSR
❏IP address entered to web browser when running Web Cong
For Self-signed Certicate, update the certicate.
For CA-signed Certicate, take the certicate again for the printer.
The proxy server setting of local address is not set to web browser.
When the printer is set to use a proxy server, congure the web browser not to connect to the local
address via the proxy server.
❏Windows:
Select Control Panel > Network and Internet > Internet Options > Connections > LAN settings
> Proxy server, and then congure not to use the proxy server for LAN (local addresses).
❏Mac OS:
Select System Preferences > Network > Advanced > Proxies, and then register the local address
for Bypass proxy settings for these Hosts & Domains.
Example:
192.168.1.*: Local address 192.168.1.XXX, subnet mask 255.255.255.0
192.168.*.*: Local address 192.168.XXX.XXX, subnet mask 255.255.0.0
Managing the Printer
Introduction of Product Security Features
is section introduces the security function of the Epson Devices.
Feature name Feature type What to set What to prevent
Setup for the
administrator
password
Locks the system settings,
such as connection setup for
network or USB, detail setup
for fax reception/transmission
or transferring, and the user
default settings.
An administrator sets a
password to the device.
You can set or change from
both Web Cong and the
printer's control panel.
Prevent from illegally reading
and changing the
information stored in the
device such as ID, password,
network settings, and
contacts. Also, reduce a wide
range of security risks such as
leakage of information for the
network environment or
security policy.
Administrator Information
>
Managing the Printer
>
Introduction of Product Security Features
500
Feature name Feature type What to set What to prevent
Setup for access
control
Limits the functions that can
be used on devices, such as
print, scan, copy, and fax for
each user. If you log on with a
user account registered in
advance, you are allowed to
use certain functions.
In addition, after logging on
from the control panel, you
will be logged o
automatically if there is no
activity for a certain period of
time.
Register any user account,
and then select the function
you want to allow, such as
copy and scan.
You can register up to 10 user
accounts.
The risk of leakage and
unauthorized viewing of data
can be reduced by
minimizing the numbers of
functions in accordance with
the business content and the
role of the user.
Setup for external
interface
Controls the interface, such as
USB port that connects to the
device.
Enable or disable the USB
port for connecting external
devices such as USB memory
and USB connection with the
computer.
❏USB port control: Reduces
the possibility of data
being taken through
unauthorized scanning of
condential documents.
❏USB connection of
computer: Prevents
unauthorized use of the
device by prohibiting
printing or scanning
without going through
the network.
Setup for processing
saved data
Automatically erases job data
temporarily stored in the
built-in hard disc of the
device. You can also safely
erase all data stored in the
hard disc.
Set whether to automatically
delete when the job is
nished. You can also erase all
the data if you want to
discard the device.
By overwriting with a specic
pattern, you can prevent
someone from restoring and
using the data even if the
hard disc is removed.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
&“Conguring the Administrator Password” on page 501
&“Restricting Available Features” on page 510
&“Disabling the External Interface” on page 512
&“Making Settings for Processing Saved Data” on page 513
Administrator Settings
Conguring the Administrator Password
When you set the administrator password, you can prevent the users from changing system management settings.
You can set and change the administrator password using either Web Cong, the printer's control panel, or Epson
Device Admin. When using Epson Device Admin, see the Epson Device Admin guide or help.
Administrator Information
>
Managing the Printer
>
Administrator Settings
501
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
&“Soware for Managing Devices on the Network (Epson Device Admin)” on page 373
Conguring the Administrator Password from the Control Panel
You can set the administrator password from the printer's control panel.
1. Select Settings on the printer's control panel.
2. Select General Settings > System Administration > Security Settings > Admin Settings.
3. Select Admin Password > Register.
4. Enter the new password.
5. Enter the password again.
Note:
You can change or delete the administrator password when you select Change or Reset on the Admin Password screen and
enter the administrator password.
Conguring the Administrator Password from a Computer
You can set the administrator password using Web Cong.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Product Security tab > Change Administrator Password.
2. Enter a password to New Password and Conrm New Password. Enter the user name, if necessary.
If you want to change the password to new one, enter a current password.
3. Select OK.
Note:
❏To set or change the locked menu items, click Administrator Login, and then enter the administrator password.
❏To delete the administrator password, click Product Security tab > Delete Administrator Password, and then enter
the administrator password.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Controlling the Panel Operation
If you set the administrator password and enable the Lock Setting, you can lock the items related to the printer’s
system settings so that users cannot change them.
Enabling the Lock Setting
Enable the Lock Setting for the printer where the password is set.
Administrator Information
>
Managing the Printer
>
Administrator Settings
502
Specify an administrator's password rst.
Enabling the Lock Setting from the Control Panel
1. Select Settings on the printer's control panel.
2. Select General Settings > System Administration > Security Settings > Admin Settings.
3. Select On on Lock Setting.
Check that is displayed on the home screen.
Enabling the Lock Setting from a Computer
1. Access Web Cong and click the Administrator Login.
2. Enter the user name and password, and then click OK.
3. Select the Device Management tab > Control Panel.
4. On the Panel Lock, select ON.
5. Click OK.
6. Check that is displayed on the home screen on the printer's control panel.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Lock Setting Items for General Settings Menu
is is a list of the Lock Setting items in Settings > General Settings on the control panel.
Some functions can be set enabled or disabled individually.
General Settings menu Panel Lock
Basic Settings -
Administrator Information
>
Managing the Printer
>
Administrator Settings
503
General Settings menu Panel Lock
LCD Brightness -
Sounds -
Sleep Timer ✓
Wake from Sleep -
Power O Timer or Power O Settings ✓
Date/Time Settings ✓
Country/Region ✓
Language ✓
*1
Start-up Screen ✓
Edit Home ✓
Wall Paper ✓
Operation Time Out ✓
Keyboard -
Default Screen(Job/Status) ✓
General Settings menu Panel Lock
Printer Settings -
Paper Source Settings -
Printing Language ✓
Universal Print Settings ✓
PDL Print Conguration ✓
Auto Error Solver ✓
Memory Device Interface ✓
Thick Paper ✓
*1
Quiet Mode ✓
*1
Ink Drying Time -
Bidirectional -
Output Tray Auto Extension -
PC Connection via USB ✓
USB I/F Timeout Setting ✓
Administrator Information
>
Managing the Printer
>
Administrator Settings
504
General Settings menu Panel Lock
Network Settings ✓
Wi-Fi Setup ✓
Wired LAN Setup ✓
Network Status ✓
Wired LAN/Wi-Fi Status ✓
*2
Wi-Fi Direct Status ✓
*2
Email Server Status ✓
*2
Print Status Sheet ✓
*2
Connection Check ✓
*3
Advanced ✓
Device Name ✓
TCP/IP ✓
Proxy Server ✓
Email Server ✓
IPv6 Address ✓
MS Network Sharing ✓
Link Speed & Duplex ✓
Redirect HTTP to HTTPS ✓
Disable IPsec/IP Filtering ✓
Disable IEEE802.1X ✓
iBeacon Transmission ✓
General Settings menu Panel Lock
Web Service Settings ✓
Epson Connect Services ✓
General Settings menu Panel Lock
Fax Settings ✓
Administrator Information
>
Managing the Printer
>
Administrator Settings
505
General Settings menu Panel Lock
Quick Operation Button ✓
Basic Settings ✓
Send Settings ✓
Receive Settings ✓
Report Settings ✓
Security Settings ✓
Check Fax Connection ✓
Fax Setting Wizard ✓
General Settings menu Panel Lock
Scan Settings ✓
Conrm Recipient ✓
Document Capture Pro ✓
Email Server ✓
General Settings menu Panel Lock
System Administration ✓
Administrator Information
>
Managing the Printer
>
Administrator Settings
506
General Settings menu Panel Lock
Contacts Manager ✓
Register/Delete ✓
*1*4
Frequent ✓
*4
Print Contacts ✓
View Options ✓
*4
Search Options ✓
*4
Copy Color Sensitivity ✓
Reset Page count ✓
Clear Internal Memory Data ✓
HDD Erase Settings ✓
Security Settings ✓
Restrictions ✓
Access Control ✓
Admin Settings ✓
Admin Password ✓
Lock Setting ✓
Password Encryption ✓
Audit Log ✓
Program Verication on Start Up ✓
Customer Research ✓
Restore Default Settings ✓
Firmware Update ✓
✓ = To be locked.
- = Not to be locked.
*1 : You can enable or disable the lock from General Settings > System Administration > Security Settings > Restrictions.
*2 : Even though items on the upper level can be locked by administrator lock, you can still access them from the same name
menu of Settings > Printer Status/Print.
*3 : Even though items on the upper level can be locked by administrator lock, you can still access them from Home >
> Description > When you cannot connect to the network.
*4 : Even though items on the upper level can be locked by administrator lock, you can still access them from the same name
menu of Settings > Contacts Manager.
Administrator Information
>
Managing the Printer
>
Administrator Settings
507
Related Information
&“Other Lock Setting Items” on page 508
&“Items at Can Be Set Individually” on page 508
Other Lock Setting Items
Besides the General Settings menu, Lock Setting would be enabled to the items below.
❏Presets
❏Add New
❏Delete
❏Rename
❏Add or remove to Home screen
❏Changing user settings
❏Settings > User Settings.
Related Information
&“Lock Setting Items for General Settings Menu” on page 503
&“Items at Can Be Set Individually” on page 508
Operating Display and Function Setting Individually
For the some target items of the Lock Setting, you can individually set whether they are enabled or disabled.
You can set each user’s availability as necessary, such as registering or changing the contacts, displaying job history,
etc.
1. Select Settings on the printer's control panel.
2. Select General Settings > System Administration > Security Settings > Restrictions.
3. Select the item for the function that you want to change the setting of, and then set to On or O.
Items That Can Be Set Individually
e administrator can permit the items below to display and change settings individually.
❏Job Log Access : Job/Status > Log
Control the display of the status monitor's job history. Select On to permit the job history to display.
❏Access to Register/Delete Contacts : Settings > Contacts Manager > Register/Delete
Control the registering and changing of contacts. Select On to register or change the contacts.
❏Fax Recent Access : Fax > Recipient > Recent
Control the display of destination when sending and receiving a fax. Select On to display the destination.
❏Fax Transmission Log Access : Fax > Menu > Transmission Log
Control the display of the communication history of a fax. Select On to display the communication history.
Administrator Information
>
Managing the Printer
>
Administrator Settings
508
❏Access to Fax Report : Fax > Menu > Fax Report
Control the printing of the fax report. Select On to permit printing.
❏Access to Print Save History of Scan to Network Folder/FTP : Scan > Network Folder/FTP > Menu > Print
Save History
Control the printing of save history for scan to network folder function. Select On to permit the printing.
❏Access to Recent of Scan to Email : Scan > Email > Recipient > History
Control the display of the history for the scan to mail function. Select On to display the history.
❏Access to Show Sent History of Scan to Email : Scan > Email > Menu > Show Sent History
Control the display of the history of email sending for the scan to mail function. Select On to display the history
of email sending.
❏Access to Print Sent History of Scan to Email : Scan > Email > Menu > Print Sent History
Control the printing of the history of email sending for the scan to mail function. Select On to permit the
printing.
❏Access to Language : Settings > Language
Control the changing of the language displayed on the control panel. Select On to change the languages.
❏Access to ick Paper : Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > ick Paper
Control the changing of the settings of the ick Paper function. Select On to change the settings.
❏Access to Quiet Mode : Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Quiet Mode
Control the changing of settings of the Quiet Mode function. Select On to change the settings.
❏Protection of Personal Data :
Control the display of the destination information on speed dial registration. Select On to display the
destination as (***).
Related Information
&“Lock Setting Items for General Settings Menu” on page 503
&“Other Lock Setting Items” on page 508
Logging on to the Printer as an Administrator
If the administrator password is set to the printer, you need to log on as an administrator to operate the locked
menu items.
Logging on the Printer Using the Control Panel
1. Tap .
2. Tap Administrator.
3. Enter the administrator password, and then tap OK.
is displayed when being authenticated, then you can operate the locked menu items.
Tap to log o.
Administrator Information
>
Managing the Printer
>
Administrator Settings
509
Note:
When you select On for Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Operation Time Out, you log o automatically
aer a specic length of time if there is no activity on the control panel.
Logging on to the Printer from a Computer
When you log in to Web Cong as an administrator, you can operate items that are set in the Lock Setting.
1. Enter the printer's IP address into a browser to run Web Cong.
2. Click Administrator Login.
3. Enter the user name and administrator password in User Name and Current password.
4. Click OK.
e locked items and Administrator Logout are displayed when being authenticated.
Click Administrator Logout to log o.
Note:
When you select ON for the Device Management tab > Control Panel > Operation Timeout, you log o automatically
aer a specic length of time if there is no activity on the control panel.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Restricting Available Features
You can register user accounts on the printer, link them with functions, and control functions that users can use.
When enabling access control, the user can use functions such as copy, fax, etc. by entering the password on the
printer’s control panel and logging in to the printer.
e unavailable functions will be grayed out and cannot be selected.
From the computer, when you register the authentication information to the printer driver or scanner driver, you
will be able to print or scan. For details of the driver settings, see the driver's help or manual.
Creating the User Account
Create the user account for access control.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Product Security tab > Access Control Settings > User Settings.
2. Click Add for the number you want to register.
c
Important:
When using the printer with the authentication system of Epson or other companies, register the user name of
the restriction setting in number 2 to number 10.
Application soware such as the authentication system uses number one, so that the user name is not displayed
on the printer's control panel.
Administrator Information
>
Managing the Printer
>
Restricting Available Features
510
3. Set each item.
❏User Name :
Enter the name displayed on the user name list between 1 and 14 characters long using alphanumeric
characters.
❏Password :
Enter a password between 0 and 20 characters long in ASCII (0x20-0x7E). When initializing the password,
leave it blank.
❏Select the check box to enable or disable each function.
Select the function that you permit to use.
4. Click Apply.
Return to the user setting list aer a specic length of time.
Check that the user name you registered on User Name is displayed and changed Add to Edit.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Editing the User Account
Edit the account registered to access control.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Product Security tab > Access Control Settings > User Settings.
2. Click Edit for the number you want to edit.
3. Change each item.
4. Click Apply.
Return to the user setting list aer a specic length of time.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Deleting the User Account
Delete the account registered to access control.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Product Security tab > Access Control Settings > User Settings.
2. Click Edit for the number you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.
c
Important:
When clicking Delete, the user account will be deleted without a conrmation message. Take care when
deleting the account.
Administrator Information
>
Managing the Printer
>
Restricting Available Features
511
Return to the user setting list aer a specic length of time.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Enabling Access Control
When enabling access control, only the registered user will be able to use the printer.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Product Security tab > Access Control Settings > Basic.
2. Select Enables Access Control.
If you select Allows printing and scanning without authentication information, you can print or scan from
the drivers that are not set with the authentication information. Set it when you want to control the operation
only from the printer's control panel and to permit printing and scanning from the computers.
3. Click OK.
e completion message is displayed aer a certain period of time.
Conrm that the icons such as copy and scan are grayed out on the printer's control panel.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Disabling the External Interface
You can disable the interface that is used to connect the device to the printer. Make the restriction settings to
restrict printing and scanning other than via network.
Note:
You can also make the restriction settings on the printer's control panel.
❏Memory Device : Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Memory Device Interface > Memory Device
❏PC Connection via USB : Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > PC Connection via USB
1. Access Web Cong and select the Product Security tab > External Interface.
2. Select Disable on the functions you want to set.
Select Enable when you want to cancel controlling.
❏Memory Device
Prohibit saving the data to external memory via USB port for external device connection.
❏PC Connection via USB
You can restrict the usage of the USB connection from the computer. If you want to restrict it, select
Disable.
3. Click OK.
Administrator Information
>
Managing the Printer
>
Disabling the External Interface
512
4. Check that the disabled port cannot be used.
❏Memory Device
Conrm that there is no response when connecting a storage device such as USB memory to the external
interface USB port.
❏PC Connection via USB
If the driver was installed on the computer
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable, and then conrm that the printer does not print
and scan.
If the driver was not installed on the computer
Windows:
Open the device manager and keep it, connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable, and then
conrm that the device manager's display contents stays unchanged.
Mac OS:
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable, and then conrm that the printer is not listed if you
want to add the printer from Printers & Scanners.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Making Settings for Processing Saved Data
You can make settings for processing data stored in the internal hard disc.
Jobs for printing, copying, and scanning are temporarily saved to the hard disc in order to handle the data for
authenticated printing and the large amount of copying, scanning, printing, etc. Make settings to safely erase this
data.
Sequential Deletion from Hard Disk
When enabled, the target data is erased sequentially when it becomes unnecessary, such as when printing or
scanning is completed. e target to be deleted is data written while this function is enabled.
Because access to the hard disc is necessary, the time to enter power saving mode will be delayed.
Erase All Memory
Erases all data on the hard disc. You cannot perform other operations or turn o the device during formatting.
❏High Speed: Erases all data with a dedicated erase command.
❏Overwrite: Erases all data with a dedicated erase command, and overwrites other data in all areas to erase all
data.
❏Triple Overwrite: Erases all data with a dedicated erase command, and overwrites other data in all areas three
times to erase all data.
Making Settings for Sequential Deletion
Note:
You can also make settings from the device's control panel.
Administrator Information
>
Managing the Printer
>
Making Settings for Processing Saved Data
513
1. Access Web Cong and select the Device Management > Stored Data.
2. Select ON for Sequential Deletion from Hard Disk.
3. Click OK.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Formatting the Internal Hard Disc
1. Select Settings on the home screen on the printer's control panel.
2. Select General Settings > System Administration > HDD Erase Settings.
3. Select Erase All Memory.
4. Select High Speed, Overwrite, or Triple Overwrite according to the purpose.
5. Select Yes on the conrmation screen.
Monitoring a Remote Printer
Checking Information for a Remote Printer
You can check the following information of the operating printer from Status by using Web Cong.
❏Product Status
Check the status, cloud service, product number, MAC address, etc.
❏Network Status
Check the information of the network connection status, IP address, DNS server, etc.
❏Usage Status
Check the rst day of printings, printed pages, printing count for each language, scanning count, etc.
❏Hardware Status
Check the status of each function of the printer.
❏Job History
Check the job log for print jobs, transmission jobs, and so on.
❏Panel Snapshot
Display a screen image snapshot that is displayed on the control panel of the device.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Administrator Information
>
Managing the Printer
>
Monitoring a Remote Printer
514
Receiving Email Notications When Events Occur
About Email Notications
is is the notication function that, when events such as printing stop and printer error occur, send the email to
the specied address.
You can register up to ve destinations and set the notication settings for each destination.
To use this function, you need to set up the mail server before setting up notications.
Related Information
&“Conguring a Mail Server” on page 447
Conguring Email Notication
Congure email notication by using Web Cong.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Device Management tab > Email Notication.
2. Set the subject of email notication.
Select the contents displayed on the subject from the two pull-down menus.
❏e selected contents are displayed next to Subject.
❏e same contents cannot be set on le and right.
❏When the number of characters in Location exceeds 32 bytes, characters exceeding 32 bytes are omitted.
3. Enter the email address for sending the notication email.
Use A-Z a-z 0-9 ! # $ % & ' * + - . /= ? ^ _ { | } ~ @, and enter between 1 and 255 characters.
4. Select the language for the email notications.
5. Select the check box on the event for which you want to receive a notication.
e number of Notication Settings is linked to the destination number of Email Address Settings.
Example :
If you want a notication sent to the email address set for number 1 in Email Address Settings when the
printer is out of paper, select the check box column 1 in line Paper out.
6. Click OK.
Conrm that an email notication will be sent by causing an event.
Example : Print by specifying the Paper Source where paper is not set.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
&“Conguring a Mail Server” on page 447
Administrator Information
>
Managing the Printer
>
Monitoring a Remote Printer
515
Items for Email Notication
Items Settings and Explanation
Ink supply unit(s) to be replaced Notice when the ink is expended.
Ink low Notice when the ink is nearing expended.
Maintenance box: end of service life Notice when the maintenance box is full.
Maintenance box: nearing end Notice when the maintenance box is nearing full.
Administrator password changed Notice when administrator password has been changed.
Paper out Notice when the paper-out error has occurred in the specied paper source..
Printing stopped* Notice when the printing is stopped due to paper jam or paper cassette not set.
Printer error Notice when the printer error has occurred.
Scanner error Notice when the scanner error has occurred.
Fax error Notice when the fax error has occurred.
Wi-Fi failure Notice when the error of the wireless LAN interface has occurred.
Built-in SD card failure Notice when the error of the built-in SD card has occurred.
TPM failure Notice when an error in the TPM chip has occurred.
HDD error Notice when the error of the internal hard disc.
PDL board failure Notice when the error of the PDL substrate has occurred.
Additional Network failure Notice when an error in the additional network interface card has occurred. This
item is displayed when the additional network interface card is installed.
Related Information
&“Conguring Email Notication” on page 515
Backing Up the Settings
You can export the setting value set from Web Cong to the le. You can use it for backing up the contacts, setting
values, replacing the printer, etc.
e exported le cannot be edited because it is exported as a binary le.
Export the settings
Export the setting for the printer.
1. Access Web Cong, and then select the Device Management tab > Export and Import Setting Value >
Export.
Administrator Information
>
Managing the Printer
>
Backing Up the Settings
516
2. Select the settings that you want to export.
Select the settings you want to export. If you select the parent category, subcategories are also selected.
However, subcategories that cause errors by duplicating within the same network (such as IP addresses and so
on) cannot be selected.
3. Enter a password to encrypt the exported le.
You need the password to import the le. Leave this blank if you do not want to encrypt the le.
4. Click Export.
c
Important:
If you want to export the printer’s network settings such as the device name and IPv6 address, select Enable to
select the individual settings of device and select more items. Only use the selected values for the replacement
printer.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Import the settings
Import the exported Web Cong le to the printer.
c
Important:
When importing values that include individual information such as a printer name or IP address, make sure the
same IP address does not exist on the same network.
1. Access Web Cong, and then select the Device Management tab > Export and Import Setting Value >
Import.
2. Select the exported le, and then enter the encrypted password.
3. Click Next.
4. Select the settings that you want to import, and then click Next.
5. Click OK.
e settings are applied to the printer.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Advanced Security Settings
is section explains advanced security features.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
517
Security Settings and Prevention of Danger
When a printer is connected to a network, you can access it from a remote location. In addition, many people can
share the printer, which is helpful in improving operational eciency and convenience. However, risks such as
illegal access, illegal use, and tampering with data are increased. If you use the printer in an environment where
you can access the Internet, the risks are even higher.
For printers that do not have external access protection, it is possible to read the contacts list that is stored in the
printer from the Internet.
In order to avoid this risk, Epson printers have a variety of security technologies.
Set the printer as necessary according to the environmental conditions that have been built with the customer's
environment information.
Name Feature type What to set What to prevent
Password encryption Encrypts condential
information stored in the
printer (all passwords, private
keys for the certicates, hard
disk authentication keys).
Congure the password
encryption and back up the
encryption key.
Because the encryption key is
not accessible from outside
the printer, encrypted
condential information can
be protected.
Control of protocol Controls the protocols and
services to be used for
communication between
printers and computers, and
it enables and disables
features.
A protocol or service that is
applied to features allowed or
prohibited separately.
Reducing security risks that
may occur through
unintended use by
preventing users from using
unnecessary functions.
SSL/TLS
communications
The communication content
is encrypted with SSL/TLS
communications when
accessing to the Epson server
on the Internet from the
printer, such as
communicating to the
computer via web browser,
using Epson Connect, and
updating rmware.
Obtain a CA-signed
certicate, and then import it
to the printer.
Clearing an identication of
the printer by the CA-signed
certication prevents
impersonation and
unauthorized access. In
addition, communication
contents of SSL/TLS are
protected, and it prevents the
leakage of contents for
printing data and setup
information.
IPsec/IP ltering You can set to allow severing
and cutting o of data that is
from a certain client or is a
particular type. Since IPsec
protects the data by IP packet
unit (encryption and
authentication), you can
safely communicate
unsecured protocol.
Create a basic policy and
individual policy to set the
client or type of data that can
access the printer.
Protect unauthorized access,
and tampering and
interception of
communication data to the
printer.
IEEE802.1X Only allows authenticated
users to connect to the
network. Allows only a
permitted user to use the
printer.
Authentication setting to the
RADIUS server
(authentication sever).
Protect unauthorized access
and use to the printer.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Security Settings and Prevention of Danger
518
Name Feature type What to set What to prevent
S/MIME Encrypts emails sent from the
printer or attaches digital
signatures to the emails. This
feature is available for Scan to
Email, Box to Email, and Fax
to Email.
Import a CA-signed
certicate, update a self-
signed certicate, and
congure a digital certicate
for the mail destination. Also,
make the S/MIME basic
settings.
Encryption prevents
information from leaking
when third parties attempt to
view the content of the email.
Also, detect sender
impersonation and email
tampering by attaching a
digital signature to the email.
Related Information
&“Making Settings for Password Encryption” on page 519
&“Controlling Using Protocols” on page 520
&“SSL/TLS Communication with the Printer” on page 532
&“Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering” on page 534
&“Connecting the Printer to an IEEE802.1X Network” on page 545
&“S/MIME Settings” on page 548
Security Feature Settings
When setting IPsec/IP ltering or IEEE802.1X, it is recommended that you access Web Cong using SSL/TLS to
communicate settings information in order to reduce security risks such as tampering or interception.
Make sure you congure the administrator password before setting IPsec/IP ltering or IEEE802.1X.
Also, you can use Web Cong by connecting the printer directly to the computer using an Ethernet cable, and then
entering the IP address into a web browser. e printer can be connected in a secure environment aer the security
settings have been completed.
Making Settings for Password Encryption
Password encryption allows you to encrypt condential information (all passwords, certicate private keys, hard
disk authentication keys) stored in the printer. e encryption key for decrypting encrypted condential
information is stored in the TPM (Trusted Platform Module) chip. Since the TPM chip is not accessible from
outside the printer, you can protect encrypted condential information without sharing the encryption key.
c
Important:
If the TPM chip fails and the encryption key cannot be used, you cannot restore the condential information in the
printer and use the printer. erefore, make sure to back up your encryption key to a USB memory.
Encrypting the Password
When you want to encrypt the password, you need to back up the encryption key. Prepare a USB memory for
backup in advance. You need 1 MB or more free space in the USB memory.
c
Important:
When replacing the TPM chip, you need a USB memory that contains the encryption key. Store this in a safe place.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Making Settings for Password Encryption
519
1. Select Settings on the home screen.
2. Select General Settings > System Administration > Security Settings > Password Encryption.
3. Select On for Password Encryption.
When a message is displayed, check the content, and then tap OK.
4. Select Proceed to Backup.
e encryption key backup screen is displayed.
5. Connect the USB memory to the printer's external interface USB port.
6. Tap Start Backup.
Writing to the USB memory starts. If an encryption key has already been stored in the USB memory, it is
overwritten.
7. When a backup completion message is displayed, tap Close.
8. Press the
P
button to turn o the printer.
9. Press the
P
button to turn on the printer again.
e password is encrypted.
e printer may take longer to start than usual.
Restoring the Password Encryption Key
If the TPM chip fails, you can restore the encryption key to the replaced TPM chip by using its backup. Follow the
steps below to replace the TPM chip while the password is encrypted.
1. Press the
P
button to turn on the printer.
e printer's control panel displays a message that the TPM has been replaced.
2. Select Restore from Backup.
When the administrator password has been set, enter the password and tap OK.
3. Connect the USB memory that contains the encryption key to the printer's external interface USB port.
4. Tap Restore from Backup.
e encryption key is restored to the TPM chip.
5. Check the message, and then tap OK.
e printer restarts.
Controlling Using Protocols
You can print using a variety of pathways and protocols.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Controlling Using Protocols
520
If you are using a multi-function printer, you can use network scanning and PC-FAX from an unspecied number
of network computers.
You can lower unintended security risks by restricting printing from specic pathways or by controlling the
available functions.
Controlling protocols
Congure the protocol settings.
1. Access Web Cong and then select the Network Security tab > Protocol.
2. Congure each item.
3. Click Next.
4. Click OK.
e settings are applied to the printer.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
&“Protocols you can Enable or Disable” on page 521
&“Protocol Setting Items” on page 522
Protocols you can Enable or Disable
Protocol Description
Bonjour Settings You can specify whether to use Bonjour. Bonjour is used to search for devices, print, and so
on.
iBeacon Settings You can enable or disable the iBeacon transmission function. When enabled, you can search
for the printer from iBeacon-enabled devices.
SLP Settings You can enable or disable the SLP function. SLP is used for push scanning and network
searching in EpsonNet Cong.
WSD Settings You can enable or disable the WSD function. When this is enabled, you can add WSD devices,
and print from the WSD port.
LLTD Settings You can enable or disable the LLTD function. When this is enabled, it is displayed on the
Windows network map.
LLMNR Settings You can enable or disable the LLMNR function. When this is enabled, you can use name
resolution without NetBIOS even if you cannot use DNS.
LPR Settings You can specify whether or not to allow LPR printing. When this is enabled, you can print from
the LPR port.
RAW(Port9100) Settings You can specify whether or not to allow printing from the RAW port (Port 9100). When this is
enabled, you can print from the RAW port (Port 9100).
RAW(Custom Port) Settings You can specify whether or not to allow printing from the RAW port (custom port). When this
is enabled, you can print from the RAW port (custom port).
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Controlling Using Protocols
521
Protocol Description
IPP Settings You can specify whether or not to allow printing from IPP. When this is enabled, you can print
over the Internet.
FTP Settings You can specify whether or not to allow FTP printing. When this is enabled, you can print over
an FTP server.
SNMPv1/v2c Settings You can specify whether or not to enable SNMPv1/v2c. This is used to set up devices,
monitoring, and so on.
SNMPv3 Settings You can specify whether or not to enable SNMPv3. This is used to set up encrypted devices,
monitoring, etc.
Related Information
&“Controlling protocols” on page 521
&“Protocol Setting Items” on page 522
Protocol Setting Items
Bonjour Settings
Items Setting value and Description
Use Bonjour Select this to search for or use devices through Bonjour.
Bonjour Name Displays the Bonjour name.
Bonjour Service Name Displays the Bonjour service name.
Location Displays the Bonjour location name.
Top Priority Protocol Select the top priority protocol for Bonjour print.
Wide-Area Bonjour Set whether to use Wide-Area Bonjour.
iBeacon Settings
Items Setting value and Description
Enable iBeacon Transmission Select this to enable the iBeacon transmission function.
SLP Settings
Items Setting value and Description
Enable SLP Select this to enable the SLP function.
This is used such as network searching in EpsonNet Cong.
WSD Settings
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Controlling Using Protocols
522
Items Setting value and Description
Enable WSD Select this to enable adding devices using WSD, and print
and scan from the WSD port.
Printing Timeout (sec) Enter the communication timeout value for WSD printing
between 3 to 3,600 seconds.
Scanning Timeout (sec) Enter the communication timeout value for WSD scanning
between 3 to 3,600 seconds.
Device Name Displays the WSD device name.
Location Displays the WSD location name.
LLTD Settings
Items Setting value and Description
Enable LLTD Select this to enable LLTD. The printer is displayed in the
Windows network map.
Device Name Displays the LLTD device name.
LLMNR Settings
Items Setting value and Description
Enable LLMNR Select this to enable LLMNR. You can use name resolution
without NetBIOS even if you cannot use DNS.
LPR Settings
Items Setting value and Description
Allow LPR Port Printing Select to allow printing from the LPR port.
Printing Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for LPR printing between 0 to 3,600
seconds. If you do not want to timeout, enter 0.
RAW(Port9100) Settings
Items Setting value and Description
Allow RAW(Port9100) Printing Select to allow printing from the RAW port (Port 9100).
Printing Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for RAW (Port 9100) printing be-
tween 0 to 3,600 seconds. If you do not want to timeout, en-
ter 0.
RAW(Custom Port) Settings
Items Setting value and Description
Allow RAW(Custom Port) Printing Select to allow printing from the RAW port (custom port).
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Controlling Using Protocols
523
Items Setting value and Description
Port Number Enter the port number for RAW printing between 1024 and
65535 (except for 9100, 1865, 2968).
Printing Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for RAW (custom port) printing be-
tween 0 to 3,600 seconds. If you do not want to timeout, en-
ter 0.
IPP Settings
Items Setting value and Description
Enable IPP Select to enable IPP communication. Only printers that sup-
port IPP are displayed.
Allow Non-secure Communication Select Allowed to allow the printer to communicate without
any security measures (IPP).
Communication Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for IPP printing between 0 to 3,600
seconds.
Require PIN Code when using IPP printing Select whether or not to require a PIN code when using IPP
printing. If you select Yes , IPP print jobs without PIN codes
are not saved in the printer.
URL(Network) Displays IPP URLs (http and https) when the printer is con-
nected to the network. The URL is a combined value of the
printer’s IP address, Port number, and IPP printer name.
URL(Wi-Fi Direct) Displays IPP URLs (http and https) when the printer is con-
nected by Wi-Fi Direct. The URL is a combined value of the
printer’s IP address, Port number, and IPP printer name.
Printer Name Displays the IPP printer name.
Location Displays the IPP location.
FTP Settings
Items Setting value and Description
Enable FTP Server Select to enable FTP printing. Only printers that support FTP
printing are displayed.
Communication Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for FTP communication between 0
to 3,600 seconds. If you do not want to timeout, enter 0.
SNMPv1/v2c Settings
Items Setting value and Description
Enable SNMPv1/v2c Select to enable SNMPv1/v2c.
Access Authority Set the access authority when SNMPv1/v2c is enabled. Se-
lect Read Only or Read/Write.
Community Name (Read Only) Enter 0 to 32 ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Controlling Using Protocols
524
Items Setting value and Description
Community Name (Read/Write) Enter 0 to 32 ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.
SNMPv3 Settings
Items Setting value and Description
Enable SNMPv3 SNMPv3 is enabled when the box is checked.
User Name Enter between 1 and 32 characters using 1 byte characters.
Authentication Settings
Algorithm Select an algorithm for an authentication for SNMPv3.
Password Enter the password for an authentication for SNMPv3.
Enter between 8 and 32 characters in ASCII (0x20-0x7E). If
you do not specify this, leave it blank.
Conrm Password Enter the password you congured for conrmation.
Encryption Settings
Algorithm Select an algorithm for an encryption for SNMPv3.
Password Enter the password for an encryption for SNMPv3.
Enter between 8 and 32 characters in ASCII (0x20-0x7E). If
you do not specify this, leave it blank.
Conrm Password Enter the password you congured for conrmation.
Context Name Enter within 32 characters or less in Unicode (UTF-8). If you
do not specify this, leave it blank. The number of characters
that can be entered varies depending on the language.
Related Information
&“Controlling protocols” on page 521
&“Protocols you can Enable or Disable” on page 521
Using a Digital Certicate
About Digital Certication
❏CA-signed Certicate
is is a certicate signed by the CA (Certicate Authority.) You can obtain it to apply to the Certicate
Authority. is certicate certies the existence of the printer is and used for SSL/TLS communication so that
you can ensure the safety of data communication.
When it is used for SSL/TLS communication, it is used as a server certicate.
When it is set to IPsec/IP Filtering, IEEE802.1x communication, or S/MIME, it is used as a client certicate.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Using a Digital Certicate
525
❏CA Certicate
is is a certicate that is in chain of the CA-signed Certicate, also called the intermediate CA certicate. It is
used by the web browser to validate the path of the printer's certicate when accessing the server of the other
party or Web Cong.
For the CA Certicate, set when to validate the path of server certicate accessing from the printer. For the
printer, set to certify the path of the CA-signed Certicate for SSL/TLS connection.
You can obtain the CA certicate of the printer from the Certication Authority where the CA certicate is
issued.
Also, you can obtain the CA certicate used to validate the server of the other party from the Certication
Authority that issued the CA-signed Certicate of the other server.
❏Self-signed Certicate
is is a certicate that the printer signs and issues itself. It is also called the root certicate. Because the issuer
certies itself, it is not reliable and cannot prevent impersonation.
❏When using for SSL/TLS communication
Use it when making the security setting and performing simple SSL/TLS communication without the CA-
signed Certicate.
If you use this certicate for an SSL/TLS communication, a security alert may be displayed on a web browser
because the certicate is not registered on a web browser.
❏When setting to S/MIME
You can also use a self-signed certicate instead of a CA-signed certicate. You can use S/MIME functions
without the cost of obtaining a CA-signed certicate, for example in a network environment that does not
have an external connection (Internet connection), such as an enterprise network. However, it is
recommended to use a CA-signed certicate when using external connections because a self-signed
certicate is low-security.
Related Information
&“Conguring a CA-signed Certicate” on page 526
&“Updating a Self-signed Certicate” on page 530
&“Conguring a CA Certicate” on page 532
Conguring a CA-signed Certicate
Obtaining a CA-signed Certicate
To obtain a CA-signed certicate, create a CSR (Certicate Signing Request) and apply it to certicate authority.
You can create a CSR using Web Cong and a computer.
Follow the steps to create a CSR and obtain a CA-signed certicate using Web Cong. When creating a CSR using
Web Cong, a certicate is the PEM/DER format.
1. Access Web Cong, and then select the Network Security tab.
2. Select one of the following.
❏SSL/TLS > Certicate
❏IPsec/IP Filtering > Client Certicate
❏IEEE802.1X > Client Certicate
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Using a Digital Certicate
526
❏S/MIME > Client Certicate
Whatever you choose, you can obtain the same certicate and use it in common.
3. Click Generate of CSR.
A CSR creating page is opened.
4. Enter a value for each item.
Note:
Available key length and abbreviations vary by a certicate authority. Create a request according to rules of each
certicate authority.
5. Click OK.
A completion message is displayed.
6. Select the Network Security tab.
7. Select one of the following.
❏SSL/TLS > Certicate
❏IPsec/IP Filtering > Client Certicate
❏IEEE802.1X > Client Certicate
❏S/MIME > Client Certicate
8. Click one of the download buttons of CSR according to a specied format by each certicate authority to
download a CSR to a computer.
c
Important:
Do not generate a CSR again. If you do so, you may not be able to import an issued CA-signed Certicate.
9. Send the CSR to a certicate authority and obtain a CA-signed Certicate.
Follow the rules of each certicate authority on sending method and form.
10. Save the issued CA-signed Certicate to a computer connected to the printer.
Obtaining a CA-signed Certicate is complete when you save a certicate to a destination.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
CSR Setting Items
Items Settings and Explanation
Key Length Select a key length for a CSR.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Using a Digital Certicate
527
Items Settings and Explanation
Common Name You can enter between 1 and 128 characters. If this is an IP address, it should be a
static IP address. You can enter 1 to 5 IPv4 addresses, IPv6 addresses, host names,
FQDNs by separating them with commas.
The rst element is stored to the common name, and other elements are stored to
the alias eld of the certicate subject.
Example:
Printer's IP address : 192.0.2.123, Printer name : EPSONA1B2C3
Common Name : EPSONA1B2C3,EPSONA1B2C3.local,192.0.2.123
Organization/ Organizational Unit/
Locality/ State/Province
You can enter between 0 and 64 characters in ASCII (0x20-0x7E). You can divide
distinguished names with commas.
Country Enter a country code in two-digit number specied by ISO-3166.
Sender's Email Address You can enter the sender's email address for the mail server setting. Enter the
same email address as the Sender's Email Address for the Network tab > Email
Server > Basic.
When creating a CSR by selecting the Network Security tab > S/MIME > Client
Certicate, this setting is not required because the sender's email address for the
mail server setting is set automatically. Congure the sender's email address for
the mail server settings in advance.
Related Information
&“Obtaining a CA-signed Certicate” on page 526
Importing a CA-signed Certicate
Import the obtained CA-signed Certicate to the printer.
c
Important:
❏Make sure that the printer’s date and time is set correctly. Certicate may be invalid.
❏If you obtain a certicate using a CSR created from Web Cong, you can import a certicate one time.
❏When you import a CA-signed Certicate by selecting the Network Security tab > S/MIME > Client
Certicate, you cannot change Sender's Email Address on the Network tab > Email Server > Basic. If you
want to change Sender's Email Address, change all signature settings to Do not add signature by selecting the
Network Security tab > S/MIME > Basic, and then delete the imported CA-signed Certicate.
1. Access Web Cong, and then select the Network Security tab.
2. Select one of the following.
❏SSL/TLS > Certicate
❏IPsec/IP Filtering > Client Certicate
❏IEEE802.1X > Client Certicate
❏S/MIME > Client Certicate
3. Click Import.
A certicate importing page is opened.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Using a Digital Certicate
528
4. Enter a value for each item. Set CA Certicate 1 and CA Certicate 2 when verifying the path of the
certicate on the web browser that accesses the printer.
Depending on where you create a CSR and the le format of the certicate, required settings may vary. Enter
values to required items according to the following.
❏A certicate of the PEM/DER format obtained from Web Cong
❏Private Key: Do not congure because the printer contains a private key.
❏Password: Do not congure.
❏CA Certicate 1/CA Certicate 2: Optional
❏A certicate of the PEM/DER format obtained from a computer
❏Private Key: You need to set.
❏Password: Do not congure.
❏CA Certicate 1/CA Certicate 2: Optional
❏A certicate of the PKCS#12 format obtained from a computer
❏Private Key: Do not congure.
❏Password: Optional
❏CA Certicate 1/CA Certicate 2: Do not congure.
5. Click OK.
A completion message is displayed.
Note:
Click Conrm to verify the certicate information.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
&“Deleting a CA-signed Certicate” on page 530
&“Conguring S/MIME Basic Settings” on page 548
CA-signed Certicate Importing Setting Items
Items Settings and Explanation
Server Certicate or Client Certicate Select a certicate’s format.
For SSL/TLS connection, the Server Certicate is displayed.
For IPsec/IP Filtering, IEEE802.1x, or S/MIME, the Client Certicate is displayed.
Private Key If you obtain a certicate of the PEM/DER format by using a CSR created from a
computer, specify a private key le that is match a certicate.
Password If the le format is Certicate with Private Key (PKCS#12), enter the password
for encrypting the private key that is set when you obtain the certicate.
CA Certicate 1 If your certicate’s format is Certicate (PEM/DER), import a certicate of a
certicate authority that issues a CA-signed Certicate used as server certicate.
Specify a le if you need.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Using a Digital Certicate
529
Items Settings and Explanation
CA Certicate 2 If your certicate’s format is Certicate (PEM/DER), import a certicate of a
certicate authority that issues CA Certicate 1. Specify a le if you need.
Related Information
&“Importing a CA-signed Certicate” on page 528
Deleting a CA-signed Certicate
You ca n d e l e t e an imp or te d certicate when the certicate has expired or when an encrypted connection is no
longer necessary.
c
Important:
If you obtain a certicate using a CSR created from Web Cong, you cannot import a deleted certicate again. In
this case, create a CSR and obtain a certicate again.
1. Access Web Cong, and then select the Network Security tab.
2. Select one of the following.
❏SSL/TLS > Certicate
❏IPsec/IP Filtering > Client Certicate
❏IEEE802.1X > Client Certicate
❏S/MIME > Client Certicate
3. Click Delete for CA-signed Certicate or Client Certicate.
4. Conrm that you want to delete the certicate in the message displayed.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Conguring a Self-signed Certicate
Updating a Self-signed Certicate
Because the Self-signed Certicate is issued by the printer, you can update it when it has expired or when the
content described changes.
A self-signed certicate for SSL/TLS and one for S/MIME are issued separately. Update each certicate as
necessary.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Using a Digital Certicate
530
c
Important:
When you update a self-signed certicate by selecting the Network Security tab > S/MIME > Client Certicate,
you cannot change Sender's Email Address on the Network tab > Email Server > Basic. If you want to change
Sender's Email Address, change all signature settings to Do not add signature by selecting the Network Security
tab > S/MIME > Basic, and then delete the self-signed certicate for S/MIME.
1. Access Web Cong, and then select the Network Security tab. Next, select SSL/TLS > Certicate or S/MIME
> Client Certicate.
2. Click Update.
3. Enter Common Name.
You can enter up to 5 IPv4 addresses, IPv6 addresses, host names, FQDNs between 1 to 128 characters and
separating them with commas. e rst parameter is stored to the common name, and the others are stored to
the alias eld for the subject of the certicate.
Example:
Printer's IP address : 192.0.2.123, Printer name : EPSONA1B2C3
Common name : EPSONA1B2C3,EPSONA1B2C3.local,192.0.2.123
4. Specify a validity period for the certicate.
5. Click Next.
A conrmation message is displayed.
6. Click OK.
e printer is updated.
Note:
You can check the certicate information by clicking Conrm on the Network Security tab > SSL/TLS > Certicate > Self-
signed Certicate or S/MIME > Client Certicate > Self-signed Certicate.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
&“Deleting a Self-signed Certicate for S/MIME” on page 531
&“Conguring S/MIME Basic Settings” on page 548
Deleting a Self-signed Certicate for S/MIME
You can delete the self-signed certicate for S/MIME when it is no longer necessary.
Even if you delete it, the self-signed certicate for SSL/TLS is not deleted.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Network Security tab > S/MIME > Client Certicate.
2. Click Delete for Self-signed Certicate.
3. Conrm that you want to delete the certicate in the message displayed.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Using a Digital Certicate
531
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Conguring a CA Certicate
When you set the CA Certicate, you can validate the path to the CA certicate of the server that the printer
accesses. is can prevent impersonation.
You can obtain the CA Certicate from the Certication Authority where the CA-signed Certicate is issued.
Importing a CA Certicate
Import the CA Certicate to the printer.
1. Access Web Cong and then select the Network Security tab > CA Certicate.
2. Click Import.
3. Specify the CA Certicate you want to import.
4. Click OK.
When importing is complete, you are returned to the CA Certicate screen, and the imported CA Certicate is
displayed.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Deleting a CA Certicate
You can delete the imported CA Certicate.
1. Access Web Cong and then select the Network Security tab > CA Certicate.
2. Click Delete next to the CA Certicate that you want to delete.
3. Conrm that you want to delete the certicate in the message displayed.
4. Click Reboot Network, and then check that the deleted CA Certicate is not listed on the updated screen.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
SSL/TLS Communication with the Printer
When the server certicate is set using SSL/TLS (Secure Sockets Layer/Transport Layer Security) communication
to the printer, you can encrypt the communication path between computers. Do this if you want to prevent remote
and unauthorized access.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
SSL/TLS Communication with the Printer
532
Conguring Basic SSL/TLS Settings
If the printer supports the HTTPS server feature, you can use an SSL/TLS communication to encrypt
communications. You can congure and manage the printer using Web Cong while ensuring security.
Congure encryption strength and redirect feature.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Network Security tab > SSL/TLS > Basic.
2. Select a value for each item.
❏Encryption Strength
Select the level of encryption strength.
❏Redirect HTTP to HTTPS
Redirect to HTTPS when HTTP is accessed.
3. Click Next.
A conrmation message is displayed.
4. Click OK.
e printer is updated.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Conguring a Server Certicate for the Printer
1. Access Web Cong and select the Network Security tab > SSL/TLS > Certicate.
2. Specify a certicate to use on Server Certicate.
❏Self-signed Certicate
A self-signed certicate has been generated by the printer. If you do not obtain a CA-signed certicate,
select this.
❏CA-signed Certicate
If you obtain and import a CA-signed certicate in advance, you can specify this.
3. Click Next.
A conrmation message is displayed.
4. Click OK.
e printer is updated.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
&“Conguring a CA-signed Certicate” on page 526
&“Updating a Self-signed Certicate” on page 530
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
SSL/TLS Communication with the Printer
533
Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering
About IPsec/IP Filtering
You can lter trac based on IP addresses, services, and port by using IPsec/IP Filtering function. By combining of
the ltering, you can congure the printer to accept or block specied clients and specied data. Additionally, you
can improve security level by using an IPsec.
Note:
Computers that run Windows Vista or later or Windows Server 2008 or later support IPsec.
Conguring Default Policy
To lter trac, congure the default policy. e default policy applies to every user or group connecting to the
printer. For more ne-grained control over users and groups of users, congure group policies.
1. Access Web Cong and then select the Network Security tab > IPsec/IP Filtering > Basic.
2. Enter a value for each item.
3. Click Next.
A conrmation message is displayed.
4. Click OK.
e printer is updated.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Default Policy Setting Items
Default Policy
Items Settings and Explanation
IPsec/IP Filtering You can enable or disable an IPsec/IP Filtering feature.
❏Access Control
Congure a control method for trac of IP packets.
Items Settings and Explanation
Permit Access Select this to permit congured IP packets to pass through.
Refuse Access Select this to refuse congured IP packets to pass through.
IPsec Select this to permit congured IPsec packets to pass through.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering
534
❏IKE Version
Select IKEv1 or IKEv2 for IKE Version. Select one of them according to the device that the printer is connected
to.
❏IKEv1
e following items are displayed when you select IKEv1 for IKE Version.
Items Settings and Explanation
Authentication Method To select Certicate, you need to obtain and import a CA-signed certicate in advance.
Pre-Shared Key If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, enter a pre-shared key
between 1 and 127 characters.
Conrm Pre-Shared Key Enter the key you congured for conrmation.
❏IKEv2
e following items are displayed when you select IKEv2 for IKE Version.
Items Settings and Explanation
Local Authentication Method To select Certicate, you need to obtain and import a CA-signed certicate in
advance.
ID Type If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, select the type of
ID for the printer.
ID Enter the printer's ID that matches the type of ID.
You cannot use "@", "#", and "=" for the rst character.
Distinguished Name : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.
You need to include "=".
IP Address : Enter IPv4 or IPv6 format.
FQDN : Enter a combination of between 1 and 255 characters using A-Z, a-z,
0-9, "-", and period (.).
Email Address : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters. You
need to include "@".
Key ID : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.
Pre-Shared Key If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, enter a pre-shared
key between 1 and 127 characters.
Conrm Pre-Shared
Key
Enter the key you congured for conrmation.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering
535
Items Settings and Explanation
Remote Authentication Method To select Certicate, you need to obtain and import a CA-signed certicate in
advance.
ID Type If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, select the type of
ID for the device that you want to authenticate.
ID Enter the printer's ID that matches to the type of ID.
You cannot use "@", "#", and "=" for the rst character.
Distinguished Name : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.
You need to include "=".
IP Address : Enter IPv4 or IPv6 format.
FQDN : Enter a combination of between 1 and 255 characters using A-Z, a-z,
0-9, "-", and period (.).
Email Address : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters. You
need to include "@".
Key ID : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.
Pre-Shared Key If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, enter a pre-shared
key between 1 and 127 characters.
Conrm Pre-Shared
Key
Enter the key you congured for conrmation.
❏Encapsulation
If you select IPsec for Access Control, you need to congure an encapsulation mode.
Items Settings and Explanation
Transport Mode If you only use the printer on the same LAN, select this. IP packets of layer 4 or later are
encrypted.
Tunnel Mode If you use the printer on the Internet-capable network such as IPsec-VPN, select this
option. The header and data of the IP packets are encrypted.
Remote Gateway(Tunnel Mode): If you select Tunnel Mode for Encapsulation, enter a
gateway address between 1 and 39 characters.
❏Security Protocol
If you select IPsec for Access Control, select an option.
Items Settings and Explanation
ESP Select this to ensure the integrity of an authentication and data, and encrypt data.
AH Select this to ensure the integrity of an authentication and data. Even if encrypting data is
prohibited, you can use IPsec.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering
536
❏Algorithm Settings
It is recommended that you select Any for all settings or select an item other than Any for each setting. If you
select Any for some of the settings and select an item other than Any for the other settings, the device may not
communicate depending on the other device that you want to authenticate.
Items Settings and Explanation
IKE Encryption Select the encryption algorithm for IKE.
The items vary depending on the version of IKE.
Authentication Select the authentication algorithm for IKE.
Key Exchange Select the key exchange algorithm for IKE.
The items vary depending on the version of IKE.
ESP Encryption Select the encryption algorithm for ESP.
This is available when ESP is selected for Security Protocol.
Authentication Select the authentication algorithm for ESP.
This is available when ESP is selected for Security Protocol.
AH Authentication Select the encryption algorithm for AH.
This is available when AH is selected for Security Protocol.
Related Information
&“Conguring Default Policy” on page 534
Conguring Group Policy
A group policy is one or more rules applied to a user or user group. e printer controls IP packets that match with
congured policies. IP packets are authenticated in the order of a group policy 1 to 10 then a default policy.
1. Access Web Cong and then select the Network Security tab > IPsec/IP Filtering > Basic.
2. Click a numbered tab you want to congure.
3. Enter a value for each item.
4. Click Next.
A conrmation message is displayed.
5. Click OK.
e printer is updated.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering
537
Group Policy Setting Items
Items Settings and Explanation
Enable this Group Policy You can enable or disable a group policy.
Access Control
Congure a control method for trac of IP packets.
Items Settings and Explanation
Permit Access Select this to permit congured IP packets to pass through.
Refuse Access Select this to refuse congured IP packets to pass through.
IPsec Select this to permit congured IPsec packets to pass through.
Local Address(Printer)
Select an IPv4 address or IPv6 address that matches your network environment. If an IP address is assigned
automatically, you can select Use auto-obtained IPv4 address.
Note:
If an IPv6 address is assigned automatically, the connection may be unavailable. Congure a static IPv6 address.
Remote Address(Host)
Enter a device's IP address to control access. e IP address must be 43 characters or less. If you do not enter an IP
address, all addresses are controlled.
Note:
If an IP address is assigned automatically (e.g. assigned by DHCP), the connection may be unavailable. Congure a static IP
address.
Method of Choosing Port
Select a method to specify ports.
❏Service Name
If you select Service Name for Method of Choosing Port, select an option.
❏Transport Protocol
If you select Port Number for Method of Choosing Port, you need to congure an encapsulation mode.
Items Settings and Explanation
Any Protocol Select this to control all protocol types.
TCP Select this to control data for unicast.
UDP Select this to control data for broadcast and multicast.
ICMPv4 Select this to control ping command.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering
538
❏Local Port
If you select Port Number for Method of Choosing Port and if you select TCP or UDP for Transport
Protocol, enter port numbers to control receiving packets, separating them with commas. You can enter 10 port
numbers at the maximum.
Example: 20,80,119,5220
If you do not enter a port number, all ports are controlled.
❏Remote Port
If you select Port Number for Method of Choosing Port and if you select TCP or UDP for Transport
Protocol, enter port numbers to control sending packets, separating them with commas. You can enter 10 port
numbers at the maximum.
Example: 25,80,143,5220
If you do not enter a port number, all ports are controlled.
IKE Version
Select IKEv1 or IKEv2 for IKE Version. Select one of them according to the device that the printer is connected to.
❏IKEv1
e following items are displayed when you select IKEv1 for IKE Version.
Items Settings and Explanation
Authentication Method If you select IPsec for Access Control, select an option. Used certicate is common with a
default policy.
Pre-Shared Key If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, enter a pre-shared key
between 1 and 127 characters.
Conrm Pre-Shared Key Enter the key you congured for conrmation.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering
539
❏IKEv2
e following items are displayed when you select IKEv2 for IKE Version.
Items Settings and Explanation
Local Authentication Method If you select IPsec for Access Control, select an option. Used certicate is
common with a default policy.
ID Type If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, select the type of
ID for the printer.
ID Enter the printer's ID that matches the type of ID.
You cannot use "@", "#", and "=" for the rst character.
Distinguished Name : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.
You need to include "=".
IP Address : Enter IPv4 or IPv6 format.
FQDN : Enter a combination of between 1 and 255 characters using A-Z, a-z,
0-9, "-", and period (.).
Email Address : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters. You
need to include "@".
Key ID : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.
Pre-Shared Key If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, enter a pre-shared
key between 1 and 127 characters.
Conrm Pre-Shared
Key
Enter the key you congured for conrmation.
Remote Authentication Method If you select IPsec for Access Control, select an option. Used certicate is
common with a default policy.
ID Type If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, select the type of
ID for the device that you want to authenticate.
ID Enter the printer's ID that matches to the type of ID.
You cannot use "@", "#", and "=" for the rst character.
Distinguished Name : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.
You need to include "=".
IP Address : Enter IPv4 or IPv6 format.
FQDN : Enter a combination of between 1 and 255 characters using A-Z, a-z,
0-9, "-", and period (.).
Email Address : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters. You
need to include "@".
Key ID : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.
Pre-Shared Key If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, enter a pre-shared
key between 1 and 127 characters.
Conrm Pre-Shared
Key
Enter the key you congured for conrmation.
Encapsulation
If you select IPsec for Access Control, you need to congure an encapsulation mode.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering
540
Items Settings and Explanation
Transport Mode If you only use the printer on the same LAN, select this. IP packets of layer 4 or later are
encrypted.
Tunnel Mode If you use the printer on the Internet-capable network such as IPsec-VPN, select this
option. The header and data of the IP packets are encrypted.
Remote Gateway(Tunnel Mode): If you select Tunnel Mode for Encapsulation, enter a
gateway address between 1 and 39 characters.
Security Protocol
If you select IPsec for Access Control, select an option.
Items Settings and Explanation
ESP Select this to ensure the integrity of an authentication and data, and encrypt data.
AH Select this to ensure the integrity of an authentication and data. Even if encrypting data is
prohibited, you can use IPsec.
Algorithm Settings
It is recommended that you select Any for all settings or select an item other than Any for each setting. If you
select Any for some of the settings and select an item other than Any for the other settings, the device may not
communicate depending on the other device that you want to authenticate.
Items Settings and Explanation
IKE Encryption Select the encryption algorithm for IKE.
The items vary depending on the version of IKE.
Authentication Select the authentication algorithm for IKE.
Key Exchange Select the key exchange algorithm for IKE.
The items vary depending on the version of IKE.
ESP Encryption Select the encryption algorithm for ESP.
This is available when ESP is selected for Security Protocol.
Authentication Select the authentication algorithm for ESP.
This is available when ESP is selected for Security Protocol.
AH Authentication Select the encryption algorithm for AH.
This is available when AH is selected for Security Protocol.
Related Information
&“Conguring Group Policy” on page 537
&“Combination of Local Address(Printer) and Remote Address(Host) on Group Policy” on page 542
&“References of Service Name on Group Policy” on page 542
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering
541
Combination of Local Address(Printer) and Remote Address(Host) on Group Policy
Setting of Local Address(Printer)
IPv4 IPv6
*2
Any addresses
*3
Setting of Remote
Address(Host)
IPv4
*1
✓–✓
IPv6
*1*2
–✓✓
Blank ✓✓✓
*1If IPsec is selected for Access Control, you cannot specify in a prex length.
*2If IPsec is selected for Access Control, you can select a link-local address (fe80::) but group policy will be disabled.
*3Except IPv6 link local addresses.
References of Service Name on Group Policy
Note:
Unavailable services are displayed but cannot be selected.
Service Name Protocol type Local port
number
Remote port
number
Features controlled
Any – – – All services
ENPC UDP 3289 Any port Searching for a printer from
applications such as Epson Device
Admin, a printer driver and the a
scanner driver
SNMP UDP 161 Any port Acquiring and conguring of MIB from
applications such as Epson Device
Admin, the Epson printer driver and
the Epson scanner driver
LPR TCP 515 Any port Forwarding LPR data
RAW (Port9100) TCP 9100 Any port Forwarding RAW data
IPP/IPPS TCP 631 Any port Forwarding data of IPP/IPPS printing
WSD TCP Any port 5357 Controlling WSD
WS-Discovery UDP 3702 Any port Searching for a printer from WSD
Network Scan TCP 1865 Any port Forwarding scan data from the
scanning software
Network Push
Scan
TCP Any port 2968 Acquiring job information of push
scanning from the scanning software
Network Push
Scan Discovery
UDP 2968 Any port Searching for a computer when push
scanning from the scanning software
is executed
FTP Data (Local) TCP 20 Any port FTP server (forwarding data of FTP
printing)
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering
542
Service Name Protocol type Local port
number
Remote port
number
Features controlled
FTP Control
(Local)
TCP 21 Any port FTP server (controlling FTP printing)
FTP Data
(Remote)
TCP Any port 20 FTP client (forwarding scan data and
received fax data)
However this can control only an FTP
server that uses remote port number
20.
FTP Control
(Remote)
TCP Any port 21 FTP client (controlling to forward scan
data and received fax data)
CIFS (Local) TCP 445 Any port CIFS server (Sharing a network folder)
CIFS (Remote) TCP Any port 445 CIFS client (forwarding scan data and
received fax data to a folder)
NetBIOS Name
Service (Local)
UDP 137 Any port CIFS server (Sharing a network folder)
NetBIOS
Datagram
Service (Local)
UDP 138 Any port
NetBIOS Session
Service (Local)
TCP 139 Any port
NetBIOS Name
Service (Remote)
UDP Any port 137 CIFS client (forwarding scan data and
received fax data to a folder)
NetBIOS
Datagram
Service (Remote)
UDP Any port 138
NetBIOS Session
Service (Remote)
TCP Any port 139
HTTP (Local) TCP 80 Any port HTTP(S) server (forwarding data of
Web Cong and WSD)
HTTPS (Local) TCP 443 Any port
HTTP (Remote) TCP Any port 80 HTTP(S) client (communicating
between Epson Connect, rmware
updating and root certicate
updating)
HTTPS (Remote) TCP Any port 443
Conguration Examples of IPsec/IP Filtering
Receiving IPsec packets only
is example is to congure a default policy only.
Default Policy:
❏IPsec/IP Filtering: Enable
❏Access Control: IPsec
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering
543
❏Authentication Method: Pre-Shared Key
❏Pre-Shared Key: Enter up to 127 characters.
Group Policy: Do not congure.
Receiving printing data and printer settings
is example allows communications of printing data and printer conguration from specied services.
Default Policy:
❏IPsec/IP Filtering: Enable
❏Access Control: Refuse Access
Group Policy:
❏Enable this Group Policy: Check the box.
❏Access Control: Permit Access
❏Remote Address(Host): IP address of a client
❏Method of Choosing Port: Service Name
❏Service Name: Check the box of ENPC, SNMP, HTTP (Local), HTTPS (Local) and RAW (Port9100).
Note:
To avoid receiving HTTP (Local) and HTTPS (Local), clear their checkboxes in Group Policy. When doing so, disable
IPsec/IP ltering from the printer's control panel temporarily to change the printer settings.
Receiving access from a specied IP address only
is example allows a specied IP address to access the printer.
Default Policy:
❏IPsec/IP Filtering: Enable
❏Access Control:Refuse Access
Group Policy:
❏Enable this Group Policy: Check the box.
❏Access Control: Permit Access
❏Remote Address(Host): IP address of an administrator’s client
Note:
Regardless of policy conguration, the client will be able to access and congure the printer.
Conguring a Certicate for IPsec/IP Filtering
Congure the Client Certicate for IPsec/IP Filtering. When you set it, you can use the certicate as an
authentication method for IPsec/IP Filtering. If you want to congure the certication authority, go to CA
Certicate.
1. Access Web Cong and then select the Network Security tab > IPsec/IP Filtering > Client Certicate.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering
544
2. Import the certicate in Client Certicate.
If you have already imported a certicate published by a Certication Authority, you can copy the certicate
and use it in IPsec/IP Filtering. To copy, select the certicate from Copy From, and then click Copy.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
&“Conguring a CA-signed Certicate” on page 526
&“Conguring a CA Certicate” on page 532
Connecting the Printer to an IEEE802.1X Network
Conguring an IEEE802.1X Network
When you set IEEE802.1X to the printer, you can use it on the network connected to a RADIUS server, a LAN
switch with authentication function, or an access point.
1. Access Web Cong and then select the Network Security tab > IEEE802.1X > Basic.
2. Enter a value for each item.
If you want to use the printer on a Wi-Fi network, click Wi-Fi Setup and select or enter an SSID.
Note:
You can share settings between Ethernet and Wi-Fi.
3. Click Next.
A conrmation message is displayed.
4. Click OK.
e printer is updated.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
IEEE802.1X Network Setting Items
Items Settings and Explanation
IEEE802.1X (Wired LAN) You can enable or disable settings of the page (IEEE802.1X > Basic) for IEEE802.1X (Wired
LAN).
IEEE802.1X (Wi-Fi) The connection status of IEEE802.1X (Wi-Fi) is displayed.
Connection Method The connection method of a current network is displayed.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Connecting the Printer to an IEEE802.1X Network
545
Items Settings and Explanation
EAP Type Select an option for an authentication method between the printer and a RADIUS server.
EAP-TLS You need to obtain and import a CA-signed certicate.
PEAP-TLS
EAP-TTLS You need to congure a password.
PEAP/MSCHAPv2
User ID Congure an ID to use for an authentication of a RADIUS server.
Enter 1 to 128 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.
Password Congure a password to authenticate the printer.
Enter 1 to 128 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters. If you are using a Windows server as a
RADIUS server, you can enter up to 127 characters.
Conrm Password Enter the password you congured for conrmation.
Server ID You can congure a server ID to authenticate with a specied RADIUS server. Authenticator
veries whether a server ID is contained in the subject/subjectAltName eld of a server
certicate that is sent from a RADIUS server or not.
Enter 0 to 128 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.
Certicate Validation You can set certicate validation regardless of the authentication method. Import the
certicate in CA Certicate.
Anonymous Name If you select PEAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS or PEAP/MSCHAPv2 for EAP Type, you can congure an
anonymous name instead of a user ID for a phase 1 of a PEAP authentication.
Enter 0 to 128 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.
Encryption Strength You can select one of the followings.
High AES256/3DES
Middle AES256/3DES/AES128/RC4
Related Information
&“Conguring an IEEE802.1X Network” on page 545
Conguring a Certicate for IEEE802.1X
Congure the Client Certicate for IEEE802.1X. When you set it, you can use EAP-TLS and PEAP-TLS as an
authentication method of IEEE802.1x. If you want to congure the certication authority certicate, go to CA
Certicate.
1. Access Web Cong and then select the Network Security tab > IEEE802.1X > Client Certicate.
2. Enter a certicate in the Client Certicate.
If you have already imported a certicate published by a Certication Authority, you can copy the certicate
and use it in IEEE802.1X. To copy, select the certicate from Copy From, and then click Copy.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Connecting the Printer to an IEEE802.1X Network
546
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
&“Conguring a CA-signed Certicate” on page 526
&“Conguring a CA Certicate” on page 532
Checking IEEE802.1X Network Status
You can check the IEEE802.1X status by printing a network status sheet.
Status ID IEEE802.1X Status
Disable IEEE802.1X feature is disable.
EAP Success IEEE802.1X authentication has succeeded and network connection is available.
Authenticating IEEE802.1X authentication has not been completed.
Cong Error Authentication has failed since the user ID has not been set.
Client Certicate Error Authentication has failed since the client certicate is out of date.
Timeout Error Authentication has failed since there is no answer from the RADIUS server and/or
authenticator.
User ID Error Authentication has failed since the printer's user ID and/or certicate protocol is
incorrect.
Server ID Error Authentication has failed since the server ID of the server certicate and the
server's ID do not match.
Server Certicate Error Authentication has failed since there are the following errors in the server
certicate.
❏The server certicate is out of date.
❏The chain of the server certicate is incorrect.
CA Certicate Error Authentication has failed since there are the following errors in a CA certicate.
❏Specied CA certicate is incorrect.
❏The correct CA certicate is not imported.
❏CA certicate is out of date.
EAP Failure Authentication has failed since there are the following errors in the printer
settings.
❏If EAP Type is EAP-TLS or PEAP-TLS, client certicate is incorrect or has
certain problems.
❏If EAP Type is EAP-TTLS or PEAP/MSCHAPv2, user ID or password is not
correct.
Related Information
&“Printing a Network Status Sheet” on page 315
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Connecting the Printer to an IEEE802.1X Network
547
S/MIME Settings
Conguring S/MIME Basic Settings
Congure the email encryption and the digital signature attachment to the emails for each function that you use.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Network Security tab > S/MIME > Basic.
2. Set each item.
3. Click Next.
A conrmation message is displayed.
4. Click OK.
e printer is updated.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
S/MIME Setting Items
Mail Encryption
❏To use email encryption, you need to import an encryption certicate for each destination registered in the
contacts list.
“Importing the Encryption Certicate to the Email Destination” on page 550
❏Unencrypted emails will be sent to the destinations that do not have an imported encryption certicate.
Items Settings and Explanation
Scan to Email Congure email encryption when using Scan to Email.
If you select Select at runtime, you can select whether or not to encrypt the email when sending it.
Default at runtime Select the default value of mail encryption when sending the mail.
This is available when Select at runtime is selected for Scan to Email.
Box to Email Congure email encryption when using Box to Email.
If you select Select at runtime, you can select whether or not to encrypt the email when sending it.
Default at runtime Select the default value of mail encryption when sending the mail.
This is available when Select at runtime is selected for Box to Email.
Fax to Email Congure email encryption when using Fax to Email.
Algorithm Select an algorithm for mail encryption.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
S/MIME Settings
548
Digital Signature
To use the S/MIME signature function, you need to congure the Client Certicate for the Network Security tab
> S/MIME > Client Certicate.
“Conguring a Certicate for S/MIME” on page 549
Items Settings and Explanation
Scan to Email Congure the digital signature attachment to the email when using Scan to Email.
If you select Select at runtime, you can select whether or not to add the digital signature to the mail
when sending it.
Default at runtime Select the default value of the digital signature attachment when sending the
mail.
This is available when Select at runtime is selected for Scan to Email.
Box to Email Congure the digital signature attachment to the email when using Box to Email.
If you select Select at runtime, you can select whether or not to add the digital signature to the mail
when sending it.
Default at runtime Select the default value of the digital signature attachment when sending the
mail.
This is available when Select at runtime is selected for Box to Email.
Fax to Email Congure the digital signature attachment to the email when using Fax to
Email.
Algorithm Select an algorithm for the digital signature.
Related Information
&“Conguring S/MIME Basic Settings” on page 548
Conguring a Certicate for S/MIME
Congure the client certicate to use the S/MIME signature function.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Network Security tab > S/MIME > Client Certicate.
2. Specify a certicate to use in Client Certicate.
❏Self-signed Certicate
If a self-signed certicate has been generated by the printer, you can select this.
❏CA-signed Certicate
If you obtain and import a CA-signed certicate in advance, you can specify this.
3. Click Next.
A conrmation message is displayed.
4. Click OK.
e printer is updated.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
S/MIME Settings
549
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
&“Conguring a CA-signed Certicate” on page 526
&“Updating a Self-signed Certicate” on page 530
Importing the Encryption Certicate to the Email Destination
To use email encryption, you need to import an encryption certicate for each destination registered in the
contacts list.
is section explains the procedure to import an encryption certicate to the email destination registered in the
contacts list.
1. Access Web Cong and select the Scan/Copy or Fax tab > Contacts.
2. Select the destination number for which you want to import the encryption certicate, and then click Edit.
3. Import the encryption certicate to the destination for Encryption Certicate or Change encryption
certicate.
4. Click Apply.
When an encryption certicate has been imported, a key icon is displayed on the contacts list.
Note:
You can check the certicate information for Encryption certicate status by selecting the destination number to which you
have imported the encryption certicate and clicking Edit.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Solving Problems for Advanced Security
Restoring the Security Settings
When you establish a highly secure environment such as IPsec/IP Filtering or IEEE802.1X, you may not be able to
communicate with devices because of incorrect settings or trouble with the device or server. In this case, restore
the security settings in order to make settings for the device again or to allow you temporary use.
Disabling the Security Function Using the Control Panel
You can disable IPsec/IP Filtering or IEEE802.1X using the printer's control panel.
1. Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings.
2. Select Advanced.
3. Select from the following items that you want to disable.
❏Disable IPsec/IP Filtering
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Solving Problems for Advanced Security
550
❏Disable IEEE802.1X
4. Select Start Setup on the conrmation screen.
Problems Using Network Security Features
Forgot a Pre–shared Key
Re-congure a pre-shared key.
To change the key, access Web Cong and select the Network Security tab > IPsec/IP Filtering > Basic > Default
Policy or Group Policy.
When you change the pre-shared key, congure the pre-shared key for computers.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
&“Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering” on page 534
Cannot Communicate with IPsec Communication
Specify the algorithm that the printer or the computer does not support.
e printer supports the following algorithms. Check the settings of the computer.
Security Methods Algorithms
IKE encryption algorithm AES-CBC-128, AES-CBC-192, AES-CBC-256, AES-GCM-128*, AES-GCM-192*,
AES-GCM-256*, 3DES
IKE authentication algorithm SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512, MD5
IKE key exchange algorithm DH Group1, DH Group2, DH Group5, DH Group14, DH Group15, DH
Group16, DH Group17, DH Group18, DH Group19, DH Group20, DH
Group21, DH Group22, DH Group23, DH Group24, DH Group25, DH
Group26, DH Group27*, DH Group28*, DH Group29*, DH Group30*
ESP encryption algorithm AES-CBC-128, AES-CBC-192, AES-CBC-256, AES-GCM-128, AES-GCM-192,
AES-GCM-256, 3DES
ESP authentication algorithm SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512, MD5
AH authentication algorithm SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512, MD5
*available for IKEv2 only
Related Information
&“Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering” on page 534
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Solving Problems for Advanced Security
551
Cannot Communicate Suddenly
The IP address of the printer has been changed or cannot be used.
When the IP address registered to the local address on Group Policy has been changed or cannot be used, IPsec
communication cannot be performed. Disable IPsec using the printer's control panel.
If the DHCP is out of date, rebooting or the IPv6 address is out of date or has not been obtained, then the IP
address registered for the printer's Web Cong (Network Security tab > IPsec/IP Filtering > Basic > Group
Policy > Local Address(Printer)) may not be found.
Use a static IP address.
The IP address of the computer has been changed or cannot be used.
When the IP address registered to the remote address on Group Policy has been changed or cannot be used, IPsec
communication cannot be performed.
Disable IPsec using the printer's control panel.
If the DHCP is out of date, rebooting or the IPv6 address is out of date or has not been obtained, then the IP
address registered for the printer's Web Cong (Network Security tab > IPsec/IP Filtering > Basic > Group
Policy > Remote Address(Host)) may not be found.
Use a static IP address.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
&“Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering” on page 534
Cannot Create the Secure IPP Printing Port
The correct certicate is not specied as the server certicate for SSL/TLS communication.
If the specied certicate is not correct, creating a port may fail. Make sure you are using the correct certicate.
The CA certicate is not imported to the computer accessing the printer.
If a CA certicate is not imported to the computer, creating a port may fail. Make sure a CA certicate is imported.
Related Information
&“Conguring a Server Certicate for the Printer” on page 533
Cannot Connect After Conguring IPsec/IP Filtering
The settings of IPsec/IP Filtering are incorrect.
Disable IPsec/IP ltering from the printer’s control panel. Connect the printer and computer and make the
IPsec/IP Filtering settings again.
Related Information
&“Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering” on page 534
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Solving Problems for Advanced Security
552
Cannot Access the Printer or Scanner after Conguring IEEE802.1X
The settings of IEEE802.1X are incorrect.
Disable IEEE802.1X and Wi-Fi from the printer’s control panel. Connect the printer and a computer, and then
congure IEEE802.1X again.
Related Information
&“Conguring an IEEE802.1X Network” on page 545
Problems on Using a Digital Certicate
Cannot Import a CA-signed Certicate
CA-signed Certicate and the information on the CSR do not match.
If the CA-signed Certicate and CSR do not have the same information, the CSR cannot be imported. Check the
following:
❏Are you trying to import the certicate to a device that does not have the same information?
Check the information of the CSR and then import the certicate to a device that has the same information.
❏Did you overwrite the CSR saved into the printer aer sending the CSR to a certicate authority?
Obtain the CA-signed certicate again with the CSR.
CA-signed Certicate is more than 5KB.
You cannot import a CA-signed Certicate that is more than 5KB.
The password for importing the certicate is incorrect.
Enter the correct password. If you forget the password, you cannot import the certicate. Re-obtain the CA-signed
Certicate.
Related Information
&“Importing a CA-signed Certicate” on page 528
Cannot Update a Self-Signed Certicate
The Common Name has not been entered.
Common Name must be entered.
Unsupported characters have been entered to Common Name.
Enter between 1 and 128 characters of either IPv4, IPv6, host name, or FQDN format in ASCII (0x20-0x7E).
A comma or space is included in the common name.
If a comma is entered, the Common Name is divided at that point. If only a space is entered before or aer a
comma, an error occurs.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Solving Problems for Advanced Security
553
Related Information
&“Updating a Self-signed Certicate” on page 530
Cannot Create a CSR
The Common Name has not been entered.
e Common Name must be entered.
Unsupported characters have been entered to Common Name, Organization, Organizational Unit,
Locality, and State/Province.
Enter characters of either IPv4, IPv6, host name, or FQDN format in ASCII (0x20-0x7E).
A comma or space is included in the Common Name.
If a comma is entered, the Common Name is divided at that point. If only a space is entered before or aer a
comma, an error occurs.
Related Information
&“Obtaining a CA-signed Certicate” on page 526
Warning Relating to a Digital Certicate Appears
Messages Cause/What to do
Enter a Server Certicate. Cause:
You have not selected a le to import.
What to do:
Select a le and click Import.
CA Certicate 1 is not entered. Cause:
CA certicate 1 is not entered and only CA certicate 2 is entered.
What to do:
Import CA certicate 1 rst.
Invalid value below. Cause:
Unsupported characters are contained in the le path and/or password.
What to do:
Make sure that the characters are entered correctly for the item.
Invalid date and time. Cause:
Date and time for the printer have not been set.
What to do:
Set date and time using Web Cong, EpsonNet Cong or the printer's control
panel.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Solving Problems for Advanced Security
554
Messages Cause/What to do
Invalid password. Cause:
The password set for CA certicate and entered password do not match.
What to do:
Enter the correct password.
Invalid le. Cause:
You are not importing a certicate le in X509 format.
What to do:
Make sure that you are selecting the correct certicate sent by a trusted certicate
authority.
Cause:
The le you have imported is too large. The maximum le size is 5KB.
What to do:
If you select the correct le, the certicate might be corrupted or fabricated.
Cause:
The chain contained in the certicate is invalid.
What to do:
For more information on the certicate, see the website of the certicate
authority.
Cannot use the Server Certicates that
include more than three CA
certicates.
Cause:
The certicate le in PKCS#12 format contains more than 3 CA certicates.
What to do:
Import each certicate as converting from PKCS#12 format to PEM format, or
import the certicate le in PKCS#12 format that contains up to 2 CA certicates.
The certicate has expired. Check if the
certicate is valid, or check the date
and time on your printer.
Cause:
The certicate is out of date.
What to do:
❏If the certicate is out of date, obtain and import the new certicate.
❏If the certicate is not out of date, make sure the printer's date and time are set
correctly.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Solving Problems for Advanced Security
555
Messages Cause/What to do
Private key is required. Cause:
There is no paired private key with the certicate.
What to do:
❏If the certicate is the PEM/DER format and it is obtained from a CSR using a
computer, specify the private key le.
❏If the certicate is the PKCS#12 format and it is obtained from a CSR using a
computer, create a le that contains the private key.
Cause:
You have re-imported the PEM/DER certicate obtained from a CSR using Web
Cong.
What to do:
If the certicate is the PEM/DER format and it is obtained from a CSR using Web
Cong, you can only import it once.
Setup failed. Cause:
Cannot nish the conguration because the communication between the printer
and computer failed or the le cannot be read by some errors.
What to do:
After checking the specied le and communication, import the le again.
Related Information
&“About Digital Certication” on page 525
Delete a CA-signed Certicate by Mistake
There is no backup le for the CA-signed certicate.
If you have the backup le, import the certicate again.
If you obtain a certicate using a CSR created from Web Cong, you cannot import a deleted certicate again.
Create a CSR and obtain a new certicate.
Related Information
&“Importing a CA-signed Certicate” on page 528
&“Deleting a CA-signed Certicate” on page 530
Using Epson Open Platform
Epson Open Platform Overview
Epson Open Platform is a platform to use Epson printers with the function provided by the server of the
authentication system.
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Using Epson Open Platform
556
You can acquire the logs of each device and user in cooperation with the server, and congure restrictions on the
device and functions that can be used for each user and group. It can be used with Epson Print Admin (Epson
Authentication System) or a third-party authentication system.
If you connect an authentication device, you can also perform user authentication using the ID card.
Conguring Epson Open Platform
Enable Epson Open Platform so that you can use the device from the authentication system.
1. Access Web Cong and then select the Epson Open Platform tab > Product Key or License Key.
2. Enter a value for each item.
❏Serial Number
e serial number of the device is displayed.
❏Epson Open Platform Version
Select the version of Epson Open Platform. e corresponding version varies depending on the
authentication system.
❏Product Key or License Key
Enter the product key obtained from the dedicated Web site. See the Epson Open Platform manual for
details such as how to obtain the product key.
3. Click Next.
A conrmation message is displayed.
4. Click OK.
e printer is updated.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Conguring the Authentication Device
You can congure the authentication device used in the authentication system from the Device Management tab >
Card Reader.
For more information, see the manual of the authentication system.
Related Information
&“Application for Conguring Printer Operations (Web Cong)” on page 371
Administrator Information
>
Advanced Security Settings
>
Using Epson Open Platform
557
Technical Support Web Site
If you need further help, visit the Epson support website shown below. Select your country or region and go to the
support section of your local Epson website. e latest drivers, FAQs, manuals, or other downloadables are also
available from the site.
http://support.epson.net/
http://www.epson.eu/Support (Europe)
If your Epson product is not operating properly and you cannot solve the problem, contact Epson support services
for assistance.
Contacting Epson Support
Before Contacting Epson
If your Epson product is not operating properly and you cannot solve the problem using the troubleshooting
information in your product manuals, contact Epson support services for assistance. If Epson support for your area
is not listed below, contact the dealer where you purchased your product.
Epson support will be able to help you much more quickly if you give them the following information:
❏Product serial number
(e serial number label is usually on the back of the product.)
❏Product model
❏Product soware version
(Click About, Version Info, or a similar button in the product soware.)
❏Brand and model of your computer
❏Your computer operating system name and version
❏Names and versions of the soware applications you normally use with your product
Note:
Depending on the product, the dial list data for fax and/or network settings may be stored in the product’s memory. Due to
breakdown or repair of a product, data and/or settings may be lost. Epson shall not be responsible for the loss of any data, for
backing up or recovering data and/or settings even during a warranty period. We recommend that you make your own
backup data or take notes.
Help for Users in Europe
Check your Pan-European Warranty Document for information on how to contact Epson support.
Help for Users in Taiwan
Contacts for information, support, and services are:
Where to Get Help
>
Contacting Epson Support
>
Help for Users in Taiwan
559
World Wide Web
http://www.epson.com.tw
Information on product specications, drivers for download, and products enquiry are available.
Epson HelpDesk
Phone: +886-2-80242008
Our HelpDesk team can help you with the following over the phone:
❏Sales enquiries and product information
❏Product usage questions or problems
❏Enquiries on repair service and warranty
Repair service center:
http://www.tekcare.com.tw/branchMap.page
TekCare corporation is an authorized service center for Epson Taiwan Technology & Trading Ltd.
Help for Users in Australia
Epson Australia wishes to provide you with a high level of customer service. In addition to your product manuals,
we provide the following sources for obtaining information:
Internet URL
http://www.epson.com.au
Access the Epson Australia World Wide Web pages. Worth taking your modem here for the occasional surf! e
site provides a download area for drivers, Epson contact points, new product information and technical support (e-
mail).
Epson Helpdesk
Phone: 1300-361-054
Epson Helpdesk is provided as a nal backup to make sure our clients have access to advice. Operators on the
Helpdesk can aid you in installing, conguring and operating your Epson product. Our Pre-sales Helpdesk sta
can provide literature on new Epson products and advise where the nearest dealer or service agent is located. Many
types of queries are answered here.
We encourage you to have all the relevant information on hand when you ring. e more information you prepare,
the faster we can help solve the problem. is information includes your Epson product manuals, type of
computer, operating system, application programs, and any information you feel is required.
Transportation of Product
Epson recommends retaining product packaging for future transportation.
Help for Users in New Zealand
Epson New Zealand wishes to provide you with a high level of customer service. In addition to your product
documentation, we provide the following sources for obtaining information:
Where to Get Help
>
Contacting Epson Support
>
Help for Users in New Zealand
560
Internet URL
http://www.epson.co.nz
Access the Epson New Zealand World Wide Web pages. Worth taking your modem here for the occasional surf!
e site provides a download area for drivers, Epson contact points, new product information and technical
support (e-mail).
Epson Helpdesk
Phone: 0800 237 766
Epson Helpdesk is provided as a nal backup to make sure our clients have access to advice. Operators on the
Helpdesk can aid you in installing, conguring and operating your Epson product. Our Pre-sales Helpdesk sta
can provide literature on new Epson products and advise where the nearest dealer or service agent is located. Many
types of queries are answered here.
We encourage you to have all the relevant information on hand when you ring. e more information you prepare,
the faster we can help solve the problem. is information includes your Epson product documentation, type of
computer, operating system, application programs, and any information you feel is required.
Transportation of Product
Epson recommends retaining product packaging for future transportation.
Help for Users in Indonesia
Contacts for information, support, and services are:
World Wide Web
http://www.epson.co.id
❏Information on product specications, drivers for download
❏Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), Sales Enquiries, questions through e-mail
Epson Hotline
Phone: +62-1500-766
Fax: +62-21-808-66-799
Our Hotline team can help you with the following over the phone or fax:
❏Sales enquiries and product information
❏Techn ical support
Epson Service Center
Province Company Name Address Phone
E-mail
DKI JAKARTA ESS JAKARTA
MANGGADUA
Ruko Mall Mangga Dua No. 48 Jl. Arteri
Mangga Dua, Jakarta Utara - DKI JAKARTA
(+6221) 62301104
jkt-admin@epson-indonesia.co.id
NORTH
SUMATERA
ESC MEDAN Jl. Bambu 2 Komplek Graha Niaga Nomor
A-4, Medan - North Sumatera
(+6261) 42066090 / 42066091
mdn-adm@epson-indonesia.co.id
Where to Get Help
>
Contacting Epson Support
>
Help for Users in Indonesia
561
Province Company Name Address Phone
E-mail
WEST JAWA ESC BANDUNG Jl. Cihampelas No. 48 A Bandung Jawa
Barat 40116
(+6222) 4207033
bdg-admin@epson-
indonesia.co.id
DI
YOGYAKARTA
ESC YOGYAKARTA YAP Square, Block A No. 6 Jl. C Simanjutak
Yogyakarta - DIY
(+62274) 581065
ygy-admin@epson-indonesia.co.id
EAST JAWA ESC SURABAYA Hitech Mall Lt. 2 Block A No. 24 Jl. Kusuma
Bangsa No. 116 - 118 Surabaya - JATIM
(+6231) 5355035
sby-admin@epson-indonesia.co.id
SOUTH
SULAWESI
ESC MAKASSAR Jl. Cendrawasih NO. 3A, kunjung mae,
mariso, MAKASSAR - SULSEL 90125
(+62411) 8911071
mksr-admin@epson-
indonesia.co.id
WEST
KALIMANTAN
ESC PONTIANAK Komp. A yani Sentra Bisnis G33, Jl. Ahmad
Yani - Pontianak Kalimantan Barat
(+62561) 735507 / 767049
pontianak-admin@epson-
indonesia.co.id
RIAU ESC PEKANBARU Jl. Tuanku Tambusai No.459A Pekanbaru
Riau
(+62761) 8524695
pkb-admin@epson-
indonesia.co.id
DKI JAKARTA ESS JAKARTA
SUDIRMAN
Wisma Keiai Lt. 1 Jl. Jenderal Sudirman Kav.
3 Jakarta Pusat - DKI JAKARTA 10220
(+6221) 5724335
ess@epson-indonesia.co.id
EAST JAWA ESS SURABAYA Ruko Surya Inti Jl. Jawa No 2-4 Kav. 29
Surabaya - Jawa Timur
(+6231) 5014949
esssby@epson-indonesia.co.id
BANTEN ESS SERPONG Ruko Mall WTC Matahari No. 953, Serpong-
Banten
(+6221) 53167051 / 53167052
esstag@epson-indonesia.co.id
CENTRAL
JAWA
ESS SEMARANG Komplek Ruko Metro Plaza Block C20 Jl. MT
Haryono No 970 Semarang - JAWA TENGAH
(+6224) 8313807 / 8417935
esssmg@epson-indonesia.co.id
EAST
KALIMANTAN
ESC SAMARINDA Jl. KH. Wahid Hasyim (M. Yamin) Kelurahan
Sempaja Selatan Kecamatan Samarinda
UTARA - SAMARINDA - KALTIM
(+62541) 7272904
escsmd@epson-indonesia.co.id
SOUTH
SUMATERA
ESC PALEMBANG Jl. H.M Rasyid Nawawi No. 249 Kelurahan 9
Ilir Palembang Sumatera Selatan
(+62711) 311330
escplg@epson-indonesia.co.id
EAST JAVA ESC JEMBER JL. Panglima Besar Sudirman Ruko no.1D
Jember-Jawa Timur (Depan Balai Penelitian
& Pengolahan Kakao)
(+62331) 488373 / 486468
jmr-admin@epson-indonesia.co.id
NORTH
SULAWESI
ESC MANADO Tekno Megamall Lt LG 11 TK 21, Kawasan
Megamas Boulevard, Jl Piere Tendean,
Manado - SULUT 95111
(+62431) 8890996
MND-ADMIN@EPSON-
INDONESIA.CO.ID
For other cities not listed here, call the Hot Line: 08071137766.
Where to Get Help
>
Contacting Epson Support
>
Help for Users in Indonesia
562
Help for Users in Malaysia
Contacts for information, support, and services are:
World Wide Web
http://www.epson.com.my
❏Information on product specications, drivers for download
❏Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), Sales Enquiries, questions through e-mail
Epson Call Centre
Phone: +60 1800-8-17349
❏Sales enquiries and product information
❏Product usage questions or problems
❏Enquiries on repair services and warranty
Head Oce
Phone: 603-56288288
Fax: 603-5628 8388/603-5621 2088
Help for Users in the Philippines
To obtain technical support as well as other aer sales services, users are welcome to contact the Epson Philippines
Corporation at the telephone, fax numbers and e-mail address below:
World Wide Web
http://www.epson.com.ph
Information on product specications, drivers for download, Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), and E-mail
Enquiries are available.
Epson Philippines Customer Care
Toll Free: (PLDT) 1-800-1069-37766
Toll Free: (Digital) 1-800-3-0037766
Metro Manila: (+632)441-9030
Web Site: https://www.epson.com.ph/contact
E-mail: customercare@epc.epson.som.ph
Accessible 9am to 6pm, Monday through Saturday (Except public holidays)
Our Customer Care team can help you with the following over the phone:
❏Sales enquiries and product information
❏Product usage questions or problems
❏Enquiries on repair service and warranty
Where to Get Help
>
Contacting Epson Support
>
Help for Users in the Philippines
563
Epson Philippines Corporation
Trunk Line: +632-706-2609
Fax: +632-706-2663
Help for Users in Singapore
Sources of information, support, and services available from Epson Singapore are:
World Wide Web
http://www.epson.com.sg
Information on product specications, drivers for download, Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), Sales Enquiries,
and Technical Support via e-mail are available.
Epson HelpDesk
Toll Free: 800-120-5564
Our HelpDesk team can help you with the following over the phone:
❏Sales enquiries and product information
❏Product usage questions or problem troubleshooting
❏Enquiries on repair service and warranty
Help for Users in Thailand
Contacts for information, support, and services are:
World Wide Web
http://www.epson.co.th
Information on product specications, drivers for download, Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), and e-mail are
available.
Epson Call Centre
Phone: 66-2685-9899
Email: support@eth.epson.co.th
Our Call Centre team can help you with the following over the phone:
❏Sales enquiries and product information
❏Product usage questions or problems
❏Enquiries on repair service and warranty
Help for Users in Vietnam
Contacts for information, support, and services are:
Where to Get Help
>
Contacting Epson Support
>
Help for Users in Vietnam
564
Epson Service Center
65 Truong Dinh Street, District 1, Hochiminh City, Vietnam.
Phone(Ho Chi Minh City): 84-8-3823-9239, 84-8-3825-6234
29 Tue Tinh, Quan Hai Ba Trung, Hanoi City, Vietnam
Phone(Hanoi City): 84-4-3978-4785, 84-4-3978-4775
Help for Users in India
Contacts for information, support, and services are:
World Wide Web
http://www.epson.co.in
Information on product specications, drivers for download, and products enquiry are available.
Helpline
❏Service, product information, and ordering consumables (BSNL Lines)
Toll-free number: 18004250011
Accessible 9am to 6pm, Monday through Saturday (Except public holidays)
❏Service (CDMA & Mobile Users)
Toll-free number: 186030001600
Accessible 9am to 6pm, Monday through Saturday (Except public holidays)
Help for Users in Hong Kong
To obtain technical support as well as other aer-sales services, users are welcome to contact Epson Hong Kong
Limited.
Internet Home Page
http://www.epson.com.hk
Epson Hong Kong has established a local home page in both Chinese and English on the Internet to provide users
with the following information:
❏Product information
❏Answers to Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
❏Latest versions of Epson product drivers
Technical Support Hotline
You can also contact our technical sta at the following telephone and fax numbers:
Phone: 852-2827-8911
Fax: 852-2827-4383
Where to Get Help
>
Contacting Epson Support
>
Help for Users in Hong Kong
565